FOREWORD

Construction of government infrastructure facilities of the highest quality has

always been the primary mandate of the Department of Public Works and Highways (
DPWH). Cognizant of the importance of providing effective standard specification
s to be used in the implementation of projects that will produce sound, durable
and economical structures, this Department has revised the 1995 edition of the D
PWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports (Volume II). The
revision was made in response to some valid comments on the use of said specific
ations to suit the actual field conditions and in consonance with the policy dir
ection of the Department to improve the quality of infrastructure projects. All
previous amendments made as well as new specifications developed were considered
and included in this 2004 edition, for the guidance and compliance of all conce
rned.
FLORANTE SORIQUEZ Acting Secretary
January 24, 2005
Department Order No. 24 Series of 2005
) ) ) ) SUBJECT : DPWH Standard Specifications for Public Works and Highways, 20
04 Edition: Volume II, Highways, Bridges and Airports.
It is hereby directed that henceforth, the DPWH Standard Specifications for Publ
ic Works and Highways 2004 Edition: Volume II – Highways, Bridges and Airports sha
ll be adopted in the implementation of all infrastructure projects of said categ
ories; except for projects which have already been advertised for bids and for w
hich specifications other than the above standards have been adopted. Where nece
ssary, these Standard Specifications shall be supplemented by special provisions
. For strict compliance. All previous issuances contrary with this Order are her
eby revoked.
SGD FLORANTE SORIQUEZ Acting Secretary
VOLUME II STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR HIGHWAYS, BRIDGES AND AIRPORTS TABLE OF CO
NTENTS PAGE PART APART BFACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER OTHER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS -
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------1 5 6 6 9 12 18 24 31 34 36 38 38 41 44 46 51 53 54
57 59 59 61 63 65 68 73 78 83
PART C- EARTHWORK Item 100Item 101Item 102Item 103Item 104Item 105Item 106Item 1
07-
Clearing and Grubbing Removal of Structures and Obstructions Excavation Structur
e Excavation Embankment Subgrade Preparation Compaction Equipment and Density Co
ntrol Strips Overhaul
PART D- SUBBASE AND BASE COURSE Item 200Item 201Item 202Item 203Item 204Item 205
Item 206Item 207PART E-
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------
Aggregate Subbase Course Aggregate Base Course Crushed Aggregate Base Course Lim
e Stabilized Road Mix Base Course Portland Cement Stabilized Road Mix Base Cours
e Asphalt Stabilized Road Mix Base Course Portland Cement Treated Plant Mix Base
Course Aggregate Stockpile
SURFACE COURSES
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------
Item 300Item 301Item 302Item 303Item 304Item 305Item 306Item 307-
Aggregate Surface Course Bituminous Prime Coat Bituminous Tack Coat Bituminous S
eal Coat Bituminous Surface Treatment Bituminous Penetration Macadam Pavement Bi
tuminous Road Mix Surface Course Bituminous Plant-Mix Surface CourseGeneral
Item 308Item 309Item 310Item 311PART F-
Cold Asphalt Plant-Mix Bituminous Plant-Mix (Stockpile Maintenance Mixture) Bitu
minous Concrete Surface Course, Hot Laid Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
---------------------------------------------------------
95 100 102 104 134 134 160 164 169 207 210 220 230 250 255 267 269 276 281
BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------
Item 400Item 401Item 402Item 403Item 404Item 405Item 406Item 407Item 408Item 409
Item 410Item 411Item 412Item 413-
Piling Railings Timber Structures Metal Structures Reinforcing Steel Structural
Concrete Prestressed Concrete Structures Concrete Structures Steel Bridges Welde
d Structural Steel Treated and Untreated Timber Paint Elastomeric Bearing Pads P
re Molded Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
PART G-
DRAINAGE AND SLOPE PROTECTION STRUCTURES Item 500Item 501Item 502Item 503Item 50
4Item 505Item 506Item 507Item 508Item 509Item 510Item 511-
---------------------------
282
Pipe Culverts and Storm Drains Underdrains Manholes, Inlets and Catch Basins Dra
inage Steel Grating with Frame Cleaning and Reconditioning Existing Drainage Str
uctures Riprap and Grouted Riprap Stone Masonry Rubble Concrete Hand-Laid Rock E
mbankment Sheet Piles Concrete Slope Protection Gabions and Mattresses
--------------- 282 --------------- 288 --------------- 291 --------------- 294
--------------- 298 ------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------300 304 308 310 312 313 315
PART H- MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES Item 600Item 601Item 602-
---------------------------------------------------------------------
322 322 326 329
Curb and/or Gutter Sidewalk Monuments, Markers and Guide Posts
Item 603Item 604Item 605Item 606Item 607Item 608Item 609Item 610Item 611Item 612
-
Guardrail Fencing Road Sign Pavement Markings Reflective Pavement Studs Topsoil
Sprigging Sodding Tree Planting Reflective Thermoplastic Stripping Material (Sol
id Form)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------
330 334 336 340 344 347 348 352 355 362
PART I-
MATERIALS DETAILS
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------
367 367 367 370 376 385 387 387 392 394 397 401 404 406 408 415 416 417
Item 700Item 701Item 702Item 703Item 703AItem 704Item 705Item 706Item 707Item 70
8Item 709Item 710Item 711Item 712Item 713Item 714Item 715-
Hydraulic Cement Construction Lime (Hydrated) Bituminous Materials Aggregates Mi
neral Filler Masonry Units Joint Materials Concrete Clay, Plastic and Fiber Pipe
Metal Pipe Chemical Admixtures For Concrete Paints Reinforcing Steel and Wire R
ope Fence and Guardrail Structural Metal Treated and Untreated Timber Water Geot
extiles
PART A FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER
A.1 REQUIREMENTS
A.1.1 Offices and Laboratories for the Engineer 1. The Contractor shall provide
and maintain field offices and testing laboratories, including all the necessary
electricity, water, drainage and telephone services for the use of the Engineer
and his staff. The offices and laboratories shall have at least the floor area
prescribed on the Plans and shall contain the equipment, supplies and furnishing
s specified in the Contract. Testing equipment supplied in accordance with the S
pecial Provisions shall be located in testing laboratories as required by the En
gineer. All offices and laboratories shall be ready for occupancy and use by the
Engineer within two (2) months of the commencement of the Works. Their location
and final plan shall require the approval of the Engineer prior to the start of
construction. It is the intent of this Specification to locate the field office
s and laboratories in government owned lots so that the use by the government of
these facilities can be maximized even after the completion of the project. How
ever, if no government lot is available, and these structures are to be erected
on private property, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to make the nece
ssary arrangements with the landowner(s) regarding the use of the lot for the En
gineer’s office and laboratories and to remove and/or transfer, if so required und
er the Contract, the improvements thereon, including all appurtenances upon comp
letion of the Works. All facilities provided by the Contractor shall be near the
job site, where necessary and shall conform to the best standard for the requir
ed types. On completion of the Contract, the facilities provided by the Contract
or including utilities and communication facilities shall revert to the Governme
nt including office equipment, apparatus, pieces of furniture, laboratory equipm
ent, etc, unless otherwise specified in the Contract documents. The Contractor s
hall be responsible for raising the ground (if necessary), grading and drainage
in the vicinity of each facility with suitable access walkways, seeding and sodd
ing of the ground around as directed and approved by the Engineer. Also, the Con
tractor shall construct a parking area for the compound near the buildings and a
satisfactory access road to the parking areas.
1
The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance and protection of all fa
cilities to be provided during the duration of the Contract, including providing
adequate stock of all expendable items, such as light bulbs, light tubes, labor
atory equipment and supplies at all times to ensure proper and continuous functi
oning of all the Engineer’s facilities. The whole area of the Engineer’s compound sh
all be fenced with barbed wire (or equivalent) with necessary gates as directed
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide suitable utilities and services, s
uch as potable water, electricity, sewerage and security on a 24-hour basis. 2.
The Contractor shall provided qualified and experienced laboratory staff to carr
y out all the materials quality control and all the tests specified in the Contr
act and required by the Engineer. The person so appointed by the Contractor to m
ange the laboratory shall be well experienced in the type of work to be undertak
en and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. He shall work full time
and shall be responsible to the Engineer for all works carried out. 3. The tele
phone service, if required in the Contract shall have a separate connection dire
ct to the telephone company’s telephone exchange simgle line for the exclusive use
of the Engineer and his staff. 4. The Contractor shall provide, if required in
the Contract, a two-way radio communication service. 5. Any portable offices req
uired in the Contract shall be dismantled, moved and erected from time to time a
s directed by the Engineer. 6. All offices, stores and testing laboratories shal
l be proficiently guarded at all times of the day and night, regularly and prope
rly cleaned, adequately supplied and maintained for the duration of the Contract
. A.1.2 Vehicles for the Engineer The Contractor shall provide within thirty (30
) calendar days after notice to commence work, the vehicles listed in the Specia
l Provisions for the exclusive use of the Engineer. The vehicles to be provided
by the Contractor shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All vehicles sha
ll comply in all respects with all relevant Philippine national or local laws st
atutes and regulations. All vehicles shall carry or be fitted with the accessori
es as may be prescribed by laws and have comprehensive insurance. The vehicles o
n delivery shall be new and shall be driven by a competent qualified and experie
nced driver who shall be under the direct order of the Engineer.
2
The contractor shall maintain the vehicle in first class condition and shall be
supplied with appropriate fuel and lubricants al all times He shall provide equi
valent substitute vehicles during any period when the specified vehicles are tak
en out of service for maintenance, repair or any other reason. Unless otherwise
specified, the vehicle shall at the end of the Contract become the property of t
he Government. A.1.3 Assistance to the Engineer The Contractor shall at all time
s during the duration of the Contract provide for the use of the Engineer all eq
uipment, instruments and apparatus, all information and records and qualified ch
ainmen and laborers required by the Engineer for inspecting and measuring the Wo
rks. Such equipment, instruments and apparatus shall include those listed in the
Special Provisions. A.1.4 Photographs The Contractor shall provide record photo
graphs taken as, when and where directed by the Engineer at intervals of not mor
e than one month. The photographs shall be sufficient in number and location to
record the exact progress of the Works. The Contractor shall provide one proof p
rint of each photograph taken, and the negative and ten copies, not less than 25
4 mm x 203 mm and printed on glossy paper, of any of the photographs by the Engi
neer. The photographs retained by the Engineer will become the property of the G
overnment and the Contractor shall supply approved albums to accommodate them. T
wo copies are to be signed by the Contractor, one of which will be signed by the
Engineer and returned to the Contractor. A.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A.2.1 Meas
urement 1. Lump-sum items shall be provided for the provision of: - Office build
ing for the Engineer including pieces of furnitures, appliances and equipment. -
Laboratory building for the Engineer including furnitures, appliances and equip
ment. - Survey equipment for the Engineer. 2. The quantities for the maintenance
of the office and the laboratory for the Engineer shall be for the time the Eng
ineer occupies the office and the laboratory respectively. The unit of the measu
re is “month”. 3. No separate payment shall be made in respect of consumable materia
ls as this is deemed to be included in the pay item for maintenance of the Engin
eer’s facilities.
3
4. The quantities for the provision of vehicles for the Engineer shall be the nu
mber of each type of vehicle supplied. The unit of measure is “each”. 5. The quantit
ies for the operation of vehicle for the Engineer shall be for the time the Engi
neer is supplied with each vehicle prior to their finally becoming the property
of the Government. The unit of measure is “month”. 6. The quantities for progress ph
otographs shall be the number of photographs selected and provided as progress p
hotographs. The unit of measure is ‘each”. A.2..2 Payment The quantities determined
as provided above shall be paid for at the appropriate contract unit price, for
each of the particular pay items shown in the Bill of Quantities which price and
payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and maintaining such
items.
4
PART B OTHER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
B.1 OFFICES, SHOPS, STORES AND WORKMENS ACCOMMODATION FOR CONTRACTOR The contrac
tor shall provide and maintain such offices, stores, workshops latrines, housing
and messing accommodations as are necessary. These should be located in the Con
tractor’s compound, distinct and separate from the Engineer’s compound. The location
, dimensions and layout of such buildings and places shall be subject to the app
roval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall not be permitted to erect temporary
buildings or structures on the site without the specific permission in writing o
f the Engineer including approval of the dimensions of such buildings or structu
res. Before the commencement of the period of Warranty, the Contractor shall fen
ce of the Contractor’s store area from the rest of the Site. By the end of the Per
iod of Warranty, the Contractor shall remove this fence and all buildings shall
be cleared and the area shall be graded as required by the Engineer. B.2 MEDICAL
ROOM AND FIRST AID FACILITIES 1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain thro
ughout the duration of the Contract, a medical room together with all necessary
supplies to be sited in the Contractor’s main area. The medical room shall be wate
rproof; it could be a building or room designated and used exclusively for the p
urpose and have a floor area of at least 15 square meters and a glazed window ar
ea of at least 2 square meters. 2. The Contractor shall employ permanently on th
e site a fully trained Medical Aide who shall be engaged solely from medical dut
ies. 3. The location of the medical room and any other arrangements shall be mad
e known to all employees by posting on prominent locations suitable notices in t
he Site. 4. The Contractor’s arrangement to comply with this Section shall be subj
ect to the approval of the Engineer and also to the approval of any qualified Me
dical Officer designated by the Government to supervise medical arrangements on
the Site. B.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Work prescribed in Section B.2 shall not b
e measured and paid separately, same shall be deemed to be included in pay items
for other items for work.
5
PART C – EARTHWORK ITEM 100 – CLEARING AND GRUBBING 100.1 Description This item shal
l consist of clearing, grubbing, removing and disposing all vegetation and debri
s as designated in the Contract, except those objects that are designated to rem
ain in place or are to be removed in consonance with other provisions of this Sp
ecification. The work shall also include the preservation from injury or defacem
ent of all objects designated to remain. 100.2 Construction Requirements 100.2.1
General
The Engineer will establish the limits of work and designate all trees, shrubs,
plants and other things to remain. The Contractor shall preserve all objects des
ignated to remain. Paint required for cut or scarred surface of trees or shrubs
selected for retention shall be an approved asphaltum base paint prepared especi
ally for tree surgery. Clearing shall extend one (1) meter beyond the toe of the
fill slopes or beyond rounding of cut slopes as the case maybe for the entire l
ength of the project unless otherwise shown on the plans or as directed by the E
ngineer and provided it is within the right of way limits of the project, with t
he exception of trees under the jurisdiction of the Forest Management Bureau (FM
B). 100.2.2 Clearing and Grubbing
All surface objects and all trees, stumps, roots and other protruding obstructio
ns, not designated to remain, shall be cleared and/or grubbed, including mowing
as required, except as provided below: (1) Removal of undisturbed stumps and roo
ts and nonperishable solid objects with a minimum depth of one (1) meter below s
ubgrade or slope of embankment will not be required.
(2) In areas outside of the grading limits of cut and embankment areas, stumps a
nd nonperishable solid objects shall be cut off not more than 150 mm (6 inches)
above the ground line or low water level. (3) In areas to be rounded at the top
of cut slopes, stumps shall be cut off flush with or below the surface of the fi
nal slope line. Grubbing of pits, channel changes and ditches will be required o
nly to the depth necessitated by the proposed excavation within such areas.
(4)
(5) In areas covered by cogon/talahib, wild grass and other vegetations, top soi
l shall be cut to a maximum depth of 150 mm below the original ground surface or
as
6
designated by the Engineer, and disposed outside the clearing and grubbing limit
s as indicated in the typical roadway section. Except in areas to be excavated,
stump holes and other holes from which obstructions are removed shall be backfil
led with suitable material and compacted to the required density. If perishable
material is burned, it shall be burned under the constant care of component watc
hmen at such times and in such a manner that the surrounding vegetation, other a
djacent property, or anything designated to remain on the right of way will not
be jeopardized. If permitted, burning shall be done in accordance with applicabl
e laws, ordinances, and regulation. The Contractor shall use high intensity burn
ing procedures, (i.e., incinerators, high stacking or pit and ditch burning with
forced air supplements) that produce intense burning with little or no visible
smoke emission during the burning process. At the conclusion of each burning ses
sion, the fire shall be completely extinguished so that no smoldering debris rem
ains. In the event that the Contractor is directed by the Engineer not to start
burning operations or to suspend such operations because of hazardous weather co
nditions, material to be burned which interferes with subsequent construction op
erations shall be moved by the Contractor to temporary locations clear of constr
uction operations and later, if directed by the Engineer, shall be placed on a d
esignated spot and burned. Materials and debris which cannot be burned and peris
hable materials may be disposed off by methods and at locations approved by the
Engineer, on or off the project. If disposal is by burying, the debris shall be
placed in layers with the material so disturbed to avoid nesting. Each layer sha
ll be covered or mixed with earth material by the land-fill method to fill all v
oids. The top layer of material buried shall be covered with at least 300 mm (12
inches) of earth or other approved material and shall be graded, shaped and com
pacted to present a pleasing appearance. If the disposal location is off the pro
ject, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with property owners
in writing for obtaining suitable disposal locations which are outside the limit
s of view from the project. The cost involved shall be included in the unit bid
price. A copy of such agreement shall be furnished to the Engineer. The disposal
areas shall be seeded, fertilized and mulched at the Contractor’s expense. Woody
material may be disposed off by chipping. The wood chips may be used for mulch,
slope erosion control or may be uniformly spread over selected areas as directed
by the Engineer. Wood chips used as mulch for slope erosion control shall have
a maximum thickness of 12 mm (1/2 inch) and faces not exceeding 3900 mm2 (6 squa
re inches) on any individual surface area. Wood chips not designated for use und
er other sections shall be spread over the designated areas in layers not to exc
eed 75 mm (3 inches) loose thickness. Diseased trees shall be buried or disposed
off as directed by the Engineer. All merchantable timber in the clearing area w
hich has not been removed from the right of way prior to the beginning of constr
uction, shall become the property of the Contractor, unless otherwise provided.
Low hanging branches and unsound or unsightly branches on trees or shrubs design
ated to remain shall be trimmed as directed. Branches of trees extending over th
e roadbed shall be
7
trimmed to give a clear height of 6 m (20 feet) above the roadbed surface. All t
rimming shall be done by skilled workmen and in accordance with good tree surger
y practices. Timber cut inside the area staked for clearing shall be felled with
in the area to be cleared. 100.2.3 Individual Removal of Trees or Stumps
Individual trees or stumps designated by the Engineer for removal and located in
areas other than those established for clearing and grubbing and roadside clean
up shall be removed and disposed off as specified under Subsection 100.2.2 excep
t trees removed shall be cut as nearly flush with the ground as practicable with
out removing stumps. 100.3 Method of Measurement Measurement will be by one or m
ore of the following alternate methods: 1. Area Basis. The work to be paid for s
hall be the number of hectares and fractions thereof acceptably cleared and grub
bed within the limits indicated on the Plans or as may be adjusted in field stak
ing by the Engineer. Areas not within the clearing and grubbing limits shown on
the Plans or not staked for clearing and grubbing will not be measured for payme
nt. Lump-Sum Basis. When the Bill of Quantities contains a Clearing and Grubbing
lump-sum item, no measurement of area will be made for such item. Individual Un
it Basis (Selective Clearing). The diameter of trees will be measured at a heigh
t of 1.4 m (54 inches) above the ground. Trees less than 150 mm (6 inches) in di
ameter will not be measured for payment.
2.
3.
When Bill of Quantities indicates measurement of trees by individual unit basis,
the units will be designated and measured in accordance with the following sche
dule of sizes:
Diameter at height of 1.4 m Over 150 mm to 900 mm Over 900 mm
Pay Item Designation Small Large
100.4 Basis of Payment
8
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 100.3, shall be paid
for at the Contract unit price for each of the Pay Items listed below that is in
cluded in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensa
tion for furnishing all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to com
plete the work prescribed in this Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 100 (1) 100 (2) 100 (3) 100 (4)
Description Clearing and Grubbing Clearing and Grubbing Individual Removal of Tr
ees, Small Individual removal of Trees, Large
Unit of Measurement Hectare Lump Sum Each Each
ITEM 101 – REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS 101.1 Description This Item shal
l consist of the removal wholly or in part, and satisfactory disposal of all bui
ldings, fences, structures, old pavements, abandoned pipe lines, and any other o
bstructions which are not designated or permitted to remain, except for the obst
ructions to be removed and disposed off under other items in the Contract. It sh
all also include the salvaging of designated materials and backfilling the resul
ting trenches, holes, and pits.
101.2 Construction Requirements 101.2.1 General
The Contractor shall perform the work described above, within and adjacent to th
e roadway, on Government land or easement, as shown on the Plans or as directed
by the Engineer. All designated salvable material shall be removed, without unne
cessary damage, in sections or pieces which may be readily transported, and shal
l be stored by the Contractor at specified places on the project or as otherwise
shown in the Special Provisions. Perishable material shall be handled as design
ated in Subsection 100.2.2 Nonperishable material may be disposed off outside th
e limits of view from the project with written permission of the property owner
on whose property the material is placed. Copies of all agreements with property
owners are to be furnished to the Engineer. Basements or cavities left by the s
tructure removal shall be filled with acceptable material to the level of the su
rrounding ground and, if within the prism of construction, shall be compacted to
the required density.
9
101.2.2
Removal of Existing Bridges, Culverts, and other Drainage Structures
All existing bridges, culverts and other drainage structures in use by traffic s
hall not be removed until satisfactory arrangements have been made to accommodat
e traffic. The removal of existing culverts within embankment areas will be requ
ired only as necessary for the installation of new structures. Abandoned culvert
s shall be broken down, crushed and sealed or plugged. All retrieved culvert for
future use as determined by the Engineer shall be carefully removed and all pre
cautions shall be employed to avoid breakage or structural damage to any of its
part. All sections of structures removed which are not designated for stockpilin
g or re-laying shall become the property of the Government and be removed from t
he project or disposed off in a manner approved by the Engineer. Unless otherwis
e directed, the substructures of existing structures shall be removed down to th
e natural stream bottom and those parts outside of the stream shall be removed d
own to at least 300 mm (12 inches) below natural ground surface. Where such port
ions of existing structures lie wholly or in part within the limits for a new st
ructure, they shall be removed as necessary to accommodate the construction of t
he proposed structure. Steel bridges and wood bridges when specified to be salva
ged shall be carefully dismantled without damaged. Steel members shall be match
marked unless such match marking is waived by the Engineer. All salvaged materia
l shall be stored as specified in Subsection 101.2.1. Structures designated to b
ecome the property of the Contractor shall be removed from the right-of-way.
Blasting or other operations necessary for the removal of an existing structure
or obstruction, which may damage new construction, shall be completed prior to p
lacing the new work, unless otherwise provided in the Special Provisions. 101.2.
3 Removal of Pipes Other than Pipe Culverts
Unless otherwise provided, all pipes shall be carefully removed and every precau
tion taken to avoid breakage or damaged. Pipes to be relaid shall be removed and
stored when necessary so that there will be no loss of damage before re-laying.
The Contractor shall replace sections lost from storage or damage by negligence
, at his own expense. 101.2.4 Removal of Existing Pavement, Sidewalks, Curbs, et
c.
All concrete pavement, base course, sidewalks, curbs, gutters, etc., designated
for removal, shall be: (1) (2) Broken into pieces and used for riprap on the pro
ject, or Broken into pieces, the size of which shall not exceed 300 mm (12 inche
s) in any dimension and stockpiled at designated locations on the project for us
e by the Government, or
10
(3) Otherwise demolished and disposed off as directed by the Engineer. When spec
ified, ballast, gravel, bituminous materials or other surfacing or pavement mate
rials shall be removed and stockpiled as required in Subsection 101.2.1, otherwi
se such materials shall be disposed off as directed. There will be no separate p
ayment for excavating for removal of structures and obstructions or for backfill
ing and compacting the remaining cavity. 101.3 Method of Measurement When the Co
ntract stipulates that payment will be made for removal of obstructions on lump-
sum basis, the pay item will include all structures and obstructions encountered
within the roadway. Where the contract stipulates that payment will be made for
the removal of specific items on a unit basis, measurement will be made by the
unit stipulated in the Contract. Whenever the Bill of Quantities does not contai
n an item for any aforementioned removals, the work will not be paid for directl
y, but will be considered as a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor under oth
er Contract Items. 101.4 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities, measured as p
rescribed in Section 101.3, shall be paid for at the Contract unit price or lump
sum price bid for each of the Pay Items listed below that is included in the Bi
ll of Quantities which price and payment shall be full compensation for removing
and disposing of obstructions, including materials, labor, equipments, tools an
d incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item. The price
shall also include backfilling, salvage of materials removed, their custody, pre
servation, storage on the right-of-way and disposal as provided herein. Payment
will be made under:
Pay Item Number 101 (1) 101 (2) 101 (3) 101 (4)
Description Removal of Structures and Obstruction Removal of Removal of Removal
of
Unit of Measurement Lump Sum Each Square Meter Linear Meter
ITEM 102 – EXCAVATION 102.1 Description This Item shall consist of roadway and dra
inage and borrow excavation and the disposal of material in accordance with this
Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades and dimensions shown on
the Plans or established by the Engineer.
11
102.1.1
Roadway Excavation
Roadway excavation will include excavation and grading for roadways, parking are
as, intersections, approaches, slope rounding, benching, waterways and ditches;
removal of unsuitable material from the roadbed and beneath embankment areas; an
d excavating selected material found in the roadway as ordered by the Engineer f
or specific use in the improvement. Roadway excavation will be classified as “uncl
assified excavation”, “rock excavation”, “common excavation”, or “muck excavation” as indicat
d in the Bill of Quantities and hereinafter described. (1) Unclassified Excavati
on. Unclassified excavation shall consist of the excavation and disposal of all
materials regardless of its nature, not classified and included in the Bill of Q
uantities under other pay items. Rock Excavation. Rock excavation shall consist
of igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic rock which cannot be excavated without b
lasting or the use of rippers, and all boulders or other detached stones each ha
ving a volume of 1 cubic meter or more as determined by physical measurements or
visually by the Engineer.
(2)
(3)
Common Excavation. Common excavations shall consist of all excavation not includ
ed in the Bill of Quantities under “rock excavation” or other pay items. Muck Excava
tion. Muck excavation shall consist of the removal and disposal of deposits of s
aturated or unsaturated mixtures of soils and organic matter not suitable for fo
undation material regardless of moisture content. Borrow Excavation
(4)
102.1.2
Borrow excavation shall consist of the excavation and utilization of approved ma
terial required for the construction of embankments or for other portions of the
work, and shall be obtained from approved sources, in accordance with Clause 61
and the following: (1) Borrow, Case 1 Borrow Case 1 will consist of material ob
tained from sources designated on the Plans or in the Special Provisions. (2) Bo
rrow, Case 2 Borrow Case 2 will consist of material obtained from sources provid
ed by the Contractor. The material shall meet the quality requirements determine
d by the Engineer unless otherwise provided in the Contract. 102.2 Construction
Requirements 102.2.1 General When there is evidence of discrepancies on the actu
al elevations and that shown on the Plans, a pre-construction survey referred to
the datum plane used in the approved Plan shall be
12
undertaken by the Contractor under the control of the Engineer to serve as basis
for the computation of the actual volume of the excavated materials. All excava
tions shall be finished to reasonably smooth and uniform surfaces. No materials
shall be wasted without authority of the Engineer. Excavation operations shall b
e conducted so that material outside of the limits of slopes will not be disturb
ed. Prior to excavation, all necessary clearing and grubbing in that area shall
have been performed in accordance with Item 100, Clearing and Grubbing. 102.2.2
Conservation of Topsoil Where provided for on the Plans or in the Special Provis
ions, suitable topsoil encountered in excavation and on areas where embankment i
s to be placed shall be removed to such extent and to such depth as the Engineer
may direct. The removed topsoil shall be transported and deposited in storage p
iles at locations approved by the Engineer. The topsoil shall be completely remo
ved to the required depth from any designated area prior to the beginning of reg
ular excavation or embankment work in the area and shall be kept separate from o
ther excavated materials for later use. 102.2.3 Utilization of Excavated Materia
ls All suitable material removed from the excavation shall be used in the format
ion of the embankment, subgrade, shoulders, slopes, bedding, and backfill for st
ructures, and for other purposes shown on the Plans or as directed. The Engineer
will designate as unsuitable those soils that cannot be properly compacted in e
mbankments. All unsuitable material shall be disposed off as shown on the Plans
or as directed without delay to the Contractor. Only approved materials shall be
used in the construction of embankments and backfills. All excess material, inc
luding rock and boulders that cannot be used in embankments shall be disposed of
f as directed. Material encountered in the excavation and determined by the Engi
neer as suitable for topping, road finishing, slope protection, or other purpose
s shall be conserved and utilized as directed by the Engineer. Borrow material s
hall not be placed until after the readily accessible roadway excavation has bee
n placed in the fill, unless otherwise permitted or directed by the Engineer. If
the Contractor places moré borrow than is required and thereby causes a waste of
excavation, the amount of such waste will be deducted from the borrow volume. 10
2.2.4 Prewatering Excavation areas and borrow pits may be prewatered before exca
vating the material. When prewatering is used, the areas to be excavated shall b
e moistened to the full depth, from the surface to the bottom of the excavation.
The water shall be controlled so that the excavated material will contain the p
roper moisture to permit compaction to the specified density with the use of sta
ndard compacting equipment. Prewatering shall be supplemented where necessary,
13
by truck watering units, to ensure that the embankment material contains the pro
per moisture at the time of compaction. The Contractor shall provide drilling eq
uipment capable of suitably checking the moisture penetration to the full depth
of the excavation. 102.2.5 Presplitting Unless otherwise provided in the Contrac
t, rock excavation which requires drilling and shooting shall be presplit. Presp
litting to obtain faces in the rock and shale formations shall be performed by:
(1) drilling holes at uniform intervals along the slope lines, (2) loading and s
temming the holes with appropriate explosives and stemming material, and (3) det
onating the holes simultaneously. Prior to starting drilling operations for pres
plitting, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a plan outlining the positio
n of all drill holes, depth of drilling, type of explosives to be used, loading
pattern and sequence of firing. The drilling and blasting plan is for record pur
poses only and will not absolve the Contractor of his responsibility for using p
roper drilling and blasting procedures. Controlled blasting shall begin with a s
hort test section of a length approved by the Engineer. The test section shall b
e presplit, production drilled and blasted and sufficient material excavated whe
reby the Engineer can determine if the Contractor’s methods are satisfactory. The
Engineer may order discontinuance of the presplitting when he determines that th
e materials encountered have become unsuitable for being presplit. The holes sha
ll be charged with explosives of the size, kind, strength, and at the spacing su
itable for the formations being presplit, and with stemming material which passe
s a 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) standard sieve and which has the qualities for proper conf
inement of the explosives. The finished presplit slope shall be reasonably unifo
rm and free of loose rock. Variance from the true plane of the excavated backslo
pe shall not exceed 300 mm (12 inches); however, localized irregularities or sur
face variations that do not constitute a safety hazard or an impairment to drain
age courses or facilities will be permitted. A maximum offset of 600 mm (24 inch
es) will be permitted for a construction working bench at the bottom of each lif
t for use in drilling the next lower presplitting pattern. 102.2.6 Excavation of
Ditches, Gutters, etc.
All materials excavated from side ditches and gutters, channel changes, irrigati
on ditches, inlet and outlet ditches, toe ditchers, furrow ditches, and such oth
er ditches as may be designated on the Plans or staked by the Engineer, shall be
utilized as provided in Subsection 102.2.3. Ditches shall conform to the slope,
grade, and shape of the required cross-section, with no projections of roots, s
tumps, rock, or similar matter. The Contractor shall maintain and keep open and
free from leaves, sticks, and other debris all ditches dug by him until final ac
ceptance of the work.
14
Furrow ditches shall be formed by plowing a continuous furrow along the line sta
ked by the Engineer. Methods other than plowing may be used if acceptable to the
Engineer. The ditches shall be cleaned out by hand shovel work, by ditcher, or
by some other suitable method, throwing all loose materials on the downhill side
so that the bottom of the finished ditch shall be approximately 450 mm (18 inch
es) below the crest of the loose material piled on the downhill side. Hand finis
h will not be required, but the flow lines shall be in satisfactory shape to pro
vide drainage without overflow. 102.2.7 Excavation of Roadbed Level Rock shall b
e excavated to a depth of 150 mm (6 inches) below subgrade within the limits of
the roadbed, and the excavation backfilled with material designated on the Plans
or approved by the Engineer and compacted to the required density. When excavat
ion methods employed by the Contractor leave undrained pockets in the rock surfa
ce, the Contractor shall at his own expense, properly drain such depressions or
when permitted by the Engineer fill the depressions with approved impermeable ma
terial. Material below subgrade, other than solid rock shall be thoroughly scari
fied to a depth of 150 mm (6 inches) and the moisture content increased or reduc
ed, as necessary, to bring the material throughout this 150 mm layer to the mois
ture content suitable for maximum compaction. This layer shall then be compacted
in accordance with Subsection 104.3.3. 102.2.8 Borrow Areas The Contractor shal
l notify the Engineer sufficiently in advance of opening any borrow areas so tha
t cross-section elevations and measurements of the ground surface after strippin
g may be taken, and the borrow material can be tested before being used. Suffici
ent time for testing the borrow material shall be allowed. All borrow areas shal
l be bladed and left in such shape as to permit accurate measurements after exca
vation has been completed. The Contractor shall not excavate beyond the dimensio
ns and elevations established, and no material shall be removed prior to the sta
king out and cross-sectioning of the site. The finished borrow areas shall be ap
proximately true to line and grade established and specified and shall be finish
ed, as prescribed in Clause 61, Standard Specifications for Public Works and Hig
hways, Volume 1. When necessary to remove fencing, the fencing shall be replaced
in at least as good condition as it was originally. The Contractor shall be res
ponsible for the confinement of livestock when a portion of the fence is removed
. 102.2.9 Removal of Unsuitable Material
Where the Plans show the top portion of the roadbed to be selected topping, all
unsuitable materials shall be excavated to the depth necessary for replacement o
f the selected topping to the required compacted thickness. Where excavation to
the finished graded section results in a subgrade or slopes of unsuitable soil,
the Engineer may require the Contractor to remove the unsuitable material and ba
ckfill to the finished graded section with approved material. The Contractor sha
ll conduct his
15
operations in such a way that the Engineer can take the necessary cross-sectiona
l measurements before the backfill is placed. The excavation of muck shall be ha
ndled in a manner that will not permit the entrapment of muck within the backfil
l. The material used for backfilling up to the ground line or water level, which
ever is higher, shall be rock or other suitable granular material selected from
the roadway excavation, if available. If not available, suitable material shall
be obtained from other approved sources. Unsuitable material removed shall be di
sposed off in designated areas shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer. 1
02.3 Method of Measurement The cost of excavation of material which is incorpora
ted in the Works or in other areas of fill shall be deemed to be included in the
Items of Work where the material is used. Measurement of Unsuitable or Surplus
Material shall be the net volume in its original position. For measurement purpo
ses, surplus suitable material shall be calculated as the difference between the
net volume of suitable material required to be used in embankment corrected by
applying a shrinkage factor or a swell factor in case of rock excavation, determ
ined by laboratory tests to get its original volume measurement, and the net vol
ume of suitable material from excavation in the original position. Separate pay
items shall be provided for surplus common, unclassified and rock material. The
Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the contract unit prices all cost
s of obtaining land for the disposal of unsuitable or surplus material. 102.4 Ba
sis of Payment The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 102.3
shall be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the Pay Items listed be
low that is included in the Bill of Quantities which price and payment shall be
full compensation for the removal and disposal of excavated materials including
all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the work pres
cribed in this Item. Payment will be made under: Pay Item Number 102 (1) 102 (2)
102 (3) 102 (4) Description Unsuitable Excavation Surplus Common Excavation Sur
plus Rock Excavation Surplus Unclassified Excavation Unit of Measurement Cubic M
eter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter
ITEM 103 – STRUCTURE EXCAVATION 103.1 Description
16
This Item shall consist of the necessary excavation for foundation of bridges, c
ulverts, underdrains, and other structures not otherwise provided for in the Spe
cifications. Except as otherwise provided for pipe culverts, the backfilling of
completed structures and the disposal of all excavated surplus materials, shall
be in accordance with these Specifications and in reasonably close conformity wi
th the Plans or as established by the Engineer. This Item shall include necessar
y diverting of live streams, bailing, pumping, draining, sheeting, bracing, and
the necessary construction of cribs and cofferdams, and furnishing the materials
therefore, and the subsequent removal of cribs and cofferdams and the placing o
f all necessary backfill. It shall also include the furnishing and placing of ap
proved foundation fill material to replace unsuitable material encountered below
the foundation elevation of structures. No allowance will be made for classific
ation of different types of material encountered. 103.2 Construction Requirement
s 103.2.1 Clearing and Grubbing
Prior to starting excavation operations in any area, all necessary clearing and
grubbing in that area shall have been performed in accordance with Item 100, Cle
aring and Grubbing. 103.2.2 (1) Excavation General, all structures. The Contract
or shall notify the Engineer sufficiently in advance of the beginning of any exc
avation so that cross-sectional elevations and measurements may be taken on the
undisturbed ground. The natural ground adjacent to the structure shall not be di
sturbed without permission of the Engineer. Trenches or foundation pits for stru
ctures or structure footings shall be excavated to the lines and grades or eleva
tions shown on the Plans or as staked by the Engineer. They shall be of sufficie
nt size to permit the placing of structures or structure footings of the full wi
dth and length shown. The elevations of the bottoms of footings, as shown on the
Plans, shall be considered as approximate only and the Engineer may order, in w
riting, such changes in dimensions or elevations of footings as may be deemed ne
cessary, to secure a satisfactory foundation. Boulders, logs, and other objectio
nable materials encountered in excavation shall be removed. After each excavatio
n is completed, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer to that effect and no f
ooting, bedding material or pipe culvert shall be placed until the Engineer has
approved the depth of excavation and the character of the foundation material. (
2) Structures other than pipe culverts. All rock or other hard foundation materi
als shall be cleaned all loose materials, and cut to a firm surface, either leve
l, stepped, or serrated as directed by the Engineer. All seams or crevices shall
be cleaned and grouted. All loose and disintegrated rocks and thin strata shall
be removed.
17
When the footing is to rest on material other than rock, excavation to final gra
de shall not be made until just before the footing is to be placed. When the fou
ndation material is soft or mucky or otherwise unsuitable, as determined by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall remove the unsuitable material and backfill with
approved granular material. This foundation fill shall be placed and compacted i
n 150 mm (6 inches) layers up to the foundation elevation. When foundation piles
are used, the excavation of each pit shall be completed before the piles are dr
iven and any placing of foundation fill shall be done after the piles are driven
. After the driving is completed, all loose and displaced materials shall be rem
oved, leaving a smooth, solid bed to receive the footing. (3) Pipe Culverts. The
width of the pipe trench shall be sufficient to permit satisfactory jointing of
the pipe and thorough tamping of the bedding material under and around the pipe
. Where rock, hardpan, or other unyielding material is encountered, it shall be
removed below the foundation grade for a depth of at least 300 mm or 4 mm for ea
ch 100 mm of fill over the top of pipe, whichever is greater, but not to exceed
three-quarters of the vertical inside diameter of the pipe. The width of the exc
avation shall be at least 300 mm (12 inches) greater than the horizontal outside
diameter of the pipe. The excavation below grade shall be backfilled with selec
ted fine compressible material, such as silty clay or loam, and lightly compacte
d in layers not over 150 mm (6 inches) in uncompacted depth to form a uniform bu
t yielding foundation. Where a firm foundation is not encountered at the grade e
stablished, due to soft, spongy, or other unstable soil, such unstable soil unde
r the pipe and for a width of at least one diameter on each side of the pipe sha
ll be removed to the depth directed by the Engineer and replaced with approved g
ranular foundation fill material properly compacted to provide adequate support
for the pipe, unless other special construction methods are called for on the Pl
ans. The foundation surface shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density t
hroughout the length of the culvert and, if directed by the Engineer, shall be c
ambered in the direction parallel to the pipe centerline. Where pipe culverts ar
e to be placed in trenches excavated in embankments, the excavation of each tren
ch shall be performed after the embankment has been constructed to a plane paral
lel to the proposed profile grade and to such height above the bottom of the pip
e as shown on the Plans or directed by the Engineer. 103.2.3 Utilization of Exca
vated Materials
All excavated materials, so far as suitable, shall be utilized as backfill or em
bankment. The surplus materials shall be disposed off in such manner as not to o
bstruct the stream or otherwise impair the efficiency or appearance of the struc
ture. No excavated materials shall be deposited at any time so as to endanger th
e partly finished structure. 103.2.4 Cofferdams
18
Suitable and practically watertight cofferdams shall be used wherever water-bear
ing strata are encountered above the elevation of the bottom of the excavation.
If requested, the Contractor shall submit drawings showing his proposed method o
f cofferdam construction, as directed by the Engineer. Cofferdams or cribs for f
oundation construction shall in general, be carried well below the bottoms of th
e footings and shall be well braced and as nearly watertight as practicable. In
general, the interior dimensions of cofferdams shall be such as to give sufficie
nt clearance for the construction of forms and the inspection of their exteriors
, and to permit pumping outside of the forms. Cofferdams or cribs which are tilt
ed or moved laterally during the process of sinking shall be righted or enlarged
so as to provide the necessary clearance. When conditions are encountered which
, as determined by the Engineer, render it impracticable to dewater the foundati
on before placing the footing, the Engineer may require the construction of a co
ncrete foundation seal of such dimensions as he may consider necessary, and of s
uch thickness as to resist any possible uplift. The concrete for such seal shall
be placed as shown on the Plans or directed by the Engineer. The foundation sha
ll then be dewatered and the footing placed. When weighted cribs are employed an
d the mass is utilized to overcome partially the hydrostatic pressure acting aga
inst the bottom of the foundation seal, special anchorage such as dowels or keys
shall be provided to transfer the entire mass of the crib to the foundation sea
l. When a foundation seal is placed under water, the cofferdams shall be vented
or ported at low water level as directed. Cofferdams shall be constructed so as
to protect green concrete against damage from sudden rising of the stream and to
prevent damage to the foundation by erosion. No timber or bracing shall be left
in cofferdams or cribs in such a way as to extend into substructure masonry, wi
thout written permission from the Engineer. Any pumping that may be permitted fr
om the interior of any foundation enclosure shall be done in such a manner as to
preclude the possibility of any portion of the concrete material being carried
away. Any pumping required during the placing of concrete, or for a period of at
least 24 hours thereafter, shall be done from a suitable sump located outside t
he concrete forms. Pumping to dewater a sealed cofferdam shall not commence unti
l the seal has set sufficiently to withstand the hydrostatic pressure. Unless ot
herwise provided, cofferdams or cribs, with all sheeting and bracing involved th
erewith, shall be removed by the Contractor after the completion of the substruc
ture. Removal shall be effected in such manner as not to disturb or mar finished
masonry. 103.2.5 Preservation of Channel Unless otherwise permitted, no excavat
ion shall be made outside of caissons, cribs, cofferdams, or sheet piling, and t
he natural stream bed adjacent to structure shall not be disturbed without permi
ssion from the Engineer. If any excavation or dredging is made at the side of th
e structure before caissons, cribs, or cofferdams are sunk in place, the Contrac
tor shall, after the foundation base is in place, backfill all such excavations
to the original ground surface or stream bed with material satisfactory to the E
ngineer. 103.2.6 Backfill and Embankment for Structures Other Than Pipe Culverts
19
Excavated areas around structures shall be backfilled with free draining granula
r material approved by the Engineer and placed in horizontal layers not over 150
mm (6 inches) in thickness, to the level of the original ground surface. Each l
ayer shall be moistened or dried as required and thoroughly compacted with mecha
nical tampers. In placing backfills or embankment, the material shall be placed
simultaneously in so far as possible to approximately the same elevation on both
sides of an abutment, pier, or wall. If conditions require placing backfill or
embankment appreciably higher on one side than on the opposite side, the additio
nal material on the higher side shall not be placed until the masonry has been i
n place for 14 days, or until tests made by the laboratory under the supervision
of the Engineer establishes that the masonry has attained sufficient strength t
o withstand any pressure created by the methods used and materials placed withou
t damage or strain beyond a safe factor. Backfill or embankment shall not be pla
ced behind the walls of concrete culverts or abutments or rigid frame structures
until the top slab is placed and cured. Backfill and embankment behind abutment
s held at the top by the superstructure, and behind the sidewalls of culverts, s
hall be carried up simultaneously behind opposite abutments or sidewalls. All em
bankments adjacent to structures shall be constructed in horizontal layers and c
ompacted as prescribed in Subsection 104.3.3 except that mechanical tampers may
be used for the required compaction. Special care shall be taken to prevent any
wedging action against the structure and slopes bounding or within the areas to
be filled shall be benched or serrated to prevent wedge action. The placing of e
mbankment and the benching of slopes shall continue in such a manner that at all
times there will be horizontal berm of thoroughly compacted material for a dist
ance at least equal to the height of the abutment or wall to the backfilled agai
nst except insofar as undisturbed material obtrudes upon the area. Broken rock o
r coarse sand and gravel shall be provided for a drainage filter at weepholes as
shown on the Plans. 103.2.7 Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment for Pipe Culverts
Bedding, Backfill and Embankment for pipe culverts shall be done in accordance
with Item 500, Pipe Culverts and Storm Drains. 103.3 Method of Measurement 103.3
.1 Structure Excavation The volume of excavation to be paid for will be the numb
er of cubic metres measured in original position of material acceptably excavate
d in conformity with the Plans or as directed by the Engineer, but in no case, e
xcept as noted, will any of the following volumes be included in the measurement
for payment: (1) The volume outside of vertical planes 450 mm (18 inches) outsi
de of and parallel to the neat lines of footings and the inside walls of pipe an
d pipe-arch culverts at their widest horizontal dimensions.
20
(2)
The volume of excavation for culvert and sections outside the vertical plane for
culverts stipulated in (1) above. The volume outside of neat lines of underdrai
ns as shown on the Plans, and outside the limits of foundation fill as ordered b
y the Engineer. The volume included within the staked limits of the roadway exca
vation, contiguous channel changes, ditches, etc., for which payment is otherwis
e provided in the Specification. Volume of water or other liquid resulting from
construction operations and which can be pumped or drained away. The volume of a
ny excavation performed prior to the taking of elevations and measurements of th
e undisturbed ground. the volume of any material rehandled, except that where th
e Plans indicate or the Engineer directs the excavation after embankment has bee
n placed and except that when installation of pipe culverts by the imperfect tre
nch method specified in Item 500 is required, the volume of material re-excavate
d as directed will be included. The volume of excavation for footings ordered at
a depth more than 1.5 m (60 inches) below the lowest elevation for such footing
s shown on the original Contract Plans, unless the Bill of Quantities contains a
pay item for excavation ordered below the elevations shown on the Plans for ind
ividual footings.
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
103.3.2 Bridge Excavation The volume of excavation, designated on the Plans or i
n the Special Provisions as “Bridge Excavation” will be measured as described below
and will be kept separate for pay purposes from the excavation for all structure
s. The volume of bridge excavation to be paid shall be the vertical 450 mm (18 i
nches) outside of and parallel to the neat lines of the footing. The vertical pl
anes shall constitute the vertical faces of the volume for pay quantities regard
less of excavation inside or outside of these planes. 103.3.3 Foundation Fill Th
e volume of foundation fill to be paid for will be the number of cubic metres me
asures in final position of the special granular material actually provided and
placed below the foundation elevation of structures as specified, complete in pl
ace and accepted. 103.3.4 Shoring, Cribbing, and Related Work Shoring, cribbing
and related work whenever included as a pay item in Bill of Quantities will be p
aid for at the lump sum bid price. This work shall include furnishing, construct
ing, maintaining, and removing any and all shoring, cribbing, cofferdams, caisso
ns, bracing, sheeting water control, and other operations necessary for the acce
ptable completion of
21
excavation included in the work of this Section, to a depth of 1.5 m below the l
owest elevation shown on the Plans for each separable foundation structure. 103.
3.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section
103.3, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the particular p
ay items listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities. The payment sh
all constitute full compensation for the removal and disposal of excavated mater
ials including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete
the work prescribed in this Item, except as follows: (1) Any excavation for foo
tings ordered at a depth more than 1.5 m below the lowest elevation shown on the
original Contract Plans will be paid for as provided in Part K, Measurement and
Payment, unless a pay item for excavation ordered below Plan elevation appears
in the Bill of Quantities. Concrete will be measured and paid for as provided un
der Item 405, Structural Concrete. Any roadway or borrow excavation required in
excess of the quantity excavated for structures will be measured and paid for as
provided under Item 102. Shoring, cribbing, and related work required for excav
ation ordered more than 1.5 m (60 inches ) below Plan elevation will be paid for
in accordance with Part K.
(2)
(3)
(4)
Payment will be made under: Pay Item Number 103 (1) 103 (2) 103 (3) 103 (4) 103
(5) 103 (6) Description Structure Excavation Bridge Excavation Foundation Fill E
xcavation ordered below Plan elevation Shoring, cribbing, and related work Pipe
culverts and drain excavation Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic
Meter Cubic Meter
Lump sum Cubic Meter
ITEM 104 – EMBANKMENT 104.1 Description This Item shall consist of the constructio
n of embankment in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the
lines, grades and dimensions shown on the Plans or established by the Engineer.
104.2 Material Requirements
22
Embankments shall be constructed of suitable materials, in consonance with the f
ollowing definitions: 1. Suitable Material – Material which is acceptable in accor
dance with the Contract and which can be compacted in the manner specified in th
is Item. It can be common material or rock. Selected Borrow, for topping – soil of
such gradation that all particles will pass a sieve with 75 mm (3 inches) squar
e openings and not more than 15 mass percent will pass the 0.075 mm (No. 200) si
eve, as determined by AASHTO T 11. The material shall have a plasticity index of
not more than 6 as determined by ASSHTO T 90 and a liquid limit of not more tha
n 30 as determined by AASHTO T 89. 2. Unsuitable Material – Material other than su
itable materials such as: (a) Materials containing detrimental quantities of org
anic materials, such as grass, roots and sewerage. Organic soils such as peat an
d muck.
(b)
(c) Soils with liquid limit exceeding 80 and/or plasticity index exceeding 55. (
d) (e) (f) Soils with a natural water content exceeding 100%. Soils with very lo
w natural density, 800 kg/m3 or lower. Soils that cannot be properly compacted a
s determined by the Engineer.
104.3 Construction Requirements 104.3.1 General Prior to construction of embankm
ent, all necessary clearing and grubbing in that area shall have been performed
in conformity with Item 100, Clearing and Grubbing. Embankment construction shal
l consist of constructing roadway embankments, including preparation of the area
s upon which they are to be placed; the construction of dikes within or adjacent
to the roadway; the placing and compacting of approved material within roadway
areas where unsuitable material has been removed; and the placing and compacting
of embankment material in holes, pits, and other depressions within the roadway
area. Embankments and backfills shall contain no muck, peat, sod, roots or othe
r deleterious matter. Rocks, broken concrete or other solid, bulky materials sha
ll not be placed in embankment areas where piling is to be placed or driven. Whe
re shown on the Plans or directed by the Engineer, the surface of the existing g
round shall be compacted to a depth of 150 mm (6 inches) and to the specified re
quirements of this Item.
23
Where provided on the Plans and Bill of Quantities the top portions of the roadb
ed in both cuts and embankments, as indicated, shall consist of selected borrow
for topping from excavations. 104.3.2 Methods of Construction Where there is evi
dence of discrepancies on the actual elevations and that shown on the Plans, a p
reconstruction survey referred to the datum plane used in the approved Plan shal
l be undertaken by the Contractor under the control of the Engineer to serve as
basis for the computation of the actual volume of the embankment materials. When
embankment is to be placed and compacted on hillsides, or when new embankment i
s to be compacted against existing embankments, or when embankment is built one-
half width at a time, the existing slopes that are steeper than 3:1 when measure
d at right angles to the roadway shall be continuously benched over those areas
as the work is brought up in layers. Benching will be subject to the Engineer’s ap
proval and shall be of sufficient width to permit operation of placement and com
paction equipment. Each horizontal cut shall begin at the intersection of the or
iginal ground and the vertical sides of the previous cuts. Material thus excavat
ed shall be placed and compacted along with the embankment material in accordanc
e with the procedure described in this Section. Unless shown otherwise on the Pl
ans or special Provisions, where an embankment of less than 1.2 m (4 feet) below
subgrade is to be made, all sod and vegetable matter shall be removed from the
surface upon which the embankment is to be placed, and the cleared surfaced shal
l be completely broken up by plowing, scarifying, or steeping to a minimum depth
of 150 mm except as provided in Subsection 102.2.2. This area shall then be com
pacted as provided in Subsection 104.3.3. Sod not required to be removed shall b
e thoroughly disc harrowed or scarified before construction of embankment. Where
ver a compacted road surface containing granular materials lies within 900 mm (3
6 inches) of the subgrade, such old road surface shall be scarified to a depth o
f at least 150 mm (6 inches) whenever directed by the Engineer. This scarified m
aterials shall then be compacted as provided in Subsection 104.3.3. When shoulde
r excavation is specified, the roadway shoulders shall be excavated to the depth
and width shown on the Plans. The shoulder material shall be removed without di
sturbing the adjacent existing base course material, and all excess excavated ma
terials shall be disposed off as provided in Subsection 102.2.3. If necessary, t
he areas shall be compacted before being backfilled. Roadway embankment of earth
material shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 200 mm (8 inches),
loose measurement, and shall be compacted as specified before the next layer is
placed. However, thicker layer maybe placed if vibratory roller with high compac
tive effort is used provided that density requirement is attained and as approve
d by the Engineer. Trial section to this effect must be conducted and approved b
y the Engineer. Effective spreading equipment shall be used on each lift to obta
in uniform thickness as determined in the trial section prior to compaction. As
the compaction of each layer progresses, continuous leveling and manipulating wi
ll be required to assure uniform density. Water shall be added or removed, if ne
cessary, in order to obtain the required density. Removal of water shall be acco
mplished through aeration by plowing, blading, discing, or other methods satisfa
ctory to the Engineer.
24
Where embankment is to be constructed across low swampy ground that will not sup
port the mass of trucks or other hauling equipment, the lower part of the fill m
ay be constructed by dumping successive loads in a uniformly distributed layer o
f a thickness not greater than necessary to support the hauling equipment while
placing subsequent layers. When excavated material contains more than 25 mass pe
rcent of rock larger than 150 mm in greatest diameter and cannot be placed in la
yers of the thickness prescribed without crushing, pulverizing or further breaki
ng down the pieces resulting from excavation methods, such materials may be plac
ed on the embankment in layers not exceeding in thickness the approximate averag
e size of the larger rocks, but not greater than 600 mm (24 inches). Even though
the thickness of layers is limited as provided above, the placing of individual
rocks and boulders greater than 600 mm in diameter will be permitted provided t
hat when placed, they do not exceed 1200 mm (48 inches) in height and provided t
hey are carefully distributed, with the interstices filled with finer material t
o form a dense and compact mass. Each layer shall be leveled and smoothed with s
uitable leveling equipment and by distribution of spalls and finer fragments of
earth. Lifts of material containing more than 25 mass percent of rock larger tha
n 150 mm in greatest dimensions shall not be constructed above an elevation 300
mm ( 12 inches) below the finished subgrade. The balance of the embankment shall
be composed of suitable material smoothed and placed in layers not exceeding 20
0 mm (8 inches) in loose thickness and compacted as specified for embankments. D
umping and rolling areas shall be kept separate, and no lift shall be covered by
another until compaction complies with the requirements of Subsection 104.3.3.
Hauling and leveling equipment shall be so routed and distributed over each laye
r of the fill in such a manner as to make use of compaction effort afforded ther
eby and to minimize rutting and uneven compaction. 104.3.3 Compaction Compaction
Trials Before commencing the formation of embankments, the Contractor shall sub
mit in writing to the Engineer for approval his proposals for the compaction of
each type of fill material to be used in the works. The proposals shall include
the relationship between the types of compaction equipment, and the number of pa
sses required and the method of adjusting moisture content. The Contractor shall
carry out full scale compaction trials on areas not less than 10 m wide and 50
m long as required by the Engineer and using his proposed procedures or such ame
ndments thereto as may be found necessary to satisfy the Engineer that all the s
pecified requirements regarding compaction can be consistently achieved. Compact
ion trials with the main types of fill material to be used in the works shall be
completed before work with the corresponding materials will be allowed to comme
nce. Throughout the periods when compaction of earthwork is in progress, the Con
tractor shall adhere to the compaction procedures found from compaction trials f
or each type of material being compacted, each type of compaction equipment empl
oyed and each degree of compaction specified.
25
Earth The Contractor shall compact the material placed in all embankment layers
and the material scarified to the designated depth below subgrade in cut section
s, until a uniform density of not less than 95 mass percent of the maximum dry d
ensity determined by AASHTO T 99 Method C, is attained, at a moisture content de
termined by Engineer to be suitable for such density. Acceptance of compaction m
ay be based on adherence to an approved roller pattern developed as set forth in
Item 106, Compaction Equipment and Density Control Strips. The Engineer shall d
uring progress of the Work, make density tests of compacted material in accordan
ce with AASHTO T 191, T 205, or other approved field density tests, including th
e use of properly calibrated nuclear testing devices. A correction for coarse pa
rticles may be made in accordance with AASHTO T 224. If, by such tests, the Engi
neer determines that the specified density and moisture conditions have not been
attained, the Contractor shall perform additional work as may be necessary to a
ttain the specified conditions. At least one group of three in-situ density test
s shall be carried out for each 500 m of each layer of compacted fill. Rock Dens
ity requirements will not apply to portions of embankments constructed of materi
als which cannot be tested in accordance with approved methods. Embankment mater
ials classified as rock shall be deposited, spread and leveled the full width of
the fill with sufficient earth or other fine material so deposited to fill the
interstices to produce a dense compact embankment. In addition, one of the rolle
rs, vibrators, or compactors meeting the requirements set forth in Subsection 10
6.2.1, Compaction Equipment, shall compact the embankment full width with a mini
mum of three complete passes for each layer of embankment. 104.3.4 Protection of
Roadbed During Construction During the construction of the roadway, the roadbed
shall be maintained in such condition that it will be well drained at all times
. Side ditches or gutters emptying from cuts to embankments or otherwise shall b
e so constructed as to avoid damage to embankments by erosion. 104.3.5 Protectio
n of Structure If embankment can be deposited on one side only of abutments, win
g walls, piers or culvert headwalls, care shall be taken that the area immediate
ly adjacent to the structure is not compacted to the extent that it will cause o
verturning of, or excessive pressure against the structure. When noted on the Pl
ans, the fill adjacent to the end bent of a bridge shall not be placed higher th
an the bottom of the backfill of the bent until the superstructure is in place.
When embankment is to be placed on both sides of a concrete wall or box type str
ucture, operations shall be so conducted that the embankment is always at approx
imately the same elevation on both sides of the structure.
26
104.3.6 Rounding and Warping Slopes Rounding-Except in solid rock, the tops and
bottoms of all slopes, including the slopes of drainage ditches, shall be rounde
d as indicated on the Plans. A layer of earth overlaying rock shall be rounded a
bove the rock as done in earth slopes. Warping-adjustments in slopes shall be ma
de to avoid injury in standing trees or marring of weathered rock, or to harmoni
ze with existing landscape features, and the transition to such adjusted slopes
shall be gradual. At intersections of cuts and fills, slopes shall be adjusted a
nd warped to flow into each other or into the natural ground surfaces without no
ticeable break. 104.3.7 Finishing Roadbed and Slopes After the roadbed has been
substantially completed, the full width shall be conditioned by removing any sof
t or other unstable material that will not compact properly or serve the intende
d purpose. The resulting areas and all other low sections, holes of depressions
shall be brought to grade with suitable selected material. Scarifying, blading,
dragging, rolling, or other methods of work shall be performed or used as necess
ary to provide a thoroughly compacted roadbed shaped to the grades and cross-sec
tions shown on the Plans or as staked by the Engineer. All earth slopes shall be
left with roughened surfaces but shall be reasonably uniform, without any notic
eable break, and in reasonably close conformity with the Plans or other surfaces
indicated on the Plans or as staked by the Engineer, with no variations therefr
om readily discernible as viewed from the road. 104.3.8 Serrated Slopes Cut slop
es in rippable material (soft rock) having slope ratios between 0.75:1 and 2:1 s
hall be constructed so that the final slope line shall consist of a series of sm
all horizontal steps. The step rise and tread dimensions shall be shown on the P
lans. No scaling shall be performed on the stepped slopes except for removal of
large rocks which will obviously be a safety hazard if they fall into the ditchl
ine or roadway. 104.3.9 Earth Berms When called for in the Contract, permanent e
arth berms shall be constructed of well graded materials with no rocks having a
diameter greater than 0.25 the height of the berm. When local material is not ac
ceptable, acceptable material shall be imported, as directed by the Engineer. Co
mpacted Berm Compacted berm construction shall consist of moistening or drying a
nd placing material as necessary in locations shown on the drawings or as establ
ished by the Engineer. Material shall contain no frozen material, roots, sod, or
other deleterious materials. Contractor shall take precaution to prevent materi
al from escaping over the embankment slope. Shoulder surface beneath berm will b
e roughened to provide a bond between the berm and shoulder when completed. The
Contractor shall compact the material placed until at least 90 mass percent of t
he maximum density is obtained as determined by AASHTO T 99, Method C. The
27
cross-section of the finished compacted berm shall reasonably conform to the typ
ical crosssection as shown on the Plans. Uncompacted Berm Uncompacted berm const
ruction shall consist of drying, if necessary and placing material in locations
shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer. Material shall contain no
frozen material, roots, sod or other deleterious materials. Contractor shall tak
e precautions to prevent material from escaping over the embankment slope. 104.4
Method of Measurement The quantity of embankment to be paid for shall be the vo
lume of material compacted in place, accepted by the Engineer and formed with ma
terial obtained from any source. Material from excavation per Item 102 which is
used in embankment and accepted by the Engineer will be paid under Embankment an
d such payment will be deemed to include the cost of excavating, hauling, stockp
iling and all other costs incidental to the work. Material for Selected Borrow t
opping will be measured and paid for under the same conditions specified in the
preceding paragraph. 104.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities, measured as
prescribed in Section 104.4, shall be paid for at the Contract unit price for e
ach of the Pay Items listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantities. Th
e payment shall continue full compensation for placing and compacting all materi
als including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete
the work prescribed in this Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 104 (1) 104 (2) 104 (3) 104 (4)
Description Embankment Selected, Borrow for topping, Case 1 Selected Borrow for
topping, Case 2 Earth Berm
Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Meter
Item 105 – SUBGRADE PREPARATION 105.1 Description
28
This Item shall consist of the preparation of the subgrade for the support of ov
erlying structural layers. It shall extend to full width of the roadway. Unless
authorized by the Engineer, subgrade preparation shall not be done unless the Co
ntractor is able to start immediately the construction of the pavement structure
. 105.2 Material Requirements Unless otherwise stated in the Contract and except
when the subgrade is in rock cut, all materials below subgrade level to a depth
150 mm or to such greater depth as may be specified shall meet the requirements
of Section 104.2, Selected Borrow for Topping. 105.3 Construction Requirements
105.3.1 Prior Works Prior to commencing preparation of the subgrade, all culvert
s, cross drains, ducts and the like (including their fully compacted backfill),
ditches, drains and drainage outlets shall be completed. Any work on the prepara
tion of the subgrade shall not be started unless prior work herein described sha
ll have been approved by the Engineer.
105.3.2 Subgrade Level Tolerances The finished compacted surface of the subgrade
shall conform to the allowable tolerances as specified hereunder: Permitted var
iation from design LEVEL OF SURFACE Permitted SURFACE IRREGULARITY MEASURED BY 3
-m STRAIGHT EDGE Permitted variation from design CROSSFALL OR CAMBER Permitted v
ariation from design LONGITUDINAL GRADE over 25 m length 105.3.3 Subgrade in Com
mon Excavation Unless otherwise specified, all materials below subgrade level in
earth cuts to a depth 150 mm or other depth shown on the Plans or as directed b
y the Engineer shall be excavated. The material, if suitable, shall be set side
for future use or, if unsuitable, shall be disposed off in accordance with the r
equirements of Subsection 102.2.9. Where material has been removed from below su
bgrade level, the resulting surface shall be compacted to a depth of 150 mm and
in accordance with other requirements of Subsection 104.3.3. + 20 mm 30 mm 30 mm
+ 0.5 % 0.1 %
29
All materials immediately below subgrade level in earth cuts to a depth of 150 m
m, or to such greater depth as may be specified, shall be compacted in accordanc
e with the requirements of Subsection 104.3.3. 105.3.4 Subgrade in Rock Excavati
on Surface irregularities under the subgrade level remaining after trimming of t
he rock excavation shall be leveled by placing specified material and compacted
to the requirements of Subsection 104.3.3. 105.3.5 Subgrade on Embankment After
the embankment has been completed, the full width shall be conditioned by removi
ng any soft or other unstable material that will not compacted properly. The res
ulting areas and all other low sections, holes, or depressions shall be brought
to grade with suitable material. The entire roadbed shall be shaped and compacte
d to the requirements of Subsections 104.3.3. Scarifying, blading, dragging, rol
ling, or other methods of work shall be performed or used as necessary to provid
e a thoroughly compacted roadbed shaped to the cross-sections shown on the Plans
.
105.3.6 Subgrade on Existing Pavement Where the new pavement is to be constructe
d immediately over an existing Portland Cement concrete pavement and if so speci
fied in the Contract the slab be broken into pieces with greatest dimension of n
ot more than 500 mm and the existing pavement material compacted as specified in
Subsection 104.3.3, as directed by the Engineer. The resulting subgrade level s
hall, as part pavement construction be shaped to conform to the allowable tolera
nces of Subsection 105.3.2 by placing and compacting where necessary a leveling
course comprising the material of the pavement course to be placed immediately a
bove. Where the new pavement is to be constructed immediately over an existing a
sphalt concrete pavement or gravel surface pavement and if so specified in the C
ontract the pavement shall be scarified, thoroughly loosened, reshaped and recom
pacted in accordance with Subsection 104.3.3. The resulting subgrade level shall
conform to the allowable tolerances of Subsection 105.3.2. 105.3.7 Protection o
f Completed Work The Contractor shall be required to protect and maintain at his
own expense the entire work within the limits of his Contract in good condition
satisfactory to the Engineer from the time he first started work until all work
shall have been completed. Maintenance shall include repairing and recompacting
ruts, ridges, soft spots and deteriorated sections of the subgrade caused by th
e traffic of the Contractor’s vehicle/equipment or that of the public. 105.3.8 Tem
plates and Straight-edges
30
The Contractor shall provide for use of the Engineer, approved templates and str
aightedges in sufficient number to check the accuracy of the work, as provided i
n this Specification. 105.4 Method of Measurement 105.4.1 Measurement of Items f
or payment shall be provided only for:
1. The compaction of existing ground below subgrade level in cuts of common mate
rial as specified in Subsection 105.3.3. 2. The breaking up or scarifying, loose
ning, reshaping and recompacting of existing pavement as specified in Subsection
105.3.6. The quantity to be paid for shall be the area of the work specified to
be carried out and accepted by the Engineer. 105.4.2 Payment for all work for t
he preparation of the subgrade, including shaping to the required levels and tol
erances, other than as specified above shall be deemed to be included in the Pay
Item for Embankment.
105.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Sectio
n 105.4, shall be paid for at the appropriate contract unit price for Pay Item l
isted below that is included in the Bill of Quantities which price and payment s
hall be full compensation for the placing or removal and disposal of all materia
ls including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete t
he work prescribed in this Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 105 (1) 105 (2) 105 (3)
Description Subgrade Preparation (Common Material) Subgrade Preparation (Existin
g Pavement) Subgrade Preparation (Unsuitable Material)
Unit of Measurement Square Meter Square Meter Square Meter
ITEM 106 – COMPACTION EQUIPMENT AND DENSITY CONTROL STRIPS 106.1 Description When
specified, this procedure will be used to determine density requirements of sele
cted embankments, subgrade, bases, and bituminous concrete. The procedure will c
onsist of control strip construction to establish target densities for the speci
fied course plus use of
31
sand-cone method of density testing equipment to determine in-place densities ob
tained during the construction process. 106.2 Construction Requirements 106.2.1
Compaction Equipment Compaction equipment shall be capable of obtaining compacti
on requirements without detrimentally affecting the compacted material. The equi
pment shall be modern, efficient compacting units approved by the Engineer. The
compacting units may be of any type, provided they are capable of compacting eac
h lift of material as specified and meet the minimum requirements as contained h
erein. Minimum requirements for rollers are as follows: 1. Sheepsfoot, tamping o
r grid rollers shall be capable of exerting a force of 45 Newton per millimeter
(250 pounds per inch) of length of roller drum. 2. Steel-wheel rollers other tha
n vibratory shall be capable of exerting a force of not less than 45 Newton per
millimeter of width of the compression roll or rolls. 3. Vibratory steel-wheel r
ollers shall have a minimum mass of 6 tonnes. The compactor shall be equipped wi
th amplitude and frequency controls and specifically designed to compact the mat
erial on which it is used. 4. Pneumatic-tire rollers shall have smooth tread tir
es of equal size that will provide a uniform compacting pressure for the full wi
dth of the roller and capable of exerting a ground pressure of at least 550 kpa
(80 pounds per square inch). 5. Heavier compacting unit may be required to achie
ve the specified density of the embankment. 106.2.2 Construction of Control Stri
ps and Determination of Target Density To determine target density, a control st
rip shall be constructed at the beginning of work each course of material to be
compacted. Each control strip, constructed to acceptable density and surface tol
erances shall remain in place and become a section of the completed roadway. Una
cceptable control strip shall be corrected or removed and replaced at the Contra
ctor’s expense. A control strip shall have an area of approximately 335 square met
ers and shall be of the same depth specified for the construction of the course
which it represents. The materials used in the construction of the control strip
shall conform to the specification requirements. They shall be furnished from t
he same source and shall be of the same type to be used in the remainder of the
course represented by the control strip. The underlying grade or pavement struct
ure upon which a control strip is to be constructed shall have the prior approva
l of the Engineer. The equipment used in the construction of the control strip s
hall be approved by the Engineer and shall be of the same type and mass to be us
ed on the remainder of the course represented by the control strip.
32
Compaction of control strips shall commence immediately after the course has bee
n placed to the specified thickness, and shall be continuous and uniform over th
e entire surface. Compaction of the control strip shall be continued until no di
scernible increase in density can be obtained by additional compactive effort. U
pon completion of the compaction, the mean density of the control strip will be
determined by averaging the results of ten in-place density tests taken at rando
mly selected sites within the control strip. The mean density of the control str
ip shall be the target density for the remainder of the course which it represen
ts. If the mean density of the control strip is less than 98 percent of the dens
ity of laboratory compacted specimens as determined by testing procedures approp
riate for the material being placed, the Engineer may order the construction of
another control strip. A new control strip may also be ordered by the Engineer o
r requested by the Contractor when: 1. 2. A change in the material or job-mix fo
rmula, is made. Ten days of production have been accepted without construction o
f a new control strip. There is reason to believe that a control strip density i
s not representative of the material being placed.
3.
106.3 Method of Measurement No measurement for payment will be made for this Ite
m. 106.4 Basis of Payment Unless otherwise provided, the cost of constructing th
e control strip will be considered incidental to the cost of the work item for w
hich a control strip is required. Payment for the work item shall be deemed to i
nclude compensation for performing the work herein specified and the furnishing
of all materials, labors, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to construc
t the density control strip. No payment will be made for any material used in th
e construction of unacceptable control strip.
ITEM 107 – OVERHAUL 107.1 Description Overhaul shall consist of authorized hauling
in excess of the free-haul distance. Freehaul distance is the specified distanc
e that excavated material shall be hauled without additional compensation. Unles
s otherwise provided in the Contract, the free-haul distance shall be 600 meters
. 107.2 Method of Measurement
33
In determining what constitutes authorized overhaul, it will be assumed that mat
erial taken from excavation will be deposited in embankment after having been ha
uled the shortest distance. The overhaul distance for material obtained and plac
ed within the roadway limits will be measured along the centerline of the roadwa
y. No allowance will be made for transverse or lateral movement to or from the c
enterline except materials moved to or from designated areas outside the roadway
limits; such as Case 1, Borrow Pits, disposal areas, etc. In such case, measure
ment shall be along the shortest route determined by the Engineer to be feasible
and satisfactory unless otherwise provided. If the Contractor chooses to haul m
aterial over some other route, and such other route is longer, the computation f
or payment shall be based on the overhaul distance measured along the route desi
gnated by the Engineer. The number of cubic metre-kilometres of overhaul to be p
aid for shall be the number of cubic meters of overhaul material multiplied by t
he overhaul distance in kilometers. The unit “cubic meter-kilometer” is the amount o
f hauling required to move one cubic meter a distance of one kilometer beyond th
e free-haul distance. 107.3 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities, measured a
s prescribed in Section 107.2, shall be paid for the contract unit price for Ove
rhaul, for the particular Pay Item listed below that is shown on the Bill of Qua
ntities, which price and payment shall be full compensation for overhaul, includ
ing all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work p
rescribed in this Item. Payment will not be made for overhaul of Borrow, Case 2,
Foundation Fill, bedding materials and material removed in the rounding of cut
slopes when rounding is a separate pay item. When the Bill of Quantities does no
t show estimated quantities for “Overhaul” from the Pay Item listed below, overhaul
will not be directly paid for, but will be considered as a subsidiary obligation
of the Contractor under other contract items. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 107 (1) 107 (2)
Description Overhaul Overhaul of Borrow, Case 1
Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter-kilometer Cubic Meter-kilometer
34
35
PART D – SUBBASE AND BASE COURSE ITEM 200 – AGGREGATE SUBBASE COURSE 200.1 Descripti
on This item shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting an aggregate su
bbase course on a prepared subgrade in accordance with this Specification and th
e lines, grades and cross-sections shown on the Plans, or as directed by the Eng
ineer. 200.2 Material Requirements Aggregate for subbase shall consist of hard,
durable particles or fragments of crushed stone, crushed slag, or crushed or nat
ural gravel and filler of natural or crushed sand or other finely divided minera
l matter. The composite material shall be free from vegetable matter and lumps o
r balls of clay, and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily to
form a firm, stable subbase. The subbase material shall conform to Table 200.1,
Grading Requirements Table 200.1 – Grading Requirements Sieve Designation Standar
d, mm Alternate US Standard 50 2” 25 1” 9.5 3/8” 0.075 No. 200
Mass Percent Passing 100 55 – 85 40 – 75 0 - 12
The fraction passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve shall not be greater than 0.66
(two thirds) of the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve. The fraction
passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a liquid limit not greater than 3
5 and plasticity index not greater than 12 as determined by AASHTO T 89 and T 90
, respectively. The coarse portion, retained on a 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve, shall
have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 50 by the Los Angeles Abrasion Tests a
s determined by AASHTO T 96. The material shall have a soaked CBR value of not l
ess than 25% as determined by AASHTO T 193. The CBR value shall be obtained at t
he maximum dry density and determined by AASHTO T 180, Method D. 200.3 Construct
ion Requirements 200.3.1 Preparation of Existing Surface The existing surface sh
all be graded and finished as provided under Item 105, Subgrade Preparation, bef
ore placing the subbase material. 38
200.3.2 Placing The aggregate subbase material shall be placed at a uniform mixt
ure on a prepared subgrade in a quantity which will provide the required compact
ed thickness. When more than one layer is required, each layer shall be shaped a
nd compacted before the succeeding layer is placed. The placing of material shal
l begin at the point designated by the Engineer. Placing shall be from vehicles
especially equipped to distribute the material in a continuous uniform layer or
windrow. The layer or windrow shall be of such size that when spread and compact
ed the finished layer be in reasonably close conformity to the nominal thickness
shown on the Plans. When hauling is done over previously placed material, hauli
ng equipment shall be dispersed uniformly over the entire surface of the previou
sly constructed layer, to minimize rutting or uneven compaction. 200.3.3 Spreadi
ng and Compacting When uniformly mixed, the mixture shall be spread to the plan
thickness, for compaction. Where the required thickness is 150 mm or less, the m
aterial may be spread and compacted in one layer. Where the required thickness i
s more than 150 mm, the aggregate subbase shall be spread and compacted in two o
r more layers of approximately equal thickness, and the maximum compacted thickn
ess of any layer shall not exceed 150 mm. All subsequent layers shall be spread
and compacted in a similar manner. The moisture content of subbase material shal
l, if necessary, be adjusted prior to compaction by watering with approved sprin
klers mounted on trucks or by drying out, as required in order to obtain the req
uired compaction. Immediately following final spreading and smoothening, each la
yer shall be compacted to the full width by means of approved compaction equipme
nt. Rolling shall progress gradually from the sides to the center, parallel to t
he centerline of the road and shall continue until the whole surface has been ro
lled. Any irregularities or depressions that develop shall be corrected by loose
ning the material at these places and adding or removing material until surface
is smooth and uniform. Along curbs, headers, and walls, and at all places not ac
cessible to the roller, the subbase material shall be compacted thoroughly with
approved tampers or compactors. If the layer of subbase material, or part thereo
f, does not conform to the required finish, the Contractor shall, at his own exp
ense, make the necessary corrections.
39
Compaction of each layer shall continue until a field density of at least 100 pe
rcent of the maximum dry density determined in accordance with AASHTO T 180, Met
hod D has been achieved. In-place density determination shall be made in accorda
nce with AASHTO T 191. 200.3.4 Trial Sections Before subbase construction is sta
rted, the Contractor shall spread and compact trial sections as directed by the
Engineer. The purpose of the trial sections is to check the suitability of the m
aterials and the efficiency of the equipment and construction method which is pr
oposed to be used by the Contractor. Therefore, the Contractor must use the same
material, equipment and procedures that he proposes to use for the main work. O
ne trial section of about 500 m2 shall be made for every type of material and/or
construction equipment/procedure proposed for use. After final compaction of ea
ch trial section, the Contractor shall carry out such field density tests and ot
her tests required as directed by the Engineer. If a trial section shows that th
e proposed materials, equipment or procedures in the Engineer’s opinion are not su
itable for subbase, the material shall be removed at the Contractor’s expense, and
a new trial section shall be constructed. If the basic conditions regarding the
type of material or procedure change during the execution of the work, new tria
l sections shall be constructed. 200.3.5 Tolerances Aggregate subbase shall be s
pread with equipment that will provide a uniform layer which when compacted will
conform to the designed level and transverse slopes as shown on the Plans. The
allowable tolerances shall be as specified hereunder: Permitted variation from d
esign THICKNESS OF LAYER Permitted variation from design LEVEL OF SURFACE Permit
ted SURFACE IRREGULARITY Measured by 3-m straight-edge Permitted variation from
design CROSSFALL OR CAMBER Permitted variation from design LONGITUDINAL GRADE ov
er 25 m in length 20 mm
+10 mm -20 mm
20 mm
0.3%
0.1%
40
200.4 Method of Measurement Aggregate Subbase Course will be measured by the cub
ic meter (m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume compacted
in-place as shown on the Plans, and accepted in the completed course. No allowan
ce will be given for materials placed outside the design limits shown on the cro
sssections. Trial sections shall not be measured separately but shall be include
d in the quantity of subbase herein measured. 200.5 Basis of Payment The accepte
d quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 200.4, shall be paid for at the
contract unit price for Aggregate Subbase Course which price and payment shall b
e full compensation for furnishings and placing all materials, including all lab
or, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed i
n this Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 200
Description Aggregate Subbase Course
Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter
ITEM 201 – AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 201.1 Description This Item shall consist of furn
ishing, placing and compacting an aggregate base course on a prepared subgrade/s
ubbase in accordance with this Specificaton and the lines, grades, thickness and
typical cross-sections shown on the Plans, or as established by the Engineer. 2
01.2 Material Requirements Aggregate for base course shall consist of hard, dura
ble particles or fragments of crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed or natural
gravel and filler of natural or crushed sand or other finely divided mineral mat
ter. The composite material shall be free from vegetable matter and lumps or bal
ls of clay, and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily to form
a firm, stable base. In some areas where the conventional base course materials
are scarce or non-available, the use of 40% weathered limestone blended with 60
% crushed stones or gravel shall be allowed, provided that the blended materials
meet the requirements of this Item. The base course material shall conform to T
able 201.1, whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities 41
Table 201.1 – Grading Requirements Sieve Designation Standard, mm Alternate US Sta
ndard 50 2” 37.5 1-1/2” 25.0 1” 19.0 ¾” 12.5 ½” 4.75 No. 4 0.425 No. 40 0.075 No. 200 Mass Pe
cent Passing Grading A Grading B 100 100 60 – 85 60 – 85 35 – 65 20 – 50 30 – 55 5 – 20 8 – 2
0 – 12 2 – 14
The fraction passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve shall not be greater than 0.66
(two thirds) of the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve. The fraction
passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a liquid limit not greater than 2
5 and plasticity index not greater than 6 as determined by AASHTO T 89 and T 90,
respectively. The coarse portion, retained on a 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve shall ha
ve a mass percent of wear not exceeding 50 by the Los Angeles Abrasion test dete
rmined by AASHTO T 96. The material passing the 19 mm (3/4 inch) sieve shall hav
e a soaked CBR value of not less than 80% as determined by AASHTO T 193. The CBR
value shall be obtained at the maximum dry density (MDD) as determined by AASHT
O T 180, Method D. If filler, in addition to that naturally present, is necessar
y for meeting the grading requirements or for satisfactory bonding, it shall be
uniformly blended with the base course material on the road or in a pugmill unle
ss otherwise specified or approved. Filler shall be taken from sources approved
by the Engineer, shall be free from hard lumps and shall not contain more than 1
5 percent of material retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve. 201.3 Construction
Requirements 201.3.1 Preparation of Existing Surface
The existing surface shall be graded and finished as provided under Item 105, Su
bgrade Preparation, before placing the base material. 201.3.2 Placing It shall b
e in accordance with all the requirements of Subsection 200.3.2, Placing.
42
201.3.3 Spreading and Compacting It shall be in accordance with all the requirem
ents of Subsection 200.3.3, Spreading and Compacting. 201.3.4 Trial Sections Tri
al sections shall conform in all respects to the requirements specified in Subse
ction 200.3.4. 201.3.5 Tolerances The aggregate base course shall be laid to the
designed level and transverse slopes shown on the Plans. The allowable toleranc
es shall be in accordance with following: Permitted variation from design THICKN
ESS OF LAYER Permitted variation from design LEVEL OF SURFACE Permitted SURFACE
IRREGULARITY Measured by 3-m straight-edge Permitted variation from design CROSS
FALL OR CAMBER Permitted variation from design LONGITUDINAL GRADE over 25 m in l
ength 201.4 Method of Measurement Aggregate Base Course will be measured by the
cubic meter (m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume compact
ed in-place as shown on the Plans, and accepted in the completed base course. No
allowance shall be given for materials placed outside the design limits shown o
n the crosssections. Trial sections shall not be measured separately but shall b
e included in the quantity of aggregate base course. 201.5 Basis of Payment The
accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 201.4, shall be paid for
at the contract unit price for Aggregate Base Course which price and payment sha
ll be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all
labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribe
d in this Item. 10 mm
+ 5 mm -10 mm
5 mm 0.2%
0.1%
43
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 201
Description Aggregate Base Course
Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter
ITEM 202 – CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 202.1 Description This Item shall consist
of furnishing, placing and compacting crushed gravel, crushed stone or crushed
rock on a prepared subgrade/subbase in one or more layers in accordance with thi
s Specification and lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-sections shown on
the Plans or as established by the Engineer. 202.2 Material Requirements 202.2.
1 Crushed Aggregate
It shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone or gravel crus
hed to the size and of the quality requirements of this Item. It shall be clean
and free from vegetable matters, lumps or balls of clay and other deleterious su
bstances. The material shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily
to form a firm, stable base. The base material shall conform to the grading requ
irements of Table 202.1, whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities. Tabl
e 201.1 – Grading Requirements Sieve Designation Standard, mm Alternate US Standar
d 37.5 1-1/2” 25 1” 19 ¾” 12.5 ½” 4.75 No. 4 0.425 No. 40 0.075 No. 200 Mass Percent Passing
Grading A Grading B 100 100 60 – 85 60 – 90 30 – 55 35 – 65 8 – 25 10 – 30 2 - 14 5 – 15
The portion of the material passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve shall not be gr
eater than 0.66 (two thirds) of the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve
.
44
The portion of the material passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a liq
uid limit of not more than 25 and a plasticity index of not more than 6 as deter
mined by AASHTO T 89 and T 90, respectively. The coarse aggregate retained on a
2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 45 by the
Los Angeles Abrasion Test as determined by AASHTO T 96, and not less than 50 ma
ss percent shall have at least one (1) fractured face. The material passing the
19 mm (3/4 inch) sieve shall have a minimum soaked CBR-value of 80% tested accor
ding to AASHTO T 193. The CBR-value shall be obtained at the maximum dry density
determined according to AASHTO T 180, Method D. If filler, in addition to that
naturally present, is necessary for meeting the grading requirements or for sati
sfactory bonding, it shall be uniformly blended with the crushed base course mat
erial on the road or in a pugmill unless otherwise specified or approved. Filler
shall be obtained from sources approved by the Engineer, free from hard lumps a
nd not contain more than 15 percent of material retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4)
sieve. 202.3 Construction Requirements Same as Subsections 201.3.1 through 201.3
.5. 202.4 Method of Measurement Crushed Aggregate Base Course will be measured b
y the cubic meter (m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume c
ompacted in-place as shown on the Plans, and accepted in the completed course. N
o allowance shall be given for materials placed outside the design limits shown
on the crosssections. Trial sections shall not be measured separately but shall
be included in the quantity of crushed aggregate base course. 202.5 Basis of Pay
ment The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 202.4, shall be
paid for at the contract unit price for Crushed Aggregate Base Course which pric
e and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all material
s, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete t
he work prescribed in this Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 202
Description Crushed Aggregate Base Course
Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter
45
ITEM 203 – LIME STABILIZED ROAD MIX BASE COURSE 203.1 Description This Item shall
consist of a foundation for surface course composed of soil aggregate, lime and
water in proper proportions, road-mixed and constructed on a prepared subgrade/s
ubbase in accordance with this Specification and the lines, grades and typical c
ross-sections shown on the Plans or established by the Engineer. 203.2 Material
Requirements 203.2.1 Soil Aggregate It shall consist of any combination of grave
l, sand, silt and clay or other approved combination of materials free from vege
table or other objectionable matter. It may be materials encountered in the cons
truction site or materials obtained from approved sources. The crushed or uncrus
hed granular material shall consist of hard, durable stones and rocks, of accept
ed quality, free from an excess of flat, elongated, soft or disintegrated pieces
or other objectionable matter. It is the intent of this Specification to utiliz
e soils existing on the roadbed if the quality is satisfactory. If the quality a
nd/or quantity is deficient, the soil aggregate shall be obtained wholly or part
ly from approved outside sources. The soil-aggregate shall conform to the gradin
g requirements of Table 203. 1. Table 203.1 – Grading Requirements Sieve Designati
on Standard, mm Alternate US Standard 50 2” 4.75 No. 4 2.00 No. 10 0.425 No. 40 0.
075 No. 200 Mass Percent Passing Grading A Grading B 100 100 45 – 100 55 – 100 37 – 80
45 – 100 15 – 20 25 – 80 0 – 25 11 – 35
The materials passing the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve produced in the crushing operati
on of either stone or gravel shall be incorporated in the base material to the e
xtent permitted by the gradation requirements. The plasticity index shall not be
less than 4 nor more than 10. The aggregate shall have a mass percent of wear n
ot exceeding 50 as determined by AASHTO Method T 96. 203.2.1.1 New Soil-Aggregat
e It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 203.2.1, Soil Ag
gregate.
46
203.2.1.2 Salvaged Soil-Aggregate Where soil-aggregate required is already in pl
ace, the Contractor shall not be responsible for its grading or quality except f
or removal of oversized materials as directed by the Engineer. In general, salva
ged soil-aggregate to be used for lime stabilized road mix base course will cons
ist of material meeting the requirements given in Subsection 203.2.1, Soil Aggre
gate. 203.2.2 Hydrated Lime It shall conform to the requirements of Item 701, Co
nstruction Lime. 203.2.3 Water It shall conform to the requirements of Item 714,
Water 203.2.4 Proportioning of Mixture The amount of lime to be added to the so
il-aggregate shall be from 3 to 12 mass percent of the dry soil. The exact perce
ntage to be added shall be fixed by the Engineer on the basis of preliminary lab
oratory tests and trial mixes of materials furnished. 203.2.5 Strength Requireme
nts CBR Test for Gravelly Soils. The mixture passing the 19 mm (3/4 inch) sieve
shall have a minimum soaked CBR-value of 100% tested according to AASHTO T 193.
The CBR-value shall be obtained at the maximum dry density determined according
to AASHTO T 180, Method D. Unconfined Compression Test for Finer Textured Soils.
The 7-day compressive strength of laboratory specimen molded and compacted in a
ccordance with ASTM D 1632 to a density of 100% of maximum dry density determine
d according to AASHTO T 134, Method B, shall not be less than 2.1 MPa (300 psi)
when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1633. 203.3 Construction Requirements 203.
3.1 Weather Limitations
Lime shall not be applied during windy, rainy or impending bad weather. In the e
vent rain occurs during the operations, work shall be promptly stopped and the e
ntire section shall be reconstructed in accordance with this Specification. 203.
3.2 Construction Equipment
The equipment to be used by the Contractor shall include scarifying, pulverizing
, mixing, spreading, hauling, watering, finishing and compacting equipment and a
slurry lime distributor.
47
Distributor equipment shall include a tachometer pressure gauge, accurate volume
measuring devices or a calibrated tank. It shall be equipped with a power unit
for the pump and full circulation spray bars adjustable laterally and vertically
, as well as agitator to prevent setting of lime solids. These equipment shall b
e on the project site in good condition and shall have been approved by the Engi
neer, both as to type and condition, and provided with experienced operators bef
ore the start of construction. 203.3.3 1. Preparation of Soil-Aggregate Case 1 (
New Soil-Aggregate) When new soil-aggregate is to be used, the existing roadbed
shall be scarified lightly and bladed to uniform grade and to the crosssection s
hown on the Plans and shall then be rolled or watered and rolled, as directed. I
f so ordered by the Engineer, depressions shall first be filled and weak portion
s of the roadbed strengthened with new soil-aggregate. At least one day shall th
en be allowed for measuring, sampling and testing for approval of quantity and g
radation before the windrow is spread for application of hydrated lime. If the s
urface moisture of the soil-aggregate is more than 2 mass percent of the dry agg
regate, the soil aggregate shall be turned by blades or disc harrows or otherwis
e aerated until the moisture content is reduced to 2 percent or less. The soil-a
ggregate shall then be spread smoothly and uniformly over half the road or other
convenient width of the surface ready for the application of hydrated lime. 2.
Case 2 (Salvaged Soil-Aggregate) When material in the existing roadbed is to be
used for mixing, the surface shall be scarified lightly and bladed to uniform gr
ade and to the cross-section shown on the Plans. The reshaped surface shall then
be scarified again to the depth ordered by the Engineer and in such manner as t
o leave a foundation of undisturbed material parallel, both in profile and cross
-section, the proposed finished surface. The loosened materials shall be bladed
aside into a windrow at the side of the road, and the undisturbed material roile
d, or watered and rolled, as directed. 203.3.4 Application of Lime The hydrated
lime shall be uniformly spread at specified percent using either the dry or slur
ry (wet) methods. It shall be distributed in successive applications, in such am
ount and at such intervals as directed. The mixing equipment shall follow immedi
ately behind the distributor, after each application to partially mix the lime w
ith the soil-aggregate. Dry lime should not be spread under windy conditions to
avoid excessive dustings. It shall be applied only to such areas as can be mixed
into the soil48
aggregate during the day of application. Dry application encompass either spotti
ng bags of lime in equal predetermined transverse and longitudinal intervals or
applying bulk lime from suitably equipped self-unloading trucks. An approved spr
eader is preferable for uniform distribution. If lime slurry is employed, the pr
eparation facilities should be approved by the Engineer. A typical slurry ratio
is 1 tonne lime to 2 cubic metre water. The actual mixing proportion depends upo
n the percent of lime, specified type of soil and its moisture condition. The sl
urry is distributed by one or more passes over a measured area until the specifi
ed percentage (based on lime solids content) is obtained. To prevent run-off and
consequent non-uniformity of lime distribution, the slurry is mixed in immediat
ely after each spreading pass. 203.3.5 Mixing After the last lime application an
d partial mixing, the entire mass of the mixture shall be windrowed on the road
surface and then mixed by blading the mixture from side to side of the road, or
by manipulation producing equivalent results, until the whole mass has a uniform
color and the mixture is free from fat or lean spots or balls of unmixed partic
les. During the mixing operations, care shall be taken to avoid cutting into the
underlying course. When directed, the mixing process shall be confined to part
of the width or area of the road so as to allow traffic to pass. Should the mixt
ure show an excess, deficiency or uneven distribution of lime, the condition sha
ll be corrected by the addition of soil-aggregate or lime as required and then r
emix. If the mixture contains excessive amounts of moisture or volatile matter,
as may be encountered in slurry application method, it shall be bladed, aerated
or otherwise manipulated until the moisture and volatile content are satisfactor
y. The spreading of the mix shall not be done when the surface to be covered is
in an unsatisfactory condition. At the end of each day’s work, or when the work is
interrupted by weather conditions or otherwise, all loose materials, shall be b
laded into a windrow, whether mixing is completed or not, and shall be retained
in a windrow until operations are resumed. When the mixing operations have been
satisfactorily completed, the mixture shall be formed into a windrow of uniform
cross-section. 203.3.6 Spreading, Compacting and Finishing The material shall be
spread by a self-propelled pneumatic-tire blade grader or a mechanical spreader
of approved type. In spreading from the windrow, care shall be taken to avoid c
utting into the underlying course. After the material is spread, the surface sha
ll be rolled. Rolling shall be parallel to the road center line and shall commen
ce at the outer edges of the road, overlapping the shoulders and progress toward
the center, overlapping on successive passes by at least one-half the width of
the roller, except that on superelevated curves rolling shall progress from the
lower to the upper edge. 49
Each pass shall terminate at least 910 mm (3 ft) in advance or to the rear of th
e end of the preceding pass. During compaction, the surface shall be dragged or
bladed as necessary to fill ruts and to remove incipient corrugation or other ir
regularities. Rolling shall continue until the surface is of uniform texture and
satisfactory compaction is obtained. Initial rolling shall be performed with a
pneumatic tire roller and final rolling with a 3-wheel or tandem-type steel whee
l roller. Rolling shall be discontinued whenever it begins to produce excessive
pulverizing of the aggregate or displacement of the mixture. When the compacted
thickness of the road mix lime stabilized base course is to be more than 150 mm,
the mixture shall be spread from the windrow and compacted in two (2) approxima
tely equal layers, the first layer to be bladed and rolled before the second lay
er is spread. Compaction shall continue until a field density of not less than 1
00% of the compacted maximum dry density determined in accordance with AASHTO T
180, Method D has been attained. Field Density test shall be in accordance with
AASHTO T 191. 203.3.7 Protection, Curing and Maintenance After the lime-stabiliz
ed base course has been finished as specified herein, the surface shall be prote
cted against rapid drying for a period of at least five (5) days by either of th
e following curing methods: 1. Maintain in a thorough and continuously moist con
dition by sprinkling with water. Cover the completed surface with a 50 mm layer
of earth or sand and maintain in moist condition. Apply on the surface an asphal
t membrane of the type and quantity approved by the Engineer. Apply on the surfa
ce a liquid membrane curing compound of the type and quantity approved by the En
gineer.
2.
3.
4.
The Contractor shall be required to maintain at his own expense the entire work
within the limits of his Contract in good condition satisfactory to the Engineer
from the time he first started work until all work shall have been completed. M
aintenance shall include immediate repairs of any defects that may occur before
and after the lime-stabilized base course has been compacted and finished, which
work shall be done by the Contractor at his own expense and repeated as may be
necessary to keep the base continuously intact. 203.3.8 Trial Sections Trial sec
tions of the stabilized base shall be constructed at least 2 weeks before actual
base construction. These shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsec
tions 200.3.4, Trial Sections.
50
203.3.9 Tolerances The stabilized base course shall be laid to the designed leve
l and transverse slopes shown on the Plans. The allowable tolerances shall be in
accordance with Subsection 201.3.5, Tolerance. 203.3.10 Traffic The Contractor
will not be permitted to drive heavy equipment over completed portions prior to
the end of five (5) days curing period except pneumatic-tired equipment required
for constructing adjoining sections. Turning areas on completed portions of the
base shall be protected by a layer of stable granular materials of not less tha
n 50 mm of compacted depth. 203.4 Method of Measurement Lime Stabilized Road Mix
base Course will be measured by the cubic meter (m3). The quantity to be paid f
or shall be the design volume compacted in place as shown on the Plans, and acce
pted in the completed course. No allowance shall be given for materials placed o
utside the design limits shown on the cross-sections. Trial sections shall not b
e measured separately but shall be included in the quantity of lime stabilized r
oad mix base course. 203.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities, measured as
prescribed in Section 203.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for L
ime Stabilized Road Mix Base Course which price and payment shall be full compen
sation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item. P
ayment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 203
Description Lime Stabilized Road Mix Base Course, (New or Salvaged) Soil-Aggrega
te
Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter
ITEM 204 – PORTLAND CEMENT STABILIZED ROAD MIX BASE COURSE 204.1 Description This
Item shall consist of a foundation for surface source composed of soilaggregate,
Portland Cement and water in proper proportions, road-mixed and constructed on
a prepared subgrade/subbase in accordance with this 51
Specification and the lines, grades and typical cross-sections shown on the Plan
s or as established by the Engineer. 204.2 Material Requirements 204.2.1 Soil Ag
gregate It shall conform to the grading and quality requirements of Subsection 2
03.2.1. 204.2.2 Portland Cement It shall conform to the requirements of Item 700
, Hydraulic Cement. 204.2.3 Water It shall conform to the requirements of Item 7
14, Water. 204.2.4 Proportioning of Mixture The amount of cement to be added to
the soil-aggregate shall be from 6 to 10 mass percent of the dry soil. The exact
percentage to be added shall be fixed by the Engineer on the basis of prelimina
ry laboratory tests and trial mixes of the materials furnished by the Contractor
. 204.2.5 Strength Requirements Strength requirements shall conform in all respe
cts to those specified in Subsection 203.2.5. 204.3 Construction Requirements Co
nstruction requirements and procedures shall be as prescribed under Subsections
203.3.1 through 203.3.10. In all cases, the word ”lime” shall be deleted and replace
d with “Portland Cement”. 204.4 Method of Measurement Portland Cement Stabilized Roa
d Mix Base Course will be measured by the cubic meter (m3). The quantity to be p
aid for shall be the design volume compacted in-place as shown on the Plans, and
accepted in the completed course. No allowance shall be given for materials pla
ced outside the design limits shown on the cross-sections. Trial sections shall
not be measured separately but shall be included in the quantity of Portland Cem
ent Stabilized Road Mix Base Course. 204.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantit
ies, measured as prescribed, in Section 204.4, shall be paid for at the contract
unit price for Portland Cement stabilized Road Mix Base Course which price and
payment shall be full compensation for furnishing 52
and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item. Payment will be made un
der:
Pay Item Number 204
Description Portland Cement Stabilized Road Mix Base Course, (New or Salvaged) S
oil-Aggregate
Unit of Measurement
Cubic meter
Item 205 – ASPHALT STABILIZED ROAD MIX BASE COURSE 205.1 Description This Item sha
ll consist of a foundation for surface course, composed of soil-aggregate and as
phaltic material in proper proportions, road mixed and constructed on a prepared
subgrade/subbase in accordance with this Specification and the lines, grades an
d typical cross-sections shown on the Plans or established by the Engineer. 205.
2 Material Requirements 205.2.1 Soil-Aggregates It shall conform to the applicab
le requirements of Item 703, Aggregates, Gradation A or B shall be used. 205.2.2
Asphaltic Material Asphaltic material shall be Anionic or Cationic Emulsified A
sphalt of the slow setting type meeting the requirements of Item 702, Bituminous
Materials, Emulsified Asphalt. 205.2.3 Proportioning of Mixture The amount of a
sphaltic material to be added to the soil-aggregate shall be from 4 to 7 mass pe
rcent of the dry soil-aggregate. The exact percentage to be used shall be fixed
by the Engineer on the basis of preliminary laboratory tests and trial mixes of
the materials furnished by the Contractor. 205.2.4 Strength Requirements Strengt
h requirements shall conform in all respects to those specified in Subsection 20
3.2.5.
53
205.3 Construction Requirements Construction requirements and procedures shall b
e as prescribed under Subsections 306.3.1 through 306.3.7. In all cases, the wor
d “aggregate” shall be deleted and replaced by “soil-aggregate”. Trial Sections shall co
nform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 200.3.4. The allowable tolera
nces shall be in accordance with Subsection 201.3.5. 205.4 Method of Measurement
Asphalt Stabilized Road Mix Base Course will be measured by the cubic meter (m3
). The quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume compacted in place as
shown on the Plans, accepted in the completed course. No allowance shall be give
n for materials placed outside the design limits shown on the crosssections. Tri
al sections shall not be measured separately but shall be included in the quanti
ty of Asphalt stabilized Road Mix Base Course. 205.5 Basis of Payment The accept
ed quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 205.4, shall be paid for at the
contract unit price for Asphalt Stabilized Road Mix Base Course which price and
payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials inc
luding all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the pre
scribed work in this Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 205
Description Asphalt Stabilized Road Mix Base Course, (New or Salvaged) Soil-Aggr
egate
Unit of Measurement
Cubic Meter
ITEM 206 – PORTLAND CEMENT TREATED PLANT MIX BASE COURSE 206.1 Description This It
em shall consist of a foundation for surface course composed of aggregate, Portl
and Cement and water in proper proportions, mixed by a travel plant or in a cent
ral plant and spread and compacted on a prepared subgrade/subbase in one or more
layers, in accordance with this Specification
54
and the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-sections shown on the Plans o
r as established by the Engineer. 206.2 Material Requirements Same as Subsection
s 204.2.1 through 204.2.5 206.3 Construction Requirements 206.3.1 Weather Limita
tions
Portland Cement shall not be applied during windy, rainy or impending bad weathe
r. In the event rain occurs, work shall be promptly stopped and the entire secti
on shall be reconstructed in accordance with this Specification. 206.3.2 Travel
Plant Method The salvaged or new soil-aggregate shall be pulverized until at lea
st 80 mass percent of all material other than stone or gravel will pass a 4.75 m
m (No. 4) sieve. Any material retained on a 50 mm (2 inches) sieve and other uns
uitable material shall be removed. If additional material is specified, it shall
be blended with the existing material. All butt joints at existing pavements or
other structures shall be cleaned prior to mixing. The subgrade/subbase shall s
upport all equipment required in the construction of the base course. Soft or yi
elding areas shall be corrected prior to mixing. The soil-aggregate to be treate
d shall be placed in a uniform windrow and spread to a uniform thickness to the
required width. The specified quantity of Portland Cement shall be applied unifo
rmly in a trench on top of the windrows or spread uniformly over the soil-aggreg
ate. Spread cement that has been lost shall be replaced, without additional comp
ensation, before mixing is started. Mixing shall be accomplished by means of a m
ixer that will thoroughly blend the cement with the soil-aggregate. The mixer sh
all be equipped with a water metering device that will introduce the required qu
antity of water during the mixing cycle. The cement soil-aggregate mixture shall
be sufficiently blended to prevent the formation of cement balls when water is
applied. A maximum time of 2 hours shall be permitted for wet mixing, laydown, a
nd finishing when this method is used. 206.3.3 Central Plant Method The soil-agg
regate shall be proportioned and mixed with cement and water in a central mixing
plant. The plant shall be equipped with feeding and metering devices which will
introduce the cement, soil-aggregate, and water into the mixer
55
in the quantities specified. Mixing shall continue until a uniform mixture has b
een obtained. 206.3.4 Spreading, Compacting and Finishing The mixture shall be s
pread on a prepared and moistened subgrade/subbase in a uniform layer by an appr
oved equipment. Not more than 60 minutes shall elapse between the start of mixin
g and the time of starting compaction of the spread mixture. After spreading, th
e mixture shall be compacted and finished conforming to the procedures/requireme
nts specified under Subsection 203.3.6, Spreading, Compacting and Finishing. The
compaction and finishing shall be completed within 2 hours of the time water is
added to the mixture. 206.3.5 Protection, Curing and Maintenance The completed
cement treated base shall be cured with a bituminous curing seal applied as soon
as possible after the completion of final rolling. The surface shall be kept mo
ist until the seal is applied. The rate of application shall be between 0.5 L/m2
to 1.00 L/m2 of surface. The exact rate will be determined by the Engineer. Cur
ing seal will be applied in sufficient quantity to provide a continuous film ove
r the base. The film shall be maintained at least 5 days unless the treated base
is protected by a subsequent course. The Contractor shall be responsible for ad
equate maintenance of the base at all times as specified under Subsection 203.3.
7, Protection, Curing and Maintenance. 206.3.6 Trial Sections Same as Subsection
203.3.8. 206.3.7 Tolerances Same as Subsection 203.3.9. 206.3.8 Traffic Same as
Subsection 203.3.10. 206.4 Method of Measurement Portland Cement Treated Plant
Mix Base Course will be measured by the cubic meter (m3). The quantity to be pai
d for shall be the design volume compacted in-place as shown on the Plans, accep
ted in the completed course. No allowance shall be given for materials placed ou
tside the design limits shown 56
on the cross-sections. Trial sections shall not be measured separately but shall
be included in the quantity of Portland Cement Treated Plant Mix Base Course. 2
06.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section
206.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Portland Cement Treated
Plant Mix Base Course which price and payment shall be full compensation for fu
rnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and in
cidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item. Payment will b
e made under:
Pay Item Number 206
Description Portland Cement treated Plant Mix Course, (New or Salvaged) Soil-Agg
regate
Unit of Measurement
Cubic Meter
ITEM 207 – AGGREGATE STOCKPILE 207.1 Description This Item shall consist of furnis
hing and placing aggregate in stockpiles at locations shown on the Plans or as d
irected and approved by the Engineer. 207.2 Material Requirements The aggregate
shall conform to all requirements of the specified Item No. of the Specification
s. It shall be tested for acceptance at the source. 207.3 Construction Requireme
nts The stockpile area, as staked by the Engineer, shall be graded, shaped and c
ompacted to a uniform cross-section that will drain satisfactorily. The entire a
rea shall be compacted with a minimum of three completed passes of the approved
equipment. The stockpiling and handling of aggregates shall be in accordance wit
h clauses 65 and 66, Part H Control of Materials of the latest DPWH Standard Spe
cifications, Volume I, Requirements and Conditions of Contract.
57
207.4 Method of Measurement The quantity of aggregate to be paid for will be the
number of cubic meters as ordered and placed in authorized stockpiles. The stoc
kpiles shall be measured and computed by the average end-area method. No allowan
ce will be made for settlement or shrinkage. 207.5 Basis of Payment The accepted
quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 207.4, shall be paid for at the c
ontract unit price for Aggregate Stockpile, which price and payment shall be ful
l compensation for furnishing and stockpiling the aggregate, including all labor
, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in
this Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 207
Description Aggregate Stockpile
Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter
58
PART E – SURFACE COURSES ITEM 300 – AGGREGATE SURFACE COURSE 300.1 Description This
item shall consist of a wearing or top course composed of gravel or crushed aggr
egate and binder material, whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities, co
nstructed on a prepared base in accordance with this Specification and in confor
mity with the lines, grades and typical cross-sections shown on the Plans. 300.2
Material Requirements The aggregate shall consist of hard, durable particles or
fragments of stone or gravel and sand or other fine mineral particles free from
vegetable matter and lumps or balls of clay and of such nature that it can be c
ompacted readily to form a firm, stable layer. It shall conform to the grading r
equirements shown in table 300.1 when tested by AASHTO T 11 and T 27. Table 300.
1 – Grading Requirements Sieve Designation Standard Alternate Mm U. S. Standard 25
1” 3/8 9.5 No.4 4.75 No. 10 2.00 No.40 0.425 No. 200 0.075 Mass Percent Passing G
rading Grading B C 100 60-100 50-85 40-70 25-45 5-20 100 55-100 40-100 20-50 6-2
0
Grading A 100 50-85 35-65 25-50 15-30 5-20
Grading D 100 70-100 55-100 30-70 8-25
The coarse aggregate material retained on the 2.00 mm (No.10) sieve shall have a
mass percent of wear by the Los Angeles Test (AASHTO T 96) of not more than 45.
When crushed aggregate is called for in the Bill of Quantities, not less than f
ifty (50) mass percent of the particles retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve sh
all have at least one (1) fractured face. The fraction passing the 0.075 mm (No.
200) sieve shall not be greater than two-thirds of the fraction passing the 0.42
5 mm (No.40) sieve. The fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have
a liquid limit not greater than 35 and a plasticity index range of 4 to 9, when
tested by AASHTO T 89 and T 90, respectively.
59
Materials for gravel surface course and crushed aggregate surface course shall h
ave a soaked CBR Value of not less than 25% and 80% respectively as determined b
y AASHTO T 193. The CBR Value shall be obtained at the maximum dry density and d
etermined by AASHTO T 180, Method D. 300.3 Construction Requirements 300.3.1 Pla
cing
Aggregate surface course shall be placed in accordance with the requirements of
Item 201, Aggregate Base Course. 300.3.2 Compacting Requirements
Aggregate surface course shall be compacted in accordance with the requirements
of Item 201, Aggregate Base Course. 300.3.3 Trial Sections
Trial sections shall be carried out for aggregate surface course in accordance w
ith the requirements of Item 201, Aggregate Base Course. 300.3.4 Surface Course
Thickness and Tolerances
The aggregate surface course shall be laid to the designed level and transverse
slopes shown on the Plans. The allowable tolerances shall be as specified hereun
der: Permitted variation from design THICKNESS OF LAYER Permitted variation from
design LEVEL OF SURFACE Permitted SURFACE IRREGULARITY Measured by 3-m straight
-edge Permitted variation from design CROSSFALL OR CAMBER Permitted variation fr
om design LONGITUDINAL GRADE over 25 m in length +15 mm - 5 mm +15 mm - 5 mm
5 mm
+0.2%
+0.1%
300.4 Method of Measurement Aggregate surface course shall be measured by the cu
bic metre (m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of cubic metres
of aggregate including all filler, placed, compacted and accepted in the complet
ed course. No allowance
60
will be given for material placed outside the design limits shown on the crossse
ctions. Trial sections shall not be measured separately but shall be included in
the quantities as measured above. 300.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantity,
measured as prescribed in Section 300.4 shall be paid for at the contract unit
price for Aggregate Surface Course which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing, handling, placing, watering, and rolling all mater
ials, including all labor and equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to comp
lete this Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 300 300 (1)
Description Aggregate Surface Course Gravel Surface Course
Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter compacted in place
300 (2)
Crushed Aggregate Surface Course
ITEM 301 – BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT 301.1 Description This Item shall consist of prep
aring and treating an aggregate base course with material in accordance with the
Plans and Specifications, preparatory to the construction of a bituminous surfa
ce course. 301.2 Material Requirements Bituminous material shall be either Rapid
Curing (RC) or Medium Curing (MC) Cut-back Asphalt, whichever is called for in
the Bill of Quantities. It shall conform to the requirements of Item 702, Bitumi
nous Materials. The type and grade shall be specified in the Special Provisions.
301.3 Construction Requirements 301.3.1 Surface Condition
Prime coat shall be applied only to surfaces which are dry or slightly moist. No
prime coat shall be applied when the weather is foggy or rainy.
61
301.3.2
Equipment
The liquid bituminous material shall be sprayed by means of a pressure distribut
or of not less than 1000 liters capacity, mounted on pneumatic tires of such wid
th and number that the load produced on the road surface will not exceed 1 kN(10
0 kgf) per cm width of tire. The tank shall have a heating device able to heat a
complete charge of bituminous liquid to 1800C. The heating device shall be such
that overheating will not occur. Consequently, the flames must not directly tou
ch the casing of the tank containing the bituminous liquid. The liquid shall be
insulated in such a way that the drop in temperature when the tank is filled wit
h bituminous liquid at 1800C and not heated will be less than 20C per hour. A th
ermometer shall be fixed to the tank in order to be able to measure continuously
the temperature of the liquid. The thermometer shall be placed in such a way th
at the highest temperature in tank is measured. The tank shall be furnished with
a calibrated dipstick to indicate the contents. The pipes for filling the tank
shall be furnished with an easily changeable filter. The distributor shall be ab
le to vary the spray width of the bituminous liquid in maximum steps of 100 mm t
o a total width of 4 m. The spraying bar shall have nozzles from which the liqui
d is sprayed fan-shaped on the road surface equally distributed over the total s
praying width. For adding the liquid bituminous material, the distributor shall
have a pump either driven by a separate motor, or with a device to synchronize i
ts speed with the speed of the distributor. The pump shall be furnished with an
indicator showing the rate of flow. The suction side of the pump shall have an e
asily changeable filter. A thermometer shall be fixed, such that it indicates th
e temperature of the liquid immediately before it leaves the spraying bar. The d
istributor shall be furnished with a tachometer, indicating its forward speed, w
hich shall be visible from the driver’s seat. The distributor shall be designed so
that the deviation from the prescribed rate of application does not exceed 10%
and shall be equipped with a device for hand spraying of the bituminous liquid.
301.3.3 Application of Bituminous Material
Immediately before applying the prime coat, the full width of surface to be trea
ted shall be swept with a power broom and if necessary, scraped to remove all di
rt and other objectionable materials. When required by the Engineer, immediately
prior to the application of the prime coat, the surface shall be slightly spray
ed with water but not saturated. Bituminous material shall be applied by means o
f a pressure distributor at the temperature given in Item 702, Bituminous Materi
als. The rate of application of the bituminous material shall be within the rang
e of 1 to 2 litres/m2, the exact rate to be ordered by the Engineer. The prime c
oat shall be left undisturbed for a period of at least 24 hours and shall not be
opened to traffic until it has penetrated and cured sufficiently so
62
that it will not be picked up by the wheels of passing vehicles. The Contractor
shall maintain the prime coat until the next course is applied. Care shall be ta
ken that the application of bituminous material is not in excess of the specifie
d amount, any excess shall be blotted with sand or removed as directed by the En
gineer. All areas inaccessible to the distributor shall be sprayed manually usin
g the device for hand spraying. The surface of structures and trees adjacent to
the areas being treated shall be protected in such a manner as to prevent their
being spattered or marred. 301.4 Method of Measurement Bituminous Prime Coat sha
ll be measured by the tonne (t). The quantity to be paid for shall be the number
of tonnes of bituminous material applied and accepted in the completed work. 30
1.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 30
1.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Prime Coat whic
h price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all ma
terials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to comp
lete this Item. Payment will be made under: Pay Item Number 301 301(1) 301 (2) D
escription Bituminous Prime Coat MC – Cut-back Asphalt RC – Cut-back Asphalt Unit of
Measurement
tonne tonne
ITEM 302 – BITUMINOUS TACK COAT 302.1 Description This Item shall consist of prepa
ring and treating an existing bituminous or cement concrete surface with bitumin
ous material in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, preparatory to the
construction of a bituminous surface course. 302.2 Material Requirements Bitumi
nous material shall be either Rapid Curing (RC) Cut-back or Emulsified Asphalt,
whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities. It shall conform to the requi
rements of Item 702, Bituminous Materials. The type and grade will be specified
in the Special Provisions.
63
302.3 Construction Requirements 302.3.1 Surface Condition
Tack coat shall be applied only to surfaces which are dry or slightly moist. No
tack coat shall be applied when the weather is foggy or rainy. 302.3.2 Equipment
Equipment shall conform in all respects to Subsection 301.3.2.. 302.3.3 Applicat
ion of Bituminous Material
Immediately before applying the tack coat, the full width of the surface to be t
reated shall be cleaned of loose and foreign materials by means of a power broom
or power blower, supplemented as necessary by hand sweeping. Where required by
the Engineer, immediately prior to the application of the tack coat, the surface
shall be lightly sprayed with water but not saturated. Bituminous material shal
l be applied by means of a pressure distributor at the temperature given in Item
702, Bituminous Materials, of the particular material being used. The rate of a
pplication of either the Rapid Curing Cut-back or the Emulsified Asphalt shall b
e within the range of 0.2 to 0.7 litre/m2, the exact rate as determined by the E
ngineer. Care shall be taken that the application of bituminous material is not
in excess of the specified amount; any excess shall be blotted by sand or remove
d as directed by the Engineer. All areas inaccessible to the distributor shall b
e treated manually using the device for hand spraying. The surfaces of structure
s and trees adjacent to the areas being treated shall be protected in such a man
ner so as to prevent their being spattered or marred. Traffic shall be kept off
the tack coat at all times. The tack coat shall be sprayed only so far in advanc
e on the surface course as will permit it to dry to a “tacky” condition. The Contrac
tor shall maintain the tack coat until the next course has been applied. Any are
a that has become fouled by traffic or otherwise, shall be cleaned and resprayed
at the Contractor’s expense before the next course is applied. 302.4 Method of Me
asurement The bituminous tack coat shall be measured by the tonne (t), completed
and accepted in-place. 302.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantity, measured a
s prescribed in Section 302.4 shall be paid for at the contract unit price for B
ituminous Tack Coat which price and payment shall be full compensation for furni
shing and placing all materials including all labor, equipment, tools and incide
ntals necessary to complete this Item.
64
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 302 302(1) 302 (2)
Description Bituminous Tack Coat RC – Cut-back Asphalt Emulsified Asphalt
Unit of Measurement
Tonne Tonne
ITEM 303 – BITUMINOUS SEAL COAT 303.1 Description This Item shall consist of an ap
plication of bituminous material with or without an application of aggregate on
an existing bituminous surface course in accordance with the Plans and Specifica
tions. 303.2 Material Requirements 303.2.1 Quantities of Materials
The approximate amounts of materials per square metre for seal coats of the seve
ral types shall be as provided in Table 303.1. The exact amounts to be used shal
l be set by the Engineer. Table 303.1 – Quantities of Materials for Seal Coats Typ
e 1 Bituminous material L/m2 Cover Aggregate, kg/m2 0.20 – 0.50 none Type 2 0.50 – 1
.00 5.00 – 10.00 Type 3 0.85 – 1.50 8.00 – 14.00
303.2.2
Bituminous Materials
Bituminous material shall be Asphalt Cement, Penetration Grade 120-150, Rapid Cu
ring (RC) or Medium Curing (MC) Cut-back Asphalt. It shall conform to the requir
ements of Item 702, Bituminous Materials, whichever is called for in the Bill of
Quantities. The type and grade of asphalt cement or cut-back asphalt will be sp
ecified in the Special Provisions. 303.2.3 Cover Aggregate
Cover Aggregate for Type 2 seal coat shall consist of sand and fine screenings,
reasonably free from dirt or other organic matter.
65
Aggregate for Type 3 seal coat shall be crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed g
ravel. Only one type of aggregate shall be used in a project unless alternative
types are approved. Aggregate gradation shall conform with Table 303.2 when test
ed by AASHTO T 27. Table 303.2 – Grading Requirements
Sieve Designation Standard Alternate mm U.S. Standard 12.50 ½ in. 9.50 3/8 in. 4.7
5 No. 4 2.36 No. 8 1.18 No. 16 0.300 No. 50 0.150 No. 100
Mass Percent Passing Type 3 Grading A Grading B 100 100 100 85 – 100 85 – 100 85 – 100
10 – 30 60 – 100 10 – 40 0 – 10 0 – 10 0–5 0–5 0 – 10 Type 2
The aggregate shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 40 when tested by
AASHTO T 96. When crushed slag is used, it shall be of uniform density and quali
ty and shall have a density of not less than 960 kg/m3 (60 lb/cu. ft.) as determ
ined by AASHTO T 19. 303.3 Construction Requirements 303.3.1 Weather and Moistur
e Conditions
Seal coating shall not be undertaken during foggy or rainy weather or when the s
urface to be treated is wet. Wet cover coat material shall not be used on the wo
rk. No seal coating work shall be continued at night unless provided with suffic
ient lighting. The Engineer shall always be consulted before the commencement of
the work and all work shall be terminated at once in the event of rain. 303.3.2
Preparation of Surface
Seal coating operations shall not be started until the bituminous surface is tho
roughly compacted by traffic and rolling. In no event shall seal coat be placed
on newly constructed or reconditioned surfaces in less than ten (10) days after
such surface is laid and opened to traffic, unless ordered in writing by the Eng
ineer. Immediately prior to applying the bituminous material, the surface shall
be cleaned of all dirt, sand, dust and objectionable material. This cleaning sha
ll be effected by means of a rotary power broom or a power blower, unless other
66
methods are authorized by the Engineer. Dried mud or other foreign material whic
h cannot be removed otherwise shall be removed by hand methods. 303.3.3 Applicat
ion of Bituminous Material
Bituminous material shall be applied by means of a pressure distributor at the r
ate of approximately 0.9 to 1.8 litres for asphalt cement and 1.5 to 3.0 litres
for cut-back asphalt, per square metre of surface, in a uniform, unbroken spread
over the section to be treated. The pressure distributor used for applying asph
altic materials shall be equipped with pneumatic tires and shall be designed and
operated so as to distribute the asphaltic material at the specified rate. It s
hall be equipped with a fifth wheel tachometer registering the speed and so loca
ted as to be visible to the truck driver. The distributor pump shall be equipped
with a gauge registering litres per minute passing through the nozzles and read
ily visible to the operator. Other suitable measuring devices approved by the En
gineer may be used. The exact quantity to be applied shall be determined by the
Engineer. The temperature at the time of application shall be within the range o
f temperature specified under Item 702, Bituminous Materials. Care shall be take
n that the application of bituminous material at the junction of spreads is not
in excess of the specified quantities. Any excess shall be removed from the surf
ace by a squeegee. If necessary, to obtain proper junction of spreads, a strip o
f manila paper approximately 1 metre wide and at least as long as the spray bar
shall be used at the beginning and end of each spread. The paper shall be remove
d after use. Any skipped areas or recognized deficiencies shall be corrected imm
ediately by hand application and hand operated pressure devices or by other equa
lly suitable means. In the event that any structure becomes discolored with bitu
minous material, the Contractor, at his own expense, shall remove the discolorat
ion to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 303.3.4 Application of the Cover Aggreg
ate
Immediately after the application of asphalt, the cover aggregate shall be evenl
y spread over the surface at the rate of approximately 0.004 to 0.007 cubic metr
e per square metre. The exact quantity shall be as directed by the Engineer. Spr
eading shall be accomplished by aggregate spreader only so that an even and accu
rate distribution is obtained. The use of spreader boards attached to tail gates
of trucks shall not be permitted. The tires of the aggregate trucks shall at no
time come in contact with the uncovered and newly applied asphalt. As soon as t
he cover aggregate has been spread, the surface shall be broomed lightly with ap
proved push or drag broom to insure an even distribution, and shall then be roll
ed with an approved power roller weighing not less than 5, nor more than 6 tonne
s to a uniform surface.
67
303.3.5
Maintenance
The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the surface until the
work is accepted by the Engineer. The maintenance work shall consist of keeping
any excess aggregate evenly spread over the asphalt surface by approved sweepin
g devices. It shall also consist of keeping all potholes or failures which may o
ccur, repaired by use of additional asphalt and necessary aggregate. All fat or
bleeding surfaces shall be covered with approved cover aggregate so that the asp
halt will not adhere to, or be picked up by the wheels of vehicles. 303.4 Method
of Measurement The quantities of bituminous material and cover aggregate shall
be measured by the tonne (t), calculated by the actual rate of application appro
ved by the Engineer. 303.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities, measured as
prescribed in Section 303.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for B
ituminous Seal Coat, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furn
ishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and inci
dentals necessary to complete this Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 303 303 (1) 303 (2) 303 (3) 303 (4)
Description Bituminous Seal Coat Cover Aggregate, Type ___ MC ___ Cut-back Aspha
lt RC ___ Cut-back Asphalt Asphalt Cement Pen. Gr.
Unit of Measurement
Tonne Tonne Tonne Tonne
ITEM 304 – BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT 304.1 Description This Item shall consist
of either a single application of bituminous material followed by a single sprea
ding of aggregate (single surface treatment) or two applications of bituminous m
aterial each followed by a spreading of aggregate (double surface treatment) in
accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
68
304.2 Material Requirements 304.2.1 Quantities of Materials
The approximate amounts of materials per square metre and sequence of operations
for single and double surface treatment shall be as provided in Table 304.1 and
Table 304.2, whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities. The quantities
given in the Tables are those of aggregates having a bulk specific gravity of 2.
65 as determined by AASHTO T 84 and T 85. Proportionate corrections will be made
when the aggregate furnished on the job has a bulk specific gravity above 2.75
or below 2.55. In such case, the corrected amount will be the product of the qua
ntity shown in the tables and the ratio of the bulk specific gravity of aggregat
e to 2.65. The amounts given in the Tables are approximate and the exact amounts
will be set by the Engineer. Total amount of bituminous material per square met
re may be varied by the Engineer as necessary to fit conditions, but the total a
mount of aggregate per square metre, after adjusting for specific gravity will n
ot be changed.
Tabel 304.1 – Quantities of Materials and Sequence of Operations Using CutBack Asp
halt or Asphalt Cement Aggregate Grading and Sequence of Operations First Course
: Apply bituminous material, L/m2 Spread Aggregate: Grading A, kg/m2 Grading B,
kg/m2 Second Course: Apply bituminous material, L/m2 Spread Aggregate: Grading C
, kg/m2 Single S.T. Double S.T.
0.7 – 1.1 AC 0.9 – 1.5 MC
1.6 – 2.0 AC 1.8 – 2.3 MC 22.0 – 27.0
11.0 – 14.0 2.3 – 2.7 AC 2.8 – 3.5 MC 11.0 – 14.0
69
Tabel 304.2 – Quantities of Materials and Sequence of Operations Using Emulsified
Asphalt Aggregate Grading and Sequence of Operations First Course: Apply bitumin
ous material, L/m2 Spread Aggregate: Grading A, kg/m2 Grading B, kg/m2 Second Co
urse: Apply bituminous material, L/m2 Spread Aggregate: Grading C, kg/m2 Single
S.T. Double S.T.
0.9 – 1.6
1.4 – 2.0
14.0 – 19.0 11.0 – 14.0
2.1 – 3.0
5.0 – 8.0
304.2.2
Bituminous Materials
Bituminous materials shall be either CRS-1 (Cationic Rapid Setting), CRS2 (Catio
nic Rapid Setting), RS-1 (Rapid Setting), RS-2 (Rapid Setting), AC 120150 (Aspha
lt cement), MC 250-800 (Medium Curing), whichever is called for in the Bill of Q
uantities. It shall conform to the requirements of Item 702, Bituminous Material
s, Penetration Grade No. of asphalt cement, the type and grade of cutback and em
ulsified asphalt will be specified in the Special Provisions. 304.2.3 Aggregates
The aggregates shall be crushed stone, crushed slag, or crushed gravel. Only one
type of aggregate shall be used in a project unless alternative types are appro
ved. The gradation shall conform to Table 304.3. Table 304.3 – Aggregate Grading R
equirements Sieve Designation Standard Alternative mm U.S. Standard 25.0 1” 19.0 ¾” 12
.5 ½” 9.5 3/8” 4.75 No. 4 2.36 No. 8 1.18 No. 16 0.300 No. 50 Mass Percent Passing Gra
ding A Grading B Grading C 100 90 – 100 20 – 55 0 – 15 0–5 100 85 – 100 10 – 30 0 – 10 0–5 10
5 – 100 10 – 40 0 – 10 0–5
70
The aggregate shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 40 when tested by
AASHTO T 96. When crushed gravel is used, not less than 50 mass percent of the p
articles retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall have at least one fractured
face. When crushed slag is used, it must be of uniform density and quality and
shall have a density not less than 960 kg/m3 (60 lb/cu.ft.) as determined by AAS
HTO T 19. 304.3 Construction Requirements
304.3.1 Rates of Application/Spreading of Asphalt and Aggregate The rates of app
lication/spreading of asphalt and aggregate shall be within the range in Table 3
04.1 and 304.2 respectively. These quantities are given as guide only and will v
ary considerably according to the type and condition of the surface, the grading
, type, shape and absorbency of the aggregate, the weather condition and the tra
ffic. The actual quantities to be used for surface treatment shall be determined
by the Contractor in accordance with the design methods for one-size aggregate
given in the Asphalt Institute Manual (MS-13), Asphalt Surface Treatment. The pr
oposed design shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor s
hall furnish the Engineer a certified vendor’s certificate in duplicate immediatel
y upon delivery of asphaltic material to the Site. The Contractor shall provide
weighing equipment on the Site to control the application of aggregates. The wei
ghing equipment shall have an approved multiple beam type scale with indicator a
nd other necessary dials for accurately weighing the aggregate. The scale shall
be protected by a weather-proof house with a floor area not less than 10 m2. The
Contractor shall at his own expense have the scale tested and approved by the D
epartment of Public Works and Highways. 304.3.2 Equipment
Equipment for applying the bituminous material shall conform to the requirements
of Subsection 301.3.2, Equipment of Item 301, Bituminous Prime Coat. A mechanic
al spreader shall be used for spreading the aggregates. It shall be capable of s
preading the aggregate uniformly over the full width of the area being treated a
nd shall have controls to regulate the feed gates, the feed roll, the auger and
the truck hatch. The equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
304.3.3 Application of Bituminous Material
The application of bituminous material shall be done when the weather is warm an
d dry.
71
The required asphaltic material shall be applied to the surface at least twenty
four (24) hours after it has been prime coated. Prior to applying the aphaltic m
aterial, dirt and other objectionable material shall be removed from the surface
. If so directed by the Engineer, the surface shall be cleaned by power broom un
til all dust and loose materials are removed. Asphaltic material shall be applie
d on a dry surface whenever cut-back or asphalt cement is used; moist surface wh
en emulsified asphalt is used. Spraying shall not be done unless the road temper
ature has been above 20 C for at least one hour prior to the commencement of spr
aying operations, and the temperature shall not be less than 200C during the spr
aying.
0
The application temperature for asphalt cement shall be within the range that pr
oduces a viscosity of 10 to 60 second Saybolt Furol and for cut-back asphalt sha
ll be within the range given in Item 702, Bituminous Material. The temperature s
hall be such that no fogging occurs. 304.3.4 Spreading of Aggregate
Immediately after applying the asphaltic material, dry aggregate shall be unifor
mly and evenly distributed over the treated surface from an approved mechanical
aggregate spreader. The truck carrying the aggregate shall move backward as it s
preads the aggregate so as to prevent the tires of the truck and the mechanical
aggregate spreader from driving directly on the newly sprayed asphalt. No portio
n of the sprayed surface shall remain uncovered for a period in excess of 2 minu
tes. Immediately after spreading the aggregate, the treated surface shall be rol
led with an approved pneumatic-tire roller. Where asphaltic material is exposed
during rolling, the area shall be covered with additional aggregate and further
rolled until an even surface results. 304.3.5 Control of Traffic
The Contractor shall take all steps necessary to control traffic over newlylaid
bituminous surface treatment so that the surface is not damaged in any way. Traf
fic shall be prohibited from traveling at speeds in excess of 40 km/h until the
asphaltic material has set. The Contractor shall ensure that no vehicles, includ
ing those delivering aggregates, shall be permitted to turn around on newlylaid
material. 304.4 Method of Measurement Bituminous material and aggregate for Bitu
minous Surface Treatment will be measured by the tonne (t). The quantity to be p
aid for shall be the number of tonnes of bituminous material and aggregate used
and accepted in the completed work.
72
304.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Sectio
n 304.4, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Surface Tre
atment, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and pl
acing all materials and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessar
y to complete this Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 304 304 (1) 304 (2) 304 (3) 304 (4) 304 (5)
Description Bituminous Surface Treatment Aggregate Grading Asphalt Cement Pen. G
rade RC ___ Cut-back Asphalt MC ___ Cut-back Asphalt Emulsified Asphalt
Unit of Measurement Tonne Tonne Tonne Tonne Tonne Tonne
ITEM 305 – BITUMINOUS PENETRATION MACADAM PAVEMENT 305.1 Description This Item sha
ll consist of furnishing and placing one or more courses of graded aggregate and
one or more application of bituminous material, followed by a seal coat with co
ver aggregate constructed on a prepared base in accordance with this Specificati
ons and in conformity with the lines, grades and typical crosssections shown on
the Plans. 305.2 305.2.1 Material Requirements Quantities of Materials
The approximate amounts of materials per square metre and sequence of operations
shall be provided in Table 305.1, whichever is called for in the Bill of quanti
ties. The weights given in the Table are those of aggregates having a bulk speci
fic gravity of 2.65 as determined by AASHTO T 84 and T 85. Proportionate correct
ions will be made when the aggregates furnished on the job have a bulk specific
gravity above 2.75 or below 2.55. In such case, the corrected amount will be the
product of the weight given in the Table and the ratio of the bulk specific gra
vity of the aggregate to 2.65. The amounts in the Table are approximate and the
exact quantity will be set by the Engineer. Total amount of bituminous material
per square metre may be varied by the Engineer as necessary to fit conditions, b
ut the total amount of
73
aggregate per square metre, after adjusting for specific gravity will not be cha
nged. Table 305.1 – Quantities of Materials and Sequence of Operations Type of Bit
uminous Material Asphalt Cement Emulsified or Rapid Curing Asphalt (RC)
Type of Aggregate and Sequence of Operations First Layer: Spread Aggregates: Coa
rse Aggregate, kg/m2 Choker Aggregate, kg/m2 Apply bituminous material, L/m2 Sec
ond Layer: Spread Aggregate: Key Aggregate, kg/m2 Apply bituminous material, L/m
2 Third Layer: Spread Aggregate: Key Aggregate, kg/m2 Apply bituminous material,
L/m2 Fourth Layer: Spread Aggregate: Cover Aggregate, kg/m2 Total Quantities: B
ituminous Material, L/m2 Aggregate, kg/m2 305.2.2 Bituminous Material
90 4.0
90 10 5.5
13 1.8
10 3.5
11 1.4
8 2
8 7.2 122
8 11 126
The bituminous material shall be either Asphalt Cement, Rapid Curing (RC), Cut-b
ack Asphalt or Emulsified Asphalt, whichever is called for in the Bill of Quanti
ties. It shall conform to the requirements of Item 702, Bituminous Materials. Th
e Penetration Grade Number of asphalt cement and type and/or grade of cut-back o
r emulsified asphalt will be specified in the Special Provisions. 305.2.3 Aggreg
ate The coarse aggregate shall be crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed gravel.
The choker material, key rock, and cover aggregate shall be crushed or broken s
tone, crushed gravel, or crushed boulders or screened gravel or coarse sand. All
aggregate shall consist of clean, tough, durable fragments, free from excess of
flat, soft or disintegrated pieces and free from stone coated with dirt or othe
r objectionable matter which will prevent adherence of the asphalt to the aggreg
ate. Natural gravel may be used for cover material. Gradation shall conform to T
able 305.2.
74
Table 305.2 – Aggregate Grading Requirements Sieve Designation Standard Alternate
Mm U.S. Standard 63 2 – 1/2” 50 2” 37.5 1 – 1/2” 25 1” 19 ¾” 12.5 ½” 9.5 3/8” 4.75 No. 4 2.36
18 No. 16 Mass Percent Passing Choker Key Aggregate Aggregate 100 100 90 – 100 90 –
100 20 – 55 40 – 70 0 – 15 0 – 15 0–5 0–5 -
Coarse Aggregate 100 90 – 100 35 – 70 0 – 15 0–5 -
Cover Aggregate 100 85 – 100 10 – 30 0 – 10 0–5
The aggregate shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 40 when tested by
AASHTO T 96. When the crushed gravel is subjected to five cycles of the sodium s
ulfate soundness test (AASHTO T 104), the weighted loss shall not exceed 12 mass
percent. When crushed slag is used, it must be of uniform density and quality a
nd shall have a density not less than 1120 kg/m3 (70 lb/cu. ft.) as determined b
y AASHTO T 19. 305.3 Construction Requirements 305.3.1 Weather Limitations
Application of bituminous material shall be made only when the aggregate is dry
and the atmospheric temperature in the shade is 150C or above and when the weath
er is not foggy or rainy. 305.3.2 Equipment
The equipment to be used shall include hand or power operated brooms, shovels, r
akes, self-powered bituminous material distributors or hand or poweroperated spr
ay pumps, broom dragging equipment and self-powered rollers. A sufficient number
of stiff-fiber or steel-bristle push brooms shall be included. Application of t
he bituminous material by any means other than a pressure spray will not be appr
oved and the equipment used shall be of such nature that the temperature of appl
ication of the bituminous material can be accurately controlled within the limit
s specified and such that the rates of application can be accurately controlled.
75
The rollers shall be self-propelled steel wheel, vibratory or pneumatic type. Th
e number and weight of rollers shall be sufficient to compact the layer to the r
equired condition. 305.3.3 Conditioning of Existing Base
Before spreading the aggregate, the base shall be cleaned of all loose foreign m
aterials. The existing base shall be swept until the embedded large aggregate is
exposed, or in the case of a previously constructed asphalt surface, until the
surface is free of mud or other covering. If shown on the Plans and called for i
n the Bill of Quantities, a prime coat shall be applied to the prepared untreate
d base in accordance with the Item 301, Bituminous Prime Coat, or in case of pre
viously constructed asphalt or cement surface tack coat shall be applied in acco
rdance with Item 302, Bituminous Tack Coat. 305.3.4 Spreading and Compacting of
Aggregate Layers
The number of layers in which the macadam pavement is to be constructed and the
order and rates the bituminous material and mineral aggregates are to be spread
shall be as indicated in Table 305.1. The type of aggregate required in the orde
r of spreading shall be placed in the required amount of approved aggregate spre
aders, or by other approved mechanical methods. All areas with non-uniformly gra
ded aggregate shall be removed and replaced with suitable materials before the r
olling begins. These corrections shall be made by hand picking whenever necessar
y and shall be continued after initial rolling until the appearance and texture
of the aggregate are uniform and all irregularities are corrected. The aggregate
shall be dry-rolled until it is compacted and keyed. Rolling shall progress gra
dually from the sides to the center, parallel with the center line of the road a
nd overlapping uniformly each preceding rear wheel track by one-half the width o
f such track and shall continue until the aggregate does not creep or displace a
head of the rollers. Materials which are crushed excessively under the roller or
becomes segregated in such a manner as to prevent free and uniform penetration
of the bituminous material shall be removed and replaced with suitable aggregate
. The compacted aggregate shall have a firm and even surface. Dry rolling shall
be stopped when the surface of the aggregate will support the distributor and be
fore the voids are closed sufficiently to prevent the free uniform penetration o
f the bituminous material. Along curbs, headers and walls, and at all places not
accessible to the roller, the aggregate shall be tamped thoroughly with mechani
cal tampers or with hand tampers. Each hand tamper shall have a mass of not less
than 25 kg and a face area of not more than 250 mm by 250 mm.
76
Aggregate in any layer that becomes coated or mixed with dirt or clay prior to t
he application of the bituminous material shall be removed and replace with clea
n aggregates and the area shall be rerolled. Prior to application of the bitumin
ous material, the surface of the aggregate layer will be tested by the Engineer
using a 3-m straight-edge at selected locations. The variation of the surface fr
om the testing edge of the straight-edge between any two contacts with the surfa
ce shall at no point exceed 10 mm. All humps or depressions exceeding the specif
ied tolerances shall be corrected by removing defective work and replacing it wi
th new materials as specified. Each layer of aggregate shall be spread so that t
he bituminous material is covered before wheels or tracks pass over it. 305.3.5
Application of Bituminous Material
The bituminous material shall be uniformly applied at the rate specified in Tabl
e 305.1. Building paper shall be placed over the end of the previous application
and the joining application shall start on the building paper. Building paper s
o used shall be removed and disposed off in a satisfactory manner. During the ap
plication of the bituminous material, care shall be taken to prevent spattering
of adjacent pavements, structures and trees. The distributors shall not be clean
ed or discharged into ditches, borrow pits or shoulders along the right-of-way.
305.4 Method of Measurement Bituminous Materials, and Aggregate for Bituminous P
enetration Macadam Pavement will be measured by the tonne (t). The quantity to b
e paid for shall be the number of tonnes of bituminous material and aggregate us
ed and accepted in the completed work. 305.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quant
ities, measured as prescribed in Section 305.4, shall be paid for at the contrac
t unit price for Bituminous Penetration Macadam Pavement, which price and paymen
t shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials and for al
l labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
77
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 305 305 (1) 305 (2) 305 (3) 305 (4)
Description Bituminous Penetration Macadam Pavement Aggregates Asphalt Cement RC
___ Cut-back Asphalt Emulsified Asphalt
Unit of Measurement
Tonne Tonne Tonne Tonne
ITEM 306 – BITUMINOUS ROAD MIX SURFACE COURSE 306.1 Description This Item shall co
nsist of constructing a bituminous road-mix surface course on a prepared base in
accordance with these Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades an
d typical cross-sections shown on the Plans, or as established by the Engineer.
306.2 Material Requirements 306.2.1 Bituminous Material
The bituminous material shall be either Rapid Curing (RC) Cut-back, Medium Curin
g (MC) Cut-back or Emulsified Asphalt, whichever is called for in the Bill of Qu
antities. It shall conform to the requirements of Item 702, Bituminous Material.
The type and grade will be specified in the Special Provisions. 306.2.2 Aggrega
te
The aggregate shall conform to applicable requirements of Item 703, Aggregates.
It will be tested for acceptance immediately preceding addition of bituminous ma
terial to the mix. This Acceptance will be based on periodic samples from the wi
ndrowed materials after all aggregates have been blended for each layer. The agg
regate may be new or salvaged from the existing surface. 1. New Aggregate It sha
ll conform to the applicable requirements of Item 703, Aggregates.
78
2.
Salvaged Aggregate Where aggregate required for the road mix surface course is a
lready in place, the Contractor shall not be responsible for its grading or qual
ity except for removal of oversize pieces. In general, salvaged aggregate to be
used for road mix surface course will consist of materials meeting the requireme
nts given in Item 703, Aggregates, for new aggregate or may consist of selected
granular material for other gradings. Any particles of salvaged aggregate appear
ing in the surface at the time of lay-down and finishing that will not pass 37.5
mm (1-1/2 inch) sieve shall be removed by the Contractor as directed by the Eng
ineer.
306.2.3
Proportioning of Mixture
The proportion of bituminous material on the basis of total dry aggregate, shall
be from 4.5 to 7.0 mass percent when cut-back asphalt is used and from 6.0 to 1
0.0 mass percent when emulsified asphalt is used. The exact percentage to be use
d shall be fixed by the Engineer in accordance with the job-mix formula and the
other quality control requirements. During the mixing operation, one-half to one
(0.5 to 1.0) mass percent of hydrated lime, dry aggregate basis, shall be added
to the mixture. The lower percentage limit is applicable to aggregates which ar
e predominantly calcareous. 306.3 Construction Requirements 306.3.1 Weather Limi
tations
The construction of road mix bituminous pavement shall be carried on only when t
he surface on which the material is to be placed is dry and when the weather is
not foggy or rainy. 306.3.2 Construction Equipment
The equipment used by the Contractor shall include scarifying, mixing, spreading
, finishing and compacting equipment; a bituminous distributor; and the equipmen
t for heating bituminous material. The distributor shall be so designed, equippe
d, maintained and operated that bituminous material at even heat may be applied
uniformly on variable widths of surface up to 4.5 m at readily determined and co
ntrolled rates from 0.2 to 10 L/m2, with uniform pressure, and with an allowable
variation from any specified rate not to exceed 0.1 L/m2. Distributor equipment
shall include a tachometer pressure gauge, accurate volume measuring devices or
a calibrated tank, and a thermometer for measuring temperatures of tank content
s. Distributors shall be equipped with a power unit for the pump, and full circu
lation spray bars adjustable laterally and vertically.
79
Travelling or stationary mixing plants or other equipment of proven performance
may be used by the Contractor in lieu of the specified equipment, if approved by
the Engineer. Rollers shall be self-propelled steel-wheel tandem or 3-wheel rol
lers weighing not less than 8 tonnes each and pneumatic tire rollers having a to
tal compacting width of not less than 1,520 mm (60 inches) and the gross mass ad
justable within the range of 3,640 to 6,360 kilograms per metre (200 t0 350 poun
ds per inch) of compaction width. The operating mass shall be directed. Tire pre
ssure or contact pressure may be specified for pneumatic-tire rollers. All tires
on pneumatic rollers shall be equally inflated, exerting equal unit pressure, w
ith a means of varying the contact pressure to suit project conditions. 306.3.3
Preparation of Base
1. Case 1 (New Aggregate) When new aggregate is to be used for the road mix surf
ace course, the existing base shall be scarified lightly and bladed to uniform g
rade and to the cross-section shown on the Plans and shall then be rolled or wat
ered and rolled, as directed. If so ordered by the Engineer, depressions shall f
irst be filled and weak portions of the base strengthened with new aggregate. 2.
Case 2 (Salvaged Aggregate) When material in the existing road surface is to be
used for mixing, the surface shall be scarified lightly and bladed to uniform g
rade and to the cross-section shown on the Plans. The reshaped surface shall the
n be scarified again to the depth ordered by the Engineer and in such manner as
to leave a foundation of undisturbed material parallel, both in profile and cros
s-section, to the proposed finished surface. The loosened materials shall be bla
ded aside into a windrow at the side of the road and the undisturbed material ro
lled or watered and rolled, as directed. 306.3.4 Placing Aggregates
New aggregates, where required, shall be uniformly spread on the prepared surfac
e by the use of spreader boxes, or other approved mechanical spreading devices.
When two or more sizes of aggregates are used, each size of aggregate shall be p
laced in the proper amount to provide for surfacing of the required width and th
ickness. The proper amounts of the separate sizes of aggregate for each course s
hall be blended and shaped into a windrow of uniform cross-section. At least one
day shall be allowed for measuring, sampling and testing for approval of quanti
ty and gradation before the windrowed material is spread for application of bitu
minous material. If the surface moisture of the aggregate is more than 2 percent
of the dry weight of the aggregate, except when the bituminous material is emul
sified
80
asphalt, the aggregate shall be turned by blades or disc harrows or otherwise ae
rated until the moisture content is reduced to 2 percent or less. The aggregate
shall then be spread smoothly and uniformly over half the road or other convenie
nt width of the surface ready for the application of bituminous material, except
that when a traveling mixing plant is used, the aggregate shall be formed into
a uniform cross-section. In lieu of aerating and drying the aggregate, the Contr
actor may use an approved additive, except where emulsified asphalt is used, whi
ch shall be satisfactorily blended with the bituminous material. The additive sh
all permit suitable coating of the wet aggregate and shall prevent the bituminou
s coating from stripping in the presence of water. 306.3.5 Application of Bitumi
nous Material The bituminous material shall be uniformly distributed in successi
ve application, in such amounts and at such intervals as directed. The mixing eq
uipment shall follow immediately behind the distributor, after each application
of bituminous material, to partially mix the aggregate and the bituminous materi
al. 306.3.6 Mixing After the last application of bituminous material and partial
mixing, the entire mass of bituminous material and aggregate shall be windrowed
on the road surface and then mixed, by blading the mixture from side to side of
the road, or by manipulation producing equivalent results, until all aggregate
particles are coated with bituminous material and the whole mass has a uniform c
olor and the mixture is free from fat or lean spots, or balls of uncoated partic
les. During the mixing operations, care shall be taken to avoid cutting into the
underlying course or contaminating the mixture with earth or other extraneous m
atter. When directed, the mixing process shall be confined to part of the width
or area of the road so as to allow traffic to pass. Should the mixture show an e
xcess, deficiency or uneven distribution of bituminous material, the condition s
hall be corrected by the addition of aggregate or bituminous material as require
d and re-mixing. If the mixture contains excessive amounts of moisture or volati
le matter, it shall be bladed, aerated or otherwise manipulated until the moistu
re and volatile content are satisfactory. The spreading of the mix shall not be
done when the surface to be covered is in an unsatisfactory condition. At the en
d of each day’s work, or when the work is interrupted by weather conditions or oth
erwise, all loose materials shall be bladed into a windrow, whether mixing is co
mpleted or not, and shall be retained in a windrow until operations are resumed.
When the mixing operations have been satisfactorily completed, the mixture shal
l be formed into a windrow of uniform cross-section. If the Contractor elects to
use traveling or stationary mixing plants in lieu of the specified equipment, t
he same requirements regarding residual moisture and evaporation of volatiles gi
ven above shall apply.
81
306.3.7 Spreading, Compacting and Finishing The material shall be spread by a se
lf-propelled pneumatic-tire blade grader or a mechanical spreader of approved ty
pe. In spreading from the windrow, care shall be taken to avoid cutting into the
underlying base. After the material is spread, the surface shall be rolled. Rol
ling shall be parallel to the road center line and shall commence at the outer e
dges of the road, overlapping the shoulders and progressing towards the center,
overlapping on successive passes by at least one-half the width of the roller, e
xcept that on superelevated curves, rolling shall progress from the lower to the
upper edge. Each pass shall terminate at least 910 mm (3 ft) in advance or to t
he rear of the end of the preceding pass. During compaction, the surface shall b
e dragged or bladed as necessary to fill ruts and to remove incipient corrugatio
ns or other irregularities. Rolling shall continue until the surfacing is of uni
form texture and satisfactory compaction is obtained. Initial rolling shall be p
erformed with a pneumatic-tire roller and final rolling with a 3-wheel or tandem
type steel wheel roller. Rolling shall be discontinued whenever it begins to pr
oduce excessive pulverizing of the aggregate or displacement of the mixture. Whe
n the compacted thickness of the road mix surface is to be more than 50 mm (2 in
ches), the mixture shall be spread from the windrow and compacted in two layers,
the first layer to be bladed and rolled before the second layer is spread. Whil
e the surface is being compacted and finished, the Contractor shall trim the edg
es neatly to line. 306.3.8 Surface Requirements Surface requirements shall be as
specified in Subsection 307.3.11 except that the permissible surface variance w
ill be 10 mm in 3 m (3.8 inch in 10 ft.). 306.4 Method of Measurement Bituminous
material and aggregate for Bituminous Road Mix Surface Course will be measured
by the tonne (t). The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of tonnes of b
ituminous material and aggregate used and accepted in the completed work. The we
ight of all moisture in the aggregate will be deducted from the pay quantity. Du
e to possible variations in the specific gravity of the aggregates, the tonnage
used may vary from the proposed quantities. No adjustment in contract unit price
will be made because of such variation.
82
306.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Sectio
n 306.4 shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Road Mix Sur
face Course, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing m
aterials, handling, mixing, hauling, placing, rolling, compacting, labor, equipm
ent, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this Item. Payment will be made
under:
Pay Item Number 306 306 (1) 306 (2)
Description Bituminous Road Mix Surface Course Aggregate for Bituminous Road Mix
Surface Course Bituminous Material for Bituminous Road Mix Surface Course
Unit of Measurement
Tonne
Tonne
ITEM 307 – BITUMINOUS PLANT-MIX SURFACE COURSE - GENERAL 307.1 Description This it
em includes general requirements that are applicable to all types of bituminous
plant mix surface courses irrespective of gradation of aggregate or kind and amo
unt of bituminous material. Derivations from these general requirements will be
indicated in the specific requirements for each type. This work shall consist of
constructing one or more bituminous bound layers on a prepared foundation in ac
cordance with the Specifications and the specific requirements of the type under
contract, and in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades, thickness,
and typical cross-sections shown on the Plans within the tolerances specified o
r established by the Engineer. 307.2 Material Requirements 307.2.1 Composition a
nd Quality of Bituminous Mixture (Job-Mix Formula). The bituminous mixture shall
be composed of aggregate, mineral filler, hydrated lime, and bituminous materia
l. At least three weeks prior to production, the Contractor shall submit in writ
ing a job-mix formula for each mixture supported by laboratory test data along w
ith samples and sources of the components and viscosity-temperature relationship
s information to the Engineer for testing and approval.
83
Each job-mix formula submitted shall propose definite single values for: 1. 2. 3
. 4. 5. The percentage of aggregate passing each specified sieve size. The perce
ntage of bituminous material to be added. The temperature of the mixture deliver
ed on the road. The kind and percentage of additive to be used. The kind and per
centage of mineral filler to be used.
After the job-mix is established, all mixture furnished for the project shall co
nform thereto within the following ranges of tolerances: Passing No. 4 and large
r sieves Passing No. 8 to No. 100 sieves (inclusive) Passing No. 200 sieve Bitum
inous Material Temperature of Mixture 7 percent 4 percent 2 percent 0.4 percent
100C
Should a change in source of material be proposed or should a job-mix formula pr
ove unsatisfactory, a new job-mix formula shall be submitted by the Contractor i
n writing and be approved by the Engineer prior to production. Approval of a new
jobmix formula may require laboratory testing and verification. The mixture sha
ll have a minimum compressive strength of 1.4 MPa (200 psi). The mixture shall h
ave a mass percent air voids with the range of 3 to 5. The mixture shall also ha
ve an index of retained strength of not less than 70 when tested by AASHTO T 165
. For aggregates having maximum sizes over 25 mm (1 inch), AASHTO T 165 will be
modified to use 150 mm x 150 mm ( 6 x 6 inches) cylindrical specimens. The 150 m
m (6 inches cylinders will be compacted by the procedures outlined in AASHTO T 1
67 modified to employ 10 repetitions of a molding load of 9.6 MPa (1400 psi), wi
th no appreciable holding time after each application of the full load. 307.2.2
Bituminous Material The kind of bituminous material to be used will be as called
for in the Bill of Quantities, while the type and grade will be specified in th
e Special Provisions. The grade may be changed one step by the Engineer at no ch
ange in unit price. It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 702,
Bituminous Materials. 307.2.3 Aggregates Aggregates shall conform to the applic
able requirements of Item 703, Aggregates.
84
307.2.4
Mineral Filler
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 703 A, Mineral Filler. 307.2.5 Hydr
ated Lime
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 701, Construction Lime. 307.2.6 Pro
portioning of Mixture
The proportion of bituminous material, on the basis of total dry aggregate, shal
l be from 5.0 to 8.0 mass percent. The exact percentage to be used shall be fixe
d by the Engineer in accordance with job-mix formula and other quality control r
equirements. Hydrated lime shall be added to the mixture during the mixing opera
tion in the amount of one-half to one (0.5 to 1.0) mass percent, dry aggregate b
asis. The lower percentage limit is applicable to aggregates which are predomina
ntly calcareous. 307.3 Construction Requirements 307.3.1 Weather Limitations
Bituminous Plant mix shall not be placed on any wet surface, or when weather con
ditions would prevent the proper handling or finishing of the bituminous mixture
s. 307.3.2 1. Construction Equipment
Bituminous Mixing Plant
Sufficient storage space shall be provided for each size of aggregate. The diffe
rent aggregate sizes shall be kept separated until they have been delivered to t
he cold elevator feeding the drier. The storage yard shall be maintained neat an
d orderly and the separate stockpiles shall be readily accessible for sampling.
Plants used for the preparation of bituminous mixtures shall conform to the requ
irements for all plants under (a) below except that scale requirements shall app
ly only where weight proportioning is used. In addition, batch mixing plants and
continuous mixing plants shall conform to the respective requirements which fol
low this Subsection. a. Requirements for all Plants.
Mixing plants shall be of sufficient capacity and coordinated to adequately hand
le the proposed bituminous construction. 1. Plant Scales. Scales shall be accura
te to 0.5 percent of the maximum load that may be required. Poises shall be desi
gned to be
85
locked in any position to prevent unauthorized change of position. In lieu of pl
ant and truck scales, the Contractor may provide an approved automatic printer s
ystem which will print the weights of the material delivered, provided the syste
m is used in conjunction with an approved automatic batching and mixing control
system. Such weights shall be evidenced by a weight ticket for each load. Scales
shall be inspected and sealed as often as the Engineer may deem necessary to as
sure their continued accuracy. The Contractor shall have on hand not less than t
en 20-kg weights for testing the scales. 2. Equipment for Preparation of Bitumin
ous Material. Tanks for the storage of bituminous material shall be equipped wit
h the proper devices to heat and hold the material at the required temperatures.
The heating shall be accomplished by steam coils, electricity, or other approve
d means so that no flame shall be in contact with the tank. The circulating syst
em for the bituminous material shall be designed to assure proper and continuous
circulation during the operating period. Provision shall be made for measuring
and sampling storage tanks. Feeder for Drier. The plant shall be provided with a
ccurate mechanical means for uniformly feeding the aggregate into the drier so t
hat uniform production and temperature will be obtained. Drier. The plant shall
include a drier or driers which continuously agitate during the heating and dryi
ng process. For cold-type bituminous mix, equipment for mechanical cooling of th
e dried aggregate to the temperature prescribed for cold mixtures shall be provi
ded and shall be capable of supplying prepared material for the mixer to operate
at full capacity. Screens. Plant screens, capable of screening all aggregate to
the specified sizes and proportions and having normal capacities in excess of t
he full capacity of the mixer, shall be provided. Bins. The plant shall include
storage bins of sufficient capacity to supply the mixer when it is operating at
full capacity. Bins shall be arranged to assure separate and adequate storage of
appropriate fractions of the mineral aggregates. Separate dry storage shall be
provided for filler or hydrated lime when used and the plant shall be equipped t
o feed such material into the mixer. Each bin shall be provided with overflow pi
pes, of such size and at such locations as to prevent backing up of material int
o other compartments or bins. Each compartment shall be provided with individual
outlet gate, constructed so that when closed, there shall be no leakage. The ga
tes shall cut off quickly and completely. Bins shall be so constructed that samp
les can be readily obtained. Bins shall be equipped with adequate tell-
3.
4.
5.
6.
86
tale devices to indicate the position of the aggregates in the bins at the lower
quarter points. 7. Bituminous Control Gate. Satisfactory means, either by weigh
ing or metering, shall be provided to obtain the proper amount of bituminous mat
erial in the mix within the tolerance specified. Means shall be provided for che
cking the quantity or rate of flow of bituminous material into the mixer. Thermo
metric Equipment. An armored thermometric of adequate range in temperature readi
ng shall be fixed in the bituminous feed line at a suitable location near the ch
arging valve at the mixer unit. The plant shall also be equipped with either an
approved dialscale, mercury-actuated thermometer, an electric pyrometer, or othe
r approved thermometric instrument so placed at the discharge chute of the drier
as to register automatically or indicate the temperature of the heated aggregat
es. The Engineer may require replacement of any thermometer by an approved tempe
rature-recording apparatus for better regulation of the temperature of aggregate
s. 9. Dust Collector. The plant shall be equipped with a dust collector construc
ted to waste or return uniformly all or any part of the material to the hot elev
ator collected as directed.
8.
10. Truck Scales. The bituminous mixture shall be weighed on approved scales fur
nished by the Contractor or on public scales at the Contractor’s expense. Such sca
les shall be inspected and sealed as often as the Engineer deems necessary to as
sure their accuracy. (See paragraph I). 11. Safety Requirements. Adequate and sa
fe stairways to the mixer platform and sampling points shall be provided, and gu
arded ladders to other plant units shall be placed at all points where accessibi
lity to plant operations is required. Accessibility to the top of truck bodies s
hall be provided by a platform or other suitable device to enable the Engineer t
o obtain sampling and mixture temperature data. A hoist or pulley system shall b
e provided to raise scale calibration equipment, sampling equipment and other si
milar equipment from ground to the mixer platform and return. All gears, pulleys
, chains, sprockets, and other dangerous moving parts shall be thoroughly guarde
d and protected. Ample and unobstructed space shall be provided on the mixing pl
atform. A clear and unobstructed passage shall be maintained at all times in and
around the truck loading area. This area shall be kept free from drippings from
the mixing platforms.
87
b. 1.
Requirements for Batching Plants Weigh box or hopper. The equipment shall includ
e a means for accurately weighing each size of aggregate in a weight box or hopp
er suspended on scales and of ample size to hold a full batch without hand rakin
g or running over. The gate shall close tightly so that no material is allowed t
o leak into the mixer while a batch is being weighed. Bituminous Control. The eq
uipment used to measure the bituminous material shall be accurate to plus or min
us 0.5 percent. The bituminous material bucket shall be a nontilting type with a
loose sheet metal cover. The length of the discharge opening or spray bar shall
be less than ¾ the length of the mixer and it shall discharge directly into the m
ixer. The bituminous material bucket, its discharge valve or valves and spray ba
r shall be adequately heated. Steam jackets, if used, shall be efficiently drain
ed and all connections shall be so constructed that they will not interfere with
the efficient operation of the bituminous scales. The capacity of the bituminou
s material bucket shall be at least 15 percent in excess of the weight of bitumi
nous material required in any batch. The plant shall have an adequately heated q
uick-acting, non-drip, charging valve located directly over the bituminous mater
ial bucket. The indicator dial shall have a capacity of at least 15 percent in e
xcess of the quantity of bituminous material used in a batch. The controls shall
be constructed so that they may be locked at any dial setting and will automati
cally reset to that reading after the addition of bituminous material to each ba
tch. The dial shall be in full view of the mixer operator. The flow of bituminou
s material shall be automatically controlled so that it will begin when the dry
mixing period is over. All of the bituminous material required for one batch sha
ll be discharged in not more than 15 seconds after the flow has started. The siz
e and spacing of the spray bar openings shall provide a uniform application of b
ituminous material the full length of the mixer. The section of the bituminous l
ine between the charging valve and the spray bar shall be provided with a valve
and outlet for checking the meter when a metering device is substituted for a bi
tuminous material bucket.
2.
3.
Mixer. The batch mixer shall be an approved type capable of producing a uniform
mixture with the job-mix tolerances. If not enclosed, the mixer box shall be equ
ipped with a dust hood to prevent loss of dust. The clearance of blades from all
fixed and moving parts shall not exceed 25 mm (1 inch) unless the maximum diame
ter of the aggregate in the mix exceed 30 mm (1-1/4 inches), in which case the c
learance shall not exceed 40 mm (1-1/2 inches).
88
4.
Control of Mixing Time. The mixer shall be equipped with an accurate time lock t
o control the operation of a complete mixing cycle. It shall lock the weigh box
gate after the charging of the mixer until the closing of the mixer gate at the
completion of the cycle. It shall lock the bituminous material bucket throughout
the dry and wet mixing periods. The dry mixing period is defined as the interva
l of time between the opening of the weigh box gate and the start of introductio
n of bituminous material. The wet mixing period is the interval of time between
the start of introduction of bituminous material and the opening of the mixer ga
te. The control of the timing shall be flexible and capable of being set at inte
rvals of 5 seconds or less throughout a total cycle of up to 3 minutes. A mechan
ical batch counter shall be installed as a part of the timing device and shall b
e so designed as to register only completely mixed batches. The setting of time
interval shall be performed in the presence and at the direction of the Engineer
who shall then lock the case covering the timing device until such time as a ch
ange is to be made in the timing periods.
c. 1.
Requirement for Continuous Mixing Plants Aggregate Proportioning. The plant shal
l include means for accurately proportioning each size of aggregate. The plant s
hall have a feeder mounted under each compartment bin. Each compartment bin shal
l have an accurately controlled individual gate to form an orifice for volumetri
cally measuring the material drawn from each compartment. The feeding orifice sh
all be rectangular with one dimension adjustable by positive mechanical means pr
ovided with a lock. Indicators shall be provided for each gate to show the respe
ctive gate opening in millimeter.
2.
Weight Calibration of Aggregate Feed. The plant shall include a means for calibr
ation of gate openings by weighing test samples. Provision shall be made so that
materials fed out of individual orifice may be by passed to individual test box
es. The plant shall be equipped to conveniently handle individual test samples w
eighing not less than 50 kilograms. Accurate scales shall be provided by the Con
tractor to weigh such test samples. Synchronization of Aggregate Feed and Bitumi
nous Material Feed. Satisfactory means shall be provided to afford positive inte
rlocking control between the flow of aggregate from the bins and the flow of bit
uminous material from the meter or other proportioning device.
3.
89
This control shall be accomplished by interlocking mechanical means or by any ot
her positive method satisfactory to the Engineer. 4. Mixer. The plants shall inc
lude a continuous mixer of an approved type, adequately heated and capable of pr
oducing a uniform mixture within the job-mix tolerances. It shall be equipped wi
th a discharge hopper with dump gates which will permit rapid and complete disch
arge of the mixture. The paddles shall be adjustable for angular position on the
shafts and reversible to retard the flow of the mix. The mixer shall have a man
ufacturer’s plate giving the net volumetric contents of the mixer of the several h
eights inscribed on a permanent gauge. Charts shall be provided showing the rate
of feed or aggregate per minute for the aggregate being used.
2.
Hauling Equipment
Trucks used for hauling bituminous mixtures shall have tight, clean, smooth meta
l beds which have been thinly coated with approved material to prevent the mixtu
re from adhering to the beds. Each truck shall have a cover of canvass or other
suitable material of such size as to protect the mixture from the weather. When
necessary, such that the mixture will be delivered on the road at the specified
temperature, truck beds shall be insulated and covers shall be securely fastened
. Truck beds shall be drained prior to loading. 3. Bituminous Pavers
The equipment shall be self-contained, power-propelled units, provided with an a
djustable activated screed or strike-off assembly, heated if necessary, and capa
ble of spreading and finishing courses of bituminous plant mix material in lane
widths applicable to the specified typical section and thickness shown on the Pl
ans. Pavers shall be equipped with a control system capable of automatically mai
ntaining the screen elevation as specified herein. The control system shall be a
utomatically actuated from either a reference line or surface through a system o
f mechanical sensors or sensor directed mechanisms or devices which will maintai
n the paver screed at a predetermined transverse slope and at the proper elevati
on to obtain the required surface. When directed, the transverse slope control s
ystem shall be made inoperative and the screed shall be controlled by sensor dir
ected automatic mechanisms which will independently control the elevation of eac
h end of the screed from reference lines or surface. The controls shall be capab
le of working in connection with any of the following attachments. a. b. Ski-typ
e device of not less than 9 m (30 feet) in length or as directed by the Engineer
. Taut stringline (wire) set to grade.
90
c.
Short ski or shoe
The Contractor shall furnish the long ski, the short ski or shoe and furnish and
install all required stakes and wire for a taut stringline. Should the automati
c control systems become inoperative during the day’s work, the Contractor will be
permitted to finish the day’s work using manual controls, however, work shall not
be resumed thereafter until the automatic control system has been made operativ
e. The Contractor shall provide and have ready for use at all times enough cover
s, as may be necessary, for use in any emergency such as rain, chilling wind, on
unavoidable delay, for the purpose of covering or protecting any material that
may have been dumped and not spread. 4. Rollers
The equipment shall be of the steel and/or pneumatic tire type and shall be in g
ood condition, capable of reversing without backlash, and shall be operated at s
peeds slow enough to avoid displacement of the bituminous mixture. The number an
d weight of rollers shall be sufficient to compact the mixture to the required d
ensity while it is still in a workable condition. The use of equipment which res
ults in excessive crushing of the aggregate will not be permitted. 307.3.3 Condi
tioning of Existing Surface
Immediately before placing the bituminous mixture, the existing surface shall be
cleaned of loose or deleterious material by brooming or other approved means. C
ontract surface or curb, gutters, manholes and other structures shall be painted
with a thin, uniform coating of bituminous material prior to the bituminous mix
ture being placed against them. 307.3.4 Preparation of Bituminous Material
The bituminous material shall be heated so as to avoid local overheating and pro
vide a continuous supply of the bituminous material to the mixer at a uniform te
mperature. The temperature of asphalt cement delivered to the mixer shall be as
required to achieve a kinematic viscosity in the range of 150-300 mm2/s, as dete
rmined by AASHTO T 201. Asphalt cement shall not be used while it is foaming nor
shall be heated above 1590C (3200F) at any time after delivery in the project.
307.3.5 Preparation of Aggregate
Aggregates for pug mill mixing shall be heated, dried and delivered to the mixin
g unit at a temperature within the range 170C ( 300F) of the bitumen. Moisture cont
ent of the aggregate shall not exceed one mass percent at the time it is introdu
ced into the mixing unit. Flames used for drying and heating shall be
91
properly adjusted to avoid damage to the aggregate and to avoid soot on the aggr
egate. Moisture content of the mixture from drum dryer plants shall not exceed t
hree (3) percent of the output, as determined by AASHTO T 110. 307.3.6 Mixing
The dried aggregates and the bituminous material shall be measured or gauged and
introduced into the mixer in the amount specified by the job mix formula. After
the required amounts of aggregate and bituminous material have been introduced
into the mixer, the material shall be mixed until a complete and uniform coating
of the particles and a thorough distribution of the bituminous material through
out the aggregate is secured. 307.3.7 Spreading and Finishing
The mixture shall be spread and struck off to the grade and elevation establishe
d. Bituminous pavers shall be used to distribute the mixture either over the ent
ire width or over such partial width as may be practicable. The longitudinal joi
nt in one layer shall offset that in the layer immediately below approximately 1
5 cm (6 inches); however, the joint in the top layer shall be at the center line
of the pavement if the roadway comprises two (2) lanes, or at lane lines if the
roadway is more than two (2) lanes, unless otherwise directed. On areas where i
rregularities or unavoidable obstacle makes the use of mechanical spreading and
finishing equipment impracticable, the mixture may be placed and finished by han
d tools. The mixture shall be placed at a temperature not less than 1070C (2250F
) as measured in the truck just prior to dumping into the spreader. When tar is
used, the mixture shall be placed at between 660C and 1070C (150 F and 2250F).
0
When production of the mixture can be maintained and when practical, pavers shal
l be used in echelon to place the wearing course in adjacent lanes. 307.3.8 Comp
action
Immediately after the mixture has been spread, struck off and surface irregulari
ties adjusted, it shall be thoroughly and uniformly compacted by rollers as spec
ified under paragraph No. 4 of Subsection 307.3.2. The surface shall be rolled w
hen the mixture is in proper condition and when the rolling does not cause under
displacement, cracking and shoving. Rolling shall begin at the sides and procee
ds longitudinally parallel toward the road centerline, each trip overlapping ½ the
roller width, gradually progressing to the crown of the road. When paving in ec
helon or abutting a previously placed
92
lane, the longitudinal joint should be rolled first followed by the regular roll
ing procedure. On superelevated curves, the rolling shall begin at the low side
and progress to the high side overlapping of longitudinal trips parallel to the
center line. Rollers shall move at a slow but uniform speed with the drive roll
or wheels nearest the paver.. Rolling shall be continued until roller marks are
eliminated and a minimum of 97 mass percent of the density of the laboratory com
pacted specimens prepared in accordance with AASHTO T 166 has been obtained. Any
displacement occurring as a result of the reversing of the direction of a rolle
r, or from other causes, shall be corrected at once by the use of rakes and addi
tion of fresh mixture when required. Care shall be exercised in rolling not to d
isplace the line and grade of the edges of the bituminous mixture. To prevent ad
hesion of the mixture to the rollers, the wheels shall be kept properly moistene
d with water or water mixed with very small quantities of detergent or other app
roved material. Excess liquid will not be permitted. Along forms, curbs, headers
, walls and other places not accessible to the rollers, the mixture shall be tho
roughly compacted with hot hand tampers, smoothing irons or with mechanical tamp
ers. 307.3.9 Joints
Placing of the bituminous paving shall be continuous as possible. Rollers shall
not pass over the unprotected end of a freshly laid mixture unless authorized by
the Engineer. Transverse joints shall be formed by cutting back on the previous
run to expose the full depth of the course. When directed by the Engineer, a br
ush coat of bituminous material shall be used on contact surfaces of transverse
joints before additional mixture is placed against the previously rolled materia
l. 307.3.10 Acceptance, Sampling and Testing
The contractor shall cut full depth samples as directed, from the finished pavem
ent, for testing. Samples shall be neatly cut by saw or core drill. Each sample
shall be at least 150 mm x 150 mm or 100 mm diameter full depth. At least one, b
ut not more than three samples shall be taken for each full day’s operation. If no
core samples were taken during the day’s operation, core samples shall be taken f
rom the completed pavement for every 100 L. M. per lane. The contractor shall su
pply and furnish new material to backfill boreholes left by the samples taken. N
o acceptance and final payment shall be made on completed asphalt pavement unles
s core test for thickness determination is conducted, except for Barangay Roads
where the implementing office is allowed to waive such test.
93
The samples obtained will be used to measure the thickness of the pavement. The
same samples will be used to test the density of the compacted pavement by AASHT
O T 166. The compacted pavement shall have a density equal to, or greater than 9
7 mass percent of the density of a laboratory specimen. The asphalt pavement rep
resented by the cores shall not be accepted if the deficiency in density is more
than 2%. The compacted pavement shall have a thickness tolerances of -5 mm. Thi
ckness in excess of the specified thickness shall not be considered in the payme
nt of asphalt pavement. The asphalt pavement represented by the individual core
shall not be accepted if the deficiency in the core thickness as obtained in acc
ordance with ASTM D 3549 is more than 5 mm. Averaging of the density and thickne
ss of asphalt cores is not permitted. If the deficiency in the core thickness is
more than 5 mm, additional layer may be permitted in order to meet the designed
thickness, however, the minimum additional asphalt overlay thickness should be
dependent on the minimum thickness capacity of asphalt paver but it should not b
e less than 50 mm (2 inches) and that proper construction procedures are followe
d. 307.3.11 Surface Tolerances The surface will be checked by the use of a 3-m s
traight-edge at sites selected by the Engineer. The straight-edge will be applie
d at right angles, as well as, parallel to the centerline of the roadbed. The va
riation of the surface from the testing edge of the straight-edge between any tw
o contacts with the surface shall not exceed 6 mm. Tests will be made immediatel
y after initial compaction and any variations detected shall be corrected by rem
oving or adding materials, as may be necessary. Rolling shall then be continued
as specified. After final rolling, the smoothness of the course shall be checked
again and any area defective in texture or composition shall be corrected, incl
uding removal and replacement of unsatisfactory material at the Contractor’s expen
se as directed by the Engineer. 307.4 Method of Measurement The area to be paid
for under this item shall be the number of square meters (m2) of asphalt pavemen
t placed, compacted and accepted based on the thickness and densities of the cor
es taken in accordance with subsection 307.3.10 (Acceptance, Sampling and Testin
g). 307.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Sect
ion 307.4 will be paid for as provided in the respective items for the specified
type of bituminous plant mix.
94
ITEM 308 – COLD ASPHALT PLANT- MIX 308.1 Description
This item shall consist of constructing Bituminous Surface Course (Asphalt Cold
Mix) prepared in central mixing plant, laid cold, on the prepared base in accord
ance with this Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades and typica
l cross-section shown on the Plans. 308.2 Material Requirements
308.2.1 Composition and Quality of Asphalt Cold Mix (Job-Mix Formula) The asphal
t cold mix shall be composed of coarse mineral aggregates, fine mineral aggregat
es, mineral fillers and chemically bonding bitumen. At least three weeks prior t
o production, the Contractor shall submit in writing a job-mix formula for each
mixture supported by laboratory test data along with samples and sources of the
components and viscosity-temperature relationships information to the Engineer f
or testing and approval. Each job-mix formula submitted shall propose definite s
ingle value for: 1. The percentage of coarse mineral aggregates passing each spe
cified sieve size. 2. The percentage of fine mineral aggregates passing each spe
cified sieve size. 3. The percentage of chemically bonding bitumen material to b
e added. 4. The temperature of the mixture delivered on the prepared base of the
road. 5. The kind and percentage of chemical additive to be used. 6. The kind a
nd percentage of mineral filler to be incorporated. Stability Requirements: The
mixture shall conform to the following: Test Property Stability N (lb) at 22.20C
(720F) Percent Stability Loss After Vacuum Saturation and Immersion Aggregate C
oating (Percent) Minimum 2224 (500) or 17.7 psi 50 Maximum 50 -
95
308.2.2
Bituminous Material
It shall be either Liquid Cut-back Asphalt or Emulsified Asphalt, whichever is c
alled for in the Bill of Quantities. The type and grade of asphalt material will
be specified by the Engineer and shall comply to the requirements of AASHTO Spe
cification M82, M140 or M208 (ASTM Designation D 2397). 308.2.3 Coarse Aggregate
s
Coarse Aggregates shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 703 or AA
SHTO Specification M 79. 308.2.4 Fine Aggregates
Fine Aggregates shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 703, AASHTO
Specification M 29 or ASTM D 1073. 308.2.5 Mineral Fillers
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 703A, Mineral Filler or ASTM Design
ation D 242. 308.2.6 Proportioning of Mixture
The proportioning of Bituminous Material on the basis of total dry aggregate sha
ll be from 4.5 to 7.0 mass percent when cut back asphalt is used and from 6.0 to
10.0 mass percent when emulsified asphalt is used. The exact percentage to be u
sed shall be fixed by the Engineer in accordance with the job-mix formula and th
e other quality control requirements. 308.3 Construction Requirements 308.3.1 We
ather Limitations
Cold Asphalt Plant Mix shall be placed only when the specified density can be ob
tained. The mixture shall not be placed on any wet surface or when weather condi
tion will prevent its proper handling or finishing. Asphalt surface mixture shal
l not be placed when the surface temperature of the base course is below 100C (5
00F). 308.3.2 Preparing Area To Be Paved
1. The area to be paved shall be substantially true to line and grade. It shall
have a firm and properly prepared surface before paving operations begin. All lo
ose and foreign material shall be removed. 2. When the compacted subgrade on whi
ch the asphalt base is to be placed loosely bonded, it shall be primed with 0.5
to 1.40 litre/m2 or 0.1 to 0.3 gal/yd2 of the type and grade of asphalt priming
material. The asphalt
96
should be entirely absorbed by the base course and the prime should be fully set
and cured before placing the surface. 3. Holes and depressions in existing surf
aces shall be repaired by removing all loose and defective material to sound pav
ement and replacing with an approved asphalt-aggregate patching material. The pa
tching mixture shall be compacted to produce a tight surface conforming to the a
djacent pavement area. 4. Excess asphalt in patches and joints shall be removed
only through methods approved by the engineer. 5. Immediately prior to applicati
on of the asphalt tack coat all loose and foreign material shall be removed by s
weeping or by blowing, or both. 6. Surfaces of curbs, gutters, vertical faces of
existing pavements, and all structures to be in actual contact with the asphalt
-aggregate mixture shall be given a thin, even coating of asphalt material, type
and grade. Care shall be taken to prevent spattering of the asphalt on surfaces
that will not be in contact with the asphalt-aggregate mixture. 308.3.3 Prepari
ng The Mixture
1. The asphalt shall be warmed, if necessary, at the paving plant to a temperatu
re at which it can be applied uniformly to the aggregate. 2. When it is necessar
y to blend aggregates from one or more sources to produce the combined gradation
, each source or size of aggregate shall stockpiled individually. Aggregate from
the individual stockpiles shall fed through separate bins to cold elevator feed
ers. They shall not be blended in the stockpile. 3. Cold aggregates shall be fed
carefully to the plant so that surpluses and shortages will not occur and cause
breaks in the continuous operation. 4. Mixing time shall be the shortest time t
hat will produce a satisfactory mixture. 308.3.4 Placing The Mix
The base course mixture shall be placed in one or more lifts with an asphalt pav
er or spreader to provide a nominal compacted thickness of the base course. The
surface course mixture shall be placed with an asphalt paver to provide a nomina
l compacted thickness of the surface course. The minimum lift thickness shall be
at least two times the maximum particle size. The maximum lift thickness shall
be that which can be demonstrated to be laid in a single lift and compacted to a
required uniform density and smoothness. Placing the mixture shall be a continu
ous operation. If any irregularities occur, they shall be corrected before final
compaction of the mixture.
97
308.3.5
Compacting The Mixture
The mix shall be compacted immediately after placing. Initial rolling with a ste
el-wheeled tandem or three wheeled roller, vibratory roller, or a pneumatic-tire
d roller shall follow the paver as closely as possible. If needed, intermediate
rolling with a pneumatic-tired roller shall be done immediately behind the initi
al rolling. An application of choke aggregate may be necessary to prevent mix pi
ck-up by the pneumatic-tired roller. Final rolling shall eliminate marks from pr
evious rolling. In areas too small for the roller a vibrating plate compactor or
a hand-tamper shall be used to achieve thorough compaction. 308.3.6 Safety
Safety precautions shall be used at all times during the progress of the work. A
s appropriate, workmen shall be furnished with hard hats, safety shoes, respirat
ors, and any other safety apparel that will reduce the possibility of injury fro
m accidents. All Occupational Safety and Health Act requirements shall be observ
ed. 308.3.7 Acceptance Requirement
Divide asphalt mixture production into lots, each lot equal to the mix produced
during one day. Determine the target density for each lot by measuring the avera
ge density of six laboratory prepared specimens representing two randomly chosen
subsamples from trucks delivering mixture to the jobsite. The target density sh
ould be reported as dry density. Determine the compacted density in the field fr
om five randomly located positions in each lot of the compacted mixture. The den
sity of freshly compacted material can be determined using a properly calibrated
nuclear density device or other procedure. Density determinations made after a
period of curing may be determined on samples obtained from compacted material b
y a suitable core drilling technique. All compacted densities should be converte
d to dry densities. It is recommended that the average of five field density det
erminations made in each lot be equal to or greater than 97 percent of the avera
ge density of the six laboratory prepared specimens, and that no individual dete
rmination be lower than 95 percent. The compacted base and surface shall have an
average thicknesses no less than those specified on the plans. Any deficiency i
n thickness shall be made up with surface mixture when the surface course is pla
ced. The surface of the completed pavement will be checked longitudinally and tr
ansversely for smoothness with a 3 m (!0 ft.) straightedge. The surface shall no
t vary more than 5 mm (0.2 in) in a 3 m (10 ft.) parallel to the centerline and
not more than 8 mm (0.3 in) in 3 m (10 ft.) at right angles to the centerline.
98
308.4 Construction Equipment 308.4.1 Equipment
The equipment shall include: 1. Asphalt mixing plants designed to produce a unif
orm mix within the job-mix tolerances. 2. Self-powered pavers that are capable o
f spreading the mix to the thickness and width specified, true to the line, grad
e and crown shown on the Plans. 3. Enough smooth metal-bedded haul trucks, with
covers when required ensure orderly and continuous paving operations. 4. A press
ure distributor that is capable of applying tack coat and prime material uniform
ly without atomization. 5. Steel-wheeled, pneumatic-tired, or vibratory rollers
capacity of attaining the required density and smoothness. 6. A power broom or a
power blower or both. 7. Hand tools necessary to complete the job. Other equipm
ent can be used in addition to the specified equipment when approved by the Engi
neer. 308.5 Sampling
Sampling of asphalt materials shall be in accordance with the latest revision of
AASHTO Designation T40 (ASTM Designation D140). Sampling of mineral aggregate s
hall be in accordance with the latest revision of AASHTO designation (ASTM Desig
nation D 75). Sampling of the asphalt mixture, as required by the Engineer, shal
l be in accordance with the latest revision of AASHTO Designation 168 (ASTM Desi
gnation D 979). 308.6 Testing
Methods of Testing shall be in accordance with the applicable AASHTO or ASTM Met
hods. 308.7 Method of Measurement The bituminous mixture will be measured by squ
are meter (m2). The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of square meters
of the mixture placed and compacted in the accepted pavement. No deduction will
be made for the weight of bituminous material in the mixture.
99
Batch weights will not be permitted as a method of measurement. 308.8 Basis of P
ayment The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 308.8, shall be
paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Plant-Mix Surface Course, Col
dLaid, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all mat
erials, handling, placing, rolling, compacting, labor, equipment, tools and inci
dentals necessary to complete this Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay item No. 308
Description Bituminous Plant-Mix Surface Course, Cold-Laid
Unit of Measurement Square Meter
ITEM 309 – BITUMINOUS PLANT-MIX (STOCKPILE MAINTENANCE MIXTURE) 309.1 Description
This Item shall consist of a bituminous stockpile maintenance mixture composed o
f aggregate, mineral filler, hydrated lime and bituminous material mixed in a ce
ntral plant. The mixture is stockpiled for immediate or future maintenance needs
. 309.2 Material Requirements 309.2.1 Composition and Quality of Bituminous Mixt
ure
Same as Subsection 307.2.1 309.2.2 Bituminous Material
The type and grade of bituminous material shall be in accordance with the follow
ing guidelines: MC MC 250 For use within short time after stockpiling. 800 For i
mmediate use under hot or moderate weather conditions, or for use within a short
time after stockpiling. Mix can be designed for use within a short time after s
tockpiling or for long storage period. Cationic emulsified Asphalt.
CMS-2/2S *CMS -
100
309.2.3
Aggregate
It shall be crushed stone, crushed or natural gravel, slag, sand, stone or slag
screenings, mineral dust, or a combination of these materials. The several aggre
gate fractions shall be combined in such proportions that the gradation of the c
omposite aggregate shall conform to the grading requirements of Table 309.1. The
combined aggregate after going through the drier, shall have a sand equivalent
value of not less than 40. The coarse aggregate shall have a mass percent of wea
r not exceeding 40 when tested by AASHTO T 96. Slag, if used, shall weigh not le
ss than 1120 kg/m3 (70 lb/cu. ft.). Table 309.1 – Grading Requirements Sieve Desig
nation Standard, mm Alternate U.S. Standard 19.0 ¾ in 12.5 ½ in 9.5 3/8 in 4.75 No.
4 2.36 No. 8 0.60 No. 30 0.30 No. 50 0.15 No. 100 0.075 No. 200 309.2.4 Mineral
Filler
Mass Percent Passing 100 80 – 100 70 – 90 50 – 70 35 – 50 18 – 30 15 – 25 8 – 15 4 - 10
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 307, Bituminous Plant Mix Surface C
ourse – General. 309.2.5 Hydrated Lime
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 307, Bituminous Plant Mix Surface C
ourse – General. 309.2.6 Proportioning of Mixture
The amount of bituminous material to be added will be from 4 to 10 mass percent
of total mix. The exact percentage to be used shall be fixed by the Engineer in
accordance with the job-mix formula and other quality control requirements. Uppe
r limit may be raised when using absorptive aggregate. During the mixing operati
on, one-half to one (0.5 to 1.0) mass percent of hydrated lime, dry aggregate ba
sis, shall be added to the mixture. The lower percentage limit is applicable to
aggregates which are predominantly calcareous. 101
309.3 Construction Requirements 309.3.1 Preparation of Mixture
The aggregate, mineral filler, and hydrated lime shall be fed into the plant in
the proportions required to provide a composite aggregate meeting the grading re
quirements. The aggregate shall be free from visible moisture at the time of mix
ing. The bituminous material shall be applied at the rate and temperature specif
ied by the Engineer. Mixing shall be thorough and shall continue until all aggre
gate particles are well coated. 309.3.2 Stockpiling
The finished mixture shall be stockpiled on a platform level storage space. 309.
4 Method of Measurement The area to be paid for under this item shall be the num
ber of square meters (m2) of asphalt pavement placed, compacted and accepted bas
ed on the thickness and density of the cores taken in accordance with subsection
307.3.10 (Acceptance, Sampling and Testing). 309.5 Basis of Payment The accepte
d quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 309.4, will be paid for at the con
tract unit price for Bituminous Plant-Mix (Stockpile Maintenance Mixture) which
price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and stockpiling the
material including incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this
Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 309
Description Bituminous Plant-Mix (Stockpile Maintenance Mixture)
Unit of Measurement
Square Meter
ITEM 310 – BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE, HOT-LAID 310.1 Description This Ite
m shall consist of constructing a bituminous concrete surface course composed of
aggregates, mineral filler, and bituminous material mixed in a central plant, c
onstructed and laid hot on the prepared base in accordance with
102
this Specification and in conformity with lines, grades, thickness and typical c
rosssection shown on the Plans. 310.2 Material Requirements 310.2.1 Composition
and Quality of Bituminous Mixture (Job-Mix Formula)
Same as Subsection 307.2.1 310.2.2 Bituminous Material
It shall be either Medium Curing (MC) Cut-back Asphalt or Asphalt Cement, whiche
ver is called for in the Bill of Quantities. It shall conform to the requirement
s of Item 702, Bituminous Materials. The penetration grade, type and grade of bi
tuminous material shall be specified in the Special Provisions. 310.2.3 Aggregat
es
Aggregates shall conform to the requirements of Item 307, Bituminous Plant Mix S
urface Course-General. 310.2.4 Mineral Filler
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 307, Bituminous Plant Mix Surface C
ourse-General. 310.2.5 Hydrated Lime
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 307, Bituminous Plant-Mix Surface C
ourse-General. 310.2.6 Proportioning of Mixtures
The proportion of bituminous material on the basis of total dry aggregate shall
be from 5.0 to 8.0 mass percent. The exact percentage to be used shall be fixed
by the Engineer in accordance with the job-mix formula and the other quality con
trol requirements. During the mixing operation, one-half to one (0.5 to 1.0) mas
s percent of hydrated lime, dry aggregate basis, shall be added to the mixture.
The lower percentage limit is applicable to aggregates which are predominantly c
alcareous. 310.3 Construction Requirements The construction requirements shall b
e in accordance whenever applicable, with Section 307.3.
103
310.4 Method of Measurement The area to be paid for under this item shall be the
number of square meters (m2) of asphalt pavement placed, compacted and accepted
based on the thickness and density of the cores taken in accordance with subsec
tion 307.3.10 (Acceptance, Sampling and Testing). 310.5 Basis of Payment The acc
epted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 310.4, shall be paid for at th
e contract unit price for Bituminous Concrete Surface Course, HotLaid, which pri
ce and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, handling
, mixing, hauling, placing, rolling, compacting, labor, equipment, tools and inc
identals necessary to complete this Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 310
Description Bituminous Concrete Surface Course, Hot-Laid
Unit of Measurement
Square Meter
ITEM 311 – PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 311.1 Description This Item shall con
sist of pavement of Portland Cement Concrete, with or without reinforcement, con
structed on the prepared base in accordance with this Specification and in confo
rmity with lines, grades, thickness and typical crosssection shown on the Plans.
311.2 Material Requirements 311.2.1 Portland Cement
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 700, Hydraulic Cement. O
nly Type I Portland Cement shall be used unless otherwise provided for in the Sp
ecial Provisions. Different brands or the same brands from different mills shall
not be mixed nor shall they be used alternately unless the mix is approved by t
he Engineer. However, the use of Portland Pozzolan Cement Type IP meeting the re
quirements of AASHTO M 240/ASTM C 695, Specifications for Blended Hydraulic Ceme
nt shall be allowed, provided that trial mixes shall be done and that the mixes
meet the concrete strength requirements, the AASHTO/ASTM provisions pertinent to
the use of Portland Pozzolan Type IP shall be adopted.
104
Cement which for any reason, has become partially set or which contains lumps of
caked cement will be rejected. Cement salvaged from discarded or used bags shal
l not be used. Samples of Cement shall be obtained in accordance with AASHTO T 1
27. 311.2.2 Fine Aggregate
It shall consist of natural sand, stone screenings or other inert materials with
similar characteristics, or combinations thereof, having hard, strong and durab
le particles. Fine aggregate from different sources of supply shall not be mixed
or stored in the same pile nor used alternately in the same class of concrete w
ithout the approval of the Engineer. It shall not contain more than three (3) ma
ss percent of material passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200 sieve) by washing nor more
than one (1) mass percent each of clay lumps or shale. The use of beach sand wil
l not be allowed without the approval of the Engineer. If the fine aggregate is
subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test, the weighted
loss shall not exceed 10 mass percent. The fine aggregate shall be free from inj
urious amounts of organic impurities. If subjected to the colorimatic test for o
rganic impurities and a color darker than the standard is produced, it shall be
rejected. However, when tested for the effect of organic impurities of strength
of mortar by AASHTO T 71, the fine aggregate may be used if the relative strengt
h at 7 and 28 days is not less than 95 mass percent. The fine aggregate shall be
well-graded from coarse to fine and shall conform to Table 311.1 Table 311.1 – Gr
ading Requirements for Fine Aggregate Sieve Designation 9.5 mm (3/8 in) 4.75 mm
(No. 4) 2.36 mm (No. 8) 1.18 mm (No. 16) 0.600 mm (No. 30) 0.300 mm (No. 50) 0.1
50 mm (No. 100) Mass Percent Passing 100 95 – 100 45 – 80 5 – 30 0 – 10
311.2.3
Coarse Aggregate
It shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, blast furnace slag, or other approved
inert materials of similar characteristics, or combinations thereof, having har
d, strong, durable pieces and free from any adherent coatings.
105
It shall contain not more than one (1) mass percent of material passing the 0.07
5 mm (No. 200) sieve, not more than 0.25 mass percent of clay lumps, nor more th
an 3.5 mass percent of soft fragments. If the coarse aggregate is subjected to f
ive (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test, the weighted loss shall not
exceed 12 mass percent. It shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 40 w
hen tested by AASHTO T 96. If the slag is used, its density shall not be less th
an 1120 kg/m3 (70 lb./cu. ft.). The gradation of the coarse aggregate shall conf
orm to Table 311.2. Only one grading specification shall be used from any one so
urce. Table 311.2 – Grading Requirement for Coarse Aggregate
Sieve Designation Standard Alternate Mm U. S. Standard 75.00 3 in. 63.00 2-1/2 i
n. 50.00 2 in. 37.5 1-1/2 in. 25.0 1 in. 19.0 ¾ in. 12.5 ½ in. 4.75 No. 4 311.2.4 Wa
ter
Grading A 100 90-100 25-60 0-10 0-5 -
Mass Percent Passing Grading Grading B C 100 90-100 35-70 0-15 0-5 100 95-100 35
-70 10-30 0-5
Water used in mixing, curing or other designated application shall be reasonably
clean and free of oil, salt, acid, alkali, grass or other substances injurious
to the finished product. Water will be tested in accordance with and shall meet
the requirements of Item 714, Water. Water which is drinkable may be used withou
t test. Where the source of water is shallow, the intake shall be so enclosed as
to exclude silt, mud, grass or other foreign materials. 311.2.5 Reinforcing Ste
el
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel. Dowels and
tie bars shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 31 or M 42, except that r
ail steel shall not be used for tie bars that are to be bent and restraightened
during construction. Tie bars shall be deformed bars. Dowels shall be plain roun
d bars. Before delivery to the site of work, one-half of the length of each dowe
l shall be painted with one coat of approved lead or tar paint.
106
The sleeves for dowel bars shall be metal of approved design to cover 50 mm ( 2
inches), plus or minus 5 mm (1/4 inch) of the dowel, with a closed end, and with
a suitable stop to hold the end of the sleeve at least 25 mm (1 inch) from the
end of the dowel. Sleeves shall be of such design that they do not collapse duri
ng construction. 311.2.6 Joint Fillers
Poured joint fillers shall be mixed asphalt and mineral or rubber filler conform
ing to the applicable requirements of Item 705, Joint Materials. Preformed joint
filler shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 705. It shall be pu
nched to admit the dowels where called for in the Plans. The filler for each joi
nt shall be furnished in a single piece for the full depth and width required fo
r the joint. 311.2.7 Admixtures
Air-entraining admixture shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 154. Chem
ical admixtures, if specified or permitted, shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 194. Fly Ash, if specified or permitted as a mineral admixture and as
20% partial replacement of Portland Cement in concrete mix shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C 618. Admixture should be added only to the concrete mix t
o produce some desired modifications to the properties of concrete where necessa
ry, but not as partial replacement of cement. 311.2.8 Curing Materials
Curing materials shall conform to the following requirements as specified; a) Bu
rlap cloth b) Liquid membrane forming compounds c) Sheeting (film) materials - A
ASHTO M 182 - AASHTO M 148 - AASHTO M 171
Cotton mats and water-proof paper can be used. 311.2.9 Calcium Chloride/Calcium
Nitrate
It shall conform to AASHTO M 144, if specified or permitted by the Engineer, as
accelerator.
107
311.2.10 Storage of Cement and Aggregate All cement shall be stored, immediately
upon delivery at the Site, in weatherproof building which will protect the ceme
nt from dampness. The floor shall be raised from the ground. The buildings shall
be placed in locations approved by the Engineer. Provisions for storage shall b
e ample, and the shipments of cement as received shall be separately stored in s
uch a manner as to allow the earliest deliveries to be used first and to provide
easy access for identification and inspection of each shipment. Storage buildin
gs shall have capacity for storage of a sufficient quantity of cement to allow s
ampling at least twelve (12) days before the cement is to be used. Bulk cement,
if used, shall be transferred to elevated air tight and weatherproof bins. Store
d cement shall meet the test requirements at any time after storage when retest
is ordered by the Engineer. At the time of use, all cement shall be free-flowing
and free of lumps. The handling and storing of concrete aggregates shall be suc
h as to prevent segregation or the inclusion of foreign materials. The Engineer
may require that aggregates be stored on separate platforms at satisfactory loca
tions. In order to secure greater uniformity of concrete mix, the Engineer may r
equire that the coarse aggregate be separated into two or more sizes. Different
sizes of aggregate shall be stored in separate bins or in separate stockpiles su
fficiently removed from each other to prevent the material at the edges of the p
iles from becoming intermixed. 311.2.11 Proportioning, Consistency and Strength
of Concrete
The Contractor shall prepare the design mix based on the absolute volume method
as outlined in the American Concrete Institute (ACI) Standard 211.1, “Recommended
Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and Heavyweight Concrete”. It is the
intent of this Specification to require at least 364 kg of cement per cubic met
er of concrete to meet the minimum strength requirements. The Engineer shall det
ermine from laboratory tests of the materials to be used, the cement content and
the proportions of aggregate and water that will produce workable concrete havi
ng a slump of between 40 and 75 mm (1-1/2 and 3 inches) if not vibrated or betwe
en 10 and 40 mm (1/2 and 1-1/2 inches) if vibrated, and a flexural strength of n
ot less than 3.8 MPa (550 psi) when tested by the third-point method or 4.5 MPa
(650 psi) when tested by the mid-point method at fourteen (14) days in accordanc
e with AASHTO T97 and T177, respectively; or a compressive strength of 24.1 MPa
(3500 psi) for cores taken at fourteen (14) days and tested in accordance with A
ASHTO T24. Slump shall be determined using AASHTO T 119. The designer shall cons
ider the use of lean concrete (econocrete) mixtures using local materials or spe
cifically modified conventional concrete mixes in base course and in the lower c
ourse composite, monolithic concrete pavements using a minimum of 75 mm (3 inche
s) of conventional concrete as the surface course.
108
The mix design shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall be acco
mpanied with certified test data from an approved laboratory demonstrating the a
dequacy of the mix design. A change in the source of materials during the progre
ss of work may necessitate a new design mix. 311.3 Construction Requirements 311
.3.1 1. Quality Control of Concrete General The Contractor shall be responsible
for the quality control of all materials during the handling, blending, and mixi
ng and placement operations. 2. Quality Control Plan The Contractor shall furnis
h the Engineer a Quality Control Plan detailing his production control procedure
s and the type and frequency of sampling and testing to insure that the concrete
produces complies with the Specifications. The Engineer shall be provided free
access to recent plant production records, and if requested, informational copie
s of mix design, materials certifications and sampling and testing reports. 3. Q
ualification of Workmen Experienced and qualified personnel shall perform all ba
tching or mixing operation for the concrete mix, and shall be present at the pla
nt and job site to control the concrete productions whenever the plant is in ope
ration. They shall be identified and duties defined as follows: a. Concrete Batc
her. The person performing the batching or mixing operation shall be capable of
accurately conducting aggregate surface moisture determination and establishing
correct scale weights for concrete materials. He shall be capable of assuring th
at the proportioned batch weights of materials are in accordance with the mix de
sign. Concrete Technician. The person responsible for concrete production contro
l and sampling and testing for quality control shall be proficient in concrete t
echnology and shall have a sound knowledge of the Specifications as they relate
to concrete production. He shall be capable of conducting tests on concrete and
concrete materials in accordance with these Specifications. He shall be capable
of adjusting concrete mix designs for improving workability and Specification co
mpliance and preparing trial mix designs. He shall be qualified to act as the co
ncrete batcher in the batcher’s absence.
b.
109
4.
Quality Control Testing The Contractor shall perform all sampling, testing and i
nspection necessary to assure quality control of the component materials and the
concrete. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the gradation of
fine and coarse aggregates and for testing the concrete mixture for slump, air c
ontent, water-cement ratio and temperature. He shall conduct his operations so a
s to produce a mix conforming to the approved mix design.
5.
Documentation The Contractor shall maintain adequate records of all inspections
and tests. The records shall indicate the nature and number of observations made
, the number and type of deficiencies found, the quantities approved and rejecte
d, and nature of any corrective action taken. The Engineer may take independent
assurance samples at random location for acceptance purposes as he deems necessa
ry.
311.3.2
Equipment
Equipment and tools necessary for handling materials and performing all parts of
the work shall be approved by the Engineer as to design, capacity and mechanica
l condition. The equipment shall be at the jobsite sufficiently ahead of the sta
rt of construction operations to be examined thoroughly and approved. 1. Batchin
g Plant and Equipment a. General. The batching shall include bins, weighing hopp
ers, and scales for the fine aggregate and for each size of coarse aggregate. If
cement is used in bulk, a bin, a hopper, and separate scale for cement shall be
included. The weighing hopper shall be properly sealed and vented to preclude d
usting operation. The batch plant shall be equipped with a suitable non-resettab
le batch counter which will correctly indicate the number of batches proportione
d. Bins and Hoppers. Bins with adequate separate compartments for fine aggregate
and for each size of coarse aggregate shall be provided in the batching plant.
Scales. Scales for weighing aggregates and cement shall be of either the beam ty
pe or the springless-dial type. They shall be accurate within one-half percent (
0.5%) throughout the range of
b.
c.
110
use. Poises shall be designed to be locked in any position and to prevent unauth
orized change. Scales shall be inspected and sealed as often as the Engineer may
deem necessary to assure their continued accuracy. d. Automatic Weighing Device
s. Unless otherwise allowed on the Contract, batching plants shall be equipped w
ith automatic weighing devices of an approved type to proportion aggregates and
bulk cement. 2. Mixers. a. General. Concrete may be mixed at the Site of constru
ction or at a central plant, or wholly or in part in truck mixers. Each mixer sh
all have a manufacturer’s plate attached in a prominent place showing the capacity
of the drum in terms of volume of mixed concrete and the speed of rotation of t
he mixing drum or blades. Mixers at Site of Construction. Mixing shall be done i
n an approved mixer capable of combining the aggregates, cement and water into a
thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified mixing period and discha
rging and distributing the mixture without segregation on the prepared grade. Th
e mixer shall be equipped with an approved timing device which will automaticall
y lock the discharge lever when the drum has been charged and released it at the
end of the mixing period. In case of failure of the timing device, the mixer ma
y be used for the balance of the day while it is being repaired, provided that e
ach batch is mixed 90 seconds. The mixer shall be equipped with a suitable nonre
settable batch counter which shall correctly indicate the number of the batches
mixed. Truck Mixer and Truck Agitators. Truck mixers used for mixing and hauling
concrete, and truck agitators used for hauling central-mixed concrete, shall co
nform to the requirements of AASHTO M 157. Non-Agitator Truck. Bodies of non-agi
tating hauling equipment for concrete shall be smooth, mortar-tight metal contai
ners and shall be capable of discharging the concrete at a satisfactory controll
ed rate without segregation.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Paving and Finishing Equipment The concrete shall be placed with an approved pav
er designed to spread, consolidate, screed and float finish the freshly placed c
oncrete in one complete pass of the machine in such a manner that a minimum of h
and finishing will be necessary to provide a dense and
111
homogeneous pavement in conformance with the Plans and Specifications. The finis
hing machine shall be equipped with at least two (2) oscillating type transverse
screed. Vibrators shall operate at a frequency of 8,300 to 9,600 impulses per m
inute under load at a maximum spacing of 60 cm. 4. Concrete Saw The Contractor s
hall provide sawing equipment in adequate number of units and power to complete
the sawing with a watercooled diamond edge saw blade or an abrasive wheel to the
required dimensions and at the required rate. He shall provide at least one (1)
stand-by saw in good working condition and with an ample supply of saw blades.
5. Forms Forms shall be of steel, of an approved section, and of depth equal to
the thickness of the pavement at the edge. The base of the forms shall be of suf
ficient width to provide necessary stability in all directions. The flange brace
s must extend outward on the base to not less than 2/3 the height of the form. A
ll forms shall be rigidly supported on bed of thoroughly compacted material duri
ng the entire operation of placing and finishing the concrete. Forms shall be pr
ovided with adequate devices for secure setting so that when in place, they will
withstand, without visible spring or settlement, the impact and vibration of th
e consolidation and finishing or paving equipment. 311.3.3 Preparation of Grade
After the subgrade of base has been placed and compacted to the required density
, the areas which will support the paving machine and the grade on which the pav
ement is to be constructed shall be trimmed to the proper elevation by means of
a properly designed machine extending the prepared work areas compacted at least
60 cm beyond each edge of the proposed concrete pavement. If loss of density re
sults from the trimming operations, it shall be restored by additional compactio
n before concrete is placed. If any traffic is allowed to use the prepared subgr
ade or base, the surface shall be checked and corrected immediately ahead of the
placing concrete. The subgrade or base shall be uniformly moist when the concre
te is placed.
112
311.3.4 1.
Setting Forms Base Support. The foundation under the forms shall be hard and tru
e to grade so that the form when set will be firmly in contact for its whole len
gth and at the specified grade. (Any roadbed, which at the form line is found be
low established grade, shall be filled with approved granular materials to grade
in lifts of three (3) cm or less, and thoroughly rerolled or tamped.) Imperfect
ions or variations above grade shall be corrected by tamping or by cutting as ne
cessary.
2.
Form Setting Forms shall be set sufficiently in advance of the point where concr
ete is being placed. After the forms have been set to correct grade, the grade s
hall be thoroughly tamped, mechanically or by hand, at both the inside and outsi
de edges of the base of the forms. The forms shall not deviate from true line bv
more than one (1) cm at any point.
3.
Grade and Alignment The alignment and grade elevations of the forms shall be che
cked and corrections made by the Contractor immediately before placing the concr
ete. Testing as to crown and elevation, prior to placing of concrete can be made
by means of holding an approved template in a vertical position and moved backw
ard and forward on the forms. When any form has been disturbed or any grade has
become unstable, the form shall be reset and rechecked.
311.3.5
Conditioning of Subgrade or Base Course
When side forms have been securely set to grade, the subgrade or base course sha
ll be brought to proper cross-section. High areas shall be trimmed to proper ele
vation. Low areas shall be filled and compacted to a condition similar to that o
f surrounding grade. The finished grade shall be maintained in a smooth and comp
acted condition until the pavement is placed. Unless waterproof subgrade or base
course cover material is specified, the subgrade or base course shall be unifor
mly moist when the concrete is placed. If it subsequently becomes too dry, the s
ubgrade or base course shall be sprinkled, but the method of sprinkling shall no
t be such as to form mud or pools of water. 311.3.6 Handling, Measuring and Batc
hing Materials
The batch plant site, layout, equipment and provisions for transporting material
shall be such as to assure a continuous supply of material to the work.
113
Stockpiles shall be built up in layers of not more than one (1) meter in thickne
ss. Each layer shall be completely in place before beginning the next which shal
l not be allowed to “cone” down over the next lower layer. Aggregates from different
sources and of different grading shall not be stockpiled together. All washed a
ggregates and aggregates produced or handled by hydraulic methods, shall be stoc
kpiled or binned for draining at least twelve (12) hours before being batched. W
hen mixing is done at the side of the work. aggregates shall be transported from
the batching plant to the mixer in batch boxes, vehicle bodies, or other contai
ners of adequate capacity and construction to properly carry the volume required
. Partitions separating batches shall be adequate and effective to prevent spill
ing from one compartment to another while in transit or being dumped. When bulk
cement is used, the Contractor shall use a suitable method of handling the cemen
t from weighing hopper to transporting container or into the batch itself for tr
ansportation to the mixer, with chute, boot or other approved device, to prevent
loss of cement, and to provide positive assurance of the actual presence in eac
h batch of the entire cement content specified. Bulk cement shall be transported
to the mixer in tight compartments carrying the full amount of cement required
for the batch. However, if allowed in the Special Provisions, it may be transpor
ted between the fine and coarse aggregate. When cement is placed in contact with
the aggregates, batches may be rejected unless mixed within 1-1/2 hours of such
contact. Cement in original shipping packages may be transported on top of the
aggregates, each batch containing the number of sacks required by the job mix. T
he mixer shall be charged without loss of cement. Batching shall be so conducted
as to result in the weight to each material required within a tolerance of one
(1) percent for the cement and two (2) percent for aggregates. Water may be meas
ured either by volume or by weight. The accuracy of measuring the water shall be
within a range of error of not over than one (1) percent. Unless the water is t
o be weighed, the water-measuring equipment shall include an auxiliary tank from
which the measuring tank shall be equipped with an outside tap and valve to pro
vide checking the setting, unless other means are provided for readily and accur
ately determining the amount of water in the tank. The volume of the auxiliary t
ank shall be at least equal to that of the measuring tank. 311.3.7 Mixing Concre
te
The concrete may be mixed at the site of the work in a central-mix plant, or in
truck mixers. The mixer shall be of an approved type and capacity. Mixing time w
ill be measured from the time all materials, except water, are in the drum. Read
y-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with requirements of
AASHTO M 157, except that the minimum required revolutions at the mixing speed
for transit-mixed concrete may be reduced to not less than that recommended by t
he mixer manufacturer. The number of revolutions
114
recommended by the mixer manufacturer shall be indicated on the manufacturer’s ser
ial plate attached to the mixer. The Contractor shall furnish test data acceptab
le to the Engineer verifying that the make and model of the mixer will produce u
niform concrete conforming to the provision of AASHTO M 157 at the reduced numbe
r of revolutions shown on the serial plate. When mixed at the site or in a centr
al mixing plant, the mixing time shall not be less than fifty (50) seconds nor m
ore than ninety (90) seconds, unless mixer performance tests prove adequate mixi
ng of the concrete is a shorter time period. Four (4) seconds shall be added to
the specified mixing time if timing starts at the instant the skip reaches its m
aximum raised positions. Mixing time ends when the discharge chute opens. Transf
er time in multiple drum mixers is included in mixing time. The contents of an i
ndividual mixer drum shall be removed before a succeeding batch is emptied there
in. The mixer shall be operated at the drum speed as shown on the manufacturer’s n
ame plate attached on the mixer. Any concrete mixed less than the specified time
shall be discarded and disposed off by the Contractor at his expense. The volum
e of concrete mixed per batch shall not exceed the mixer’s nominal capacity in cub
ic metre, as shown on the manufacturer’s standard rating plate on the mixer, excep
t that an overload up to ten (10) percent above the mixer’s nominal capacity may b
e permitted provided concrete test data for strength, segregation, and uniform c
onsistency are satisfactory, and provided no spillage of concrete takes place. T
he batches shall be so charged into the drum that a portion of the mixing water
shall be entered in advance of the cement and aggregates. The flow of water shal
l be uniform and all water shall be in the drum by the end of the first fifteen
(15) seconds of the mixing period. The throat of the drum shall be kept free of
such accumulations as may restrict the free flow of materials into the drum. Mix
ed concrete from the central mixing plant shall be transported in truck mixers,
truck agitators or non-agitating truck specified in Subsection 311.3.2, Equipmen
t. The time elapsed from the time water is added to the mix until the concrete i
s deposited in place at the Site shall not exceed forty five (45) minutes when t
he concrete is hauled in non-agitating trucks, nor ninety (90) minutes when haul
ed in truck mixers or truck agitators, except that in hot weather or under other
conditions contributing to quick hardening of the concrete, the maximum allowab
le time may be reduced by the Engineer. In exceptional cases and when volumetric
measurements are authorized for small project requiring less than 75 cu.m. of c
oncrete per day of pouring, the weight proportions shall be converted to equival
ent volumetric proportions. In such cases, suitable allowance shall be made for
variations in the moisture condition of the aggregates, including the bulking ef
fect in the fine aggregate. Batching and mixing shall be in accordance with ASTM
C 685, Section 6 through 9. Concrete mixing by chute is allowed provided that a
weighing scales for determining the batch weight will be used.
115
Retempering concrete by adding water or by other means shall not be permitted, e
xcept that when concrete is delivered in truck mixers, additional water may be a
dded to the batch materials and additional mixing performed to increase the slum
p to meet the specified requirements, if permitted by the Engineer, provided all
these operations are performed within forty-five (45) minutes after the initial
mixing operation and the water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Concrete that is n
ot within the specified slump limits at the time of placement shall not be used.
Admixtures for increasing the workability or for accelerating the setting of th
e concrete will be permitted only when specifically approved by the Engineer. 31
1.3.8 Limitation of Mixing
No concrete shall be mixed, placed or finished when natural light is insufficien
t, unless an adequate and approved artificial lighting system is operated. Durin
g hot weather, the Engineer shall require that steps be taken to prevent the tem
perature of mixed concrete from exceeding a maximum temperature of 900F ( 320C)
Concrete not in place within ninety (90) minutes from the time the ingredients w
ere charged into the mixing drum or that has developed initial set shall not be
used. Retempering of concrete or mortar which has partially hardened, that is re
mixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water, shall not be perm
itted. In order that the concrete may be properly protected against the effects
of rain before the concrete is sufficiently hardened, the Contractor will be req
uired to have available at all times materials for the protection of the edges a
nd surface of the unhardened concrete. 311.3.9 Placing Concrete
Concrete shall be deposited in such a manner to require minimal rehandling. Unle
ss truck mixers or non-agitating hauling equipment are equipped with means to di
scharge concrete without segregation of the materials, the concrete shall be unl
oaded into an approved spreading device and mechanically spread on the grade in
such a manner as to prevent segregation. Placing shall be continuous between tra
nsverse joints without the use of intermediate bulkheads. Necessary hand spreadi
ng shall be done with shovels, not rakes. Workmen shall not be allowed to walk i
n the freshly mixed concrete with boots or shoes coated with earth or foreign su
bstances. When concrete is to be placed adjoining a previously constructed lane
and mechanical equipment will be operated upon the existing lane, that previousl
y constructed lane shall have attained the strength for fourteen (14) day concre
te. If only finishing equipment is carried on the existing lane, paving in adjoi
ning lanes may be permitted after three (3) days.
116
Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated against and along the faces of all for
ms and along the full length and on both sides of all joint assemblies, by means
of vibrators inserted in the concrete. Vibrators shall not be permitted to come
in contact with a joint assembly, the grade, or a side form. In no case shall t
he vibrator be operated longer than fifteen (15) seconds in any one location. Co
ncrete shall be deposited as near as possible to the expansion and contraction j
oints without disturbing them, but shall not be dumped from the discharge bucket
or hopper into a joint assembly unless the hopper is well centered on the joint
assembly. Should any concrete material fall on or be worked into the surface of
a complete slab, it shall be removed immediately. 311.3.10 Test Specimens As wo
rk progresses, at least one (1) set consisting of three (3) concrete beam test s
pecimens, 150 mm x 150 mm x 525 mm or 900 mm shall be taken from each 330 m2 of
pavement, 230 mm depth, or fraction thereof placed each day. Test specimens shal
l be made under the supervision of the Engineer, and the Contractor shall provid
e all concrete and other facilities necessary in making the test specimens and s
hall protect them from damage by construction operations. Cylinder samples shall
not be used as substitute for determining the adequacy of the strength of concr
ete. The beams shall be made, cured, and tested in accordance with AASHTO T 23 a
nd T 97. 311.3.11 Strike-off of Concrete and Placement of Reinforcement Followin
g the placing of the concrete, it shall be struck off to conform to the cross-se
ction shown on the Plans and to an elevation such that when the concrete is prop
erly consolidated and finished, the surface of the pavement will be at the eleva
tion shown on the Plans. When reinforced concrete pavement is placed in two (2)
layers, the bottom layer shall be struck off and consolidated to such length and
depth that the sheet of fabric or bar mat may be laid full length on the concre
te in its final position without further manipulation. The reinforcement shall t
hen be placed directly upon the concrete, after which the top layer of the concr
ete shall be placed, struck off and screeded. Any portion of the bottom layer of
concrete which has been placed more then 30 minutes without being covered with
the top layer shall be removed and replaced with freshly mixed concrete at the C
ontractor’s expense. When reinforced concrete is placed in one layer, the reinforc
ement may be firmly positioned in advance of concrete placement or it may be pla
ced at the depth shown on the Plans in plastic concrete, after spreading by mech
anical or vibratory means. Reinforcing steel shall be free from dirt, oil, paint
, grease, mill scale and loose or thick rust which could impair bond of the stee
l with the concrete.
117
311.3.12 Joints Joints shall be constructed of the type and dimensions, and at t
he locations required by the Plans or Special Provisions. All joints shall be pr
otected from the intrusion of injurious foreign material until sealed. 1. Longit
udinal Joint Deformed steel tie bars of specified length, size, spacing and mate
rials shall be placed perpendicular to the longitudinal joints, they shall be pl
aced by approved mechanical equipment or rigidly secured by chair or other appro
ved supports to prevent displacement. Tie bars shall not be painted or coated wi
th asphalt or other materials or enclosed in tubes or sleeves. When shown on the
Plans and when adjacent lanes of pavement are constructed separately, steel sid
e forms shall be used which will form a keyway along the construction joint. Tie
bars, except those made of rail steel, may be bent at right angles against the
form of the first lane constructed and straightened into final position before t
he concrete of the adjacent lane is placed, or in lieu of bent tie bars, approve
d two-piece connectors may be used. Longitudinal formed joints shall consist of
a groove or cleft, extending downward from and normal to, the surface of the pav
ement. These joints shall be effected or formed by an approved mechanically or m
anually operated device to the dimensions and line indicated on the Plans and wh
ile the concrete is in a plastic state. The groove or cleft shall be filled with
either a premolded strip or poured material as required. The longitudinal joint
s shall be continuous, there shall be no gaps in either transverse or longitudin
al joints at the intersection of the joints. Longitudinal sawed joints shall be
cut by means of approved concrete saws to the depth, width and line shown on the
Plans. Suitable guide lines or devices shall be used to assure cutting the long
itudinal joint on the true line. The longitudinal joint shall be sawed before th
e end of the curing period or shortly thereafter and before any equipment or veh
icles are allowed on the pavement. The sawed area shall be thoroughly cleaned an
d, if required, the joint shall immediately be filled with sealer. Longitudinal
pavement insert type joints shall be formed by placing a continuous strip of pla
stic materials which will not react adversely with the chemical constituent of t
he concrete. 2. Transverse Expansion Joint The expansion joint filler shall be c
ontinuous from form to form, shaped to subgrade and to the keyway along the form
. Preformed
118
joint filler shall be furnished in lengths equal to the pavement width or equal
to the width of one lane. Damaged or repaired joint filler shall not be used. Th
e expansion joint filler shall be held in a vertical position. An approved insta
lling bar, or other device, shall be used if required to secure preformed expans
ion joint filler at the proper grade and alignment during placing and finishing
of the concrete. Finished joint shall not deviate more than 6 mm from a straight
line. If joint fillers are assembled in sections, there shall be no offsets bet
ween adjacent units. No plugs of concrete shall be permitted anywhere within the
expansion space. 3. Transverse Contraction Joint/Weakened Joint When shown on t
he Plans, it shall consist of planes of weakness created by forming or cutting g
rooves in the surface of the pavement and shall include load transfer assemblies
. The depth of the weakened plane joint should at all times not be less than 50
mm, while the width should not be more than 6 mm. a. Transverse Strip Contractio
n Joint. It shall be formed by installing a parting strip to be left in place as
shown on the Plans. Formed Groove. It shall be made by depressing an approved t
ool or device into the plastic concrete. The tool or device shall remain in plac
e at least until the concrete has attained its initial set and shall then be rem
oved without disturbing the adjacent concrete, unless the device is designed to
remain in the joint. Sawed Contraction Joint. It shall be created by sawing groo
ves in the surface of the pavement of the width not more than 6 mm, depth should
at all times not be less than 50 mm, and at the spacing and lines shown on the
Plans, with an approved concrete saw. After each joint is sawed, it shall be tho
roughly cleaned including the adjacent concrete surface. Sawing of the joint sha
ll commence as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit sawing w
ithout excessive ravelling, usually 4 to 24 hours. All joints shall be sawed bef
ore uncontrolled shrinkage cracking takes place. If necessary, the sawing operat
ions shall be carried on during the day or night, regardless of weather conditio
ns. The sawing of any joint shall be omitted if crack occurs at or near the join
t location prior to the time of sawing. Sawing shall be discounted when a crack
develops ahead of the saw. In general, all joints should be sawed in sequence. I
f extreme condition exist which make it impractical to prevent erratic cracking
by early sawing, the contraction joint groove shall be formed prior to initial s
et of concrete as provided above.
b.
c.
119
4.
Transverse Construction Joint It shall be constructed when there is an interrupt
ion of more than 30 minutes in the concreting operations. No transverse joint sh
all be constructed within 1.50 m of an expansion joint, contraction joint, or pl
ane of weakness. If sufficient concrete has been mixed at the time of interrupti
on to form a slab of at least 1.5 m long, the excess concrete from the last prec
eding joint shall be removed and disposed off as directed.
5.
Load Transfer Device Dowel, when used, shall be held in position parallel to the
surface and center line of the slab by a metal device that is left in the pavem
ent. The portion of each dowel painted with one coat of lead or tar, in conforma
nce with the requirements of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel, shall be thoroughly co
ated with approved bituminous materials, e.g., MC-70, or an approved lubricant,
to prevent the concrete from binding to that portion of the dowel. The sleeves f
or dowels shall be metal designed to cover 50 mm plus or minus 5 mm (1/4 inch),
of the dowel, with a watertight closed end and with a suitable stop to hold the
end of the sleeves at least 25 mm (1 inch) from the end of the dowel. In lieu of
using dowel assemblies at contraction joints, dowel may be placed in the full t
hickness of pavement by a mechanical device approved by the Engineer.
311.3.13 Final Strike-off (Consolidation and Finishing) 1. Sequence The sequence
of operations shall be the strike-off and consolidation, floating and removal o
f laitance, straight-edging and final surface finish. Work bridges or other devi
ces necessary to provide access to the pavement surface for the purpose of finis
hing straight-edging, and make corrections as hereinafter specified, shall be pr
ovided by the Contractor. In general, the addition of water to the surface of th
e concrete to assist in finishing operations will not be permitted. If the appli
cation of water to the surface is permitted, it shall be applied as fog spray by
means of an approved spray equipment. 2. Finishing Joints The concrete adjacent
to joints shall be compacted or firmly placed without voids or segregation agai
nst the joint material assembly, also
120
under and around all load transfer devices, joint assembly units, and other feat
ures designed to extend into the pavement. Concrete adjacent to joints shall be
mechanically vibrated as required in Subsection 311.3.9, Placing Concrete. After
the concrete has been placed and vibrated adjacent to the joints as required in
Subsection 311.3.9, the finishing machine shall be brought forward, operating i
n a manner to avoid damage or misalignment of joints. If uninterrupted operation
of the finishing machine, to over and beyond the joints causes segregation of c
oncrete, damage to, or misalignment of the joints, the finishing machine shall b
e stopped when the front screed is approximately 20 cm (8 inches) from the joint
. Segregated concrete shall be removed from in front of and off the joint. The f
ront screed shall be lifted and set directly on top of the joint and the forward
motion of the finishing machine resumed. When the second screed is close enough
to permit the excess mortar in front of it to flow over the joint, it shall be
lifted and carried over the joint. Thereafter, the finishing machine may be run
over the joint without lifting the screeds, provided there is no segregated conc
rete immediately between the joint and the screed or on top of the joint. 3. Mac
hine Finishing a. Non-vibratory Method. The concrete shall be distributed or spr
ead as soon as placed. As soon as the concrete has been placed, it shall be stru
ck off and screeded by an approved finishing machine. The machine shall go over
each area of pavement as many times and at such intervals as necessary to give t
he proper compaction and leave a surface of uniform texture. Excessive operation
over a given area shall be avoided. The tops of the forms shall be kept clean b
y an effective device attached to the machine and the travel of the machine on t
he forms shall be maintained true without wobbling or other variation tending to
affect the precision finish. During the first pass of the finishing machine, a
uniform ridge of concrete shall be maintained ahead of the front screed in its e
ntire length. b. Vibratory Method. When vibration is specified, vibrators for fu
ll width vibration of concrete paving slabs, shall meet the requirements in Subs
ection 311.3.2, Equipment. If uniform and satisfactory density of the concrete i
s not obtained by the vibratory method at joints, along forms, at structures, an
d throughout the pavement, the Contractor will be required to furnish equipment
and method which will produce pavement conforming to the Specifications. All pro
visions in item (a) above not in conflict with the provisions for the vibratory
method shall govern.
121
4.
Hand Finishing Hand finishing methods may only be used under the following condi
tions: a. In the event of breakdown of the mechanical equipment, hand methods ma
y be used to finish the concrete already deposited on the grade. In narrow width
s or areas of irregular dimensions where operations of the mechanical equipment
is impractical, hand methods may be used.
b.
Concrete, as soon as placed, shall be struck off and screeded. An approved porta
ble screed shall be used. A second screed shall be provided for striking off the
bottom layer of concrete if reinforcement is used. The screed for the surface s
hall be at least 60 cm (2 feet) longer than the maximum width of the slab to be
struck off. It shall be of approved design, sufficiently rigid to retain its sha
pe, and constructed either of metal or other suitable material shod with metal.
Consolidation shall be attained by the use of suitable vibrator or other approve
d equipment. In operation, the screed shall be moved forward on the forms with a
combined longitudinal and transverse shearing motion, moving always in the dire
ction in which the work is progressing and so manipulated that neither end is ra
ised from the side forms during the striking off process. If necessary, this sha
ll be repeated until the surface is of uniform texture, true to grade and cross-
section, and free from porous areas. 5. Floating After the concrete has been str
uck off and consolidated, it shall be further smoothed, trued, and consolidated
by means of a longitudinal float, either by hand or mechanical method. a. Hand M
ethod. The hand-operated longitudinal float shall be not less than 365 cm (12 fe
et) in length and 15 cm (6 inches) in width, properly stiffened to prevent flexi
bility and warping. The longitudinal float, operated from foot bridges resting o
n the side forms and spanning but not touching the concrete, shall be worked wit
h a sawing motion while held in a floating position parallel to the road center
line, and moving gradually from one side of the pavement to the other. Movement
ahead along the center line of the pavement shall be in successive advances of
122
not more than one-half the length of the float. Any excess water or soupy materi
al shall be wasted over the side forms on each pass. b. Mechanical Method. The m
echanical longitudinal float shall be of a design approved by the Engineer, and
shall be in good working condition. The tracks from which the float operates sha
ll be accurately adjusted to the required crown. The float shall be accurately a
djusted and coordinated with the adjustment of the transverse finishing machine
so that a small amount of mortar is carried ahead of the float at all times. The
forward screed shall be adjusted so that the float will lap the distance specif
ied by the Engineer on each transverse trip. The float shall pass over each area
s of pavement at least two times, but excessive operation over a given area will
not be permitted. Any excess water or soupy material shall be wasted over the s
ide forms on each pass. Alternative Mechanical Method. As an alternative, the Co
ntractor may use a machine composed of a cutting and smoothing float or floats s
uspended from and guided by a rigid frame. The frame shall be carried by four or
more visible wheels riding on, and constantly in contact with the side forms. I
f necessary, following one of the preceding method of floating, long handled flo
ats having blades not less than 150 cm (5 feet) in length and 15 cm (6 inches) i
n width may be used to smooth and fill in opentextured areas in the pavement. Lo
ng-handled floats shall not be used to float the entire surface of the pavement
in lieu of, or supplementing, one of the preceding methods of floating. When str
ike off and consolidation are done by the hand method and the crown of the pavem
ent will not permit the use of the longitudinal float, the surface shall be floa
ted transversely by means of the long-handled float. Care shall be taken not to
work the crown out of the pavement during the operation. After floating, any exc
ess water and laitance shall be removed from the surface of the pavement by a 3-
m straight-edge or more in length. Successive drags shall be lapped one-half the
length of the blade.
c.
6.
Straight-edge Testing and Surface Correction After the floating has been complet
ed and the excess water removed, but while the concrete is still plastic, the su
rface of the concrete shall be tested for trueness with a 300 cm long straight-e
dge. For this purpose, the Contractor shall furnish and use an accurate 300-cm s
traight-edge swung from handles 100 cm (3 feet) longer than one-half the width o
f the slab. The straight-edge shall be held in contact with the surface in succe
ssive positions parallel to the road center line and the whole area gone over fr
om one side of the slab to the other as necessary. Advances along the road shall
be in
123
successive stages of not more than one-half the length of the straightedge. Any
depressions found shall be immediately filled with freshly mixed concrete, struc
k off, consolidated and refinished. High areas shall be cut down and refinished.
Special attention shall be given to assure that the surface across joints meets
the requirements for smoothness. Straight-edge testing and surface corrections
shall continue until the entire surface is found to be free from observable depa
rtures from the straight-edge and the slab conforms to the required grade and cr
oss-section. 7. Final Finish If the surface texture is broom finished, it shall
applied when the water sheen has practically disappeared. The broom shall be dra
wn from the center to the edge of the pavement with adjacent strokes slightly ov
erlapping. The brooming operation should be so executed that the corrugations pr
oduced in the surface shall be uniform in appearance and not more than 1.5 mm in
depth. Brooming shall be completed before the concrete is in such condition tha
t the surface will be unduly roughened by the operation. The surface thus finish
ed shall be free from rough and porous areas, irregularities, and depressions re
sulting from improper handling of the broom. Brooms shall be of the quality size
and construction and be operated so as to produce a surface finish meeting the
approval of the Engineer. Subject to satisfactory results being obtained and app
roval of the Engineer, the Contractor will be permitted to substitute mechanical
brooming in lieu of the manual brooming herein described. If the surface textur
e is belt finished, when straight-edging is complete and water sheen has practic
ally disappeared and just before the concrete becomes non-plastic, the surface s
hall be belted with 2ply canvass belt not less than 20 cm wide and at least 100
cm longer than the pavement width. Hand belts shall have suitable handles to per
mit controlled, uniform manipulation. The belt shall be operated with short stro
kes transverse to the center line and with a rapid advances parallel to the cent
er line. If the surface texture is drag finished, a drag shall be used which con
sists of a seamless strip of damp burlap or cotton fabric, which shall produce a
uniform of gritty texture after dragging it longitudinally along the full width
of pavement. For pavement 5 m or more in width, the drag shall be mounted on a
bridge which travels on the forms. The dimensions of the drag shall be such that
a strip of burlap or fabric at least 100 cm wide is in contact with the full wi
dth of pavement surface while the drag is used. The drag shall consist of not le
ss than 2 layers of burlap with the bottom layer approximately 15 cm wider than
the layer. The drag shall be maintained in such condition that the resultant sur
face is of uniform appearance and reasonably free from grooves over 1.5 mm in de
pth. Drag shall be maintained clean and free from
124
encrusted mortar. Drags that cannot be cleaned shall be discarded and new drags
be substituted. Regardless of the method used for final finish, the hardened sur
face of pavement shall have a coefficient of friction of 0.25 or more. Completed
pavement that is found to have a coefficient of friction less than 0.25 shall b
e grounded or scored by the Contractor at his expense to provide the required co
efficient of friction. 8. Edging at Forms and Joints After the final finish, but
before the concrete has taken its initial set, the edges of the pavement along
each side of each slab, and on each side of transverse expansion joints, formed
joints, transverse construction joints, and emergency construction joints, shall
be worked with an approved tool and rounded to the radius required by the Plans
. A well – defined and continuous radius shall be produced and a smooth, dense mor
tar finish obtained. The surface of the slab shall not be unduly disturbed by ti
lting the tool during the use. At all joints, any tool marks appearing on the sl
ab adjacent to the joints shall be eliminated by brooming the surface. In doing
this, the rounding of the corner of the slab shall not be disturbed. All concret
e on top of the joint filler shall be completely removed. All joints shall be te
sted with a straight-edge before the concrete has set and correction made if one
edge of the joint is higher than the other. 311.3.14 Surface Test As soon as th
e concrete has hardened sufficiently, the pavement surface shall be tested with
a 3-m straight-edge or other specified device. Areas showing high spots of more
than 3 mm but not exceeding 12 mm in 3 m shall be marked and immediately ground
down with an approved grinding tool to an elevation where the area or spot will
not show surface deviations in excess of 3 mm when tested with 3 m straight-edge
. Where the departure from correct cross-section exceeds 12 mm, the pavement sha
ll be removed and replaced by and at the expense of the Contractor. Any area or
section so removed shall be not less than 1.5 m in length and not less than the
full width of the lane involved. When it is necessary to remove and replace a se
ction of pavement, any remaining portion of the slab adjacent to the joints that
is less than 1.5 m in length, shall also be removed and replaced. 311.3.15 Curi
ng Immediately after the finishing operations have been completed and the concre
te has sufficiently set, the entire surface of the newly placed concrete shall b
e cured in accordance with either one of the methods described herein. Failure
125
to provide sufficient cover material of whatever kind the Contractor may elect t
o use, or the lack of water to adequately take care of both curing and other req
uirements, shall be a cause for immediate suspension of concreting operations. T
he concrete shall not be left exposed for more than ½ hour between stages of curin
g or during the curing period. In all congested places, concrete works should be
designed so that the designed strength is attained. 1. Cotton of Burlap Mats Th
e surface of the pavement shall be entirely covered with mats. The mats used sha
ll be of such length (or width) that as laid they will extend at least twice the
thickness of the pavement beyond the edges of the slab. The mat shall be placed
so that the entire surface and the edges of the slab are completely covered. Pr
ior to being placed, the mats shall be saturated thoroughly with water. The mat
shall be so placed and weighted down so as to cause them to remain in intimate c
ontact with the covered surface. The mat shall be maintained fully wetted and in
position for 72 hours after the concrete has been placed unless otherwise speci
fied. 2. Waterproof Paper The top surface and sides of the pavement shall be ent
irely covered with waterproof paper, the units shall be lapped at least 45 cm. T
he paper shall be so placed and weighted down so as to cause it to remain in int
imate contact with the surface covered. The paper shall have such dimension but
each unit as laid will extend beyond the edges of the slab at least twice the th
ickness of the pavement, or at pavement width and 60 cm strips of paper for the
edges. If laid longitudinally, paper not manufactured in sizes which will provid
e this width shall be securely sewed or cemented together, the joints being secu
rely sealed in such a manner that they do not open up or separate during the cur
ing period. Unless otherwise specified, the covering shall be maintained in plac
e for 72 hours after the concrete has been placed. The surface of the pavement s
hall be thoroughly wetted prior to the placing of the paper. 3. Straw Curing Whe
n this type of curing is used, the pavement shall be cured initially with burlap
or cotton mats, until after final set of the concrete or, in any case, for 12 h
ours after placing the concrete. As soon as the mats are removed, the surface an
d sides of the pavement shall be thoroughly wetted and covered with at least 20
cm of straw or hay, thickness of which is to be measured after wetting. If the s
traw or hay covering becomes displaced during the curing period, it shall be rep
laced to the original depth and saturated. It shall be kept thoroughly saturated
with water for 72 hours and thoroughly wetted
126
down during the morning of the fourth day, and the cover shall remain in place u
ntil the concrete has attained the required strength. 4. Impervious Membrane Met
hod The entire surface of the pavement shall be sprayed uniformly with white pig
mented curing compound immediately after the finishing of the surface and before
the set of the concrete has taken place, or if the pavement is cured initially
with jute or cotton mats, it may be applied upon removal of the mass. The curing
compound shall not be applied during rain. Curing compound shall be applied und
er pressure at the rate 4 L to not more than 14 m2 by mechanical sprayers. The s
praying equipment shall be equipped with a wind guard. At the time of use, the c
ompound shall be in a thoroughly mixed condition with the pigment uniformly disp
ersed throughout the vehicle. During application, the compound shall be stirred
continuously by effective mechanical means. Hand spraying of odd widths or shape
s and concrete surface exposed by the removal of forms will be permitted. Curing
compound shall not be applied to the inside faces of joints to be sealed, but a
pproved means shall be used to insure proper curing at least 72 hours and to pre
vent the intrusion of foreign material into the joint before sealing has been co
mpleted. The curing compound shall be of such character that the film will harde
n within 30 minutes after application. Should the film be damaged from any cause
within the 72 hour curing period, the damaged portions shall be repaired immedi
ately with additional compound. 5. White Polyethylene Sheet The top surface and
sides of the pavement shall be entirely covered with polyethylene sheeting. The
units used shall be lapped at least 45 cm. The sheeting shall be so placed and w
eighted down so as to cause it to remain intimate contact with the surface cover
ed. The sheeting as prepared for use shall have such dimension that each unit as
laid will extend beyond the edges of the slab at least twice the thickness of t
he pavement. Unless otherwise specified, the covering shall be maintained in pla
ce for 72 hours after the concrete has been placed. 311.3.16 Removal of Forms Af
ter forms for concrete shall remain in place undisturbed for not less than twent
y four (24) hours after concrete pouring. In the removal of forms, crowbars shou
ld be used in pulling out nails and pins. Care should be taken so as not to brea
k the edges of the pavement. In case portions of the concrete are spalled, they
shall be immediately repaired with fresh mortar mixed in the proportion of one p
art of Portland Cement and two parts fine aggregates. Major honeycomb areas will
be considered as defective work and shall be removed and replaced at the
127
expense of the Contractor. Any area or section so removed shall not be less than
the distance between weakened plane joint nor less than the full width of the l
ane involved. 311.3.17 Sealing Joints Joints shall be sealed with asphalt sealan
t soon after completion of the curing period and before the pavement is opened t
o traffic, including the Contractor’s equipment. Just prior to sealing, each joint
shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign materials including membrane curing
compound and the joint faces shall be clean and surface dry when the seal is app
lied. The sealing material shall be applied to each joint opening to conform to
the details shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Material for seal
applied hot shall be stirred during heating so that localized overheating does
not occur. The pouring shall be done in such a manner that the material will not
be spilled on the exposed surfaces of the concrete. The use of sand or similar
material as a cover for the seal will not be permitted. Preformed elastomeric ga
skets for sealing joints shall be of the crosssectional dimensions shown on the
Plans. Seals shall be installed by suitable tools, without elongation and secure
d in placed with an approved lubricant adhesive which shall cover both sides of
the concrete joints. The seals shall be installed in a compressive condition and
shall at time of placement be below the level of the pavement surface by approx
imately 6 mm. The seals shall be in one piece for the full width of each transve
rse joint. 311.3.18 Protection of Pavement The Contractor shall protect the pave
ment and its appurtenances against both public traffic and traffic caused by his
own employees and agents. This shall include watchmen to direct traffic and the
erection of and maintenance of warning signs, lights, pavement bridges or cross
-overs, etc. The Plans or Special Provisions will indicate the location and type
of device or facility required to protect the work and provide adequately for t
raffic. All boreholes after thickness and/or strength determinations of newly co
nstructed asphalt and concrete pavements shall be immediately filled/restored wi
th the prescribed concrete/asphalt mix after completion of the drilling works. A
ny damage to the pavement, occurring prior to final acceptance, shall be repaire
d or the pavement be replaced. 311.3.19 Concrete Pavement – Slip Form Method If th
e Contract calls for the construction of pavement without the use of fixed forms
, the following provisions shall apply:
128
1.
Grade After the grade or base has been placed and compacted to the required dens
ity, the areas which will support the paving machine shall be cut to the proper
elevation by means of a properly designed machine. The grade on which the paveme
nt is to be constructed shall then be brought to the proper profile by means of
properly designed machine. If the density of the base is disturbed by the gradin
g operation, it shall be corrected by additional compaction before concrete is p
laced. The grade should be constructed sufficiently in advance of the placing of
the concrete. If any traffic is allowed to use the prepared grade, the grade sh
all be checked and corrected immediately before the placing of concrete.
2.
Placing Concrete The concrete shall be placed with an approved slip-form paver d
esigned to spread, consolidate, screed and float-finish the freshly placed concr
ete in one complete pass of the machine in such a manner that a minimum of hand
finish will be necessary to provide a dense and homogenous pavement in conforman
ce with the Plans and Specifications. The machine shall vibrate the concrete for
the full width and depth of the strip of pavement being placed. Such vibration
shall be accompanied with vibrating tubes or arms working in the concrete or wit
h a vibrating screed or pan operating on the surface of the concrete. The slidin
g forms shall be rigidly held together laterally to prevent spreading of the for
ms. The forms shall trail behind the paver for such a distance that no appreciab
le slumping of the concrete will occur, and that necessary final finishing can b
e accomplished while the concrete is still within the forms. Any edge slump of t
he pavement, exclusive of edge rounding, in excess of 6 mm shall be corrected be
fore the concrete has hardened. The concrete shall be held at a uniform consiste
ncy, having a slump of not more than 40 mm (1-12/ inches). The slip form paver s
hall be operated with as nearly as possible a continuous forward movement and th
at all operations of mixing, delivering and spreading concrete shall be coordina
ted so as to provide uniform progress with stopping and starting of the paver he
ld to a minimum. If, for any reason, it is necessary to stop the forward movemen
t of the paver the vibratory and tamping elements shall also be stopped immediat
ely. No tractive force shall be applied to the machine, except that which is con
trolled from the machine.
3.
Finishing The surface smoothness and texture shall meet the requirements of Subs
ections 311.3.13 and 311.3.14.
129
4.
Curing Unless otherwise specified, curing shall be done in accordance with one o
f the methods included in Subsection 311.3.15. The curing media shall be applied
at the appropriate time and shall be applied uniformly and completely to all su
rfaces and edges of the pavement.
5.
Joints All joints shall be constructed in accordance with Subsection 311.3.12.
6.
Protection Against Rain In order that the concrete may be properly protected aga
inst rain before the concrete is sufficiently hardened, the Contractor will be r
equired to have available at all times, materials for the protection of the edge
s and surface of the unhardened concrete. Such protective materials shall consis
t of standard metal forms or wood planks having a nominal thickness of not less
than 50 mm (2 inches) and a nominal width of not less than the thickness of the
pavement at its edge for the protection of the pavement edges, and covering mate
rial such as burlap or cotton mats, curing paper or plastic sheeting materials f
or the protection of the surface of the pavement. When rain appears imminent, al
l paving operations shall stop and all available personnel shall begin placing f
orms against the sides of the pavement and covering the surface of the unhardene
d concrete with the protective covering.
311.3.22 Acceptance of Concrete The strength level of the concrete will be consi
dered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three (3) consecutive strength
test results equal or exceed the specified strength, fc’ and no individual streng
th test result is deficient by more than 15% of the specified strength, fc’. Concr
ete deemed to be not acceptable using the above criteria may be rejected unless
the Contractor can provide evidence, by means of core tests, that the quality of
concrete represented by failed test results is acceptable in place. At least th
ree (3) representative cores shall be taken from each member or area of concrete
in place that is considered deficient. The location of cores shall be determine
d by the Engineer so that there will be at least impairment of strength of the s
tructure. The obtaining and testing of drilled cores shall be in accordance with
AASHTO T 24. Concrete in the area represented by the cores will be considered a
dequate if the average strength of the cores is equal to at least 85% of, and if
no single core is less than 75% of, the specified strength, fc’.
130
If the strength of control specimens does not meet the requirements of this Subs
ection, and it is not feasible or not advisable to obtain cores from the structu
re due to structural considerations, payment of the concrete will be made at an
adjusted price due to strength deficiency of concrete specimens as specified her
eunder: Deficiency in Strength of Concrete Specimens, Percent (%) Less than 5 5
to less than 10 10 to less than 15 15 to less than 20 20 to less than 25 25 or m
ore 311.3.23 Opening to Traffic The Engineer will decide when the pavement may b
e opened to traffic. The road will not be opened to traffic until test specimens
molded and cured in accordance with AASHTO T 23 have attained the minimum stren
gth requirements in Subsection 311.2.11. If such tests are not conducted prior t
o the specified age the pavement shall not be operated to traffic until 14 days
after the concrete was placed. Before opening to traffic, the pavement shall be
cleaned and joint sealing completed. 311.3.24 Tolerance and Pavement thickness 1
. General The thickness of the pavement will be determined by measurement of cor
es from the completed pavement in accordance with AASHTO T 148. The completed pa
vement shall be accepted on a lot basis. A lot shall be considered as 1000 linea
r meters of pavement when a single traffic lane is poured or 500 linear meters w
hen two lanes are poured concurrently. The last unit in each slab constitutes a
lot in itself when its length is at least ½ of the normal lot length. If the lengt
h of the last unit is shorter than ½ of the normal lot length, it shall be include
d in the previous lot. Other areas such as intersections, entrances, crossovers,
ramp, etc., will be grouped together to form a lot. Small irregular areas may b
e included with other unit areas to form a lot. Each lot will be divided into fi
ve (5) equal segments and one core will be obtained from each segment in accorda
nce with AASHTO T 24. Percent (%) of Contract Price Allowed
100 80 70 60 50 0
131
2.
Pavement Thickness It is the intent of this Specification that the pavement has
a uniform thickness as called for on the Plans for the average of each lot as de
fined. After the pavement has met all surface smoothness requirements, cores for
thickness measurements will be taken. In calculating the average thickness of t
he pavement, individual measurements which are in excess of the specified thickn
ess by more than 5 mm will be considered as the specified thickness plus 5 mm an
d measurement which are less than the specified thickness by more than 25 mm sha
ll not be included in the average. When the average thickness for the lot is def
icient, the contract unit price will be adjusted for thickness in accordance wit
h paragraph (3 below). Individual areas within a segment found deficient in thic
kness by more than 25 mm shall be evaluated by the Engineer, and if in his judgm
ent, the deficient areas warrant removal, they shall be removed and replaced by
the Contractor with pavement of the specified thickness at his entire expense. H
owever, if the evaluation of the Engineer is that the deficient area should not
be removed and replaced, such area will not be paid. When the measurement of any
core is less than the specified thickness by more than 25 mm, the actual thickn
ess of the pavement in this area will be determined by taking additional cores a
t no less than 5 m intervals parallel to the center line in each direction from
the affected location until a core is found in each direction, which is not defi
cient in thickness by more than 25 mm. The area of slab for which no payment wil
l be made shall be the product of the paving width multiplied by the distance al
ong the center line of the road between transverse sections found not deficient
in thickness by more than 25 mm. The thickness of the remainder of the segment t
o be used to get the average thickness of each lot shall be determined by taking
the average thickness of additional cores which are not deficient by more than
25 mm.
3.
Adjustment for Thickness When the average thickness of the pavement per lot is d
eficient, payment for the lot shall be adjusted as follows: Deficiency in the Av
erage Thickness per lot (mm) 0–5 6 – 10 11 – 15 16 – 20 21 – 25 More than 25 132 Percent (
%) of Contract Price Per Lot 100% payment 95% payment 85% payment 70% payment 50
% payment Remove and replace/ No payment
No acceptance and final payment shall be made on completed pavement unless core
test for thickness determination is conducted, except for Barangay Roads where t
he implementing office is allowed to waive such test. 311.4 Method of Measuremen
t The area to be paid for under this Item shall be the number of square meters (
m2) of concrete pavement placed and accepted in the completed pavement. The widt
h for measurements will be the width from outside edge to outside edge of comple
ted pavement as placed in accordance with the Plans or as otherwise required by
the Engineer in writing. The length will be measured horizontally along the cent
er line of each roadway or ramp. Any curb and gutter placed shall not be include
d in the area of concrete pavement measured. 311.5 Basis of Payment The accepted
quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 311.4, shall be paid for at the con
tract unit price for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, which price and payment
shall be full compensation for preparation of roadbed and finishing of shoulders
, unless otherwise provided by the Special Provisions, furnishing all materials,
for mixing, placing, finishing and curing all concrete, for furnishing and plac
ing all joint materials, for sawing weakened plane joints, for fitting the prefa
bricated center metal joint, for facilitating and controlling traffic, and for f
urnishing all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 311 (1) 311 (2)
Description PCC Pavement (Plain) PCC Pavement (Reinforced)
Unit of Measurement Square meter Square meter
133
PART F – BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION ITEM 400 – PILING 400.1 Description 400.1.1 Scope This
Item shall consist of piling, furnished, driven or placed, cut and spliced in ac
cordance with this Specification and in reasonably close conformity with the Pla
ns. The Contractor shall furnish the piles in accordance with an itemized list,
which will be provided by the Engineer, showing the number and lengths of all pi
les. When cast-in-place concrete piles are specified on the Plans, the Engineer
will not furnish the Contractor an itemized list showing the number and length o
f piles. When test piles and load tests are required in conformance with Subsect
ion 400.1.2 and 400.1.3, respectively, the data obtained from driving test piles
and making test loads will be used in conjunction with other available sub-soil
information to determine the number and lengths of piles to be furnished. The E
ngineer will not prepare the itemized list of piles for any portion of the found
ation area until all specified loading tests in the Contract representative of t
he portion have been completed. In determining lengths of piles for ordering and
to be included for payment, the lengths given in the order list will be based o
n the lengths which are assumed to remain in the completed structure. The Contra
ctor, shall, without added compensation, increase the lengths to provide for the
fresh heading and for such additional length as maybe necessary to suit the Con
tractor’s method of operation. 400.1.2 Test Piles For his own information, the Con
tractor may drive at the location of the regular piles indicated on the Plans su
ch test piles as he may consider necessary in addition to the test piles specifi
ed in the Contract and shall be considered as regular piles. When called for in
the Bill of Quantities, a pile if required to be subjected to load test shall co
nform to the provision as provided in Subsection 400.1.3, Load Tests. The Contra
ctor shall furnish and drive test piles of the dimensions and at the locations d
esignated by the Engineer. They shall be of the material shown in the Bill of Qu
antities and shall be driven to refusal or to such tip elevation or approximate
bearing value as the Engineer may request. Test piles shall be driven with the s
ame hammer that is used for driving foundation piles. When the Engineer requests
a load test to determine a bearing value, the first load test pile shall be dri
ven to the specified bearing value as determined by the applicable formula in Su
bsection 400.1.4 for Timber Pile Bearing Value by Formula. Subsequent test piles
to be load-tested shall be driven to the specified bearing value as determined
by the applicable formula modified by the results of
134
prior test loads and foundation data. The ground at each test pile shall be exca
vated to the elevation of the bottom of the footing before the pile is driven. 4
00.1.3 Load Tests Load tests for files shall be either Static or Pile Testing by
Low-Strain Dynamic Method, High-Strain Dynamic Method and Cross-Hole Sonic Logg
ing. When load tests are specified, the number and location of piles to be teste
d will be designated by the Engineer. Load tests shall be done by methods approv
ed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval det
ailed plans of the loading apparatus he intends to use. The apparatus shall be s
o constructed as to allow the various increments of the load to be placed gradua
lly without causing vibration to the test piles. If the approved method requires
the use of tension (anchor) piles, such tension piles shall be of the same type
and diameter as the permanent piles and shall be driven in the location of perm
anent piles when feasible. Piling not a part of the structure shall be removed o
r cut off at least 300mm below the bottom of the footing or finished elevation o
f the ground upon completion of the test load. Permanent piling used as anchor p
iling which is raised during the test load shall be redriven to original grade a
nd bearing. 400.1.3.1 Static Testing
Suitable approved apparatus for determining accurately the load on pile and the
settlement of the pile under increment of load shall be supplied by the Contract
or. Test loading shall consist of the application of incremental static loads to
a pile and measuring the resultant settlement. The loads shall be applied by a
hydraulic jack acting against suitable anchorage, transmitting the load directly
to the pile, or other methods designated by the Plans or approved by the Engine
er. The load shall be applied in increments of 5 or 10 tonnes as directed by the
Engineer. Gross settlement readings, loads and other data shall be recorded by
the Engineer immediately before and after the applications of each load incremen
t. Each load increment shall be held for an interval of two and one-half minutes
. Each succeeding increment shall be as directed by the Engineer or as shown on
the Plans and shall be applied immediately after the two and one-half minute int
erval readings have been made. When a load-settlement curve obtained from these
data shows that the pile has failed; i.e., the load can be held only by the cons
tant pumping and the pile or shaft is being driven into the ground, pumping shal
l cease. Gross settlement readings, loads and other data shall be recorded immed
iately after pumping has ceased and again after an interval of two and one-half
minutes for a total period of five (5) minutes. All loads shall then be removed
and the member allowed to recover. Gross settlement readings shall be made immed
iately after all loads
135
have been removed and at each interval of two and one-half minutes for a total p
eriod of five (5) minutes. All load tests shall be carried to failure or to the
capacity of the equipment, unless otherwise noted on the Plans. After the comple
tion of loading tests, the load used shall be removed and the piles including te
nsion piles, shall be utilized in the structure if found by the Engineer to be s
atisfactory for such use. Test piles not loaded shall be utilized similarly. If
any pile, after serving its purpose as a test or tension pile, is found unsatisf
actory for utilization in the structure, it shall be removed if so ordered by th
e Engineer or shall be cut off below the ground line of footings, whichever is a
pplicable. When diesel or other types of hammers requiring calibration are to be
used, the Contractor shall make load tests even though no load tests are called
for in the Bill of Quantities, except that load tests will not be required when
the hammer is to be used only for driving piles to refusal, rock or a fixed tip
elevation or the hammer is of a type and model that has been previously calibra
ted for similar type, size and length of pile, and foundation material. Calibrat
ion data must have been obtained from sources acceptable to the Engineer. 400.1.
3.2 Pile Testing Pile testing shall be done by Low-Strain Dynamic Method, High-S
train Dynamic Method or Cross-Hole Sonic Logging Method as required in the plans
or as directed by the Engineer. 400.1.3.2.1 Low-Strain dynamic Method Pile inte
grity testing by Low-Strain Dynamic Method shall conform to ASTM D-5882-96. It i
s a so-called Low Strain Method, since it requires the impact of only a small ha
nd-held hammer, and also referred to as a Non-Destructive Method. 400.1.3.2.2 Hi
gh-Strain Dynamic Testing Pile Integrity testing by High-Strain Dynamic Method s
hall conform to ASTM D4945-97. High-Strain Dynamic Method shall be applied to co
nfirm the design parameters and capacities assumed for the piles as well as to c
onfirm the normal integrity of testing of the piles. It is considered supplement
al to the lowstrain and sonic-type integrity testing of the cast-in-place piles.
It is a nondestructive relatively quick test and it is intended that the test s
haft be left in a condition suitable for use in production. The shaft used for t
he test will be instrumented and tested by the testing specialist, as approved b
y the Engineer, meeting requirements in accordance to ASTM D4945-97. 400.1.3.2.3
Cross-Hole Sonic Logging of Bored Holes By sending ultrasonic pulses through co
ncrete from one probe to another (probes located in parallel tubes), the Cross-h
ole Sonic Logging (CSL) procedure
136
inspects the drilled shaft structural integrity, and extent and location of defe
cts, if any. At the receiver probe, pulse arrival time and signal the concrete a
ffects strength. For equidistant tubes, uniform concrete yields consistent arriv
al times with reasonable pulse wave speed and signal strengths. Non – uniformities
such as contamination, soft concrete, honeycombing, voids, or intrusions of for
eign objects exhibit delayed arrival time with reduced signal strength. 400.1.4
Timber Pile Bearing Value by Formula
When load tests are called for in the Bil
l of Quantities and when diesel or other hammers to be calibrated are used, the
minimum number of hammer blows per unit of pile penetration needed to obtain the
specified bearing value of piles shall be determined by load tests, as provided
in Subsections 400.1.2 and 400.1.3. In the absence of load tests, the safe bear
ing value of each timber pile shall be determined by whichever of the following
approximate formulas is applicable: 1000 WH For gravity hammer, P = ------------
- x --------------6 S+25.4 For single-action steam or air hammers, and for diese
l hammers having unrestricted rebound of ram, 1000 WH P = ----------- x --------
--------6 S+2.54 For double-action steam or air hammers, and diesel hammers havi
ng enclosed ram, 1000 E P = ------------ x ----------------6 S+2.54 For diesel o
r steam hammers on very heavy piles, 1000 E P = ---------- x -------------------
----6 S+2.54 (Wp/W) Where: P W = Safe load per pile in Newton or kg = Weight of
the striking part of the hammer in Newton or kg H = Height of fall of ram in met
res S = Average penetration per blow in mm for the last 5 to 10 blows for gravit
y hammers and the last 10 to 20 blows for steam hammers E = Hammer energy, N.m o
r kg.m Wp = Weight of pile
137
The above formula are applicable only when: 1. The hammer has a free fall. 2. Th
e head of the pile is free from broomed or crushed wood fiber or other serious i
mpairment. 3. The penetration is reasonably quick and uniform. 4. There is no me
asurable bounce after the blow. 5. A follower is not used. If there is a measura
ble bounce, twice the height of bounce shall be deducted from H to determine its
value in the formula. The bearing power as determined by the appropriate formul
a listed in this Subsection, will be considered effective only when it is less t
han the crushing strength of the pile. Other recognized formulas may be used if
fully detailed in the Special Provisions. When bearing power is determined by a
formula, timber piles shall be driven until a computed safe bearing power of eac
h is not less than 18 tonnes. 400.1.5 Concrete and Steel Pile Bearing Values The
bearing values for concrete and steel pile will be determined by the Engineer u
sing the following formulas: a. Modified Hiley’s Formula or any formula from broch
ures of the equipment used, shall be used when the ratio of weight of ram or ham
mer to weight of pile is greater than one fourth (1/4). 2WH (W) Ru = -----------
----------------(S+K) (W+Wp) Ru Ra = --------------FS Where: Ru Ra W H Wp S K FS
ultimate capacity of piles (KN) capacity of pile (KN)–shall be greater than the r
equired weight of ram or hammer (KN) height of fall of ram (mm) weight of pile (
KN) average penetration for the last ten blows (mm) 10 mm (unless otherwise obse
rved/computed during driving) = factor of safety (min. = 3) = = = = = = =
138
b. Hiley’s Formula shall be used when the ratio of the weight of ram or hammer to
weight of pile is less than one fourth (1/4). efWH (W) (W + n2 Wp) Ru = --------
---------------------- x --------------------------S+1/2 (C1+C2+C3) (W + Wp) Ru
Ra = -------------FS where: Ru Ra ef W Wp H S C1 C2 C3 = = = = = = = = = = ultim
ate capacity of pile (KN) capacity of pile (KN) efficiency of hammer (refer to t
able) weight of ram (KN) weight of pile (KN) height of fall of ram (mm) average
penetration for last ten blows (mm) temporary compression allowance for pile hea
d and cap (refer to table) RuL/AEp range from 2.54mm to 5.08mm (0.1” to 0.2”) for re
silient soil to 0 for hard pan (rock, very dense sand and gravel) length of pile
cross-sectional area of pile modulus of elasticity of pile coefficient of resti
tution (refer to table) factor of safety (min. = 3)
L A Ep n FS
= = = = =
Required minimum penetration of all piles shall be six (6) meters. However, for
exposed piles, the embedded length shall be equal or greater than the exposed le
ngth but not less than 6.0m.
Note: Formula for other pile hammers with suggested factor of safety should be a
s provided/recommended by their respective manufacturer.
139
Values of C1 for Hiley Formula Temporary Compression Allowance C1 for Pile Head
and Cap
Materials to which blow is applied Easy Driving: P1 = 3.45 MPa (500 psi) on Pile
Butt If no cushion, mm (in.) 1.27 (0.05) Medium Driving: P1 = 6.90 MPa (1000 ps
i) on Head or Cap. mm (in.) Hard Driving: P1 = 10.34 MPa (1500 psi) on Head or C
ap. mm (in.) Very Hard Driving: P1 = 13.88 MPa (2000 psi) on Head or Cap. mm (in
.) 5.08 (0.20)
Head of timber pile 76–100mm (3-4 in.) packing inside cap on head of precast concr
ete piles Concrete Pile Steel-covered cap. containing wood packing but steel pil
ing at pipe 4.76mm (3/16 in.) red electrical tuber disk between two 10mm (3/8”) st
eel plates, for use with severe driving on Monotube pile Head of steel piling of
pipe
2.54 (0.10)
3.81 (0.15)
1.27 + 1.778b b (0.05 + 0.07) 0.635 (0.025)
2.54 + 3.81b b (0.10 + 0.15) 1.27 (0.05)
3.81 + 5.588b b (0.015 + 0.22) 1.905 (0.075)
5.08 + 7.62b b (0.20 + 0.30) 2.54 (0.10)
1.016 (0.04)
2.032 (0.08)
3.048 (0.12)
4.064 (0.16)
0.508 (0.02)
1.016 (0.04)
1.524 (0.06)
2.032 (0.08)
0
0
0
0
The first figure represent the compression of the cap and wood dolly or packing
above the cap, whereas the second figure represent the compression of the wood p
acking between the cap and the pile head. P1 = Ru/A Values of Efficiency of Hamm
er, ef Hammer Type Drop Hammer released by trigger Drop Hammer actuated by rope
and friction winch McKiernan-Terry Single-acting hammers Warrington-Vulcan Singl
e –acting hammers Differential-acting hammers McKiernan-Terry, Industrial B. Ownho
ist, National and Union double-acting hammers Diesel Hammers ef 1.00 0.75 0.85 0
.75 0.75 0.85 1.00
b
140
Pile Type
Reinforced Concrete
Values of Coefficient of Restitution, n Head Condition Drop, Single Acting or Di
esel Hammer Helmet with composite plastic or 0.40 green heart dolly on top of pi
le Helmet with Timber dolly, and packing on top of pile Hammer direct on pile wi
th pad only Driving cap with Standard plastic or greenheart dolly Driving cap wi
th Timber dolly Hammer direct on pile Hammer direct on pile
Double Acting Hammers
0.50
0.25 -
0.40 0.50
Steel
0.50 0.30 0.25
0.50 0.30 0.50 0.40
Timber
The formulas specified in the preceding Subsection for timber piling may be used
in determining a rough approximation for the bearing power of precast and cast-
in-place concrete piles and of steel piles. In all cases when the bearing power
of concrete and steel piles is determined by formula, the piles shall be driven
until the safe bearing power of each is computed to be not less than 27 tonnes.
400.1.6 Safe Loads When the safe bearing power of any pile is found by test or c
omputation to be less than the design load, longer piles or additional piles sha
ll be driven as ordered in writing by the Engineer. 400.1.7 Jetted Piles The saf
e bearing power of jetted piles shall be determined by actual tests or by the ap
propriate methods and formulas given in the preceding Subsections. No jet shall
be used during the test blows. 400.2 Material Requirements The kind and type of
piles shall be as specified on the Plans and Bill of Quantities. No alternative
type or kind of piling shall be used. 400.2.1 Untreated Timber Piles Timber shal
l conform to the requirements of Item 713, Treated and Untreated Timber. The spe
cie shall be specified on the Plans. Unless otherwise
141
noted on the Plans or Special Provisions, only the best grade shall be used. It
shall be free from loose knots, splits, wormholes, decay, warp, ring separation
or any defect which will impair its strength or render it unfit for its intended
use. Any specie specified on the Plans may be used for untreated timber and if
the specie is not available, a specie of equivalent strength and durability may
be used if authorized by the Engineer. Round piles shall be cut above the ground
swell and shall taper from butt to tip. A line drawn from the center of the tip
to the center of the butt shall not fall outside of the cross-section of the pi
le at any point more than one percent of the length of the pile. In short bends,
the distance from the center of the pile to a line stretched from the center of
the pile above the bend to the center of the pile below the bend shall not exce
ed four percent of the length of the bend or a maximum of 65mm. Unless otherwise
specified, all piles shall be peeled removing all rough bark and at least 80 pe
rcent of the inner bark. Not less than 80 percent of the surface on any circumfe
rence shall be clean wood. No strip of inner bark remaining on the pile shall be
more than 20mm wide and 200mm long. All knots shall be trimmed close to the bod
y of the pile. The pile sizes shall conform to the dimensions shown in Table 400
.1. Table 400.1 – Dimension of Piles Length of Pile Diameter (1 metre from the But
t) Minimum mm 300 320 350 Maximum mm 450 450 500 Minimum Tip Diameter, mm
Less than 12 metres 12 to 18 metres More than 18 metres
200 180 150
The diameter of the piles shall be measured in their peeled condition. When the
pile is not exactly round, the average of three measurements may be used. For an
y structure, the butt diameters for the same lengths of pile shall be as uniform
as possible. Square piles shall have the dimensions shown on the Plans. 400.2.2
Treated Timber Piles Timber shall conform to the requirements of Item 713, Trea
ted and Untreated Timber. Treatment shall consist of the forcing of either creos
ote oil or creosote petroleum oil mixture into the outer fibers of the timber by
a heat and pressure process. The process shall be in accordance with ASTM D-176
0 Standard Specification for Pressure Treatment of Timber Products, but with suc
h changes as temperatures, pressures, duration of treatment and other factors af
fecting the final treatment that experience has shown to be necessary in the
142
treatment of structural timbers sawn from woods native to the Philippines. The t
reatment shall be so regulated that the curing process will not induce excessive
checking. The minimum penetration of the preservative into the surface of the t
imber shall be 20 mm. All piles shall retain the minimum amount of preservative
specified in Table 400.2.
Table 400.2 – Minimum Preservative Per Cubic Metre of Wood Type of Processing Empt
y Cell Process Full Cell Process 195 kg 320 kg
Use General Use Marine Use
The Engineer shall inspect the timber prior to the treatment to determine confor
mance with the Specifications and suitability of conditions for treatment. He sh
all be permitted free access to the plant in order that temperatures, pressures
and quantities and type of treatment materials used may be observed. Samples of
the creosote or creosote petroleum mixtures shall be furnished as required for t
est. The timber shall be checked to determine penetration of treatment, quantity
of free preservative remaining on the timber and any visual evidence that the t
reatment has been performed in a satisfactory manner. The penetration of treatme
nt shall be determined by boring a sufficient number of well-distributed holes t
o determine the average penetration. All such holes shall be plugged with plugs
approximately 2 mm larger in diameter than the bit used in boring the holes. If
the penetration of preservative is less than the required amount, the entire cha
rge, or such parts thereof shall be retreated. If after treatment the penetratio
n is still insufficient, the treated pieces shall be rejected. 400.2.3 Concrete
Piles Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concret
e. Concrete shall be Class “C” unless otherwise specified in the Plans. Concrete sha
ll be proportioned to achieve a range of 6”-8” (150 mm to 200 mm) slump, self-compac
ting mix. The use of appropriate plasticizer/additives to assure mix fluidity an
d consistency shall be allowed and with the Engineer’s approval. A retardant of pr
oven adequacy and approved by the Engineer may be used to ensure that early hard
ening of concrete during operation will not occur. Reinforcing steel shall confo
rm to the requirements of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel. Prestressing reinforcing
steel shall be high-tensile steel wire conforming to AASHTO M 204 or other high-
tensile metals conforming to AASHTO Standards.
143
400.2.4 Steel Shells 1. Shells Driven Without a Mandrel Unless otherwise called
for on the Plans or Special Provisions, shells for cast-in-place concrete piles
shall have a minimum 305mm diameter at cut off and a minimum 203mm diameter at t
ip: made from not less than 4.55mm in thickness plate stock conforming to AASHTO
M 183. Shells may either be spirally welded or longitudinally welded and may ei
ther be tapered or constant in section. Tips shall be sealed as shown on the Pla
ns. 2. Shells Driven With a Mandrel The shell shall be of sufficient strength an
d thickness to withstand driving without injury and to resist harmful distortion
and/or buckling due to soil pressure after driven and the mandrel removed. Butt
and tip dimension shall be as called for on the Plans or Special Provisions. 40
0.2.5 Steel Pipes Filled Steel Pipes (filled with concrete) shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A 252, Grade 2, Welded and Seamless Pipe Piles. Closure Pl
ates for closed piles shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 183. Unfille
d Tubular Steel Piles shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 252, Grade 2,
with chemical requirements meeting ASTM Designation A 53, Grade B. The wall thic
kness shall not be less than 4.76mm. 400.2.6 Steel H-Piles Steel H-Piles shall b
e rolled steel sections of the weight and shape called for on the Plans. They sh
all be structural steel meeting the requirements of AASHTO M 183 provided that,
where the Special Provisions called for copperbearing structural steel, the stee
l shall not contain less than one-fifth percent nor more than zero point thirty
five percent (0.35%) of copper, except that steel manufactured by the acid-besse
mer process shall not be used. 400.2.7 Sheet Piles Steel sheet piles shall meet
the requirements of AASHTO M 202 (ASTM A 328), or AASHTO M 223. All other sheet
piles shall meet the requirements prescribed above the particular material speci
fied. The joints shall be practically water-tight when the piles are in place. 4
00.2.8 Pile Shoes Pile shoes shall be as called for on the Plans.
144
400.2.9 Splices Material for pile splices, when splicing is allowed, shall be of
the same quality as the material used for the pile itself and shall follow the
requirements given on the Plans. 400.2.10 Paint It shall conform to Item 709, Pa
ints. 400.3 Construction Requirements 400.3.1 Location and Site Preparation Pile
s shall be driven where indicated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. A
ll excavations for the foundation on which the piles are to be driven shall be c
ompleted before the pile driving, unless otherwise specified or approved by the
Engineer. After driving is completed, all loose and displaced materials shall be
removed from around the piles by hand excavation, leaving clean solid surface t
o receive the concrete of the foundation. Any requirement for granular fill and
lean concrete shall be indicated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. 40
0.3.2 Determination of Pile Length Pile length and bearing capacity shall be det
ermined by the Engineer from the results of the test piling and load tests. The
criterion for pile length may be one of the following: 1. Piles in sand and grav
el shall be driven to a bearing power determined by the use of the pile driving
formula or as decided by the Engineer. 2. Piles in clay shall be driven to the d
epth ordered by the Engineer. However, the bearing power shall be controlled by
the pile driving formula if called for by the Engineer. 3. Piles shall be driven
to refusal on rock or hard layer when so ordered by the Engineer. The Contracto
r shall be responsible for obtaining the correct pile length and bearing capacit
y according to the criteria given by the Engineer. 400.3.3 Pile Driving All pile
s shall be driven as shown on the Plans or as ordered in writing by the Engineer
. They shall be driven within an allowed variation of 20mm per metre of pile len
gth from the vertical or batter as shown on the Plans. The maximum allowable var
iation at the butt end of the pile shall be 75mm in any direction from the locat
ion shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Each pile shall, after dr
iving, be within 150mm from the theoretical location underneath the pile
145
cap or underneath the superstructure in case of pile bents. All piles pushed up
by the driving of adjacent piles or any other cause shall be redriven. Piles sha
ll be used only in places where the minimum penetration of 3m in firm materials,
or 5m in soft materials can be obtained. Whereas soft upper stratum overlies a
hard stratum, the piles shall penetrate the hard materials at sufficient depths
to fix the ends rigidly. All pile driving equipment is subject to the Engineer’s a
pproval. The Contractor is responsible for sufficient weight and efficiency of t
he hammers to drive the piles down to the required depth and bearing capacity. H
ammers shall be gravity hammers, single and double acting steam or pneumatic ham
mers or diesel hammers. Gravity hammers shall not weigh less than 60 percent of
the combined weight of the pile and driving head but not less than 2,000 kg. The
fall shall be regulated so as to avoid injury to the pile and shall in no case
exceed 4.50m for timber and steel piles and 2.50m for concrete piles unless othe
rwise specified or approved by the Engineer. The plant and equipment furnished f
or steam hammers shall have sufficient capacity to maintain, under working condi
tion, the pressure at the hammer specified by the manufacturer. The boiler or pr
essure tank shall be equipped with an accurate pressure gauge and another gauge
shall be supplied at the hammer intake to determine the drop in pressure between
the gauges. When diesel hammers or any other types requiring calibration are us
ed, they shall be calibrated with test piling and/or test loads in accordance wi
th Subsection 400.1.2, Test Piles. Water jets shall be used only when permitted
in writing by the Engineer. When water jets are used, the number of jets and the
nozzle volume and pressure shall be sufficient to erode freely the material adj
acent to the pile. The plant shall have sufficient capacity to deliver at all ti
me a pressure equivalent to at least 690 KPa at two 19 mm (3/4 inch) jet nozzles
. The jets shall be shut off before the required penetration is reached and the
piles shall be driven solely by hammers to final penetration as required by the
Engineer. Piles shall be supported in line and position with leads while being d
riven. Pile driving leads shall be constructed in such a manner as to afford fre
edom of movement of the hammer, and shall be held in position by guys or steel b
races to insure rigid lateral support to the pile during driving. The leads shal
l be of sufficient length to make the use of a follower unnecessary and shall be
so designed as to permit proper placing of batter piles. The driving of the pil
es with followers shall be avoided if practicable and shall be done only under w
ritten permission from the Engineer. The method used in driving piles shall not
subject them to excessive and undue abuse producing crushing and spalling of the
concrete, injurious splitting, splintering and brooming of the wood or deformat
ion of the steel. Manipulation of piles to force them into proper position if co
nsidered by the Engineer too excessive will not be permitted.
146
The pile tops shall be protected by driving heads, caps or cushions in accordanc
e with the recommendation of the manufacturer of the pile hammer and to the sati
sfaction of the Engineer. The driving head shall be provided to maintain the axi
s of the pile with the axis of the hammer and provide a driving surface normal t
o the pile. Full length piles shall be used where practicable. Splicing of piles
when permitted, shall be in accordance with the provisions of Subsection 400.3.
7 and 400.3.8. All piles shall be continuously driven unless otherwise allowed b
y the Engineer. Piles shall not be driven within 7 m of concrete less than 7 day
s old. 400.3.4 Timber Piles Piles shall be strapped with three metal straps: one
about 450mm from the butt, one about 600mm from the butt, and the third, about
300mm from the tip. Additional straps shall be provided at about 4.5m on centers
between tip and butt. Strapping should encircle the pile once and be tensioned
as tightly as possible. Straps shall be 38mm wide, 0.8mm thick, cold rolled, ful
ly heat treated, high tensile strapping, painted and waxed. Treated piles shall
be strapped after treatment. Point protection shall be considered for all timber
piles. Where timber piles must penetrate dump fill, or may encounter obstructio
ns or be driven to hard strata, point protection shall be used. A boot that enco
mpasses and utilizes the entire end area of the pile is preferred. 400.3.5 Timbe
r Pile Bents Piles for any one bent shall be carefully selected as to size, to a
void undue bending or distortion of the sway bracing. Care shall be exercised in
the distribution of piles of various sizes to obtain uniform strength and rigid
ity in the bents of any given structure. Cut offs shall be made accurately to in
sure full being between caps and piles of bents. 400.3.6 Precast Concrete Piles
Precast concrete piles shall be of the design shown on the Plans. Prestressed co
ncrete piles shall be prestressed as prescribed in Item 406, Prestressed Concret
e Structures. The piles shall be cast separately and concrete in each pile shall
be place continuously. The completed piles shall be free from stone pockets, ho
neycombs, or other defects, and shall be straight and true to the form specified
. The forms shall be true to line and built of metal, plywood or dressed lumber.
A 25mm chamfer strip shall be used in all corners. Form shall be water-tight an
d shall not be removed until at least twenty-four (24) hours after the concrete
is placed.
147
Piles shall be cured and finished in accordance with Items 405, Structural Concr
ete and 406, Prestressed Concrete Structures. Cylinder specimens shall be made a
nd tested in accordance with Item 405. Piles shall not be moved until the tests
indicate that the concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least 80 pe
rcent (80%) of the design 28-day compressive strength and they shall not be tran
sported or driven until the design 28-day compressive strength has been attained
. If testing equipment is not available, as in isolated areas, piles shall not b
e moved until after fourteen (14) days after casting and shall not be transporte
d or driven prior to 28 days after casting. If high early strength cement is use
d, piles shall not be moved, transported or driven prior to 7 days after casting
. When concrete piles are lifted or moved, they shall be supported at the points
shown on the Plans; if not shown, they shall be supported at the quarter points
. 400.3.7 Cast-in-place Concrete Piles 1. Drilled Holes All holes for concrete p
iles cast in drilled holes shall be drilled dry to tip elevation shown on the Pl
ans. All holes will be examined for straightness and any hole which on visual in
spection from the top shows less than one-half the diameter of the hole at the b
ottom of the hole will be rejected. Suitable casings shall be furnished and plac
ed when required to prevent caving of the hole before concrete is placed. All lo
ose material existing at the bottom of the hole after drilling operations have b
een completed shall be removed before placing concrete. The use of water for dri
lling operations or for any other purpose where it may enter the hole will not b
e permitted. All necessary action shall be taken to prevent surface water from e
ntering the hole and all water which may have infiltrated into the hole shall be
removed before placing concrete. Concrete shall be placed by means of suitable
tubes. Prior to the initial concrete set, the top 3m of the concrete filled pile
or the depth of any reinforcing cage, whichever is greater, shall be consolidat
ed by acceptable vibratory equipment, Casing, if used in drilling operations, ma
y be left in place or removed from the hole as concrete is placed. The bottom of
the casing shall be maintained not more than 1.5m nor less than 0.3m below the
top of the concrete during withdrawal and placing operations unless otherwise pe
rmitted by the Engineer. Separation of the concrete during withdrawal operations
shall be avoided by vibrating the casing.
148
2. Steel Shells and Pipes The inside of shells and pipes shall be cleaned and al
l loose materials removed before concrete is placed. The concrete shall be place
d in one continuous operation from tip to cut-off elevation and shall be carried
on in such a manner as to avoid segregation. The top 3m of concrete filled shel
ls, or to the depth of any reinforcing cage, whichever is greater, shall be cons
olidated by acceptable vibratory equipment. Pipes shall be of the diameter shown
on the Plans. The pipe wall thickness shall not be less than that shown on the
Plans but in no case less than 5mm. The pipe, including end closures, shall be o
f sufficient strength to be driven by the specified methods without distortion.
Closure plates and connecting welds shall not project more than 12.5mm beyond th
e perimeter of the pile tips. No shell or pipe shall be filled with concrete unt
il all adjacent shells, pipes, or piles within a radius of 1.5m or 4 ½ times the a
verage pile diameter, whichever is greater, have been driven to the required res
istance. After a shell or pipe has been filled with concrete, no shell, pipe or
pile shall be driven within 6m thereof until at least 7 days have elapsed. 3. Dr
illed Shafts Drilled shafts are deep foundations formed by boring a cylindrical
hole into soil and/or rock and filling the hole with concrete. Drilled shafts ar
e also commonly referred to as caissons, bored piles or drilled piers. Drilled s
hafts, like driven piles, transfer structural loads to bearing stratum well belo
w the base of the structure by passing soils having insufficient strength to car
ry the design loads. Drilled shafts are classified according to their primary me
chanism for deriving load resistance either as floating shafts (i.e., shafts tra
nsferring load primarily by side resistance), or end-bearing shafts (i.e., shaft
s transferring load primarily by tip resistance). Occasionally, the bases of sha
fts are enlarged (i.e., belled or underreamed) to improved the load capacity of
end bearing shafts on less than desirable soils, or to increase the uplift resis
tance of floating shafts. Effects of ground and ground water conditions on shaft
construction operations should be considered and delineated, when necessary, th
e general method of construction to be followed to ensure the expected performan
ce. Because shafts derive their capacity from side and tip resistance which are
a function of the condition of the materials in direct contact with the shaft, i
t is important that the construction procedures be consistent with the material
conditions assumed in the design. Softening, loosening or other changes in soil
and rock conditions caused by the construction method could result in a reductio
n
149
in shaft capacity and an increase in shaft displacement. Therefore, evaluation o
f the effects of shaft construction procedure on load capacity must be considere
d an inherent aspect of the design. Drilled shafts are normally sized in 15.24cm
(6-inch diameter increments with a minimum diameter of 45.72cm (18”). The diamete
r of a shaft socketed into rock should be a minimum of 15.24cm (6”) larger than th
e socket diameter. If a shaft must be inspected by the entry of a person, the sh
aft diameter shall not be less than 76.20cm (30”). Drilled shafts constructed in d
ry, noncaving soils can usually be excavated without lateral support of the hole
. Other ground conditions where caving, squeezing or sloughing soils are present
require installation of a steel casing or use of a slurry for support of the ho
le. Such conditions and techniques may result in loosening of soil around the sh
aft, or altering of frictional resistance between the concrete shaft and surroun
ding soil. The center-to-center spacing between shafts is normally restricted to
a minimum of 3B to minimize the effects of interaction between adjacent shafts
during construction or in service. However, larger spacings may be required wher
e drilling operations are difficult or where construction must be completed in v
ery short time frames. Particular attention should be given to the potential for
deposition of loose or wet material in the bottom of the hole, or the buildup o
f a cake of soft material around the shaft perimeter prior to concrete placement
. Adequate cleaning and inspection of rock sockets should always be performed to
assure good contact between the rock and shaft concrete. If good contact along
the shaft cannot be confirmed, it may be necessary to assume that all load is tr
ansferred to the tip. If the deposition of soft or loose material in the bottom
of the hole is expected, the shaft may have to be designed to carry the entire d
esign load through side resistance. A number of methods can be used to prevent c
aving during the drilling of holes and the placement of concrete. It is preferre
d that drilled shafts be constructed in stable non-sloughing soil without excess
ive ground water. If impossible, consider the following three different construc
tion methods: a. The construction of the pile or shaft in a wet condition while
the walls of the excavation are stabilized by hydrostatic pressure of water or a
mineral slurry until the concrete is placed by tremie methods for the full leng
th of the pile. Mineral slurry used in the drilling process shall have both a mi
neral grain size that will remain in suspension and sufficient viscosity and gel
characteristics to transport excavated material to a suitable screening system.
The percentage and specific gravity of the material used to make the suspension
shall be sufficient to maintain the stability of the excavation and to allow pr
oper concrete placement. The level of the slurry shall be maintained at a height
sufficient to prevent caving of the hole.
150
The mineral slurry shall be premixed thoroughly with clean fresh water and adequ
ate time allotted for hydration prior to introduction into the shaft excavation.
Adequate slurry tanks will be required when specified. No excavated slurry pits
will be allowed when slurry tanks are required on the project without written p
ermission of the Engineer. Adequate desanding equipment will be required when sp
ecified. Steps shall be taken as necessary to prevent the slurry from “setting up” i
n the shaft excavation, such as agitation, circulation, and adjusting the proper
ties of the slurry. Control tests using suitable apparatus shall be carried out
by the Contractor on the mineral slurry to determine density, viscosity, and pH.
An acceptable range of values for those physical properties is shown in the fol
lowing table. Range of Values (At 20o [68oF]) Property (Units) Density (KN/m3) (
pcf) Viscosity (sec. per quart) pH Time of Slurry Introduction 10.10 to 10.86 64
.3 to 69.1 Time of Concreting (In Hole) 10.10 to 11.79 64.3 to 75.0 Test Method
Density Balance
28 to 45
28 to 45
Marsh Cone pH Paper or Meter
8 to 11
8 to 11
Note: a) Increase density values by 0.314 KN/m3 (2 pcf) in salt water. b) If des
anding is required; sand content shall not exceed 4 percent (by volume) at any p
oint in the shaft excavation as determined by the American Petroleum Institute s
and content test. Tests to determine density, viscosity and pH values shall be d
one during the shaft excavation to establish a consistent working pattern. Prior
to placing shaft concrete, slurry samples shall be taken from the bottom and at
intervals not exceeding 3.05m (10 feet) for the full height of slurry. Any heav
ily contaminated slurry that has accumulated at the bottom of the shaft shall be
eliminated. The mineral slurry shall be within specification requirements immed
iately before shaft concrete placement. Excavation Inspection The Contractor sha
ll provide equipment for checking the dimensions and alignment of each shaft exc
avation. The Contractor under the direction of the Engineer shall determine the
dimensions and alignment of the drilled shaft. Final shaft depth shall be measur
ed after final cleaning.
151
The base of the shaft excavation may be cleaned using a cleaning bucket followed
by airlifting. Reverse circulation techniques may also be used to clean the bas
e of the shaft. The shaft excavation shall be cleaned so that a minimum of 50 pe
rcent of the base will have less than 12.5mm of sediment and at no place on the
base more than 37.5mm of sediment. The Engineer will determine shaft cleanliness
. b. The use of steel casing which is installed during drilling operations to ho
ld the hole open and usually withdrawn during concrete placement. Casing, if use
d in operation, shall be metal, smooth, clean, watertight, and of ample strength
to withstand both handling and driving stresses and the pressure of both concre
te and the surrounding earth materials. The outside diameter of casing shall not
be less than the specified size of the shaft. It shall conform to AASHTO M 270
(ASTM A 709) Grade 36 unless otherwise specified. Temporary casings shall be rem
oved while the concrete remains workable. Generally the removal of temporary cas
ing shall not be started until concrete placement in the shaft is at or above gr
ound surface. Movement of casing by rotating, exerting downward pressure and tap
ping to facilitate extraction or extraction with a vibratory hammer will be perm
itted. Casing extraction shall be at a slow, uniform rate with the pull in line
with the shaft axis. A sufficient head of concrete shall be maintained above the
bottom of the casing to overcome the hydrostatic pressure of water or drilling
fluid outside of the casing. c. The use of a permanent casing which is left in p
lace within the portion of the pile which is in unstable material. A permanent c
asing is applied as protection from the presence of surface water during drillin
g and as support later for the installation of the rebar cage and as a concrete
form in drilling under water. Reinforcing Steel Cage Construction and Placement
The reinforcing steel cage consisting of the steel shown on the Plans plus cage
stiffener bars, spacers, centralizers and any other necessary appurtenances shal
l be completely assembled and placed as a unit immediately after the shaft excav
ation is inspected and accepted and prior to shaft concrete placement. Where the
reinforcing cage length is too long for placement as a single unit the cage may
be placed in separate units such that appropriate means of splicing the longitu
dinal steel is provided for. The Contractor shall submit his plans for such spli
ces to the Engineer for approval. The reinforcing steel in the hole shall be tie
d and supported so that the reinforcing steel will remain within allowable toler
ances until the concrete will
152
support the reinforcing steel. When concrete is placed by suitable tubes, tempor
ary hold-down devices shall be used to prevent uplifting of the steel cage durin
g concrete placement. Concrete spacers or other approved noncorrosive spacing de
vices shall be used at sufficient intervals not exceeding 1.50 meters along the
shaft to insure concentric location of the cage within the shaft excavation. Whe
n the size of the longitudinal reinforcing steel exceeds 25mm, such spacing shal
l not exceed 3.0 meters. Concrete Placement, Curing and Protection Concrete shal
l be placed as soon as possible after reinforcing steel cage placement. Concrete
placement shall be continuous in the shaft to the top elevation of the shaft. P
lacement shall continue after the shaft is full until good quality concrete is e
vident at the top of the shaft. Concrete shall be placed through a suitable tube
. For piles less than 2.5 meters in diameter, the elapsed time from the beginnin
g of concrete placement in the shaft to the completion of placement shall not ex
ceed 2 hours. For piles 2.50 meters and greater in diameter, the concrete placin
g rate shall not be less than 9.0 meters of pile height per each 2-hour period.
The concrete mix shall be of such design that the concrete remains in a workable
plastic state throughout the 2-hour placement limit. When the top of pile eleva
tion is above ground, the portion of the pile above ground shall be formed with
a removable form or permanent casing when specified. The upper 1.5 meters of con
crete shall be vibrated or rodded to a depth of 1.5 meter below the ground surfa
ce except where soft uncased soil or slurry remaining in the excavation will pos
sibly mix with the concrete. After placement, the temporarily exposed surfaces o
f the shaft concrete shall be cured in accordance with the provision in Sub-sect
ion 407.3.8 – Curing Concrete. For at least 48 hours after pile concrete has been
placed, no construction operations that would cause soil movement adjacent to th
e shaft, other than mild vibration, shall be conducted. Construction Tolerances:
The following tolerances shall be maintained in constructing drilled shaft. a.
The drilled shaft shall be within 7.62cm (6”) of the plan position in the horizont
al plane at the plan elevation for the top of the shaft. b. The vertical alignme
nt of the shaft excavation shall not vary from the plan alignment by more than 2
0.83 mm/m (1/4 inch per foot) of depth.
153
c.
After all the shaft concrete is placed, the top of the reinforcing steel cage sh
all be no more than 15.24 cm (6”) above and no more than 7.62 cm (3”) below plan pos
ition.
d. When casing is used, its outside diameter shall not be less than the shaft di
ameter shown on the plans. When casing is not used, the minimum diameter of the
drilled shaft shall be the diameter shown on the plans for diameters 60.96 cm (2
4”) or less, and not more than 2.54 cm (1 inch) less than the diameter shown on th
e plans for diameters greater than 60.96 cm (24”). e. The bearing area of bells sh
all be excavated to the plan bearing area as a minimum. All other plan dimension
s shown for the bells may be varied, when approved, to accommodate the equipment
used. f. The top elevation of the shaft shall be within 2.54 cm (1 inch) of the
plan top of shaft elevation. g. The bottom of the shaft excavation shall be nor
mal to the axis of the shaft within 62.5 mm/m (3/4 inch per foot) of shaft diame
ter. Drilled shaft excavations constructed in such a manner that the concrete sh
aft cannot be completed within the required tolerances are unacceptable. 400.3.8
Steel H-Pile Steel H-Pile shall consist of structural steel shapes of the secti
ons indicated on the Plans. When placed in the leads, the pile shall not exceed
the camber and sweep permitted by allowable mill tolerance. Piles bent or otherw
ise damaged will be rejected. The loading, transporting, unloading, storing and
handling of steel H-pile shall be conducted so that the metal will be kept clean
and free from damage. 400.3.9 Unfilled Tubular Steel Piles The tubular steel pi
les should be or as specified by the Engineer. The minimum wall thickness shall
be as indicated in the following table:
Outside Diameter Minimum wall thickness
Less than 355 mm 6.5 mm
355 mm and over 9.5 mm
Cutting shoes for piles driven open end may be inside or outside of the pipe. Th
ey may be high carbon structural steel with a machined ledged for pile bearing o
r cast steel with a ledge, designed for attachment with a simple weld.
154
400.3.10 Splicing Splicing when permitted shall be made as shown on the Plans an
d in accordance with this Subsection. 1. Precast Concrete Piles a. By using pref
abricated joints mounted in the forms and cast together with the piles sections
and joined together as specified by the manufacturer and approved by the Enginee
r. The joints shall be of the design and type as specified or shown on the Plans
. b. By cutting away the concrete at the end of the pile, leaving the reinforcin
g steel exposed for a length of 40 bar diameters for corrugated or deformed bars
and 60 bar diameters for plain bars. The final cut of the concrete shall be per
pendicular to the axis of the pile. Reinforcement of the same size as that used
in the pile shall be spliced to the projecting steel in accordance with Item 404
, Reinforcing Steel, and the necessary formwork shall be placed, care being take
n to prevent leakage along the pile. The concrete shall be of the same quality a
s that used in the pile. Just prior to placing concrete, the top of the pile sha
ll be wetted thoroughly and covered with a thin coating of neat cement, retemper
ed mortar, or other suitable bonding material to the satisfaction of the Enginee
r. The forms shall remain in place not less than seven (7) days. The pile shall
not be driven until the safe design has been reached. c. By any other method sho
wn on the Plans or approved by the Engineer. Curing and finishing of extensions
shall be the same as in the original pile. 2. Prestressed Piles Splicing of pres
tressed precast piles will generally not be permitted, but when permitted, it sh
all be made in accordance with (1) above, but only after driving has been comple
ted. Reinforcement bars shall be included in the pile head for splicing to the e
xtension bars. No additional driving will be permitted. The Contractor, at his o
ption, may submit alternative plans of splicing for consideration by the Enginee
r. 3. Steel Piles, Shells or Pipes If the length of the steel pile, shell or pip
e driven is insufficient to obtain the specified bearing power, an extension of
the same cross-section shall be spliced to it. Unless otherwise shown on the Pla
ns, splices shall be made by butt-welding the entire cross-sections to form an i
ntegral pile using the electric arc method. The sections connected shall be prop
erly aligned so that the axis of the pile shall be straight. Bent and/or damaged
piles shall be rejected.
155
400.3.11 Cutting Off and Capping Piles The top of foundation piles shall be embe
dded in the concrete footing as shown on the Plans. Concrete piles shall, when a
pproved by the Engineer, be cut off at such a level that at least 300mm of undam
aged pile can be embedded in the structure above. If a pile is damaged below thi
s level, the Contractor shall repair the pile to the satisfaction of the Enginee
r. The longitudinal reinforcement of the piles shall be embedded in the structur
e above to a length equal to at least 40 times the diameter of the main reinforc
ing corrugated bars (60 diameters for plain bars). The distance from the side of
any pile to the nearest edge of the cap shall not be less than 200mm. When the
cut off elevation for a precast pile or for the steel shell or pile for a cast i
n place concrete pile is below the elevation of the bottom of the pile cap, the
pile may be built-up from the butt of the pile to the elevation of the bottom of
the cap by means of reinforced concrete extension constructed in accordance wit
h Subsection 400.3.10 or as approved by the Engineer. Cut-offs of structural ste
el piles shall be made at right angles to the axis of the pile. The cuts shall b
e made in clear, straight lines and any irregularity due to cutting or burning s
hall be leveled-off with deposits of weld metal prior to placing bearing caps. 4
00.3.12 Defective Piles Any pile delivered with defects, or damaged in driving d
ue to internal defects or by improper driving, or driven out of its proper locat
ion, or driven below the elevation fixed by the Plans or by the Engineer, shall
be corrected at the Contractor’s expense by one of the following methods approved
by the Engineer for the pile in question: 1. Any pile delivered with defects sha
ll be replaced by a new pile. 2. Additional pile shall be driven/casted at the l
ocation as directed by the Engineer. 3. The pile shall be spliced or built-up as
otherwise provided herein on the underside of the footing lowered to properly e
mbed the pile. A precast concrete pile shall be considered defective if it has a
visible crack, extending around the four sides of the pile, or any defect which
, in the opinion of the Engineer, affects the strength or life of the pile. When
a new pile is driven or cast to replace a rejected one, the Contractor at his o
wn expense, shall enlarge the footing as deemed necessary by the Engineer.
156
400.3.13 Protecting Untreated Timber Trestle Piles The heads of untreated piles
shall be treated as follows: The sawed surface shall be thoroughly brush-coated
with two (2) applications of hot creosote oil or other approved preservative. 40
0.3.14 Protecting Treated Timber Trestle Piles All cuts and abrasions in treated
timber piles shall be protected by a preservative approved by the Engineer. 400
.3.15 Painting Steel Piles Unless otherwise provided, when required steel piles
extend above the ground surface or water surface, they shall be protected by pai
nt as specified for cleaning and painting metal surfaces in accordance with Item
403, Metal Structures. This protection shall extend from the elevation shown on
the Plans to the top of the exposed steel. 400.3.16 Pile Records The Contractor
shall keep records of all piles driven or installed. A copy of the record shall
be given to the Engineer within two (2) days after each pile is driven. The rec
ord form to be used shall be approved by the Engineer. The pile records shall gi
ve full information on the following:
Driven Piles 1. Pile type and dimension
Cast-in-Place Piles 1. Date of boring or driving (For steel shell) & casting 2.
Pile type and nominal dimension 3. Length of finished pile and tip elevation
2. Date of casting and concrete quality (for concrete piles) 3. Date of driving
4. Details of penetration during 4. Driving equipment: type, boring or driving o
f steel shell weight & efficiency of hammer, (driving records as for driven etc.
piles) 5. Description of cushion on pile head 6. Depth driven and tip elevation
5. Concrete quality and consistency 6. Time interval between boring or driving
and concreting
157
7. Final set for the last 20 blows 7. Volume of concrete placed in concrete (for
every 10 piles and when the Engineer so requires the penetration along the whol
e depth driven shall be recorded) 8. For gravity and single-acting hammers: the
height of drop 9. For double acting-hammers --the frequency of blows 10. Details
of any interruption in driving 11. Level of pile top immediately after driving
and the level when all piles in the group are driven 12. Details of re-driving 4
00.4 Method of Measurement 400.4.1 Timber, Steel and Precast Concrete Piles 1. P
iles Furnished The quantity to be paid for will be the sum of the lengths in met
res of the piles of the several types and lengths ordered in writing by the Engi
neer, furnished in compliance with these Specifications and stockpiles in good c
ondition at the project site by the Contractor and accepted by the Engineer. The
length to be paid for will include test and tension piles ordered by the Engine
er, but not those furnished by the Contractor at his option. No allowance will b
e made for piles, including test piles, furnished by the Contractor to replace p
iles previously accepted by the Engineer that are subsequently lost or damaged w
hile in stockpile, or during handling or driving, and are ordered by the Enginee
r to be removed from the site of work. In case extensions of piles are necessary
, the extension length will be included in the length of pile furnished, except
for cut off lengths used for extensions and already measured for payment. 2. Pil
es Driven The quantity to be paid for will be the sum of the lengths in metres o
f the piles driven in the completed work measured from the pile tip elevation to
the bottom of pile caps, footings or bottom of concrete superstructure in the c
ase of pile bents. Measurement will not include additional piles or test
158
piles driven that may be necessary to suit the Contractor’s method of construction
and were driven at his option. Unless otherwise provided for, preboring, jettin
g or other methods used for facilitating pile driving operations will not be mea
sured directly but will be considered subsidiary to pay items. 400.4.2 Cast-In-P
lace Concrete Piles The quantity to be paid for will be the sum of actual length
s in meters of the piles cast and left in-place in the completed and accepted wo
rk. Measurements will be from the pile tip to the bottom of cap or footing. Port
ions of piles cast deeper than the required length through over-drilling will no
t be measured for payment. 400.4.3 Pile Shoes The quantity to be paid for, inclu
ding test pile shoes, will be the number of pile shoes driven shown on the Plans
or ordered in writing by the Engineer, furnished by the Contractor in accordanc
e with these Specifications and accepted by the Engineer. Pile shoes furnished b
y the Contractor at his option or to replace those that are lost or damaged in s
tockpile or handling will not be measured for payment. 400.4.4 Load Tests The qu
antity of the load tests to be paid for will be the number of tests completed an
d accepted except that load tests made to calibrate different types of hammers,
if not included in the Bill of Quantities, will not be measured for payment. Anc
hor and test piling which are not part of the completed structure, will be inclu
ded in the unit bid price for each “Load Test”. Anchor and test piling or anchor and
test shafts which are a part of the permanent structure will be paid for under
the appropriate Item. 400.4.5 Splices The quantity to be paid for will be the nu
mber of splices which may be required to drive the pile in excess of the estimat
ed length shown on the Plans for cast-in-place steel pipes or shells or in exces
s of the order length furnished by the Engineer for all other types of piling. S
plices made for the convenience of the Contractor or to fabricate piles cut offs
will not be paid for. 400.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities, measured
as prescribed in Section 400.4 shall be paid for at the contract unit price for
each of the particular item listed below that is included in the Bill of Quantit
ies, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placi
ng all materials, including all labor, equipment tools
159
and incidentals as well as temporary works, staging areas or craneway necessary
to complete the work prescribed in this Item. Payment will be made under: Pay It
em Number 400 (1) 400 (2) 400 (3) 400 (4) 400 (5) 400 (6) 400 (7) 400 (8) 400 (9
) 400 (10) 400 (11) 400 (12) 400 (13) 400 (14) 400 (15) 400 (16) 400 (17) 400 (1
8) 400 (19) 400 (20) 400 (21) 400 (22) 400 (23) 400 (24) Description Unit of Mea
surement Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter
Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Each Each Each Meter Meter
Untreated Timber Piles, furnished Treated Timber Piles, preservative, furnished
Steel H-Piles, furnished Precast Concrete Piles, furnished Precast, Prestresssed
Concrete Piles, furnished Structural Steel Sheet Piles, furnished Precast Concr
ete Sheet Piles, furnished Untreated Timber Piles, driven Treated Timber Piles,
driven Steel H-Piles, driven Steel Pipes Piles Structural Steel Sheet Piles, dri
ven Precast Concrete Sheet Piles, driven Precast Concrete Piles, driven Precast,
Prestresssed Concrete Piles, driven Test Piles, furnished and driven Concrete P
iles cast in Drilled Holes Concrete Piles cast in Steel Shells Concrete Piles ca
st in Steel Pipes Pile Shoes Splices Load Tests Bored Piles (dia. __m) Permanent
Casing (dia. ___m)
ITEM 401 – RAILINGS 401.1 Description This Item shall consist of furnishing or fab
ricating and/or placing railings, for bridges and other structures of the materi
al or combination of materials shown on the Plans, constructed in reasonably clo
se conformity with this Specification and to the lines, grades and dimensions sh
own on the Plans. Railings shall be classified as concrete, steel, aluminum or t
imber in accordance with the predominating material contained in each.
160
401.2 Material Requirements 401.2.1 Concrete It shall conform to the applicable
requirements prescribed in Item 405, Structural Concrete. 401.2.2 Reinforcing St
eel It shall conform to the requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire
Rope. 401.2.3 Steel Structural steel consisting of steel and iron plates, shape
s, pipes, fittings and castings shall conform to the requirements of Item 403, M
etal Structures. 401.2.4 Aluminum It shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M 193, ASTM B 221 or ASTM B 308 or as called for on the Plans. 401.2.5 Timber I
t shall conform to the requirements of Item 713, Treated and Untreated Timber. 4
01.2.6 Stones and Bricks These shall conform to the requirements of Item 505, St
one Masonry and Item 704, Masonry Units. 401.2.7 Paint It shall conform to the r
equirements of Item 709, Paints. 401.3 Construction Requirements
401.3.1 General Railings shall be constructed to the lines and grades shown on t
he Plans and shall not reflect any unevenness in the structure. All railing post
s shall be set plumb in hand or mechanically dug holes, unless driving is permit
ted. In the latter case, the manner of driving shall be such as to avoid batteri
ng or distorting of post. Post holes shall be backfilled with acceptable materia
l placed in layers and thoroughly compacted. When it is necessary to cut post ho
les in existing pavement, all loose materials shall be removed and the paving re
placed in kind. Bridge railings shall not be placed on a span until centering or
falsework has been removed, rendering the span self-supporting.
161
Rail elements shall be erected according to Plans and in a manner resulting in a
smooth, continuous installation with laps in the direction of traffic flow. All
bolts except adjustment bolts shall be drawn tight. Bolts shall be of sufficien
t length to extend beyond the nuts by more than 25 mm. Where painting of railing
component is specified, any damage to the shop coat of paint shall be corrected
by an application of an approved rust-inhibitive primer prior to painting. Unga
lvanized surfaces inaccessible to painting after erection shall be field painted
before erection. The railing components shall be given the specified number of
coats of paint uniformly applied by thorough brushing or by approved pressure sp
ray. Galvanized surfaces which have been abraded so that the base metal is expos
ed, threaded portions of all fittings and fasteners and cut ends of bolts shall
be painted with two (2) coats of zinc-dust and zinc oxide paint. 401.3.2 Metal R
ailing Fabrication and erection shall be done in accordance with the requirement
s of Item 403, Metal Structures. In the case of welded railings, all exposed joi
nts shall be finished by grinding or filing after welding to give a neat appeara
nce. Metal railing shall be carefully adjusted prior to fixing in-place to insur
e proper matching of abutting joints, correct alignment and camber throughout th
eir length. Holes for field connection shall be drilled with the railing in-plac
e in the structure at proper grade and alignment. Welding may be substituted for
rivets or bolts in field connections with the approval of the Engineer. 401.3.3
Concrete Railing 1. Railing Cast-In-Place The portion of the railing or parapet
which is to be cast-in-place shall be constructed in accordance with the requir
ements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. Special care shall be exercised to secu
re smooth and tight fitting forms which can be rigidly held in line and grade an
d removed without injury to the concrete. Forms shall either be of single width
boards or shall be lined with suitable material to have a smooth surface which s
hall meet the approval of the Engineer or as shown on the Plans. All moldings, p
anel work and bevel strips shall be constructed according to the detailed Plans
with metered joints, and all corners in the finished work shall be true, sharp a
nd clean-cut and shall be free from cracks, spalls and other defects.
162
2. Precast Railings Moist tamped mortar precast members shall be removed from th
e molds as soon as practicable and shall be kept damp for a period of at least t
en (10) days. Any member that shows checking of soft corners of surfaces shall b
e rejected. Expansion joints shall be constructed as to permit freedom of moveme
nt. After all work is completed, all loose or thin shells of mortar likely to sp
all under movement shall be carefully removed from all expansion joints by means
of a sharp chisel. 401.3.4 Wooden Railing Wooden railing shall be constructed i
n accordance with the requirements of Item 402, Timber Structures. 401.3.5 Stone
and Brick Railing The materials used in masonry brick railing and parapet and t
he work to be done shall conform to the requirements of this Specification. The
workmanship shall be first class and the finished construction shall be neat in
appearance and true to line and grade. 401.4 Method of Measurement
The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of linear meters of specified ra
iling actually completed and accepted measured from center to center of end post
s. 401.5 Basis of Payment
The accepted quality, measured as prescribed in Section 401.4, shall be paid for
at the contract unit price for Railing, which price and payment shall be full c
ompensation for furnishing and placing all materials including all labor, equipm
ent, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this Item. Payment will be made
under:
Pay
Item Number 401
Description Railing
Unit of Measurement Meter
163
ITEM 402 – TIMBER STRUCTURES
402.1 Description This Item shall consist of the construction of timber structur
es to the dimensions, lines and grades as shown on the Plans or as ordered by th
e Engineer in accordance with these Specifications. The timber shall be treated
or untreated as called for on the Plans or Special Provisions. 402.2 Material Re
quirements 402.2.1 Timber It shall conform to the requirements of Item 713, Trea
ted and Untreated Timber. 402.2.2 Hardware All hardware shall be of the kind and
size specified on the Plans. All bolts, including drift bolts, shall be either
wrought iron or medium steel. Washers shall be either ogee gray iron casting or
malleable cast iron unless cut washers are specified on the Plans. Bolts shall h
ave square heads and nuts, unless otherwise specified. Nails shall be cut or rou
nd wire of standard form. Spikes shall be cut wire or spikes, or boat spikes, as
specified. All hardware shall be galvanized in conformity with AASHTO M 232 or
cadmium plated per ASTM M 165 Type OS, unless otherwise specified on the Plans o
r Special Provisions. 402.2.3 Paint It shall conform to the requirements of Item
709, Paints or Item 411, Paint. 402.2.4 Structural Steel It shall conform to th
e applicable requirements of Item 712, Structural Metal. 402.2.5 Preservatives T
he preservative shall be creosote oil or creosote petroleum oil blend as called
for on the Plans or by the Special Provisions, and shall conform to the Specific
ations for timber preservatives of the AASHTO M 133. When timber is intended for
marine use, creosote petroleum oil blend shall not be used.
164
402.3
Construction Requirements
402.3.1 Storage of Materials All timber which is to be stored on the job for any
length of time prior to its use in the structure shall be neatly stacked in pil
es to prevent warping or distortion. Untreated timber shall be open-stacked at l
east 300mm above the ground and the stack shall be sloped so as to shed water. C
reosote-treated timber shall be close-stacked and piled to prevent warping. The
ground underneath and in the vicinity of all material piles shall be cleared of
all weeds and rubbish. 402.3.2 Treated Timber All treated timber shall be framed
prior to treating. Care shall be exercised in handling all treated timber so as
not to break or penetrate the treatment with any tool or handling equipment. An
y piece of timber that has been damaged by the Contractor shall be replaced by h
im without extra compensation. Any cut made or hole bored in treated timber that
shall expose untreated wood shall be given three coats of hot creosote or carbo
lineum before the exposed part is assembled. 402.3.3 Timber Treatment Treatment
shall consist of the forcing of either creosote oil or a creosotepetroleum oil m
ixture into the outer fibers of the timber by a heat and pressure process. The t
reatment shall be so regulated that the curing process will not induce excessive
checking. The minimum penetration of the preservative with the surface of the t
imber shall be 20mm. The minimum retention of preservative per cubic metre of ti
mber shall be as follows: For general use, 195 kg by empty cell process For mari
ne use, 320 kg by full cell process The Engineer shall be notified at least ten
(10) days in advance of the date that the treating process will be performed in
order that the untreated timber, the treatment process, and the finished treated
timber may all be inspected. The Engineer will inspect the timber prior to trea
tment to determine conformance with the Specifications and suitability of condit
ions for treatment. He shall be permitted free access to the plant in order that
temperatures, pressures and quantities and types of treatment materials used ma
y be observed. Samples of the creosote or creosote-petroleum mixture shall be fu
rnished as required for tests. After completion of the treatment, the timber sha
ll be checked to determine penetration of treatment, amount of checking, quantit
y of free preservative remaining of the timber and any other visual evidence tha
t the treatment has been
165
performed in a satisfactory manner. The penetration of treatment shall be determ
ined by boring a sufficient number of well-distributed holes to determine the av
erage penetration. All such holes shall be plugged with plugs approximately 2mm
larger in diameter than the bit used in boring the holes. If the penetration of
preservative is less than the required amount, the entire charge, or such parts
thereof as are determined by the Engineer or his authorized representative to be
unsatisfactory, may be retreated. If after retreatment, the penetration is stil
l insufficient, the retreatment pieces shall be rejected. Any excessive checking
caused by the treating process shall be cause for rejection of the pieces in wh
ich the excessive checking occurs. The treating plant shall be equipped with ade
quate thermometers and pressure gages so that the process can be accurately cont
rolled and a continuous record made of stages of the treating process. If reques
ted by the Engineer, records shall be furnished showing the duration, maximum an
d minimum temperatures and pressures used during all stages of the process. 402.
3.4 Untreated Timber In structures of untreated timber, all of the following sur
faces shall be coated thoroughly with two (2) coats of hot creosote oil or carbo
lineum before the timber are assembled: ends, tops and all contact surfaces of p
osts, sills, caps, floor beams and stringers, all ends, joints and contact surfa
ces of bracing. The back surface of all bulkheads and any other timber in direct
contact with earth shall be similarly treated. 402.3.5 Bolts and Washers Washer
s of the size and type specified shall be used under all bolt heads and nuts tha
t would otherwise be in contact with wood. Cast iron washers shall have a thickn
ess equal to one fourth the diameter of the bolt and the diameter of the washer
shall be four times its thickness. For malleable or plate washers, the diameter
or side size of the square shall be equal to four times the diameter of the bolt
. Cap washers shall be used when the timber is in contact with earth. All nuts s
hall be checked effectively after being finally tightened. 402.3.6 Pile Bents Th
e pile shall be driven as indicated on the Plans, with a variation of the portio
n above the ground of not more than 6mm per 300mm from the vertical or batter in
dicated, or so that the cap may be placed in its proper location without inducin
g excessive stresses on the piles. Excessive manipulation of piles will not be p
ermitted and the Contractor will be required to redrive or use other satisfactor
y methods to avoid such manipulations. No shimming on tops of piles will be perm
itted.
166
The piles for any one bent shall be carefully selected as to size and quality to
avoid undue bending or distortion of the sway bracing. However, care shall be e
xercised in the distribution of piles of various sizes to secure uniform strengt
h and rigidity in the bents of any given structure. Cut offs shall be accurately
made to insure perfect hearing between caps and piles. 402.3.7 Frame Bents Conc
rete pedestal for the support of framed bents shall be finished carefully so tha
t sills or posts will take even bearing on them. Dowels for anchoring sills or p
osts shall be set the concrete is cast and shall project at least 150mm above th
e tops of the pedestals. Sills shall have true and even bearing on piles or pede
stals. They shall be drift-bolted with bolts extending into the piles or pedesta
ls at least 150mm. When possible, all earth shall be removed from contact with s
ills so that there will be free circulation of air around the sills. 402.3.8 Cap
s Timber caps shall be placed to obtain even and uniform bearing over the tops o
f the supporting posts or piles with their ends in alignment. All caps shall be
secured by driftbolts, set approximately at the center extending at least 230mm
into the post or piles. 402.3.9 Bracing Bracing shall be bolted through at inter
sections to the pile, posts, caps or sills. 402.3.10 Stringers Stringers shall b
e sized at bearings and shall be placed in position so that knots near the edges
will be in the top portions of the stringers. Outside stringers may have butt j
oints but interior stringers shall be lapped to take bearing over the full width
of the floor beam or cap at each end. The lapped ends of untreated stringers sh
all be securely fastened to caps by driftbolts. When stringers are two panels in
length, the joints shall be staggered. Cross-bridging between stringers shall b
e neatly and accurately framed and securely toe-nailed with at least two nails a
t each end. All cross-bridging members shall have full bearing at each end again
st the sides of stringers. Unless otherwise specified, cross bridging shall be p
laced at the center of each span. 402.3.11 Plank Floors Roadway and sidewalk flo
or planks, unless otherwise stipulated, shall be surfaced one side and one edge
(SISIE). The planks shall be laid heartside down, with 7mm openings between them
for seasoned materials and with tight joints for unseasoned material. Each plan
k shall be spiked securely to each joint or
167
supporting member. The planks shall be graded carefully as to thickness, and so
laid that no two adjacent planks shall vary in thickness by more than 1.6mm. 402
.3.12 Laminated or Strip Floors Planks for laminated or strip floors shall have
a nominal thickness of 50mm and shall be surfaced to a uniform width (SIE), and
when so specified, to a uniform thickness (SIS). Unless otherwise stipulated, no
splicing of planks will be allowed. Planks shall be laid with the surfaced edge
down and each plank shall be toe-nailed to each alternative stringer. The naili
ng of successive planks shall be staggered so that the spacing of nails along ea
ch stringer shall not be less than 100mm. In addition, each piece shall be naile
d horizontally to adjacent pieces at 450mm centers, and staggered both horizonta
lly and vertically with nails in adjacent pieces. All floors shall be cut to a s
traight line along the sides of the roadway. 402.3.13 Railing and Rail Posts Rai
ling and rail posts shall be built as shown on the Plans and shall be constructe
d in a workmanlike and substantial manner. All railing and rail post materials s
hall be surfaced on four sides (S4S). All rails shall be continuous and squarely
butt-joined at the post. 402.3.14 Wheel Guards Wheel guards shall be accurately
constructed true to line and grade in accordance with the Plans. Unless otherwi
se specified, wheel guards shall be surfaced on one side and one edge (SISIE). W
heel guards shall be laid in sections not less than 3.60mm long. 402.4 Method of
Measurement Timber structures shall be measured by the completed span and shall
include all materials, equipment and labor used to finish the structure as call
ed for in the Bid, Plans and Specifications. 402.5 Basis of Payment Payment for
the timber structure measured in Section 402.4, Method of Measurement, shall con
stitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, preservative treatment,
if called for in the Contract, equipment, hardware and other metal parts, tools
and labor necessary for the completion of the structure and painting, if require
d in a satisfactory manner and all incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
168
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 402 (1)
Description Timber Structure
Unit of Measurement Span
ITEM 403 – METAL STRUCTURES 403.1 Description This work shall consist of steel str
uctures and the steel structure portions of composite structures, constructed in
reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the
Plans or established by the Engineer. The work will include the furnishing, fabr
icating, hauling, erecting, welding and painting of structural metals called for
in the Special Provision or shown on the Plans. Structural metals will include
structural steel, rivet, welding, special and alloy steels, steel forgings and c
astings and iron castings. This work will also include any incidental metal cons
truction not otherwise provided for, all in accordance with these Specifications
, Plans and Special Provisions. 403.2 Material Requirements Materials shall meet
the requirements of Item 712, Structural Metal; Item 409, Welded Structural Ste
el, and Item 409, Welded Structural Steel; and Item 709, Paints. 403.3 Construct
ion Requirements 403.3.1 Inspection
The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least fifteen (15) days notice prior t
o the beginning of work at the mill or shop, so that the required inspection may
be made. The term “mill” means any rolling mill, shop or foundry where material for
the work is to be manufactured or fabricated. No material shall be rolled or fa
bricated until said inspection has been provided. The Contractor shall furnish t
he Engineer with copies of the certified mill reports of the structural steel, p
referably before but not later than the delivery of the steel to the job site. T
he Contractor shall furnish all facilities for inspection and the Engineer shall
be allowed free access to the mill or shop and premises at all times. The Contr
actor shall furnish, without charge, all labor, machinery, material and tools ne
cessary to prepare test specimens.
169
Inspection at the mill or shop is intended as a means of facilitating the work a
nd avoiding errors and it is expressly understood that it will not relieve the C
ontractor from any responsibility for imperfect material or workmanship and the
necessity for replacing same. The acceptance of any material or finished member
at the mill or shop by the Engineer shall not preclude their subsequent rejectio
n if found defective before final acceptance of the work. Inspection of welding
will be in accordance with the provision of Section 5 of the “Standard Code for Ar
c and Gas Welding in Building Construction” of the American Welding Society. 403.3
.2 Stock Material Control
When so specified in the Contract, stock material shall be segregated into class
es designated as “identified” or “unidentified”. Identified material is material which c
an be positively identified as having been rolled from a given heat for which ce
rtified mill test can be produced. Unidentified material shall include all other
general stock materials. When it is proposed to use unidentified material, the
Engineer shall be notified of such intention at least fifteen (15) days in advan
ce of commencing fabrication to permit sampling and testing. When so indicated o
r directed, the Contractor shall select such material as he wishes to use from s
tock, and place it in such position that it will be accessible for inspection an
d sampling. The Contractor shall select identified material from as few heat num
bers as possible, and furnish the certified mill test reports on each of such he
at numbers. Two samples shall be taken from each heat number as directed, one fo
r a tension test and one for a bend test. In the case of unidentified stock, the
Engineer may, at his discretion, select any number of random test specimens. Ea
ch bin from which rivets or bolts are taken shall subject to random test. Five r
ivets or bolts may be selected by the Engineer from each bin for test purposes.
Structural material, either plain or fabricated, shall be stored above the groun
d upon platforms, skids, or other supports. It shall be kept free from dirt, gre
ase, or other foreign matter, and shall be protected as far as practicable from
corrosion. 403.3.3 Fabrication
These Specifications apply to riveted, bolted and welded construction. The Contr
actor may, however, with approval of the Engineer, substitute high tensile stren
gth steel bolts equivalent to the rivets in any connection. Workmanship and fini
sh shall be in accordance with the best general practice in modern bridge shops.
Portions of the work exposed to view shall be finished neatly. Shearing, flame
cutting, and chipping shall be done carefully and accurately.
170
Structural material, either plain or fabricated, shall be stored above the groun
d upon platforms, skids or other supports. It shall be kept free from dirt, grea
se or other foreign matter, and shall be protected as far as practicable from co
rrosion. Rolled material before being laid off or worked must be straight. If st
raightening is necessary, it shall be done by methods that will not injure the m
etal. Sharp kinks and bends will be cause for rejection of the material. Prepara
tion of material shall be in accordance with AWS (American Welding Society) D 1.
1, paragraph 3.2 as modified by AASHTO Standard Specification for Welding of Str
uctural Steel Highway Bridges. 403.3.4 Finishing and Shaping
Finished members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends and open join
ts. 1. Edge Planing Sheared edges of plates more than 15.9 mm in thickness and c
arrying calculated stresses shall be planed to a depth of 6.3 mm. Re-entrant cut
s shall be filleted before cutting. 2. Facing of Bearing Surfaces The surface fi
nish of bearing and based plates and other bearing surfaces that are to come in
contact with each other or with concrete shall meet the American National Standa
rds Institute surface roughness requirements as defined in ANSI B-46.1-47, Surfa
ce Roughness Waviness and Lay, Part I: Steel slabs Heavy plates in contact in sh
oes to Be welded Milled ends of compression members, stiffeners and fillers Brid
ge rollers and rockers Pins and pin holes Sliding bearings 3. Abutting Joints Ab
utting joints in compression members and girders flanges, and in tension members
where so specified on the drawings, shall be faced and brought to an even beari
ng. Where joints are not faced, the opening shall not exceed 6.3 mm. ANSI 2,000
ANSI 1,000 ANSI 500 ANSI 250 ANSI 125 ANSI 125
171
4.
End Connection Angles Floor beams, stringers and girders having end connection a
ngles shall be built to plan length back to back of connection angles with a per
missible tolerance of 0 mm to minus 1.6 mm. If end connections are faced, the fi
nished thickness of the angles shall not be less than that shown on the detail d
rawings, but in no case less than 9.5 mm.
5.
Lacing Bars The ends of lacing bars shall be neatly rounded unless another form
is required.
6.
Fabrication of Members Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, steel plates for mai
n members and splice plates for flanges and main tension members, not secondary
members, shall be cut and fabricated so that the primary direction of rolling is
parallel to the direction of the main tensile and/or compressive stresses. Fabr
icated members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends and open joints
.
7.
Web Plates (Riveted or Bolted) In girders having no cover plates and not to be e
ncased in concrete, the top edges of the web shall not extend above the backs of
the flange angles and shall not be more than 3.2 mm below at any point. Any por
tion of the plate projection beyond the angles shall be chipped flush with the b
acks of the angles. Web plates of girders having cover plates may not be more th
an 12.7 mm less in width than the distance back to back of flange angles. Splice
s in webs of girders without cover plates shall be sealed on top with red lead p
aste prior to painting. At web splices, the clearance between the ends of the pl
ates shall not exceed 9.5 mm. The clearance at the top and bottom ends of the we
b slice plates shall not exceed 6.3 mm.
8.
Bent Plates Cold-bent load-carrying rolled-steel plates shall conform to the fol
lowing: a. They shall be so taken from the stock plates that the bendline will b
e at right angles to the direction of rolling, except that cold-bent ribs for or
thotropic deck bridges may be bent in the direction of rolling if permitted by t
he Engineer.
172
b. The radius of bends shall be such that no cracking of the plate occurs. Minim
um bend radii, measured to the concave face of the metal, are shown in the follo
wing table: ASTM DESIGATION A36 A242 A440 A441 A529 Gr.42 Gr.45 Gr.50 Gr.55 Gr.6
0 Gr.65 A572 A588 A514b 2t 3t 2t 5t 2t a--3t a--3t THICKNESS, t in mm Over 12.7
Over 25.4 Over 38.1 To 25.4 to 38.1 to 50.08 2t 3t 4t 5t a--a--6t a--a--5t a--a-
----------3t 4t 5t 3t 4t ---4t a-----5t a-----6t ----------------
Up to 6.3 1.5t 2t 2.5t 2t 2t 2t 2t 2.5t 3t 3.5t 4t
Over 6.3 To 12.7 1.5t 3t 3.5t 3t 2t 2t 2t 2.5t 3t 3.5t 4t
a
It is recommended that steel in this thickness range be bent hot. Hot bending ho
wever, may result in a slight decrease in the as-rolled mechanical properties. T
he mechanical properties of ASTM A 514 steel results from a quench-andtemper-ope
ration. Hot bending may adversely affect these mechanical properties. If necessa
ry to hotbend, fabricator should discuss procedure with steel supplier. c. Befor
e bending, the corners of the plate be rounded to a radius of 1.6 mm throughout
that portion of the plate where the bending is to occur. 9. Fit of Stiffeners En
d stiffeners of girders and stiffeners intended as supports for concentrated loa
ds shall have full bearing (either milled, ground or on weldable steel in compre
ssion areas of flanges, welded as shown on the Plans or specified) on the flange
s to which they transmit load or from which they receive load. Stiffeners not in
tended to support concentrated loads shall, unless shown or specified otherwise,
fit sufficiently tight to exclude water after being painted, except that for we
lded flexural members, the ends of stiffeners adjacent to the
b
173
tension flanges shall be cut back as shown on the Plans. under stiffeners shall
fit within 6.3 mm at each end.
Fillers
Welding will be permitted in lieu of milling or grinding if noted on the Plans o
r in the Special Provisions. Brackets, clips, gussets, stiffeners, and other det
ail material shall not be welded to members or parts subjected to tensile stress
unless approved by the Engineer. 10. Eyebars Pin holes may be flame cut at leas
t 50.8 mm smaller in diameter than the finished pin diameter. All eyebars that a
re to be placed side by side in the structure shall be securely fastened togethe
r in the order that they will be placed on the pin and bored at both ends while
so clamped. Eyebars shall be packed and matchmarked for shipment and erection. A
ll identifying marks shall be stamped with steel stencils on the edge of one hea
d of each member after fabrication is completed so as to be visible when the bar
s are nested in place on the structure. The eyebars shall be straight and free f
rom twists and the pin holes shall be accurately located on the centerline of th
e bar. The inclination of any bar to the plane of the truss shall not exceed 1.6
mm to 305 mm. The edges of eyebars that lie between the transverse centerline o
f their pin holes shall be cut simultaneously with two mechanically operated tor
ches abreast of each other, guided by a substantial template, in such a manner a
s to prevent distortion of the plates. 11. Annealing and Stress Relieving Struct
ural members which are indicated in the Contract to be annealed or normalized sh
all have finished machining, boring and straightening done subsequent to heat tr
eatment. Normalizing and annealing (full annealing) shall be in accordance with
ASTM E 44. The temperatures shall be maintained uniformly throughout the furnace
during heating and cooling so that the temperature at no two points on the memb
er will differ by more than 37.80C at any one time. Members of A514/A517 steels
shall not be annealed or normalized and shall be stress relieved only with the a
pproval of the Engineer. A record of each furnace charge shall identify the piec
es in the charge and show the temperatures and schedule actually used. Proper in
struments including recording pyrometers, shall be provided for determining at a
ny time the temperatures of members in the furnace. The records of the treatment
operation shall be available to and meet the approval of the Engineer. Members,
such as bridge shoes, pedestals, or others which are built up by welding sectio
ns of plate together shall be stress relieved
174
in accordance with the provisions of Subsection 403.3.11 when required by the Pl
ans, Specifications or Special Provisions governing the Contract. 12. Tests When
full size tests of fabricated structural members or eyebars are required by the
Contract, the Plans or Specifications will state the number and nature of the t
ests, the results to be attained and the measurements of strength, deformation o
r other performances that are to be made. The Contractor will provide suitable f
acilities, material, supervision and labor necessary for making and recording th
e tests. The members tested in accordance with the Contract will be paid for in
accordance with Subsection 403.3.5.1. The cost of testing, including equipment h
andling, supervision labor and incidentals for making the test shall be included
in the contract price for the fabrication or fabrication and erection of struct
ural steel, whichever is the applicable item in the Contract, unless otherwise s
pecified. 403.3.5 Pins and Rollers
Pins and rollers shall be accurately turned to the dimensions shown on the Plans
and shall be straight, smooth, and free from flaws. Pins and rollers more 228.6
mm or less in diameter may either be forged and annealed. Pins and rollers 228.
6 mm or less in diameter may either be forged and annealed or coldfinished carbo
n-steel shafting. In pins larger than 228.6 mm in diameter, a hole not less than
50.8 mm in diameter shall be bored full length along the axis after the forging
has been allowed to cool to a temperature below the critical range under suitab
le conditions to prevent injury by too rapid cooling and before being annealed.
Pin holes shall be bored true to the specified diameter, smooth and straight, at
right angles with the axis of the member and parallel with each other unless ot
herwise specified. The final surface shall be produced by a finishing cut. The d
istance outside to outside of holes in tension members and inside to inside of h
oles in compression members shall not vary from that specified more than 0.8 mm.
Boring of holes in built-up members shall be done after the riveting is complet
ed. The diameter of the pin hole shall not exceed that of the pin by more than 0
.51 mm for pins 127 mm or less in diameter, or 0.8 mm for larger pins. The pilot
and two driving nuts for each size of pin shall be furnished, unless otherwise
specified.
175
403.3.6
Fastener Holes (Rivets and Bolts)
All holes for rivets or bolts shall be either punched or drilled. Material formi
ng parts or a member composed of not more than five thickness of metal may be pu
nched 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the rivets or bolts whenever th
e thickness of the material is not greater than 19 mm for structural steel, 15.9
mm for high-strength steel or 12.7 mm for quenched and tempered alloy steel, un
less subpunching and reaming is required for field connections. When there are m
ore than five thicknesses or when any of the main material is thicker than 19 mm
for structural steel, 15.9 mm for high-strength steel, or 12.7 mm for quenched
and tempered alloy steel, all holes shall either be subdrilled or drilled full s
ize. When required for field connections, all holes shall either be subpunched o
r subdrilled (subdrilled if thickness limitation governs) 4.8 mm smaller and, af
ter assembling, reamed 1.6 mm larger or drilled full size 1.6 mm larger than the
nominal diameter of the rivets or bolts. When permitted by design criteria, enl
arged or slotted holes are allowed with high-strength bolts. For punched holes,
the diameter of the die shall not exceed the diameter of the punch by more than
1.6 mm. If any holes must be enlarged to admit the fasteners, they shall be ream
ed. Holes shall be clean cut, without torn or ragged edges. Poor matching of hol
es will be cause for rejection. Reamed holes shall be cylindrical, perpendicular
to the member, and not more than 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the
fasteners. Where practicable, reamers shall be directed by mechanical means. Dr
illed holes shall be 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the fasteners. B
urrs on the outside surfaces shall be removed. Poor matching of holes will be ca
use for rejection. Reaming and drilling shall be done with twist drills. If requ
ired by the Engineer, assembled parts shall be taken apart for removal of burrs
caused by drilling. Connecting parts requiring reamed or drilled holes shall be
assembled and securely held while being reamed or drilled and shall be matchmark
ed before disassembling. Unless otherwise specified, holes for all field connect
ions and field splices of main truss or arch members, continuous beams, towers (
each face), bents, plate girders and rigid frames shall be subpunched (or subdri
lled if subdrilling is required) and subsequently reamed while assembled in the
shop in accordance with Subsection 403.3.7. All holes for floor-beam and stringe
r field end connections shall be subpunched and reamed to a steel template reame
d while being assembled. Reaming or drilling full size of field connection throu
gh templates shall be done after templates have been located with the utmost car
e as to position and angle and firmly bolted in place. Templates used for the re
aming of matching members, or of the opposite faces of one member, shall be exac
t duplicated.
176
Templates for connections which duplicate shall be so accurately located that li
ke members are duplicates and require no matchmarking. If additional subpunching
and reaming is required, it will be specified in the Special Provisions or on t
he Plans. Alternately, for any field connection or splice designated above in li
eu of sub-sized holes and reaming while assembled, or drilling holes full-size w
hile assembled, the Contractor shall have the option to drill bolt holes full-si
ze in unassembled pieces and/or connections including templates for use with mat
ching sub-sized and reamed holes means of suitable numerically-controlled (N/C)
drilling equipment subject to the specific provisions contained in this Subsecti
on. If N/C drilling equipment is used, the Engineer, unless otherwise stated in
the Special Provisions or on the Plans, may require the Contractor, by means if
check assemblies to demonstrate that this drilling procedure consistently produc
es holes and connections meeting the requirements of conventional procedures. Th
e Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a detailed outline of the
procedures that he proposes to follow in accomplishing the work from initial dr
illing through check assembly, if required, to include the specific members of t
he structure that may be N/C drilled, the sizes of the holes, the location of co
mmon index and other reference points, composition of check assemblies and all o
ther pertinent information. Holes drilled by N/C drilling equipment shall be dri
lled to appropriate size either through individual pieces, or any combination of
pieces held tightly together. All holes punched full size, subpunched or subdri
lled shall be so accurately punched that after assembling (before any reaming is
done), a cylindrical pin 3.2 mm smaller in diameter than the nominal size of th
e punched hole may be entered perpendicular to the face of the member, without d
rifting, in at least 75 percent of the contiguous holes in the same plane. If th
e requirement is not fulfilled, the badly punched pieces will be rejected. If an
y hole will not pass a pin 4.8 mm smaller in diameter than the nominal size of t
he punched holes, this will cause for rejection. When holes are reamed or drille
d, 85 percent of the holes in any continuous group shall, after reaming or drill
ing, show no offset greater than 0.8 mm between adjacent thickness of metal. All
steel templates shall have hardened steel bushings in holes accurately dimensio
ned from the center lines if the connections as inscribed on the template. The c
enter lines shall be used in locating accurately the template from the milled or
scribed ends of the members.
177
403.3.7
Shop Assembly 1. Fitting for Riveting and Bolting Surfaces of metal in contact s
hall be cleaned before assembling. The parts of a member shall be assembled, wel
l pinned and firmly drawn together with bolts before reaming or riveting is comm
enced. Assembled pieces shall be taken apart, if necessary, for the removal of b
urrs and shavings produced by the reaming operation. The member shall be free fr
om twists, bends and other deformation. Preparatory to the shop riveting of full
-sized punched material, the rivet holes, if necessary, shall be spear-reamed fo
r the admission of the rivets. The reamed holes shall not be more than 1.6 mm la
rger than the nominal diameter of the rivets. End connection angles, and similar
parts shall be carefully adjusted to correct positions and bolted, clamped, or
otherwise firmly in place until riveted. Parts not completely riveted in the sho
p shall be secured by bolts, in so far as practicable, to prevent damage in ship
ment and handling. 2. Shop Assembling The field connections of main members of t
russes, arches, continuous beam spans, bents, towers (each face), plate girders
and rigid frames shall be assembled in the shop with milled ends of compression
members in full bearing, and then shall have their subsize holes reamed to speci
fied size while the connections are assembled. Assembly shall be “Full Truss or Gi
rders Assembly” unless “Progressive Chord Assembly” or “Special Complete Structure Assem
bly” is specified in the Special Provisions or on the Plans. Check assemblies with
Numerically-Controlled Drilled Fields Connections shall be in accordance with t
he provision of 2 (f) of this Subsection. Each assembly, including camber, align
ment, accuracy of holes and fit of milled joints, shall be approved by the Engin
eer before reaming is commenced or before an N/C drilled check assembly is disma
ntled. The fabricator shall furnished the Engineer a camber diagram showing the
camber at each panel point in the cases of trusses or arch ribs and at the locat
ion of field splices and fractions of span length (0.25 points minimum, 0.10 poi
nts maximum) in case of continuous beam and girders or rigid frames. When the sh
op assembly is Full Truss or Girder Assembly or Special Complete Structure Assem
bly, the camber diagram shall show the camber
178
measured in assembly. When any of the other methods of shop assembly is used, th
e camber diagram shall show calculated camber. Methods of assembly shall be desc
ribed below: a. Full of Truss or Girders Assembly shall consist of assembling al
l members of each truss, arch rib, bent, tower face, continuous beam line, plate
girder or rigid frame at one time. b. Progressive Truss or Girder Assembly shal
l consist of assembling initially for each truss, arch rib, bent, tower face, co
ntinuous beam line, plate girder, or rigid frame all members in at least three c
ontinuous shop sections or panels but not less than the number of panels associa
ted with three continuous chord lengths (i.e., length between field splices) and
not less than 45.72 m in case of structures longer than 45.72 m. At least one s
hop section or panel or as many panels as are associated with a chord length sha
ll be added at the advancing end of the assembly before any member is removed fr
om the rearward end so that the assembled portion of the structure is never less
than that specified above. c. Full Chord Assembly shall consist of assembling w
ith geometric angles at the joints, the full length of each chord or each truss
or open spandrel arch, or each leg of each bent or tower, than reaming their fie
ld connection holes while the members are assembled; and reaming the web member
connections to steel templates set at geometric (not cambered) angular relation
to the chord lines. Field connection holes in web members shall be reamed to ste
el templates. At least one end of each web member shall be milled or shall be sc
ribed normal to the longitudinal axis of the member and the templates of both en
ds of the member shall be accurately located from one of the milled ends or scri
bed line. d. Progressive Chord Assembly shall consist of assembling contiguous c
hord members in the manner specified for Full Chord Assembly, and in the number
and length specified for Progressive Truss or Girder Assembly. e. Special Comple
te Structure Assembly shall consist of assembling the entire structure, includin
g the floor system. (This procedure is ordinarily needed only for complicated st
ructures such as those having curbed girders, or extreme skew in combination wit
h severe grade or camber). The assembly including camber, alignment, accuracy of
holes and fit of milled joints shall be approved by the Engineer before reaming
is commenced.
179
A Contractor shall furnished the Engineer a camber diagram showing the camber at
each panel point of each truss, arch rib, continuous beam line, plate girder or
rigid frame. When shop assembly is Full Truss or Girder Assembly or Special Com
plete Structure Assembly, the camber diagram shall show the camber measured in a
ssembly. When any of the other methods of shop assembly is used, the camber diag
ram shall show calculated camber. f. Check Assemblies with Numerically-Controlle
d Drilled Field Connections. A check assembly shall be required for each major s
tructural type of each project, unless otherwise designated on the Plans or in t
he Special Provisions, and shall consist of at least three contiguous shop secti
ons or, in a truss, all members in at least three contiguous panels but not less
than the number of panels associated with three contiguous chord lengths (i.e.,
length between field splices). Check assemblies should be based on the proposed
order erection, joints in bearings, special complex points, and similar conside
rations. Such special points could be the portals of skewed trusses, etc. Use of
either geometric angles (giving theoretically zero secondary stresses under dea
dload conditions after erection) or cambered angles (giving theoretically zero s
econdary stresses under no-load conditions) should be designated on the Plans or
in the Special Provisions. The check assemblies shall be preferably be the firs
t such sections of each major structural type to be fabricated. No matchmaking a
nd no shop assemblies other than the check assemblies shall be required. If the
check assembly fails in some specific manner to demonstrate that the required ac
curacy is being obtained, further check assemblies may be required by the Engine
er for which there shall be no additional cost to the contracting authority. 403
.3.8 Rivets and Riveting
The size of rivets called for on the Plans shall be the size before heating. Riv
et heads shall be of standard shape, unless otherwise specified, and of uniform
size for the same diameter of rivet. They shall be full, neatly made, concentric
with the rivets holes, and in full contact with the surface of the member. Suff
icient rivets for field connections shall be furnished to rivet the entire struc
ture with an ample surplus to replace all rivets burned, lost or cut out. Rivets
shall be heated uniformly to a “light cherry red color” and shall be driven while h
ot. Any rivet whose point is heated more than the remainder shall
180
not be driven. When a rivet is ready for driving, it shall be free from slag, sc
ale and other adhering matter. Any rivet which is sealed excessively, will be re
jected. All rivets that are loose, burned, badly formed, or otherwise defective
shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory rivets. Any rivet whose head is
defective in size or whose head is driven off center will be considered defectiv
e and shall be removed. Stitch rivets that are loosened by driving of adjacent r
ivets shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory rivets. Caulking, recappin
g, or double gunning of rivets heads will not be permitted. Shop rivets shall be
driven by direct-acting rivet machines when practicable. Approved bevelled rive
t sets shall be used for forming rivet heads on sloping surfaces. When the use o
f a direct-acting rivet machine is not practicable, pneumatic hammers of approve
d size shall be used. Pneumatic bucking tools will be required when the size and
length of the rivets warrant their use. Rivets may be driven cold provided thei
r diameter is not over 9.5 mm. 403.3.9 Bolted Connections, Unfurnished, Turned a
nd Ribbed Bolts 1. General Bolts under this Subsection shall conform to “Specifica
tions for Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners”, AST
M A 307. Specifications for high strength bolts are covered under Subsection 403
.3.10. Bolts shall be unfinished, turned or an approved form of ribbed bolts wit
h hexagonal nuts and heads except that ribbed bolts shall have button heads. Bol
ted connections shall be used only as indicated by the Plans or Special Provisio
ns. Bolts not tightened to the proof loads shall have single self locking nuts o
r double nuts. Bevel washers shall be used where bearing faces have a slope or m
ore than 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis. Bolts shall be of
such length that will extend entirely through their nuts but not more than 6.3
mm beyond them. Bolts shall be driven accurately into the holes without damage t
o the threads. A snap shall be used to prevent damage to the heads. The heads an
d nuts shall be drawn tight against the work with the full effort of a man using
a suitable wrench, not less than 381 mm long for bolts of nominal diameter 19 m
m and over. Heads of bolts shall be tapped with a hammer while the nuts are bein
g tightened.
181
2. Unfinished Bolts Unfinished bolts shall be furnished unless other types are s
pecified. The number of bolts furnished shall be 5 percent more than the actual
number shown on the Plans for each size and length. 3. Turned Bolts The surface
of the body of turned bolts shall meet the ANSI roughness rating value of 125. H
eads and nuts shall be hexagonal with standard dimensions for bolts of the nomin
al size specified or the next larger nominal size. Diameter of threads shall be
equal to the body of the bolt or the nominal diameter of the bolt specified. Hol
es for turned bolts shall be carefully reamed with bolts furnished to provide fo
r a light driving fit. Threads shall be entirely outside of the holes. A washer
shall be provided under the nut. 4. Ribbed Bolts The body of ribbed shall be of
an approved form with continuous longitudinal ribs. The diameter of the body mea
sured on a circle through the points of the ribs shall be 1.98 mm greater than t
he nominal diameter specified for the bolts. Ribbed bolts shall be furnished wit
h round heads conforming to ANSI B 18.5 unless otherwise specified. Nuts shall b
e hexagonal, either recessed or with a washer of suitable thickness. Ribbed bolt
s shall make a driving fit with the holes. The hardness of the ribs shall be suc
h that the ribs do not mash down enough to permit the bolts to turn in the holes
during tightening. If for any reason the bolt twists before drawing tight, the
holes shall be carefully reamed and an oversized bolt used as a replacement. The
Contractor shall provide and supply himself with oversize bolts and nuts for th
is replacement in an amount not less than ten percent (10%) of the number of rib
bed bolts specified. 403.3.10 Bolted Connections (High Tensile-Strength Bolts) 1
. Bolts Bolts shall be AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325 or AASHTO M 253) tensioned to a
high tension. Other fasteners which meet the chemical requirements of AASHTO M 1
64 or M 253 and which meet the mechanical requirements of the same specification
in full size tests and which have body diameter and bearing areas under the hea
d and nut, or their equivalents, not less than those provided by a bolt and nut
of the same nominal dimensions prescribed above, may be used subject to the appr
oval of the Engineer.
182
Bolts lengths shall be determined by adding the grip-length values given in Tabl
e 403.1 to the total thickness of connected material. The values of Table 403.1
compensate for manufacturer’s tolerance, the use of heavy semi-finished hexagon nu
t and a positive “stick-through” at the end of the bolt. For each hardened flat wash
er that is used and 4 mm to the tabular value and for each bevelled washer add 7
.9 mm. The length determined shall be adjusted to the next longer 6.3 mm. Table
403.1 – Grip-Length Values Bolts Size (mm) To determine required bolt length, add
grip (mm) * 17.5 22.2 25.4 28.6 31.7 38.1 41.3 44.4 47.6
9.5 12.7 19.0 22.2 25.4 28.6 31.7 34.9 38.1
* Does not include allowance for washer thickness 2. Bolted Parts The slope of s
urface of bolted parts in contact with the bolt head and nut shall not exceed 1:
20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis. Bolted parts shall fit solid
ly together when assembled and shall not be separated by gaskets or any other in
terposed compressible material. When assembled, all joint surfaces, including th
ose adjacent to the bolt head, nuts or washers, shall be free of scale, except t
ight mill scale, and shall also be free of burrs, dirt and other foreign materia
l that would prevent solid seating of the parts. Paint is permitted unconditiona
lly in bearing-type connections. In friction-type connections, the Class, as def
ined below, indicating the condition of the contact surfaces shall be specified
on the Plans. Where no Class is specified, all joint surfaces shall be free of s
cale, except tight mill scale and shall not have a vinyl wash. a. Classes A, B a
nd C (uncoated). Contact surfaces shall be free of oil, paint, lacquer or other
coatings. b. Class D (hot-dip galvanized and roughened). Contact surfaces shall
be tightly scored by wire brushing or blasting after galvanizing and prior to as
sembly. The wire brushing treatment 183
shall be a light application of manual or power brushing that marks or scores th
e surface but remove relatively little of the zinc coating. The blasting treatme
nt shall be a light “brush-off” treatment which will produce a dull gray appearance.
However, neither treatment should be severed enough to produce any break or dis
continuity in the zinc surface. c. Classes E and F (blast-cleaned, zinc rich pai
nt). Contact surfaces shall be coated with organic or inorganic zinc rich paint
as defined in the Steel Structures Painting Council Specification SSPC 12.00. d.
Classes G and H (blast-cleaned, metallized zinc or aluminum). Contact surfaces
shall be coated in accordance with AWS C2.2, Recommended Practice for Metallizin
g with Aluminum and Zinc for Protection of Iron and Steel, except that subsequen
t sealing treatments, described in Section IV therein shall not be used. e. Clas
s I (vinyl wash). Contact surfaces shall be coated in accordance with the provis
ions of the Steel Structure Painting Council Pretreatment Specifications SSPC PT
3. AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) Type 2 and AASHTO M 253 bolts shall not be galvaniz
ed nor shall they be used to connect galvanized material. 3. Installation a. Bol
t Tension. Each fastener shall be tightened to provide, when all fasteners in th
e joints are tight at least the minimum bolt tension shown in Table 403.2 for th
e size of fastener used. Threaded bolts shall be tightened with properly calibra
ted wrenches or by the turn-of-nut method. If required, because of bolt entering
and wrench operation clearances, tightening by either procedure may be done by
turning the bolt while the nut is prevented from rotating. Impact wrenches, if u
sed, shall be of adequate capacity and sufficiently supplied with air to perform
the required tightening of each bolt in approximately ten seconds. AASHTO M 253
and galvanized AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) bolts shall not be reused. Other AASHT
O M 164 (ASTM A 325) bolts may be reused, but not more than once, if approved by
the Engineer. Retightening previously tightened bolts which may have been loose
ned by the tightening of adjacent bolts shall not be considered as a reuse. b. W
ashers. All fasteners shall have a hardened washer under the element (nut or bol
t head) turned in tightening except that AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) bolts install
ed by the turn of the
184
nut method in holes which are not oversized or slotted may have the washer omitt
ed. Hardened washers shall be used under both the head and nut regardless of the
element turned in the case of AASHTO M 253 bolts if the material against which
it bears has a specified yield strength less than 275.76 MPa. Table 403.2 – Bolt T
ension Minimum Bolt Tension1, kg. AASHTO M AASHTO M 253 164 (ASTM A (ASTM A 420)
325) Bolts Bolts 5 466 6 758 8 709 10 569 12 882 15 821 13 268 21 999 23 360 24
312 25 605 36 786 32 522 45 858 38 760 55 111 47 174 66 905
Bolt Size, mm
12.7 15.9 19.0 22.2 25.4 28.6 31.7 34.9 38.1
1
Equals to 70 percent of specified minimum tensile strength bolts. Where an outer
face of the bolted parts has a slope of more than 1:20 with respect to a Plane
normal to the bolt axis, a smooth bevelled washer shall be used to compensate fo
r the lack of parallel line.
c. Calibrated Wrench Tightening. When Calibrated wrenches are used to provide th
e bolt tension as specified above, their setting shall be such as to induce a bo
lt tension 5 to 10 percent in excess of this value. These wrenches shall be cali
brated at least once each working day by tightening, in a device capable of indi
cating actual bolt tension, not less than three typical bolts of each diameter f
rom the bolts to be installed. Power wrenches shall be adjusted to installed or
cut-out at the selected tension. If manual torque wrenches are used, the torque
indication corresponding to the calibrating tension shall be noted and used in t
he installation of all the tested lot. Nuts shall be turned in the tightening di
rection when torque is measured. When using calibrated wrenches to install sever
al bolts in a single joint, the wrench shall be returned to “touch-up” bolts previou
sly tightened which may have been loosened by the tightening of adjacent bolts,
until all are tightened to the prescribed amount. d. Turn-of-Nut Tightening. Whe
n the turn-of-nut method is used to provide the bolt tension specified in (a) ab
ove, there shall first be enough bolts brought to a “snug tight” condition to insure
that the parts of the joint are brought into full contact with each other.
185
Snug tight is defined as the tightness attained by a few impacts of an impact wr
ench or the full effort of a man using an ordinary spud wrench. Following this i
nitial operation, bolts shall be placed in any remaining holes in the connection
and brought to snug tightness. All bolts in the joints shall then be tightened
additionally, by the applicable amount of nut rotation specified in Table 403.3
with tightening progressing systematically from the most rigid part of the joint
to its free edges. During this operation, there shall be no rotation of the par
t not turned by the wrench. e. Lock Pin and Collar Fasteners. The installation o
f lock pin and collar fasteners shall be by methods approved by the Engineer. Ta
ble 403.3 – Nut Rotation From Snug Tight Condition1 Disposition of Outer Faces of
Bolted Parts faces face Both Both faces One not normal to normal to bolt sloped
faces normal to axis and other more than 1:20 face sloped from normal to bolt ax
is not more 1:20 bolt axis (bevel not (bevel washer washers used) not used) 0.33
turn 0.5 turn 0.66 turn
Bolt Length measured from underside of head to extreme end of point Up to and in
cluding 4 diameters Over 4 diameters but not exceeding 8 diameters Over 8 diamet
ers but not exceeding 12 diameters2
1
0.5 turn
0.66 turn
0.625 turn
0.66 turn
0.83 turn
1 turn
Nut rotation is relative to bolt, regardless of the element (nut or bolt) being
turned. For bolts installed by ½ turn and less the tolerance should be plus or min
us 300, for bolts installed by 2/3 turn and more, the tolerance should be plus o
r minus 450. No research work has been performed by the Research Council on Rive
ted and Bolted Structural joints to establish the turn-of-nut procedure when bol
t lengths exceed 12 diameters. Therefore, the required rotation must be determin
ed by actual tests in a suitable tension device simulating the actual conditions
.
2
186
4. Inspection The Engineer will determine that the requirements of these Specifi
cations are not in the work. When the calibrated wrench method of tightening is
used, the Engineer shall have full opportunity to witness the calibration tests.
The Engineer will observe the installation and tightening of the bolts to deter
mine that the selected tightening procedure is properly used and will determine
that all bolts are tightened. The following inspection shall be used unless a mo
re extensive or different procedure is specified: a. The Contractor shall use an
inspecting wrench which may either be a torque wrench or a power wrench that ca
n be accurately adjusted in accordance with the requirements of Subsection 403.3
.10(3) (c) above, in the presence of the Engineer. b. Three bolts of the same gr
ade, size and condition as those under inspection shall be placed individually i
n a calibration device capable of indicating bolt tension. Length may be any len
gth representative of bolts used in the structure. There shall be a washer under
the part turned in tightening each bolt. c. When the inspecting wrench is a tor
que wrench, each of the three bolts specified above shall be tightened in the ca
libration device by any convenient means to the minimum tension specified for it
s size in Table 403.2. The inspecting wrench shall then be applied to the tighte
ned bolt and the torque necessary to run the nut or head 5 degrees (approximatel
y 25.4 mm at 304.8 mm radius) in the tightening direction shall be determined. T
he average torque measured in the tests of three bolts shall be taken as the job
inspection torque to be used in the manner specified below. d. When the inspect
ing wrench is a power wrench, it shall be adjusted so that it will tighten each
of the three bolts specified to a tension at least 5 but not more than 10 percen
t greater than the minimum tension specified for its size in Table 403.2. This s
etting of wrench shall be taken as the job inspecting torque to be used in the m
anner specified below. e. Bolts, represented by the three samples bolts prescrib
ed above, which have been tightening in the structure shall be inspected by appl
ying, in the tightening direction, the inspecting wrench and its job inspecting
torque to 10 percent of the bolts, but not less than two bolts selected at rando
m in each connection. If no nut or bolt head is turned by this application of th
e job inspecting torque, the connection shall be accepted as properly tightened.
187
If any nut or bolt head is turned by the application of the job inspecting torqu
e, this torque shall be applied to all bolts in the connection, and all bolts wh
ose nut or head is turned by the job inspecting torque shall be tightened and re
-inspected, or alternatively, the fabricator or erector, at his option may re-ti
ghten all the bolts in the connection and then resubmit the connection for the s
pecified inspection. 403.3.11 Welding Welding shall be done in accordance with t
he best modern practice and the applicable requirements at AWS D1.1 except as mo
dified by AASHTO “Standard Specifications for Welding of Structural Steel Highway
Bridges”. 403.3.12 Erection 1. General The Contractor shall provide the falsework
and all tools, machinery and appliances, including driftpins and fitting-up bolt
s, necessary for the expeditious handling of the work and shall erect the metal
work, remove the temporary construction, and do all work necessary to complete t
he structure as required by the Contract and in accordance with the Plans and th
ese Specifications. If shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, the Cont
ractor shall dismantle the old structure on the bridge site in accordance with I
tem 101, Removal of Structures and Obstructions. 403.3.13 Handling and Storing M
aterials Materials to be stored shall be placed on skids above the ground. It sh
all be kept clean and properly drained. Girders and beams shall be placed uprigh
t and shored. Long members, such as columns and chords, shall be supported on sk
ids placed near enough together to prevent injury from deflection. If the Contra
ct is for erection only, the Contractor shall check the material turned over to
him against the shipping lists and report promptly in writing any shortage or da
mage discovered. He shall be responsible for the loss of any material while in h
is care, or for any damage caused to it after being received by him. 403.3.14 Fa
lsework The false work shall be properly designed and substantially constructed
and maintained for the loads which will come upon it. The Contractor shall prepa
re and submit to the Engineer working drawings for falsework and working drawing
s for changes in any existing structure for maintaining traffic, in accordance w
ith Clause 45 of Part G, Div. II, Vol. I.
188
403.3.15 Method and Equipment Before starting the work of erection, the Contract
or shall inform the Engineer fully as to the method of erection he proposes to f
ollow, and the amount and character of equipment he proposes to use, which shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The approval of the Engineer shall
not be considered as relieving the Contractor of the responsibility for the safe
ty of his method or equipment or from carrying out the work in full accordance w
ith the Plans and Specifications. No work shall be done until such approval by t
he Engineer has been obtained. 403.3.16 Straightening Bent Materials The strengt
hening of plates, angles, other shapes and built-up members, when permitted by t
he Engineer, shall be done by methods that will not produce fracture or other in
jury. Distorted members shall be straightened by mechanical means or, if approve
d by the Engineer, by the carefully planned and supervised application of a limi
ted amount of localized heat, except that heat straightening of AASHTO M 244 (AS
TM A 514) or ASTM A 517 steel members shall be done only under rigidly controlle
d procedures, each application subject to the approval of the Engineer. In no ca
se shall the maximum temperature of the AASHTO M 244 (ASTM A 514) or ASTM A 517
steels exceed 607.20C, nor shall the temperature exceed 5100C at the weld metal
or within 152.4 mm of weld metal. Heat shall not be applied directly on weld met
al. In all other steels, the temperature of the heated area shall not exceed 648
.90C (a dull red) as controlled by temperature indicating crayons, liquids or bi
metal thermometers. Parts to be heat-straightened shall be substantially free of
stress and from external forces, except stresses resulting from mechanical mean
s used in conjunction with the application of heat. Following the straightening
of a bend or buckle, the surface of the metal shall be carefully inspected for e
vidence of fracture. 403.3.17 Assembling Steel The parts shall be accurately ass
embled as shown on the working drawings and any matchmarks shall be followed. Th
e material shall be carefully handled so that no parts will be bent, broken or o
therwise damaged. Hammering which will injure or distort the members shall not b
e done. Bearing surfaces and surfaces to be in permanent contact shall be cleane
d before the members are assembled. Unless erected by the cantilever methods, tr
uss spans shall be erected on blocking so placed as to give the trusses proper c
amber. The blocking shall be left in place until the tension chord splices are f
ully connected with permanent fasteners and all other truss connections pinned a
nd erection bolted. Splices of butt joints of compression members, that are mill
ed to bear and of railing shall not be permanently fastened until the spans have
been swung, except that such permanent fastening may be accomplished for the tr
uss members at any time that joint holes are fair. Splices and field connections
shall
189
have one-half of the holes filled with erection bolts and cylindrical erection p
ins (half bolts and half pins) before placing permanent fasteners. Splices and c
onnections carrying traffic during erection shall have three-fourths of the hole
s so filled, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Fitting-up bolts shall
be of the same nominal diameter as the permanent fasteners and cylindrical erect
ion pins will be 1.6 mm larger. 403.3.18 Riveting Pneumatic hammers shall be use
d for field riveting except when the use of hand tools is permitted by the Engin
eer. Rivets larger than 15.9 mm in diameter shall not be driven by hand. Cup-fac
ed dollies, fitting the head closely to insure good bearing, shall be used. Conn
ections shall be accurately and securely fitted up before the rivets are driven.
Drifting shall be only such as to draw the parts into position and not sufficie
nt to enlarge the holes or distort the metal. Unfair holes shall be reamed or dr
illed. Rivets shall be heated uniformly to a “light cherry red” color and shall be d
riven while hot. They shall not be overheated or burned. Rivet heads shall be fu
ll and symmetrical, concentric with the shank, and shall have full bearing all a
round. They shall not be smaller than the heads of the shop rivets. Rivets shall
be tight and shall grip the connected parts securely together. Caulking or recu
pping will not be permitted. In removing rivets, the surrounding metal shall not
be injured. If necessary, they shall be drilled out. 403.3.19 Pin Connections P
ilot and driving nuts shall be used in driving pins. They shall be furnished by
the Contractor without charge. Pins shall be so driven that the members will tak
e full bearing on them. Pin nuts shall be screwed up tight and the threads burre
d at the face of the nut with a pointed tool. 403.3.20 Setting Shoes and Bearing
s Shoes and bearing shall not be placed on bridge seat bearing areas that are im
properly finished, deformed, or irregular. They shall be set level in exact posi
tion and shall have full and even bearing. The shoes and bearing plates may be s
et by either of the following methods: 1. Method 1 The bridge seat bearing area
shall be heavily coated with red lead paint and then covered with three layers o
f 405 to 472 g/m2 duck, each layer being coated thoroughly on its top surface wi
th red lead paint. The shoes and bearing plates shall be placed in position whil
e the paint is plastic.
190
As alternatives to canvas and red lead, and when so noted on the Plans or upon w
ritten permission by the Engineer, the following may be used: a. Sheet lead of t
he designated thickness b. Preformed fabric pad composed of multiple layers of 2
70 g/m2 duck impregnated and bound with high quality natural rubber or of equiva
lent and equally suitable materials compressed into resilient pads of uniform th
ickness. The number of plies shall be such as to produce the specified thickness
, after compression and vulcanizing. The finished pads shall withstand compressi
on loads perpendicular to the plane of the laminations of not less than 7 kg/mm2
without detrimental reduction in thickness or extension. c. Elastomeric bearing
pads 2. Method 2 The shoes and bearing plates shall be properly supported and f
ixed with grout. No load shall be placed on them until the grout has set for at
least 96 hours, adequate provision being made to keep the grout well moistened d
uring this period. The grout shall consist of one part Portland Cement to one pa
rt of fine-grained sand. The location of the anchor bolts in relation to the slo
tted holes in expansion shoes shall correspond with the temperature at the time
of erection. The nuts on anchor bolts at the expansion ends shall be adjusted to
permit the free movement of the span. 403.3.21 Preparing Metal Surfaces for Pai
nting All surfaces of new structural steel which are to be painted shall be blas
t cleaned unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or approved in wr
iting by the Engineer. In repainting existing structures where partial cleaning
is required, the method of cleaning will be specified in the Special Provision.
The steel surfaces to be painted shall be prepared as outlined in the “Steel Struc
tures Painting Council Specifications” (SSPC) meeting one of the following classes
of surface preparation. a. b. c. d. SSPC – SP – 5 SSPC – SP – 6 SSPC – SP – 8 SSPC – SP – 10
ite Metal Blast Cleaning Commercial Blast Cleaning Pickling Near White Blast Cle
aning
191
Blast cleaning shall leave all surfaces with a dense and uniform anchor pattern
of not less than one and one-half mills as measured with an approved surface pro
file comparator. Blast cleaned surfaces shall be primed or treated the same day
blast cleaning is done. If cleaned surface rust or are contaminated with foreign
material before painting is accomplished, they shall be recleaned by the Contra
ctor at his expense. When paint systems No. 1 or 3 are specified, the steel surf
aces shall be blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC – SP – 10. When paint systems No
. 2, 4 or 5 are specified, the steel surface shall be blast cleaned in accordanc
e with SSPC – SP – 6. 403.3.22 System of Paint The paint system to be applied shall
consist of one as set forth in Table 403.4 and as modified in the Special Provis
ions. 403.3.23 Painting Metal Surfaces 1. Time of Application The prime coat of
paint or pretreatment when specified, shall be applied as soon as possible after
the surface has been cleaned and before deterioration of the surface occurs. An
y oil, grease, soil, dust or foreign matter deposited on the surface after the s
urface preparation is completed shall be removed prior to painting. In the event
the rusting occurs after completion of the surface preparation, the surfaces sh
all be again cleaned. Particular care shall be taken to prevent the contaminatio
n of cleaned surfaces with salts, acids, alkali, or other corrosive chemicals be
fore the prime coat is applied and between applications of the remaining coats o
f paint. Such contaminants shall be removed from the surface. Under these circum
stances, the pretreatments or, in the absence of a pretreatment, the prime coat
of paint shall be applied immediately after the surface has been cleaned. 2. Sto
rage of Paint and Thinner All paint and thinner should preferably be stored in a
separate building or room that is well ventilated and free from excessive heat,
sparks, flame or the direct ray of the sun. All containers of paint should rema
in unopened until required for use. Containers which have been opened shall be u
sed first.
192
Paint which has livered, gelled, or otherwise deteriorated during storage shall
not be used. Thixotropic materials which may be stirred to attain normal consist
ency are satisfactory. 3. Mixing and Thinning All ingredients in any container o
f paint shall be thoroughly mixed before use and shall be agitated often enough
during application to keep the pigment in suspension. Paint mixed in the origina
l container shall not be transferred until all settled pigment is incorporated i
nto the vehicle. This does not imply that part of the vehicle cannot be poured o
ff temporarily to simplify the mixing. Mixing shall be by mechanical methods, ex
cept that hard mixing will be permitted for container up to 19 litres in size. M
ixing in open containers shall be done in a well ventilated area away from spark
s or flames. Paint shall not be mixed or kept in suspension by means of an air s
tream bubbling under the paint surface. When a skin has formed in the container,
the skin shall be cut loose from the sides of the container, removed, and disca
rded. If such skins are thick enough to have a practical effect on the compositi
on and quality of the paint, the paint shall not be used. The paint shall be mix
ed in manner which will insure breaking up of all lumps, complete dispersion of
settled pigment, and a uniform composition. If mixing is done by hand, most of t
he vehicle shall be poured off into a clean container. The pigment in the paint
shall be lifted from the bottom of the container with a broad, flat paddle, lump
s shall be broken up, and the pigment thoroughly mixed with the vehicle. The pou
red off vehicle shall be returned to the paint with simultaneous stirring, or po
uring repeatedly from one container to another until the composition is uniform.
The bottom of the container shall be inspected for unmixed pigment. Tinting pas
tes or colors shall be wetted with a small amount of thinner, vehicle, or paint
and thoroughly mixed. The thinned mixture shall be added to the large container
of paint and mixed until the color is uniform. Paint which does not have a limit
ed pot life, or does not deteriorate on standing, may be mixed at any time befor
e using, but if settling has occurred, it must be remixed immediately before usi
ng. Paint shall not remain in spray pots, painter’s buckets, etc., overnight, but
shall be gathered into a container and remixed before use.
193
No thinner shall be added to the paint unless necessary for proper application.
In no case shall more than 0.5 litres of thinner be added per 3.8 litres unless
the paint is intentionally formulated for greater thinning. The type of thinner
shall comply with the paint specification. When the use of thinner is permissibl
e, thinner shall be added to paint during the mixing process. Painters shall not
add thinner to paint after it has been thinned to the correct consistency. All
thinning shall be done under supervision of one acquainted with the correct amou
nt and type of thinner to be added to the paint. Table 403.4 – Paint System Paint
System High Pollution or Coastal Mild Climate 1 x 2 x 3 x 4 x 5 X
Note: 1. Paint system shown for severe areas are satisfactorily in less severe a
reas. 2. Coastal - within 304.8 m of ocean or tidal water. High pollution-air po
llution environment such as industrial areas. Mild-other than coastal areas not
in air pollution environment. All structural steel shall be painted by one of th
e following systems. The required system or choice of systems will be shown in t
he Contract. System 4 is intended for use in mild climates or to repaint existin
g structures where the other systems are not compatible. Coating Thickness Speci
fications Min. Dry Film System 1 – Vinyl Paint System Wash Prime 708.03 (b) 12.7 I
ntermediate Coat 708.03 (b) 38.10 – 50.80 3rd Coat 708.03 (b) 38.10 – 50.80 th 4 Coa
t 708.03 (b) 38.10 – 50.80 Finish Coat 708.03 (b) 38.10 – 50.80 Total thickness 165.
10 – 203.20 System 2 – Epoxy-Polymide System Prime Coat 708.03 (c) 50.80 – 76.20 Inter
mediate Coat 708.03 (c) 50.80 – 76.20 3rd Coat 708.03 (c) 50.80 – 76.20 Finish Coat
708.03 (c) 38.10 – 50.80 Total thickness 190.50 – 279.40 * The third coat may be eli
minated in mild climates
194
Coating Thickness Specifications Min. Dry Film System 3 – Inorganic Zinc-Rich Coat
ing System Prime Coat 708.03(d) 88.90 – 127 Epoxy Intermediate Coat 708.03 (d) 40.
80 – 76.20 Finish Coat 708.03 (d) 38.10 – 50.80 Total thickness 177.80 – 254 Alternate
System Prime Coat 708.03 (d) 88.90 – 127 Wash Primer Tie Coat 708.03 (d) 12.70 Fi
nish Coat 708.03 (d) 38.10 – 50.80 Total thickness 139.70 – 190.50 System 4 – Alkyd-Oi
l-Basic Lead-Chromate System Prime Coat 708.03 (e) 38.10 – 50.80 Intermediate Coat
708.03 (e) 38.10 – 50.80 Finish Coat 708.03 (e) 38.10 – 50.80 Total thickness 114.3
0 – 152.40 * The paint system may be specified as four coats for new structure ste
el in mild climate, with a minimum thickness of 152.40 mm. System 5 – Organic Zinc
-Rich Paint System Prime Coat 708.03 (f) 38.10 – 50.80 Intermediate Coat 708.03 (f
) 50.80 – 63.50 Wash Primer Tie Coat 708.03 (f) 12.70 Finish Coat 708.03 (f) 38.10
– 50.80 Total thickness 139.70 – 177.80 4. Application of Paint a. General
The oldest of each kind of paint shall be used first. Paint shall be applied by
brushing or spraying or a combination of these methods. Daubers or sheepskins ma
y be used when no other method is practicable for proper application in places o
f difficult access. Dipping, roller coating, or flow coating shall be used only
when specifically authorized. All paints shall be applied in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. Open seams at contact surfaces of built up members w
hich would retain moisture shall be caulked with red lead paste, or other approv
ed material, before the second undercoat of paint is applied. Paint shall not be
applied when the surrounding air temperature is below 4.40C. Paint shall not be
applied when the temperature is expected to drop to 00C before the paint has dr
ied. Paint shall not be applied to steel at a temperature over 51.70C unless the
paint is specifically formulated for application at the proposed temperature, n
or shall paint be applied to steel which is at a temperature that will
195
cause blistering or porosity or otherwise will be detrimental to the life of the
paint. Paint shall not be applied in fog or mist, or when it is raining or when
the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent. Paint shall not be applied to wet or
damp surfaces. When paint must be applied in damp or cold weather, the steel sha
ll be painted under cover, or protected, or sheltered or the surrounding air and
the steel heated to a satisfactory temperature. In such cases, the above temper
ature and humidity conditions shall be met. Such steel shall remain under cover
or be protected until dry or until weather conditions permit its exposure. Any a
pplied paint exposed to excess humidity, rain or condensation shall first be per
mitted to dry. Then damaged areas of paint shall be removed, the surface again p
repared and then repainted with the same number of coats of paint of the same ki
nd as the undamaged areas. If stripe painting is stipulated in the Special Provi
sions or if the Contractor chooses to do so at his option, all edges, corners, c
revices, rivets, bolts, weld and sharp edges shall be painted with the priming p
aint by brush before the steel receives first full prime coat of paint. Such str
iping shall extend for at least 25.4 mm from the edge. When practicable, this st
ripe coat shall be permitted to dry before the prime coat is applied, otherwise
the stripe coat shall set to touch before the full prime coat is applied. Howeve
r, the stripe coat shall not be permitted to dry for a period of long enough to
allow rusting of the unprimed steel. When desired, the stripe coat may be applie
d after a complete prime coat. To the maximum extent practicable, each coat of p
aint shall be applied as continuous film of uniform thickness free of pores. Any
thin spots or areas missed in the application shall be repainted and permitted
to dry before the next coat of paint is applied. Film thickness is included in t
he description of paint systems. Each coat of paint shall be in a proper state o
f cure or dryness before application of the succeeding coat. b. Brush Applicatio
n
Paint shall be worked into all crevices and corners where possible and surfaces
not accessible to brushes shall be painted by spray, doubers, or sheepskins. All
runs or rags shall be brushed out. There shall be a minimum of brush marks left
in the paint.
196
c.
Spray Application of Paint
The equipment used for spray application of paint shall be suitable for the inte
nded purpose, shall be capable of properly atomizing the paint to be applied and
shall be equipped with suitable pressure regulators and gages. The air caps, no
zzles, and needles shall be those recommended by the manufacturer of the equipme
nt for the material being sprayed. The equipment shall be kept in satisfactory c
ondition to permit proper paint application. In closed or recirculating paint sp
ray system, where gas under pressure is used over the liquid, the gas shall be a
n inert, one such as nitrogen. Traps or separators shall be provided to remove o
il and water from the compressed air. These traps or separators shall be adequat
e size and shall be drained periodically during operations. The air from the spr
ay gun impinging against the surface shall show no water or oil. Paint ingredien
ts shall be kept properly mixed in the spray pots or containers during paint app
lications either by continuous mechanical agitation or by intermittent agitation
as frequently as necessary. The pressure on the material in the pot and of the
air at the guns shall be adjusted for optimum spraying effectiveness. The pressu
re on the material in the pot shall be adjusted when necessary for changes in el
evation of the gun above the pot. The atomizing air pressure at the gun shall be
high enough to atomize the paint properly but not so high as to cause excessive
fogging of paint, excessive evaporation of solvent or loss by overspray. Spray
equipment shall be kept sufficiently clean so that dirt, dried paint and other f
oreign material are not deposited in the paint film. Any solvents left in the eq
uipment shall be completely removed before applying paint to the surface being p
ainted. Paint shall be applied in uniform layer, with overlapping at the edge of
the spray pattern. The spray shall be adjusted so that the paint is deposited u
niformly. During application, the gun shall be held perpendicular to the surface
and at a distance which will insure that a wet layer of paint is deposited on t
he surface. The trigger of the gun should be released at the end of each stroke.
All rums and sags shall be brushed out immediately or the paint shall be remove
d and the surface repainted. Spray application of prime coats shall in all cases
be immediately followed by brushing Areas inaccessible to the spray gun shall b
e painted by brush, if not accessible by brush, daubers or sheepskins shall be u
sed. Brushes shall be used to work paint into cracks, crevices and blind spots w
here are not adequately painted by spray.
197
d.
Shop Painting
Shop painting shall be done after fabrication and before any damage to the surfa
ce occurs from weather or other exposure. Shop contact surfaces shall not be pai
nted unless specified. Surfaces not to be in contact but which will be inaccessi
ble after assembly shall receive the full paint system specified or three shop c
oats of the specified before assembly. The areas of steel surfaces to be in cont
act with concrete shall not be painted, unless otherwise shown on the Plans, the
areas of steel surfaces to be in contact with wood shall receive either the ful
l paint coats specified or three shop coats of the specified primer. If paint wo
uld be harmful to a welding operator or would be detrimental to the welding oper
ation or the finished welds, the steel shall not be painted within a suitable di
stance from the edges to be welded. Welding through inorganic zinc paint systems
will not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer. Antiweld spatter coating
s shall be removed before painting. Weld slag and flux shall be removed by metho
ds at least as effective as those specified for the cleaning. Machine-finished o
r similar surfaces that are not to be painted, but do not require protections, s
hall be protected with a coating of rust inhibitive petroleum, other coating whi
ch may be more suitable, for special conditions. Erection marks and weight marks
shall be copied on area that have been previously painted with the shop coat. e
. Field Painting
Steel structures shall be painted as soon as practicable after erection. Metal w
hich has been shop coated shall be touched up with the same type of paints as th
e shop coat. This touch-up shall include cleaning and painting of field connecti
ons, welds, rivets and all damaged or defective paint and rusted areas. The Cont
ractor may, at his option, apply an overall coat of primer in place of touch-up
spot painting. Surfaces (other than contact surfaces) which are accessible befor
e erection but which will not be accessible after erection shall receive all fie
ld coats of paint before erection. If possible the final coat of paint shall not
be applied until all concrete work is finished. If concreting or other operatio
ns damage
198
any paint, the surfaces shall be cleaned and repainted. All cement or concrete s
patter and dripping shall be removed before any paint is applied. Wet paint shal
l be protected against damage from dust or other detrimental foreign matter to t
he extent practicable. f. Drying of Painted Metal
The maximum practicable time shall be allowed for paint to dry before recoating
or exposure. No drier shall be added to paint on the job unless specifically cal
led for in the Specifications for the paint. No painted metal shall be subjected
to immersion before the paint is dried through. Paint shall be protected from r
ain, condensation, contamination, and freezing until dry, to the fullest extent
practicable. g. Handling of Painted Steel
Painted steel shall not be handled until the paint has dried, except for necessa
ry handling in turning for painting or stacking for drying. Paint which is damag
ed in handling shall be scraped off and touched-up with the same number of the c
oats and kinds of paint as were previously applied to the steel. Painted steel s
hall not be loaded for shipment or shipped until it is dry. Precautions shall be
taken to minimize damage to paint films resulting from stocking members. 5. Mea
surement of Dry Film Thickness of Paints a. Instrumentation
Dry paint film thickness shall be measured using Pull-Off (Type 1) or Fixed Prob
e (Type 2) Magnetic Gages. Type 1 gages include Tinsley, Elcometer, Microtest an
d Inspector models. Type 2 gage include Elcometric, Minitector, General Electric
, Verimeter and Accuderm models. b. Calibration 1. Type 1 (Pull-Off) Magnetic Ga
ges Measure the coating thickness on a series of reliable standards covering the
expected range of paint thickness. Record the calibration correction either plu
s (+) or minus (-)
199
required at each standard thickness. To guard against gage drift during use, re-
check occasionally with one or more of the standards. When the gage adjustment h
as drifted so far that large corrections are needed, it is advisable to re-adjus
t closer to the standard values and re-calibrate. For Type 1 gages, the preferre
d basic standards are small, chromeplated steel panels that may be available fro
m the National Bureau of Standards in coating thickness from 12.70 mm to 203.20
mm. Plastic shims of certified thickness in the appropriate ranges may also be u
sed to calibrate the gages. The gage is held firmly enough to press the shim tig
htly against the steel surface. Record the calibration correction as above. 2. T
ype 2 (Fixed Probe) Magnetic Gages Shims of plastic or non-magnetic metals laid
on the appropriate steel base (at least 76.2 x 76.2 x 3.2 mm) are suitable worki
ng standards. These gages are held firmly enough to press the shim tightly again
st the steel surface. One should avoid excessive pressure that might indent the
plastic or, on a blast cleaned surface, might impress the steel peaks into the u
ndersurface of the plastic. The National Bureau of Standards – standards panels sh
all not be used to calibrate Type 2 gages. c. Measurement Procedures
To determine the effect of the substrate surface condition on the gage readings,
access is required to some unpainted areas. Repeated gage readings, even at poi
nts close together, may differ considerably due to small surface irregularities.
Three gage readings should therefore be made for each spot measurement of eithe
r the substrate or the paint. Move the probe a short distance for each new gage
reading. Discard any unusually high of flow gage reading that cannot be repeated
consistently. Take the average of the three gage readings as the spot measureme
nt. 1. Measurement with Type 1 (Pull-Off) Gage Measure (A), the bare substrate,
at a number of spots to obtain a representative average value. Measure (B), the
dry paint film, at the specified number of spots.
200
Correct the (A) and (B) gage readings or averages as determined by calibration o
f the gage. Subtract the corrected readings (A) from (B) to obtain the thickness
of the paint above the peaks of the surface. 2. Measurement with Type 2 (Fixed
Probe) Gage Place a standard shim of the expected paint thickness on the bare su
bstrate that is to be painted. Adjust the gage in place on the shim so that it i
ndicates the known thickness of the shim. Conform the gage setting by measuring
the shim at several other area of the bare substrate. Re-adjust the gage as need
ed to obtain an average setting representative of the substrate. With the gage a
djustment as above, measure the dry paint film at three points. The gage reading
s indicate the paint film thickness at the three points. The gage readings indic
ate the paint thickness above the peaks of the surface profile. Re-check the gag
e setting at frequent intervals during a long series of measurements. Make five
separate spot measurements spaced evenly over each section of the structure 9.29
square metres in area, or of other area as may be specified. The average of fiv
e spot measurements for each such section shall not be less than the specified t
hickness. No single spot measurement (average of three readings) in any section
shall be less than 80% of the specified thickness. Since paint thickness is usua
lly specified (or implied) as a minimum, greater thickness that does not cause d
efects of appearance or functions such as mud cracking, wrinkling, etc., is perm
itted unless otherwise specified. d. Special Notes
All of the above magnetic, if properly adjusted and in good condition, are inher
ently accurate to within +15% of the true thickness of the coating. Much larger,
external errors may be caused by variations in method of use of the gages or by
unevenness of the surface of the substrate or of the coating. Also, any other f
ilm present on the steel (rust or mill scale or even a blast cleaned profile zon
e) will add to the apparent thickness of the applied paint film. The surface of
the paint and the probe of the gage must be free from dust, grease and other for
eign matter in order to obtain close
201
contact of the probe with the paint and also to avoid adhesion of the magnet. Th
e accuracy of the measurement will be affected if the coating is tacky or excess
ively soft. The magnetic gages are sensitive to geometrical discontinuities of t
he steel, as at holes, corners or edges. The sensitivity to edge effects and dis
continuities varies from gage to gage. Measurements closer than 25.4 mm from the
discontinuity may not be valid unless the gage is calibrated specifically for t
hat location. Magnetic gage readings also may be affected by proximity to anothe
r mass of steel close to the body of the gage, by surface curvature and presence
of other magnetic fields. All of the magnets or probe must be held perpendicula
r to the painted surface to produce valid measurements. 403.3.24 Clean-up Upon c
ompletion and before final acceptance, the Contractor shall remove all falsework
, falsework piling down to at least 609.6 mm below the finished ground line, exc
avated or unused materials, rubbish and temporary buildings. He shall replace or
renew any fences damaged and restored in an acceptable manner all property, bot
h public and private, which may have been damaged during the prosecution of the
work and shall leave the work site and adjacent highway in a neat and presentabl
e condition, satisfactory to the Engineer. All excavated material or falsework p
laced in the stream channel during construction shall be removed by the Contract
or before final acceptance. 403.4 Method of Measurement 403.4.1 Unit Basis
The quantity of structural steel to be paid for shall be the number of kilos com
plete in place and accepted. For the purpose of measurement for payment componen
ts fabricated from metals listed in (1) below, such as casting, alloy steels, st
eel plates, anchor bolts and nuts, shoes, rockers, rollers, pins and nuts, expan
sion dams, roadway drains and souppers, welds metal, bolts embedded in concrete,
cradles and brackets, posts, conduits and ducts, and structural shapes for expa
nsion joints and pier protection will be considered as structural steel. Unless
otherwise provided, the mass of metal paid for shall be computed and based upon
the following mass: 1. Unit Density kg/m3 Aluminum, cast or rolled Bronze or cop
per alloy Copper sheet Iron, cast 2771.2 8585.9 8938.3 7128.2
202
Iron, malleable Lead, sheet Steel, cast or rolled, including alloy copper bearin
g and stainless Zinc 2. Shapes, Plates Railing and Flooring
7528.7 11229 7849 7208.3
The mass of steel shapes and plates shall be computed on the basis of their nomi
nal mass and dimensions as shown on the approved shop drawings, deducting for co
pes, cuts and open holes, exclusive of rivets holes. The mass of all plates shal
l be computed on the basis of nominal dimensions with no additional for overrun.
The mass of railing shall be included as structural steel unless the Bill of Qu
antities contains as pay item for bridge railing under Item 401, Railings. The m
ass of steel grid flooring shall be computed separately. 3. Casting The mass of
casting shall be computed from the dimensions shown on the approved drawings, de
ducting for open holes. To this mass will be added 5 percent allowable for fille
ts and overruns. Scale mass may be substituted for computed mass in the case of
castings of small complex parts for which accurate computations of mass would be
difficult. 4. Miscellaneous The mass of erection bolts, shop and field paint, g
alvanizing the boxes, crates and other containers used for shipping, together wi
th sills, struts, and rods used for supporting members during the transportation
, bridge hardware as defined in Subsection 402.2.2 excluding steel plates and be
arings, connectors used for joining timber members, nails, spikes and bolts, exc
ept anchor bolts will be excluded. 5. Rivets Heads The mass of all rivet heads,
both files and shop, will be assumed as follows: Diameter of rivet (mm) 12.7 15.
9 19.0 22.2 25.4 28.6 31.7 203 kg per 100 heads 1.80 3.20 5.44 8.16 11.80 16.33
21.8
6. High-Strength Bolts High-strength steel bolts shall be considered for purpose
of payment, the same as rivets of the same diameter, with the mass of the bolt
heads and nuts the same as the corresponding rivet heads. 7. Welds The mass of s
hop and field fillet welds shall be assumed as follows: Size of Weld (mm) 6.3 7.
9 9.5 12.7 5.9 19.0 22.2 25.4 kg per linear metre 0.984 1.213 1.771 2.690 3.936
5.379 7.314 9.774
The mass of other welds will be computed on the basis of the theoretical volume
from dimensions of the welds, with an addition of 50 mass percent as an allowanc
e for overrun. 8. Other Items The quantities of other Contract Items which enter
into the completed and accepted structure shall be measured for payment in the
manner prescribed for the Items involved. 403.4.2 Lump Sum Basis
Lump sum will be the basis of payment unless noted otherwise in the bidding docu
ments. No measurements of quantities will be made except as provided in Subsecti
on 403.5.1 (4). 403.5 Basis of Payment 403.5.1 Structural Steel 1. Furnished, Fa
bricated and Erected The quantity, determined as provided above, shall be paid f
or at the contract unit price per kilogram for “Structural Steel, furnished, fabri
cated and erected”, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing, galvanizing, fabricating, radiographing, magnetic particle inspecti
on, delivering, erecting ready for use, and painting all steel and other metal i
ncluding all labor, equipment, tools 204
and incidentals necessary to complete the work, except as provided in Subsection
s 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4. 2. Furnished and Fabricated When a quantity and
unit price for “Structural Steel, furnished and fabricated” are shown in the Bill of
Quantities, the quantity, determined as provided above, will be paid for at the
contract unit price per kilogram which price and payment shall be full compensa
tion for furnishing, galvanizing, fabricating, radiographing, magnet particle in
spection, shop painting and delivering the structural steel and other metal free
of charges at the place designated in the Special Provisions and for all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work, save erection
and except as provided in Subsection 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4. 3. Erected Wh
en a quantity and unit price for “Structural Steel Erected” are shown in the Bill of
Quantities, the quantity, determined as provided above, will be paid for at the
said contract unit price per kilogram which price and payment shall be full com
pensation for unloading all the structural steel and other metal, payment of any
demurrage charges, transporting to the bridge site, erecting, magnetic particle
inspection and radiographing, complete ready for use including furnishing and a
pplying the field paint including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals ne
cessary to complete the work, save furnishing and fabrication, and except as pro
vided in Subsections 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4. 4. Lump Sum When the Bill of
Quantities calls for lump sum price for “Structural Steel, furnished, fabricated a
nd erected”, the Item will be paid for at the contract lump sum price and payment
shall be full compensation for furnishing, fabricating and erecting material and
for all work herein before prescribed in connection therewith, including all la
bor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work, except as
provided in Subsections 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4. The estimate of the mass o
f structural steel shown on the Plans is approximate only and no guarantee is ma
de that it is the correct mass to be furnished. No adjustment in the contract pr
ice will be made if the mass furnished is more or less than estimated mass. If c
hanges in the work are ordered by the Engineer, which vary the mass of steel to
be furnished, the lump sum payment shall be adjusted as follows: a. The value pe
r kilogram of the increase or decrease in mass of structural steel involved in t
he change shall be determined by
205
dividing the contract lump sum amount by the estimate shown on the Plans. The ad
justed contract lump sum shall be the contract lump sum plus or minus the value
of involved in the change, and no additional compensation made on account of sai
d change.
of mass payment the steel shall be
b. Full-size members which are tested in accordance with the Specifications when
such tests are required by the Contract, shall be paid for at the same rate as
for comparable members in the structure. Members which fail to meet the Contract
requirements, and members rejected as a result of test shall not be paid for.
403.5.2
Material Considered as Structural Steel
For the purpose of Subsection 403.5.1 and unless otherwise shown on the Plans, c
astings, forgings, special alloy steels and steel plates, wrought iron, and stru
ctural shapes of expansion joints and pier protection shall be considered as str
uctural steel except that when quantities and unit price for certain alloy steel
s, forgings, castings or other specific categories of metal are called for in th
e Bill of Quantities, the mass of such selected material, determined as provided
above, shall be paid for at the respective contract unit price per kilogram for
“Structural Steel (Alloy steel, forgings, castings, and/or other category), furni
shed and fabricated, and erected” or “Structural Steel (Subsection 403.4.1), furnish
ed and fabricated” as named in the Bill of Quantities. 403.5.3 Other Items
The quantities of all other Contract Items which enter into the completed and ac
cepted structure shall be paid for at the contract unit prices for the several P
ay Items as prescribed for the Items involved. 403.5.4 Payment as Reinforcing St
eel
When the Bill of Quantities does not contain a pay item for structural steel, th
e quantities of metal drains, scuppers, conduits, ducts and structural shapes fo
r expansion joints and pier protection, measured as provided above will be paid
for as Reinforcing Steel under Item 404. Payment will be made under: Pay Item Nu
mber 403 (1) Description Structural Steel, furnished, fabricated and erected Str
uctural Steel, furnished, fabricated and erected Structural Steel, furnished, fa
bricated Unit of Measurement kilogram
403 (2)
kilogram
403 (3)
kilogram
206
403 (4) 403 (5) 403 (6) 403 (7)
Structural Steel, furnished, fabricated Structural Steel erected Structural Stee
l erected Structural Steel, furnished, fabricated and erected
kilogram kilogram kilogram kilogram
Where separate payment is to be made for certain metals or for certain particula
r components, other than under the general provision for structural steel, desig
nation of those particular cases shall be inserted in the spaces provided in the
pay names for Item 403 (2), 403 (4) or 403 (6), as the case may be.
ITEM 404 – REINFORCING STEEL 404.1 Description This Item shall consist of furnishi
ng, bending, fabricating and placing of steel reinforcement of the type, size, s
hape and grade required in accordance with this Specification and in conformity
with the requirements shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. 404.2 M
aterial Requirements Reinforcing steel shall meet the requirements of item 710,
Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope. 4.4.3 Construction Requirements
404.3.1 Order Lists Before materials are ordered, all order lists and bending di
agrams shall be furnished by the Contractor, for approval of the Engineer. The a
pproval of order lists and bending diagrams by the Engineer shall in no way reli
eve the Contractor of responsibility for the correctness of such lists and diagr
ams. Any expense incident to the revisions of materials furnished in accordance
with such lists and diagrams to make them comply with the Plans shall be borne b
y the Contractor. 404.3.2 Protection of Material Steel reinforcement shall be st
ored above the surface of the ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports an
d shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface de
terioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the
work, reinforcement shall be free from dirt, detrimental rust, loose scale, pain
t, grease, oil, or other foreign materials. Reinforcement shall be free from inj
urious defects such as cracks and laminations. Rust, surface seams, surface irre
gularities or mill scale will not be
207
cause for rejection, provided the minimum dimensions, cross sectional area and t
ensile properties of a hand wire brushed specimen meets the physical requirement
s for the size and grade of steel specified. 404.3.3 Bending All reinforcing bar
s requiring bending shall be cold-bent to the shapes shown on the Plans or requi
red by the Engineer. Bars shall be bent around a circular pin having the followi
ng diameters (D) in relation to the diameter of the bar (d): Nominal diameter, d
, mm 10 to 20 25 to 28 32 and greater Pin diameter (D) 6d 8d 10d
Bends and hooks in stirrups or ties may be bent to the diameter of the principal
bar enclosed therein. 404.3.4 Placing and Fastening All steel reinforcement sha
ll be accurately placed in the position shown on the Plans or required by the En
gineer and firmly held there during the placing and setting of the concrete. Bar
s shall be tied at all intersections except where spacing is less than 300mm in
each directions, in which case, alternate intersections shall be tied. Ties shal
l be fastened on the inside. Distance from the forms shall be maintained by mean
s of stays, blocks, ties, hangers, or other approved supports, so that it does n
ot vary from the position indicated on the Plans by more than 6mm. Blocks for ho
lding reinforcement from contact with the forms shall be precast mortar blocks o
f approved shapes and dimensions. Layers of bars shall be separated by precast m
ortar blocks or by other equally suitable devices. The use of pebbles, pieces of
broken stone or brick, metal pipe and wooden blocks shall not be permitted. Unl
ess otherwise shown on the Plans or required by the Engineer, the minimum distan
ce between bars shall be 40mm. Reinforcement in any member shall be placed and t
hen inspected and approved by the Engineer before the placing of concrete begins
. Concrete placed in violation of this provision may be rejected and removal may
be required. If fabric reinforcement is shipped in rolls, it shall be straighte
ned before being placed. Bundled bars shall be tied together at not more than 1.
8m intervals. 404.3.5 Splicing All reinforcement shall be furnished in the full
lengths indicated on the Plans. Splicing of bars, except where shown on the Plan
s, will not be permitted without the written approval of the Engineer. Splices s
hall be staggered as far as possible and with a minimum separation of not less t
han 40 bar diameters. Not more than one-third of the bars may be spliced in the
same cross-section, except where shown on the Plans.
208
Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, bars shall be lapped a minimum distance of:
Splice Type Tension Compression Grade 40 min. lap 24 bar dia 20 bar dia Grade 6
0 min. lap 36 bar dia 24 bar dia But not less than 300 mm 300 mm
In lapped splices, the bars shall be placed in contact and wired together. Lappe
d splices will not be permitted at locations where the concrete section is insuf
ficient to provide minimum clear distance of one and one-third the maximum size
of coarse aggregate between the splice and the nearest adjacent bar. Welding of
reinforcing steel shall be done only if detailed on the Plans or if authorized b
y the Engineer in writing. Spiral reinforcement shall be spliced by lapping at l
east one and a half turns or by butt welding unless otherwise shown on the Plans
. 404.3.6 Lapping of Bar Mat Sheets of mesh or bar mat reinforcement shall overl
ap each other sufficiently to maintain a uniform strength and shall be securely
fastened at the ends and edges. The overlap shall not be less than one mesh in w
idth. 404.4 Method of Measurement
The quantity of reinforcing steel to be paid for will be the final quantity plac
ed and accepted in the completed structure. No allowance will be made for tie-wi
res, separators, wire chairs and other material used in fastening the reinforcin
g steel in place. If bars are substituted upon the Contractor’s request and approv
ed by the Engineer and as a result thereof more steel is used than specified, on
ly the mass specified shall be measured for payment. No measurement or payment w
ill be made for splices added by the Contractor unless directed or approved by t
he Engineer. When there is no item for reinforcing steel in the Bill of Quantiti
es, costs will be considered as incidental to the other items in the Bill of Qua
ntities. 404.5 Basis of Payment
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 404.4, shall be paid fo
r at the contract unit price for Reinforcing Steel which price and payment shall
be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all la
bor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed
in this Item.
209
Payment will be made under: Pay Item Number 404 Description Reinforcing Steel Un
it of Measurement Kilogram
ITEM 405 – STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 405.1 Description 405.1.1 Scope This Item shall con
sist of furnishing, bending, placing and finishing concrete in all structures ex
cept pavements in accordance with this Specification and conforming to the lines
, grades, and dimensions shown on the Plans. Concrete shall consist of a mixture
of Portland Cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, admixture when specified,
and water mixed in the proportions specified or approved by the Engineer. 405.1
.2 Classes and Uses of Concrete Five classes of concrete are provided for in thi
s Item, namely: A, B, C, P and Seal. Each class shall be used in that part of th
e structure as called for on the Plans. The classes of concrete will generally b
e used as follows: Class A – All superstructures and heavily reinforced substructu
res. The important parts of the structure included are slabs, beams, girders, co
lumns, arch ribs, box culverts, reinforced abutments, retaining walls, and reinf
orced footings. Class B – Footings, pedestals, massive pier shafts, pipe bedding,
and gravity walls, unreinforced or with only a small amount of reinforcement. Cl
ass C – Thin reinforced sections, railings, precast R.C. piles and cribbing and fo
r filler in steel grid floors. Class P – Prestressed concrete structures and membe
rs. Seal – Concrete deposited in water. 405.2 Material Requirements 405.2.1 Portla
nd Cement It shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.1.
210
405.2.2 Fine Aggregate It shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 31
1.2.2. 405.2.3 Coarse Aggregate It shall conform all the requirements of Subsect
ion 311.2.3 except that gradation shall conform to Table 405.1. Table 405.1 – Grad
ing Requirements for Coarse Aggregate
Sieve Designation Standard Alternate Mm US Standard 63 50 37.5 25 19.0 12.5 9.5
4.75 2-1/2” 2” 1-1/2” 1” ¾” ½” 3/8” No.4 Class A Class B Mass Percent Passing Class Class C P
s Seal
100 95 – 100 35 – 70 10 – 30 0-5
100 95 – 100 35 – 70 10 – 30 0-5
100 90 – 100 40 – 70 0 – 15*
100 95 – 100 20 – 55 0 – 10*
100 95 – 100 25 – 60 0 – 10*
* The measured cement content shall be within plus (+) or minus (-) 2 mass perce
nt of the design cement content. 405.2.4 Water It shall conform to the requireme
nts of Subsection 311.2.4 405.2.5 Reinforcing Steel It shall conform to the requ
irements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope. 405.2.6 Admixtures Admixt
ures shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.7 405.2.7 Curing Mate
rials Curing materials shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.8.
405.2.8 Expansion Joint Materials Expansion joint materials shall be: 1. Preform
ed Sponge Rubber and Cork, conforming to AASHTO M 153. 2. Hot-Poured Elastic Typ
e, conforming to AASHTO M 173. 3. Preformed Fillers, conforming to AASHTO M 213.
211
405.2.9 Elastomeric Compression Joint Seals These shall conform to AASHTO M 220.
405.2.10 Elastomeric Bearing Pads These shall conform to AASHTO M 251 or Item 4
12 – Elastomeric Bearing Pads. 405.2.11 Storage of Cement and Aggregates Storage o
f cement and aggregates shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.
2.10. 405.3 Sampling and Testing of Structural Concrete
As work progresses, at least one (1) sample consisting of three (3) concrete cyl
inder test specimens, 150 x 300mm (6 x 12 inches), shall be taken from each seve
nty five (75) cubic meters of each class of concrete or fraction thereof placed
each day. Compliance with the requirements of this Section shall be determined i
n accordance with the following standard methods of AASHTO: Sampling of fresh co
ncrete Weight per cubic metre and air content (graviMetric) of concrete Sieve an
alysis of fine and coarse aggregates Slump of Portland Cement Concrete Specific
gravity and absorption of fine aggregate T 141 T 121 T 27 T 119 T 84
Tests for strength shall be made in accordance with the following: Making and cu
ring concrete compressive and flexural tests specimens in the field Compressive
strength of molded concrete Cylinders 405.4 Production Requirements
T 23 T 22
405.4.1 Proportioning and Strength of Structural Concrete The concrete materials
shall be proportioned in accordance with the requirements for each class of con
crete as specified in Table 405.2, using the absolute volume method as outlined
in the American Concrete Institute (ACI) Standard 211.1. “Recommended Practice for
Selecting Proportions for Normal and Heavyweight Concrete”. Other methods of prop
ortioning may be employed in the mix design with prior approval of the Engineer.
The mix shall either be
212
designed or approved by the Engineer. A change in the source of materials during
the progress of work may necessitate a new mix design. The strength requirement
s for each class of concrete shall be as specified in Table 405.2. Table 405.2 -
Composition and Strength of Concrete for Use in Structures
Class Of Concre te Minimum Cement Content Per m3 kg (bag**) Maximum Water/ Cemen
t Ratio kg/kg Consistency Range in Slump Designated Size of Coarse Aggregate Squ
are Opening Std. mm Minimum Compressive Strength of 150x300mm Concrete Cylinder
Specimen at 28 days, MN/m2 (psi) 20.7 (3000) 16.5 (2400) 20.7 (3000) 37.7 (5000)
20.7 (3000)
mm (inch)
A
360 (9 bags) 320 (8 bags) 380 (9.5 bags) 440 (11 bags) 380 (9.5 bags)
0.53
50 – 100 (2 – 4) 50 – 100 (2 – 4) 50 – 100 (2 – 4) 100 max. (4 max.) 100 – 200 (4 - 8)
37.5 – 4.75 (1-1/2” – No. 4) 50 – 4.75 (2” – No. 4) 12.5 – 4.75 (1/2” – No. 4) 19.0 – 4.75 (3
) 25 – 4.75 (1” – No. 4)
B
0.58
C
0.55
P
0.49
Seal
0.58
* The measured cement content shall be within plus or minus 2 mass percent of th
e design cement content. ** Based on 40 kg/bag 405.4.2 Consistency Concrete shal
l have a consistency such that it will be workable in the required position. It
shall be of such a consistency that it will flow around reinforcing steel but in
dividual particles of the coarse aggregate when isolated shall show a coating of
mortar containing its proportionate amount of sand. The consistency of concrete
shall be gauged by the ability of the equipment to properly place it and not by
the difficulty in mixing and transporting. The quantity of mixing water shall b
e determined by the Engineer and shall not be varied without his consent. Concre
te as dry as it is practical to place with the equipment specified shall be used
. 405.4.3 Batching Measuring and batching of materials shall be done at a batchi
ng plant.
213
1. Portland Cement Either sacked or bulk cement may be used. No fraction of a sa
ck of cement shall be used in a batch of concrete unless the cement is weighed.
All bulk cement shall be weighed on an approved weighing device. The bulk cement
weighing hopper shall be properly sealed and vented to preclude dusting operati
on. The discharge chute shall not be suspended from the weighing hopper and shal
l be so arranged that cement will neither be lodged in it nor leak from it. Accu
racy of batching shall be within plus (+) or minus (-) 1 mass percent. 2. Water
Water may be measured either by volume or by weight. The accuracy of measuring t
he water shall be within a range of error of not more than 1 percent. 3. Aggrega
tes Stockpiling of aggregates shall be in accordance with Subsection 311.2.10. A
ll aggregates whether produced or handled by hydraulic methods or washed, shall
be stockpiled or binned for draining for at least 12 hours prior to batching. Ra
il shipment requiring more than12 hours will be accepted as adequate binning onl
y if the car bodies permit free drainage. If the aggregates contain high or non-
uniform moisture content, storage or stockpile period in excess of 12 hours may
be required by the Engineer. Batching shall be conducted as to result in a 2 mas
s percent maximum tolerance for the required materials. 4. Bins and Scales The b
atching plant shall include separate bins for bulk cement, fine aggregate and fo
r each size of coarse aggregate, a weighing hopper, and scales capable of determ
ining accurately the mass of each component of the batch. Scales shall be accura
te to one-half (0.5) percent throughout the range used. 5. Batching When batches
are hauled to the mixer, bulk cement shall be transported either in waterproof
compartments or between the fine and coarse aggregate. When cement is placed in
contact with moist aggregates, batches will be rejected unless mixed within 1-1/
2 hours of
214
such contact. aggregates.
Sacked cement may be transported on top of the
Batches shall be delivered to the mixer separate and intact. Each batch shall be
dumped cleanly into the mixer without loss, and, when more than one batch is ca
rried on the truck, without spilling of material from one batch compartment into
another. 6. Admixtures The Contractor shall follow an approved procedure for ad
ding the specified amount of admixture to each batch and will be responsible for
its uniform operation during the progress of the work. He shall provide separat
e scales for the admixtures which are to be proportioned by weight, and accurate
measures for those to be proportioned by volume. Admixtures shall be measured i
nto the mixer with an accuracy of plus or minus three (3) percent. The use of Ca
lcium Chloride as an admixture will not be permitted. 405.4.4 Mixing and Deliver
y Concrete may be mixed at the site of construction, at a central point or by a
combination of central point and truck mixing or by a combination of central poi
nt mixing and truck agitating. Mixing and delivery of concrete shall be in accor
dance with the appropriate requirements of AASHTO M 157 except as modified in th
e following paragraphs of this section, for truck mixing or a combination of cen
tral point and truck mixing or truck agitating. Delivery of concrete shall be re
gulated so that placing is at a continuous rate unless delayed by the placing op
erations. The intervals between delivery of batches shall not be so great as to
allow the concrete inplace to harden partially, and in no case shall such an int
erval exceed 30 minutes. In exceptional cases and when volumetric measurements a
re authorized, for small project requiring less than 75 cu.m. per day of pouring
, the weight proportions shall be converted to equivalent volumetric proportions
. In such cases, suitable allowance shall be made for variations in the moisture
condition of the aggregates, including the bulking effect in the fine aggregate
. Batching and mixing shall be in accordance with ASTM C 685, Section 6 through
9. Concrete mixing, by chute is allowed provided that a weighing scales for dete
rmining the batch weight will be used. For batch mixing at the site of construct
ion or at a central point, a batch mixer of an approved type shall be used. Mixe
r having a rated capacity of less than a one-bag batch shall not be used. The vo
lume of concrete mixed per batch shall not exceed the mixer’s nominal capacity as
shown on the manufacturer’s standard rating plate on the mixer except that an over
load up to 10 percent above the mixer’s nominal capacity may be permitted, provide
d concrete test data for strength, segregation, and uniform consistency are sati
sfactory and provided no
215
spillage of concrete takes place. The batch shall be so charge into the drum tha
t a portion of the water shall enter in advance of the cement and aggregates. Th
e flow of water shall be uniform and all water shall be in the drum by the end o
f the first 15 seconds of the mixing period. Mixing time shall be measured from
the time all materials, except water, are in the drum. Mixing time shall not be
less than 60 seconds for mixers having a capacity of 1.5m3 or less. For mixers h
aving a capacity greater than 1.5m3, the mixing time shall not be less than 90 s
econds. If timing starts, the instant the skip reaches its maximum raised positi
on, 4 seconds shall be added to the specified mixing time. Mixing time ends when
the discharge chute opens. The mixer shall be operated at the drum speed as sho
wn on the manufacturer’s name plate on the mixer. Any concrete mixed less than the
specified time shall be discarded and disposed off by the Contractor at his own
expenses. The timing device on stationary mixers shall be equipped with a bell
or other suitable warning device adjusted to give a clearly audible signal each
time the lock is released. In case of failure of the timing device, the Contract
or will be permitted to continue operations while it is being repaired, provided
he furnishes an approved timepiece equipped with minute and second hands. If th
e timing device is not placed in good working order within 24 hours, further use
of the mixer will be prohibited until repairs are made. Retempering concrete wi
ll not be permitted. Admixtures for increasing the workability, for retarding th
e set, or for accelerating the set or improving the pumping characteristics of t
he concrete will be permitted only when specifically provided for in the Contrac
t, or authorized in writing by the Engineer. 1. Mixing Concrete: General Concret
e shall be thoroughly mixed in a mixer of an approved size and type that will in
sure a uniform distribution of the materials throughout the mass. All concrete s
hall be mixed in mechanically operated mixers. Mixing plant and equipment for tr
ansporting and placing concrete shall be arranged with an ample auxiliary instal
lation to provide a minimum supply of concrete in case of breakdown of machinery
or in case the normal supply of concrete is disrupted. The auxiliary supply of
concrete shall be sufficient to complete the casting of a section up to a constr
uction joint that will meet the approval of the Engineer. Equipment having compo
nents made of aluminum or magnesium alloys, which would have contact with plasti
c concrete during mixing, transporting or pumping of Portland Cement concrete, s
hall not be used.
216
Concrete mixers shall be equipped with adequate water storage and a device of ac
curately measuring and automatically controlling the amount of water used. Mater
ials shall be measured by weighing. The apparatus provided for weighing the aggr
egates and cement shall be suitably designed and constructed for this purpose. T
he accuracy of all weighing devices except that for water shall be such that suc
cessive quantities can be measured to within one percent of the desired amounts.
The water measuring device shall be accurate to plus or minus 0.5 mass percent.
All measuring devices shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Scales
and measuring devices shall be tested at the expense of the Contractor as freque
ntly as the Engineer may deem necessary to insure their accuracy. Weighing equip
ment shall be insulated against vibration or movement of other operating equipme
nt in the plant. When the entire plant is running, the scale reading at cut-off
shall not vary from the weight designated by the Engineer more than one mass per
cent for cement, 1-1/2 mass percent for any size of aggregate, or one (1) mass p
ercent for the total aggregate in any batch. 2. Mixing Concrete at Site Concrete
mixers may be of the revolving drum or the revolving blade type and the mixing
drum or blades shall be operated uniformly at the mixing speed recommended by th
e manufacturer. The pick-up and throw-over blades of mixers shall be restored or
replaced when any part or section is worn 20mm or more below the original heigh
t of the manufacturer’s design. Mixers and agitators which have an accumulation of
hard concrete or mortar shall not be used. When bulk cement is used and volume
of the batch is 0.5m3 or more, the scale and weigh hopper for Portland Cement sh
all be separate and distinct from the aggregate hopper or hoppers. The discharge
mechanism of the bulk cement weigh hopper shall be interlocked against opening
before the full amount of cement is in the hopper. The discharging mechanism sha
ll also be interlocked against opening when the amount of cement in the hopper i
s underweight by more than one (1) mass percent or overweight by more than 3 mas
s percent of the amount specified. When the aggregate contains more water than t
he quantity necessary to produce a saturated surface dry condition, representati
ve samples shall be taken and the moisture content determined for each kind of a
ggregate. The batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some water will ente
r in advance of cement and aggregate. All water shall be in the drum by the end
of the first quarter of the specified mixing time.
217
Cement shall be batched and charged into the mixer so that it will not result in
loss of cement due to the effect of wind, or in accumulation of cement on surfa
ce of conveyors or hoppers, or in other conditions which reduce or vary the requ
ired quantity of cement in the concrete mixture. The entire content of a batch m
ixer shall be removed from the drum before materials for a succeeding batch are
placed therein. The materials composing a batch except water shall be deposited
simultaneously into the mixer. All concrete shall be mixed for a period of not l
ess than 1-1/2 minutes after all materials, including water, are in the mixer. D
uring the period of mixing, the mixer shall operate at the speed for which it ha
s been designed. Mixers shall be operated with an automatic timing device that c
an be locked by the Engineer. The time device and discharge mechanics shall be s
o interlocked that during normal operation no part of the batch will be charged
until the specified mixing time has elapsed. The first batch of concrete materia
ls placed in the mixer shall contain a sufficient excess of cement, sand, and wa
ter to coat inside of the drum without reducing the required mortar content of t
he mix. When mixing is to cease for a period of one hour or more, the mixer shal
l be thoroughly cleaned. 3. Mixing Concrete at Central Plant Mixing at central p
lant shall conform to the requirements for mixing at the site. 4. Mixing Concret
e in Truck Truck mixers, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, shall be o
f the revolving drum type, water-tight, and so constructed that the concrete can
be mixed to insure a uniform distribution of materials throughout the mass. All
solid materials for the concrete shall be accurately measured and charged into
the drum at the proportioning plant. Except as subsequently provided, the truck
mixer shall be equipped with a device by which the quantity of water added can b
e readily verified. The mixing water may be added directly to the batch, in whic
h case a tank is not required. Truck mixers may be required to be provided with
a means of which the mixing time can be readily verified by the Engineer. The ma
ximum size of batch in truck mixers shall not exceed the minimum rated capacity
of the mixer as stated by the manufacturer and stamped in metal on the mixer. Tr
uck mixing, shall, unless other-wise
218
directed be continued for not less than 100 revolutions after all ingredients, i
ncluding water, are in the drum. The mixing speed shall not be less than 4 rpm,
nor more than 6 rpm. Mixing shall begin within 30 minutes after the cement has b
een added either to the water or aggregate, but when cement is charged into a mi
xer drum containing water or surface wet aggregate and when the temperature is a
bove 32oC, this limit shall be reduced to 15 minutes. The limitation in time bet
ween the introduction of the cement to the aggregate and the beginning of the mi
xing may be waived when, in the judgement of the Engineer, the aggregate is suff
iciently free from moisture, so that there will be no harmful effects on the cem
ent. When a truck mixer is used for transportation, the mixing time specified in
Subsection 405.4.4 (3) at a stationary mixer may be reduced to 30 seconds and t
he mixing completed in a truck mixer. The mixing time in the truck mixer shall b
e as specified for truck mixing. 5. Transporting Mixed Concrete Mixed concrete m
ay only be transported to the delivery point in truck agitators or truck mixers
operating at the speed designated by the manufacturers of the equipment as agita
ting speed, or in non-agitating hauling equipment, provided the consistency and
workability of the mixed concrete upon discharge at the delivery point is suitab
le point for adequate placement and consolidation in place. Truck agitators shal
l be loaded not to exceed the manufacturer’s guaranteed capacity. They shall maint
ain the mixed concrete in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass during hauling. No
additional mixing water shall be incorporated into the concrete during hauling
or after arrival at the delivery point. The rate of discharge of mixed concrete
from truck mixers or agitators shall be controlled by the speed of rotation of t
he drum in the discharge direction with the discharge gate fully open. When a tr
uck mixer or agitator is used for transporting concrete to the delivery point, d
ischarge shall be completed within one hour, or before 250 revolutions of the dr
um or blades, whichever comes first, after the introduction of the cement to the
aggregates. Under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete o
r when the temperature of the concrete is 30oC, or above, a time less than one h
our will be required. 6. Delivery of Mixed Concrete The Contractor shall have su
fficient plant capacity and transportation apparatus to insure continuous delive
ry at the rate required. The rate of
219
delivery of concrete during concreting operations shall be such as to provide fo
r the proper handling, placing and finishing of the concrete. The rate shall be
such that the interval between batches shall not exceed 20 minutes. The methods
of delivering and handling the concrete shall be such as will facilitate placing
of the minimum handling. 405.5 Method of Measurement
The quantity of structural concrete to be paid for will be the final quantity pl
aced and accepted in the completed structure. No deduction will be made for the
volume occupied by pipe less than 100mm (4 inches) in diameter or by reinforcing
steel, anchors, conduits, weep holes or expansion joint materials. 405.6 Basis
of Payment
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 405.5, shall be paid
for at the contract unit price for each of the Pay Item listed below that is inc
luded in the Bill of Quantities. Payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing, placing and finishing concrete including all labor, equipment, tools
and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in the item. Payment
will be made under: Pay Item Number 405 (1) 405 (2) 405 (3) 405 (4) 405 (5) Desc
ription Structural Concrete, Class A Structural Concrete, Class B Structural Con
crete, Class C Structural Concrete, Class P Seal Concrete Unit of Measurement Cu
bic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter
ITEM 406 – PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURES 406.1 Description This Item shall consi
st of prestressed concrete structures and the prestressed concrete portions of c
omposite structures, constructed in reasonably close conformity with the lines,
grades and dimensions shown on the Plans or established by the Engineer and in a
ccordance with this Specification. It shall also include the furnishing and inst
alling of any appurtenant items necessary for the particular prestressing system
to be used, including but not limited to ducts, anchorage assemblies and grouts
used for pressure grouting ducts.
220
406.2 Material Requirements
406.2.1 Concrete and Grout The materials for concrete and grout shall conform to
Item 405, Structural Concrete. The concrete shall be Class P as shown in Table
405.2, unless otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provision
s. The proportions of the grout will be as set out in Subsection 406.3.11, Bondi
ng Steel. 406.2.2 Prestressing Reinforcing Steel It shall conform to Item 710, R
einforcing Steel and Wire Rope. 406.2.3 Prestressing Steel It shall conform to t
he requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope. All prestressing s
teel shall be protected against physical damage and rust or other results of cor
rosion at all times from manufacture to grouting. Prestressing steel that has su
stained physical damage at any time shall be rejected. 406.2.4 Packaging, Storin
g and Shipping Prestressing steel shall be packaged in containers or other shipp
ing forms for the protection of the steel against physical damage and corrosion
during shipping and storage. A corrosion inhibitor which prevents rust or other
results of corrosion shall be placed in the package or form, or when permitted b
y the Engineer, may be applied directly to the steel. The corrosion inhibitor sh
all have no deleterious effect on the steel or concrete or bond strength of conc
rete to steel. Packaging or forms damaged from any cause shall be immediately re
placed or restored to original condition. This shipping package or form shall be
clearly marked with a statement that the package contains high-strength prestre
ssing steel and the care to be used in handling, and the type, kind and amount o
f corrosion inhibitor used, including the date when placed, safety orders and in
structions for use. 406.2.5 Elastomeric Bearing Pads This shall conform to Item
412, Elastomeric Bearing Pads. 406.2.6 Water It shall conform to the requirement
s of Subsection 311.2.4, Water.
221
406.2.7 Enclosures Duct enclosures for prestressing steel shall be galvanized fe
rrous metal or of a type approved by the Engineer, mortartight and accurately pl
aced at the locations shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer. Transition
couplings connecting said ducts to anchoring devices need not be galvanized. 40
6.2.8 Sampling and Testing All wire, strand, anchorage assemblies or bars to be
shipped to the site shall be assigned a lot number and tagged for identification
purposes. All samples submitted shall be representative of the lot to be furnis
hed and in the case of wire or strand, shall be taken from the same master roll.
All of the materials specified for testing shall be furnished free of cost and
shall be delivered in time for tests to be made well in advance of anticipated t
ime of use. The Contractor shall furnish for testing the following samples selec
ted from each lot, if ordered by the Engineer. The selection of samples will be
made at the manufacturer’s plant by the Engineer or his representative. 1. For pre
tensioning work-samples at least 2 m long shall be furnished of each size of wir
e or strand proposed. 2. For post-tensioning work-samples of the following lengt
hs shall be furnished of each size of wire proposed. a. For wire requiring headi
ng, 2 m. b. For wires not requiring heading, sufficient length to make up one pa
rallel-lay cable of 1.50 m long consisting of the same number of wires as the ca
ble to be furnished. c. For strand to be furnished with fittings, 1.50 m between
near ends of fittings. d. For bars to be furnished with thread ends and nuts, 1
.5 m between threads at ends. 3. Anchorage assemblies – If anchorage assemblies ar
e not attached to reinforcement samples, two (2) anchorage assemblies shall be f
urnished, completed with distribution plates of each size and type to be used. W
hen prestressing system has been previously tested and approved for similar proj
ects by an agency acceptable to the Engineer, complete tendon samples need not b
e furnished, provided there is no change whatsoever in the materials, design or
details previously approved.
222
406.3
Construction Requirements
406.3.1 General Prestressed concrete structural members shall be constructed in
accordance with the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete and Reinforcin
g Steel shall be placed in accordance with the requirements of Item 404, Reinfor
cing Steel, subject to the modifications and amendments contained herein. 406.3.
2 Prestressing Method The method of prestressing to be used shall be optional wi
th the Contractor subject to all requirements hereinafter specified. The Contrac
tor, prior to casting any members to be prestressed, shall submit to the Enginee
r for approval complete details of the methods, materials and equipment he propo
ses to use in the prestressing operations. Such details shall outline the method
and sequence of stressing, complete specifications and details of the prestress
ing, steel and anchoring devices proposed for use, anchoring stresses, type of e
nclosures and all other data pertaining to the prestressing operations, includin
g the proposed arrangement of the prestressing units in the members, pressure gr
outing materials and equipment. 406.3.3 Prestressing Equipment Hydraulic jacks u
sed to stress tendons shall be equipped with either a pressure gauge or a load c
ell for determining the jacking stress. The pressure gauge, if used, shall have
an accurate reading dial at least 154 mm (6 inches) in diameter and each jack an
d its gauge shall be calibrated as a unit with the cylinder extension in the app
roximate position that it will be at final jacking force, and shall be accompani
ed by a certified calibration chart. The load cell, if used, shall be calibrated
and shall be provided with an indicator by means of which the prestressing forc
e in the tendon may be determined. The range of the load cell shall be such that
the lower ten (10) percent of the manufacturer’s rated capacity will not be used
in determining the jacking stress. Safety measures shall be taken by the Contrac
tor to prevent accidents due to possible breaking of the prestressing steel or t
he slipping of the grips during the prestressing process. 406.3.4 Casting Yard T
he precasting of prestressed concrete structural members may be done at a locati
on selected by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the Engineer. 406.3.5
Placing Enclosures Enclosures for prestressed reinforcement shall be accurately
placed at locations shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer.
223
406.3.6 Placing Steel Steel units shall be accurately placed at the position sho
wn on the Plans and firmly held during the placing and setting of the concrete.
Ducts may be fabricated with either welded or interlocked seams. Galvanizing of
the welded steel will not be required. Ducts shall have sufficient strength to m
aintain their correct alignment and shape during placing of concrete. Joints bet
ween sections of ducts shall be positive metallic connections which do not resul
t in angle changes at the joints. Waterproof tape shall be used at the connectio
ns. All ducts or anchorage assemblies shall be provided with pipes or other suit
able connections for the injection of grout after prestressing. Ducts for prestr
essing steel shall be securely fastened in place to prevent movement. After inst
allation in the forms, the end of ducts shall at all times be covered as necessa
ry to prevent the entry of water of debris. All ducts for continuous structures
shall be vented over each intermediate support, and at additional locations as s
hown on the Plans. Vents shall be 12.7 mm (1/2 inch) minimum diameter standard p
ipe. Connections to ducts shall be made with metallic structural fasteners. The
vents shall be mortar tight, taped as necessary, and shall provide means for inj
ection of grout through the vents and for sealing the vents. Ends of vents shall
be removed 25.4 mm (1 inch) below the roadway surface after grouting has been c
ompleted. Distances from the forms shall be maintained by stays, blocks, ties, h
angers or other approved supports. Blocks for holding units from contact with th
e forms shall be precast mortar blocks of approved shape and dimensions. Layers
of units shall be separated by mortar blocks or other equally suitable devices.
Wooden blocks shall not be left in the concrete. When acceptable prestressing st
eel for post-tensioning is installed in ducts after completion of concrete curin
g, and if stressing and grouting are completed within ten (10) calendar days aft
er the installation of the prestressing steel, rust which may form during said t
en (10) days will not be caused for rejection of the steel. Prestressing steel,
installed, tensioned and grouted in this manner, all within ten (10) calendar da
ys, shall be subject to all the requirements in this Item pertaining to corrosio
n protection and rejection because of rust. No welds or grounds for welding equi
pment shall be made on the forms or on the steel in the manner after the prestre
ssing steel has been installed. Wires, wire groups, parallel-lay cables and any
other prestressing elements shall be straightened to insure proper positioning i
n the enclosures.
224
Suitable horizontal and vertical spacers shall be provided, if required, to hold
the wires in place in true position in the enclosures. 406.3.7 Pretensioning Th
e prestressing elements shall be accurately held in position and stressed by jac
ks. A record shall be kept of the jacking force and the elongations produced the
reby. Several units may be cast in one continuous line and stressed at one time.
Sufficient space shall be left between ends of units to permit access for cutti
ng after the concrete has attained the required strength. No bond stress shall b
e transferred to the concrete, nor end anchorages released until the concrete ha
s attained a compressive strength, as shown by cylinder tests, of at least 28 MP
a unless otherwise specified. The elements shall be cut or released in such an o
rder that lateral eccentricity or prestress will be a minimum. 406.3.8 Placing C
oncrete Concrete shall not be deposited in the forms until the Engineer has insp
ected the placing of the reinforcement, enclosures, anchorages and prestressing
steel and given his approval thereof. The concrete shall be vibrated with care a
nd in such a manner as to avoid displacement of reinforcement, conduits, or wire
s. Prior to placing concrete, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer t
hat all ducts are unobstructed. 406.3.9 Curing Steam curing process may be used
as an alternative to water curing. The casting bed for any unit cured with steam
shall be completely enclosed by a suitable type of housing, tightly constructed
so as to prevent the escape of steam and simultaneously exclude outside atmosph
ere. Two to four hours after placing concrete and after the concrete has undergo
ne initial set, the first application of steam or radiant heat shall be made unl
ess retarders are used, in which case the waiting period before application of t
he steam or radiant heat shall be increased to from four to six hours. During th
e waiting period, the temperature within the curing chamber shall not be less th
an 10.0oC (50oF) and live steam or radiant heat may be used to maintain the curi
ng chamber at the proper minimum temperature. The steam shall be at 100 percent
relative humidity to prevent loss of moisture and to provide moisture for proper
hydration of the cement. Application of the steam shall not be directly on the
concrete. During application of the steam, or of radiant heat, the ambient air t
emperature shall increase at a rate not to exceed 4.41oC per hour until the curi
ng temperature is reached. The maximum curing temperature within the enclosure s
hall not exceed 71.1oC. The maximum temperature shall be held until the concrete
has reached the desired strength. Detensioning shall be accomplished immediatel
y after the steam curing or the heat curing has been discontinued and additional
curing is not required after detensioning.
225
1. Curing with Low Pressure Steam Application of live steam shall not be directe
d on the concrete forms as to cause localized high temperatures. 2. Curing with
Radiant Heat Radiant heat may be applied by means of pipes circulating steam, ho
t oil or hot water, or by electric heating elements. Radiant heat curing shall b
e done under a suitable enclosure to contain the heat and moisture loss shall be
minimized by covering all exposed concrete surfaces with plastic sheeting or by
applying an approved liquid membrane curing compound to all exposed concrete su
rfaces. Top surface of concrete members to be used in composite construction sha
ll be clear of residue of the membrane curing compound so as not to reduce bond
below design limits. If the Contractor proposes to cure by any other special met
hod, the method and its details shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer
. 406.3.10 Post-tensioning Tensioning of the prestressing reinforcement shall no
t be commenced until tests on concrete cylinders, manufactured of the same concr
ete and cured under the same conditions, indicate that the concrete of the parti
cular member to be prestressed has attained compressive strength of at least 28
MPa unless otherwise specified. After all concrete has attained the required str
ength, the prestressing reinforcement shall be stressed by means of jacks to the
desired tension and the stress transferred to the end anchorage. Cast-in-place
concrete shall not be post-tensioned until at least ten (10) days after the last
concrete has been placed in the member to be the posttensioned and until the co
mpressive strength of said placed concrete has reached the strength specified fo
r the concrete at the time of stressing. All side forms for girders shall be rem
oved before post-tensioning. The falsework under the bottom slab supporting the
superstructure shall not be released until a minimum of 48 hours have elapsed af
ter grouting of the posttension tendons nor until all other conditions of the Sp
ecifications have been met. The supporting falsework shall be constructed in suc
h a manner that the superrestructure will be free to lift off the falsework and
shorten during posttensioning. Formwork left inside box girders to support the r
oadway slab shall be detailed in such a manner so as to offer minimum resistance
to girder shortening due to shrinkage and post-tensioning. The tensioning proce
ss shall be so conducted that the tension being applied and the elongation of th
e prestressing elements may be measured at all times. The friction loss in the e
lement, i.e., the difference between the tension of
226
the jack and the minimum tension, shall be determined in accordance with Article
1.6.7 of AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. Suitable shims or
other approved devices shall be used to insure that the specified anchor set los
s is attained. Prestressing tendons in continuous post-tensioned members shall b
e tensioned by jacking at each end of the tendon. Such jacking of both ends need
not be done simultaneously. A record shall be kept of gage pressure and elongat
ion at all times and submitted to the Engineer for his approval. 406.3.11 Bondin
g Steel Prestressing steel shall be bonded to the concrete by filling the void s
pace between the duct and the tendon with grout . Grout shall consist of Portlan
d Cement, water and an expansive admixture approved by the Engineer. Water shall
be potable. No admixture containing chlorides or nitrates shall be used. Water
shall first be added to the mixer followed by cement and admixture. The grout sh
all be mixed in mechanical mixing equipment of a type that will produce uniform
and thoroughly mixed grout. The water content shall be not more than 19 litres (
5 gallons) per sack of cement. Retempering of grout will not be permitted. Grout
shall be continuously agitated until it is pumped. Grouting equipment shall be
capable of grouting at a pressure of at least 0.6894 MPa (100 psi). Grouting equ
ipment shall be furnished with a pressure gauge having a fullscale reading of no
t more than 2.07 MPa (300 psi). Standby flushing equipment capable of developing
a pumping pressure of 1.72 MPa (250 psi) and of sufficient capacity to flush ou
t any partially grouted ducts shall be provided. All ducts shall be clean and fr
ee of deleterious materials that would impair bonding of the grout or interfere
with grouting procedures. All grout shall pass through a screen with a 2 mm (0.0
787 inch) maximum clear openings prior to being introduced into the grout pump.
Grout injection pipes shall be fitted with positive mechanical shutoff valves. V
ents and ejection pipes shall be fitted with valves, caps or other devices capab
le
227
of withstanding the pumping pressures. Valves and caps shall not be removed or o
pened until the grout has set. Post-tensioned steel shall be bonded to the concr
ete. All prestressing steel to be bonded to the concrete shall be free of dirt,
loose rust, grease or other deleterious substances. Immediately after completion
of the concrete pour, the metal conduit shall be blown out with compressed oil
free air to the extent necessary to break up and remove any mortar in the condui
t before it hardens. Approximately 24 hours after the concrete pour, the metal c
onduits shall be flushed out with water and then blown out with compressed oil f
ree air. Prior to placing forms for roadway slabs of box girder structures, the
Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that all ducts
are unobstructed and if the prestressing reinforcement has been placed, that the
steel is free and unbonded in the duct. After the tendons have been stressed to
the required tension, each conduit encasing the prestressing steel shall be blo
wn out with compressed oil free air. The conduit shall then be completely filled
from the low end with grout under pressure. Grout shall be pumped through the d
uct and continuously wasted at the outlet until no visible slugs of water or air
are ejected and the efflux time of ejected grout is not less than 11 seconds. A
ll vents and openings shall then be closed and the grouting pressure at the inje
ction end shall be raised to a minimum of 0.6894 MPa (100 psi) and held for a mi
nimum of 10 seconds. If aluminum powder is used to expand the grout, it shall be
added as follows: From 2 to 4 grams of the unpolished variety (about 1 to 2 tea
spoons) shall be added for each sack of cement used in the grout. The exact amou
nt of aluminum powder will be designated by the Engineer. The dosage per batch o
f grout shall be carefully weighed. A number of weighings may be made in the lab
oratory and doses placed in glass vials for convenient use in the mix. The alumi
num powder shall be blended with pumicite or other inert powder in the proportio
n of one (1) part powder to fifty (50) parts pumicite (or other inert powder) by
weight. The blend shall be thoroughly mixed with the cement. The amount of the
blend used should vary from 120 g (4-1/2 ounces) per sack of cement for concrete
having a temperature of 21.1oC to 190 g (7 ounces) for a temperature of 4.44oC
after all ingredients are added, the batch shall be mixed for 3 minutes. Batches
of grout shall be placed within 45 minutes after mixing. 406.3.12 Unbonded Stee
l Where the steel is not to be bonded to the concrete, it shall be carefully pro
tected against corrosion by a coating of tar of other waterproofing material, in
addition to any galvanizing which may be specified in addition to the requireme
nts of ASTM A 416 (AASHTO M 203) and ASTM A 421 (AASHTO M 204.)
228
406.3.13 Handling Extreme care shall be exercised in handling and moving precast
prestressed concrete mortar members. Precast girders and slabs shall be transpo
rted in an upright position and the points of support and directions of the reac
tions with respect to the member shall be approximately the same during transpor
tation and storage as when the members are in their final position. If the Contr
actor deems it expedient to transport or store precast units in other than this
position, it shall be done at his own risk after notifying the Engineer of his i
ntention to do so. Prestressed concrete girders shall not be shipped until tests
on concrete cylinders, manufactured of the same concrete and cured under the sa
me conditions as the girders, indicate that the concrete of the particular girde
r has attained a compressive strength equal to the specified design compressive
strength of the concrete in the girder and has attained a minimum age of 14 days
. 406.3.14 Composite Slab Construction The manufacturing tolerances for pre-cast
members shall not exceed those given for length, cross-section and straightness
on the Plans, as specified in the Contract or as approved by the Engineer. In a
ddition, where beams are laid side by side in a deck: 1. The difference on soffi
t level between adjacent units before the in-situ concrete is placed shall not e
xceed 5 mm for units up to 10 mm for longer units. 2. The width of the deck soff
it shall be within 25 mm. 3. In adjacent span, the continuity of the outside beam
s shall be maintained. 4. The width of gap between individual beams shall not ex
ceed twice the nominal gap. 5. The alignment of transverse holes shall permit th
e reinforcement or prestressing cables to be placed without distortion. 406.4 Me
thod of Measurement 406.4.1 Structural Members The quantity to be measured for p
ayment will be the actual number of precast prestressed concrete structural memb
ers, except piling, of the several types and sizes, installed in place, complete
d and accepted. Each member will include the concrete, reinforcement and prestre
ssing steel, anchorages, plates, nuts, elastomeric bearing pads, and other such
material contained within or attached to the unit. Piling will be measured as pr
ovided in Item 400.
229
406.4.2 Other Items The quantities of other Contract items which enter into the
completed and accepted structure will be measured for payment in the manner pres
cribed for the several items involved. 406.5 Basis of Payment
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 406.4 shall be paid f
or at the contract unit price for each of the particular item listed below that
is included in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full com
pensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipme
nt, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item
. Payment will be made under:
Pay Number
Item
Description
Unit of Measurement
406 (1)
Prestressed Structural Concrete Members (Identification) Prestressed Concrete
Each Lump Sum
406 (2)
ITEM 407– CONCRETE STRUCTURES 407.1 Description This Item shall consist of the gen
eral description of the materials, equipment, workmanship and construction requi
rements of concrete structures and the concrete portions of composite structures
conforming to the alignment, grades, design, dimensions and details shown on th
e Plans and in accordance with the Specifications for piles, reinforcing steel,
structural steel, structural concrete and other items which constitute the compl
eted structure. The class of concrete to be used in the structure or part of the
structure shall be as specified in Item 405, Structural Concrete. 407.2 Materia
l Requirements 1. Concrete and Concrete Ingredients Concrete and concrete materi
als shall conform to the requirements in Item 405, Structural Concrete. Unless o
therwise shown on the Plans or specified in Special Provisions, concrete shall b
e of Class A.
230
2. Reinforcing Steel Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements in Item
404, Reinforcing Steel. 3. Structural Steel Structural steel shall conform to t
he requirements of corresponding materials in Item 403, Metal Structures. 4. Bri
dge Bearing (Elastomeric Bearing Pad) Elastomeric bearing pads shall conform to
Item 412, Elastomeric Bearing Pads.
5. Paints Paints shall conform to the requirements in Item 411, Paint. 6. Waterp
roofing and Dampproofing Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or indicated in Spe
cial Provisions, materials for waterproofing and dampproofing shall conform to t
he requirements of the following specifications: a. AASHTO M 115 Asphalt for dam
pproofing and waterproofing. b. AASHTO M 116 Primer for the use with Asphalt in
dampproofing and waterproofing. c. AASHTO M 117 Woven cotton fabrics saturated w
ith bituminous substances for use in waterproofing. d. AASHTO M 118 Coal-Tar pit
ch for roofing, dampproofing and waterproofing. e. AASHTO M 121 Creosote for pri
ming coat with coal-tar pitch dampproofing and waterproofing. f. AASHTO M 159 Wo
ven burlap fabric saturated with bituminous substances for use in waterproofing.
g. AASHTO M 166 Numbered cotton duck and array duck. h. AASHTO M 239 Asphalt fo
r use in waterproofing membrane construction. 7. Concrete Curing Compound Curing
compound shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 148 Liquid membrane-form
ing compounds for curing concrete. 8. Joint Filler
231
Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or in Special Provisions, materials for expa
nsion joint filler shall conform to the requirements of the following specificat
ions: a. AASHTO M 33 Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete. b. AASHTO M
153 Preformed sponge rubber and cork expansion joint fillers for concrete paving
and structural construction. c. AASHTO M 173 Concrete joint sealer hot poured e
lastic type. d. AASHTO M 213 Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete pavin
g and structural construction-non-extruding and resilient bituminous types. e. A
ASHTO M 220 concrete. Preformed elastomeric compression joint seals for
407.2.1 Proportioning and Strength of Structural Concrete This shall be in accor
dance with Item 405, Structural Concrete. 407.2.2 Sampling and Testing This shal
l be in accordance with Item 405, Structural Concrete. 407.3 Construction and Re
quirements 407.3.1 Handling and Placing Concrete: General Concrete shall not be
placed until forms and reinforcing steel have been checked and approved by the E
ngineer. If lean concrete is required in the Plan or as directed by the Engineer
prior to placing of reinforcing steel bar, the lean concrete should have a mini
mum compressive strength of 13.8 MPa (2,000 psi).. In preparation for the placin
g of concrete all sawdust, chips and other construction debris and extraneous ma
tter shall be removed from inside the formwork, struts, stays and braces, servin
g temporarily to hold the forms in correct shape and alignment, pending the plac
ing of concrete at their locations, shall be removed when the concrete placing h
as reached an elevation rendering their service unnecessary. These temporary mem
bers shall be entirely removed from the forms and not buried in the concrete. No
concrete shall be used which does not reach its final position in the forms wit
hin the time stipulated under “Time of Hauling and Placing Mixed Concrete”. Concrete
shall be placed so as to avoid segregation of the materials and the displacemen
t of the reinforcement. The use of long troughs, chutes, and
232
pipes for conveying concrete to the forms shall be permitted only on written aut
horization of the Engineer. The Engineer shall reject the use of the equipment f
or concrete transportation that will allow segregation, loss of fine materials,
or in any other way will have a deteriorating effect on the concrete quality. Op
en troughs and chutes shall be of metal lined; where steep slopes are required,
the chutes shall be equipped with baffles or be in short lengths that reverse th
e direction of movement to avoid segregation. All chutes, troughs and pipes shal
l be kept clean and free from coatings of hardened concrete by thoroughly flushi
ng with water after each run. Water used for flushing shall be discharged clear
of the structure. When placing operations would involve dropping the concrete mo
re than 1.5 m, concrete shall be conveyed through sheet metal or approved pipes.
As far as practicable, the pipes shall be kept full of concrete during placing
and their lower end shall be kept buried in the newly placed concrete. After ini
tial set of the concrete, the forms shall not be jarred and no strain shall be p
laced on the ends of projecting reinforcement bars. The concrete shall be placed
as nearly as possible to its final position and the use of vibrators for moving
of the mass of fresh concrete shall not be permitted. 407.3.1.1 Placing Concret
e by Pneumatic Means Pneumatic placing of concrete will be permitted only if spe
cified in the Special Provisions or authorized by the Engineer. The equipment sh
all be so arranged that vibration will not damage freshly placed concrete. Where
concrete is conveyed and placed by pneumatic means, the equipment shall be suit
able in kind and adequate in capacity for the work. The machine shall be located
as close as practicable to the work. The discharge lines shall be horizontal or
inclined upwards from the machine. The discharge end of the line shall not be m
ore than 3 m from the point of deposit. At the conclusion of placing the concret
e, the entire equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. 407.3.1.2 Placing of Concre
te by Pumping The placing of concrete by pumping will be permitted only if speci
fied or if authorized by the Engineer. The equipment shall be so arranged that v
ibration will not damage freshly placed concrete. Where concrete is conveyed and
placed by mechanically applied pressure the equipment shall be suitable in kind
and adequate in capacity for the work. The operation of the pump shall be such
that a continuous stream of concrete without air pockets is produced. When pumpi
ng is completed, the concrete remaining in the pipeline, if it is to be used, sh
all be ejected in such a manner that there will be
233
no contamination of the concrete or separation of the ingredients. operation, th
e entire equipments shall be thoroughly cleaned. 407.3.1.3 Placing Concrete in W
ater
After this
Concrete shall not be placed in water except with approval of the Engineer and u
nder his immediate supervision. In this case the method of placing shall be here
inafter specified. Concrete deposited in water shall be Class A concrete with a
minimum cement content of 400 kg/m3 of concrete. The slump of the concrete shall
be maintained between 10 and 20 cm. To prevent segregation, concrete shall be c
arefully placed in a compact mass, in its final position, by means of a tremie,
a bottom-dump bucket, or other approved means, and shall not be disturbed after
being placed. A tremie shall consist of a tube having a diameter of not less tha
n 250 mm constructed in sections having flanged couplings fitted with gaskets wi
th a hopper at the top. The tremie shall be supported so as to permit free movem
ent of the discharge and over the entire top surface of the work and so as to pe
rmit rapid lowering when necessary to retard or stop the flow of concrete. The d
ischarge end shall be closed at the start of work so as to prevent water enterin
g the tube and shall be completely submerged in concrete at all times; the tremi
e tube shall be kept full to the bottom of the hopper. When a batch is dumped in
to the hopper, the flow of concrete shall be induced by lightly raising the disc
harge end, but always keeping it in the placed concrete. The flow shall be conti
nuous until the work is completed. When the concrete is placed with a bottom-dum
p bucket, the top of the bucket shall be open. The bottom doors shall open freel
y downward and outward when tripped. The buckets shall be completely filled and
slowly lowered to avoid backwash. It shall not be dumped until it rests on the s
urface upon which the concrete is to be deposited and when discharged shall be w
ithdrawn slowly until well above the concrete. 407.3.2 Compaction of Concrete Co
ncrete during and immediately after placing shall be thoroughly compacted. The c
oncrete in walls, beams, columns and the like shall be placed in horizontal laye
rs not more than 30 cm thick except as hereinafter provided. When less than a co
mplete layer is placed in one operation, it shall be terminated in a vertical bu
lkhead. Each layer shall be placed and compacted before the preceding layer has
taken initial set to prevent injury to the green concrete and avoid surfaces of
separation between the layers. Each layer shall be compacted so as to avoid the
formation of a construction joint with a preceding layer. The compaction shall b
e done by mechanical vibration. The concrete shall be vibrated internally unless
special authorization of other methods is given by the Engineer or is provided
herein. Vibrators shall be of a type, design, and frequency approved by the Engi
neer. The intensity of vibration shall be such as to visibly
234
affect a mass of concrete with a 3 cm slump over a radius of at least 50 cm. A s
ufficient number of vibrator shall be provided to properly compact each batch im
mediately after it is placed in the forms. Vibrators shall be manipulated so as
to thoroughly work the concrete around the reinforcement and embedded fixtures a
nd into the corners and angles of the forms and shall be applied at the point of
placing and in the area of freably placed concrete. The vibrators shall be inse
rted into and withdrawn from the concrete slowly. The vibration shall be of suff
icient duration and intensity to compact the concrete thoroughly but shall not b
e continued so as to cause segregation and at any one point to the extent that l
ocalized areas of grout are formed. Application of vibrators shall be at points
uniformly spaced, and not farther apart than twice the radius over which the vib
ration is visibly effective. Vibration shall not be applied directly or thru the
reinforcement to sections or layers of concrete that have hardened to the degre
e that the concrete ceases to be plastic under vibration. It shall not be used t
o make concrete flow in the forms over distances so great as to cause segregatio
n, and vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete in the forms of troughs
or chutes. 407.3.3 Casting Sections and Construction Joints The concrete in eac
h form shall be placed continuously. Placing of concrete in any such form shall
not be allowed to commence unless sufficiently inspected and approved materials
for the concrete is at hand, and labor and equipment are sufficient to complete
the pour without interruption. Joints in the concrete due to stopping work shall
be avoided as much as possible. Such joints, when necessary, shall be construct
ed to meet the approval of the Engineer. When the placing of concrete is tempora
rily discontinued, the concrete, after becoming firm enough to retain its shape,
shall be cleaned of laitance and other objectionable material to a sufficient d
epth to expose sound concrete. Where a “faster edge” might be produced at a construc
tion joint, as in the sloped top surface of a wingwall, an inset formwork shall
be used to produce an edge thickness of not less than 15 cm in the succeeding la
yer. Work shall not be discontinued within 50 cm of the top of any face, unless
provision has been made for a coping less than 50 cm thick, in which case if per
mitted by the Engineer, the construction joint may be made at the underside of c
oping. Immediately following the discontinuance of placing concrete, all accumul
ations of mortar splashed upon the reinforcing steel and the surfaces of forms s
hall be removed. Dried mortar chips and dust shall not be puddled into the unset
concrete. Care shall be exercised, during the cleaning of the reinforcing steel
, not to injure or break the concrete-steel bond at and near the surface of the
concrete.
235
407.3.4 Casting Box Culverts In general, the base slab of box culverts shall be
placed and allowed to set before the remainder of the culvert is constructed. In
the construction of box culverts the side walls and top slab may be constructed
as a monolith. If the concrete in the walls and top slab is placed in two separ
ate operations, special care shall be exercised in order to secure bonding in th
e construction joint and appropriate keys shall be left in the sidewalls for anc
horing the top slab. Each wingwall shall be constructed, if possible, as a monol
ith. Construction joints where unavoidable, shall be horizontal and so located t
hat no joints will be visible in the exposed face of the wingwall above the grou
nd line. Vertical construction joints shall be at right angles to the axis of th
e culverts. 407.3.5 Casting Columns, Slabs and Girders Concrete in columns shall
be placed in one continuous operation, unless otherwise directed. The concrete
shall be allowed to set for at least 20 hours before the caps are placed. Unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer, no concrete shall be placed in the superst
ructure until the column forms have been stripped sufficiently to determine the
condition of the concrete in the column. The load of the superstructure shall no
t be allowed to come upon the bents until they have been in place at least 14 da
ys, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Concrete in slab spans shall be
placed in one continuous operation for each span unless otherwise provided. Conc
rete in T-Beam or deck girder spans shall be placed in one continuous operation
unless otherwise directed. If it is permitted to place the concrete in two separ
ate operations, each of the operations, shall be continuous: first, to the top o
f the girder stems, and second, to completion. In the latter case, the bond betw
een stem and slab shall be secured by means of suitable shear keys which may be
formed by the use of timber blocks approximately 50 mm x 100 mm in crosssection
having a length of 100 mm less than the width of the girder stem. These key bloc
ks shall be placed along the girder stems as required, but the spacing shall not
be greater than 300 mm center to center. The blocks shall be beveled and oiled
in such a manner as to insure their ready removal, and they shall be removed as
soon as the concrete has set sufficiently to retain its shape. If the contractor
wishes to place the concrete in two separate operations, he shall, with his req
uest for permission to do so, submit plans and proposals of the required changes
to the reinforcement, which plans and proposals shall be subject to the approva
l of the Engineer. In box girders, the concrete in the bottom slab be poured fir
st, as a separate operation.
236
The concrete in the webs and the top slab shall be placed in one continuous oper
ation unless otherwise specified. If it is permitted to place the concrete in mo
re than one operation, the requirements for T-beam shall apply. 407.3.6 Construc
tion Joints Construction joints shall be made only where shown on the Plans or c
alled for in the pouring schedule, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Sh
ear keys or reinforcement shall be used, unless otherwise specified, to transmit
shear or to bond the two sections together. Before depositing new concrete on o
r against concrete which has hardened, the forms shall be retightened. The surfa
ce of the hardened concrete shall be roughened as required by the Engineer, in a
manner that will not leave loose particles of aggregate or damage concrete at t
he surface. It shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter and laitance. When
directed by the Engineer, the surface of the hardened concrete which will be in
contact with new concrete shall be washed with water to this satisfaction, and t
o insure an excess of mortar at the juncture of the hardened and the newly depos
ited concrete, the cleaned and saturated surfaces, including vertical and inclin
ed surfaces shall first be thoroughly covered with a coating of mortar of the sa
me proportion of sand and cement as the class of concrete used against which the
new concrete shall be placed before the grout or mortar has attained its initia
l set. The placing of concrete shall be carried continuously from joint to joint
. The face edges of all joints which are exposed to view shall be carefully fini
shed true to line and elevation. 407.3.7 Concrete Surface Finishing Surface fini
shing shall be classified as follows: Class 1, Ordinary Finish Class 2, Rubbed F
inish Class 3, Floated Finish All concrete shall be given Class 1, Ordinary Fini
sh and additionally any further finish as specified. Unless otherwise specified,
the following surfaces shall be given a Class 2, Rubbed Finish. 1. The exposed
faces of piers, abutments, wingwalls, and retaining walls. 2. The outside faces
of girders, T-beams, slabs, columns, brackets, curbs, headwalls, railings, arch
rings, spandrel walls and parapets. Excluded, however, are the tops and bottoms
of floor slabs and sidewalks, bottoms of beams and girders, sides of interior be
ams and girders, backwalls above bridge seats or the underside of copings. The s
urface finish on piers and abutments shall include all exposed surfaces below th
e bridge seats to 20 cm
237
below low water elevation or 50 cm below finished ground level when such ground
level is above the water surface. Wingwalls shall be finished from the top to 50
cm below the finished slope lines on the outside face and shall be finished on
top and for a depth of 20 cm below the top on the back sides. Unless otherwise s
pecified, the surface of the traveled way shall be Class 3, Floated Finish. Clas
s 1, Concrete Ordinary Finish Immediately following the removal of forms, all fi
ns and irregular protection shall be removed from all surface except from those
which are not to be exposed or are not to be waterproofed. On all surfaces the c
avities produced by form ties and all other holes, honeycomb spots, broken corne
rs or edges and other defects shall be thoroughly cleaned, and after having been
kept saturated with water for a period of not less than three hours shall be ca
refully pointed and made true with a mortar of cement and fine aggregate mixed i
n the proportions used in the grade of the concrete being finished. Mortar used
in pointing shall not be more than one hour old. The mortar patches shall be cur
ed as specified under Subsection 407.3.8. All construction and expansion joints
in the completed work shall be left carefully tooled and free of all mortar and
concrete. The joint filler shall be left exposed for its full length with a clea
n and true edges. The resulting surface shall be true and uniform. All repaired
surfaces, the appearance of which is not satisfactory to the Engineer, shall be “r
ubbed” as specified below. Class 2, Concrete Rubbed Finish After removal of forms,
the rubbing of concrete shall be started as soon as its condition will permit.
Immediately before starting this work, the concrete shall be kept thoroughly sat
urated with water for a minimum period of three hours. Sufficient time shall hav
e elapsed before the wetting down to allow the mortar used in the pointing of ro
ad holes and defects to thoroughly set. Surfaces to be finished shall be rubbed
with a minimum coarse carborundum stone using a small amount of mortar on each f
ace. The mortar shall be composed of cement and fine sand mixed in the proportio
ns used in the concrete being finished. Rubbing shall be continued until all for
m marks, protections and irregularities have been removed, all voids have been f
illed, and a uniform surface has been obtained. The face produced by this rubbin
g shall be left in place at this time. After all concrete above the surface bein
g created has been cast, the final finish shall be obtained by rubbing with a fi
ne carborundum stone and water. This rubbing shall be continued until the entire
surface is of smooth texture and uniform color. After the final rubbing is comp
leted and the surface has dried, it should be rubbed with burlap to remove loose
powder and shall be left free from all unsound patches, paste, powder and objec
tionable marks.
238
Class 3, Concrete Floated Finish After the concrete is compacted as specified in
Subsection 407.3.2, Compaction of Concrete, the surface shall be carefully stru
ck off with a strike board to conform to the cross-section and grade shown on th
e Plans. Proper allowance shall be made for camber if required. The strike board
may be operated longitudinally or transversely and shall be moved forward with
a combined longitudinal and transverse motion, the manipulation being such that
neither is raised from the side forms during the process. A slight excess of con
crete shall be kept in front of the cutting edge at all times. After striking of
f and consolidating as specified above, the surface shall be made uniform by lon
gitudinal or transverse floating or both. Longitudinal floating will be required
except in places where this method is not feasible. The longitudinal float, ope
rated from foot bridges, shall be worked with a sawing motion while held in a fl
oating position parallel to the road centerline and passing gradually from one s
ide of the pavement to the other. The float shall then be moved forward one-half
of each length and the above operation repeated. Machine floating which produce
s an equivalent result may be substituted for the above manual method. The trans
verse float shall be operated across the pavement by starting at the edge and sl
owly moving to the center and back again to the edge. The float shall then be mo
ved forward one-half of each length and the above operation repeated. Care shall
be taken to preserve the crown and cross-section of the pavement. After the lon
gitudinal floating has been completed and the excess water removed, but while th
e concrete is still plastic, the slab surface shall be tested for trueness with
a straight-edge. For the purpose, the Contractor shall furnish and use an accura
te 3 m straight-edge swing handless 1 m longer than one half the width of the sl
ab. The straight-edge shall be held in successive positions parallel to the road
centerline and in contact with the surface and the whole area gone over from on
e side of the slab to the other as necessary advancement along the deck shall be
in successive stages of not more than one-half the length of the straight-edge.
Any depression found shall be immediately filled with freshly mixed concrete, s
truck off, consolidated and refinished. The straight-edge testing and refloating
shall continue until the entire surface is found to be free from observable dep
arture from the straight-edge and the slabs has the required grade and contour,
until there are no deviations of more than 3 mm under the 3 m straight-edge. Whe
n the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the surface shall be given a broom fin
ish. The broom shall be an approved type. The strokes shall be square across the
slabs from edge to edge, with adjacent strokes slightly overlapped, and shall b
e made by drawing the broom without tearing the concrete, but so as to produce r
egular corrugations not over 3 mm in depth. The surface as thus finished shall b
e free from porous spots, irregularities, depressions and small
239
pockets or rough spots such as may be caused by accidental disturbing, during th
e final brooming of particles of coarse aggregate embedded near the surface. Con
crete Surface Finish for Sidewalk. After the concrete has been deposited in plac
e, it shall be compacted and the surface shall be struck off by means of strike
board and floated with a wooden or cork float. An edging tool shall be used on a
ll edges and at all expansion joints. The surface shall not vary more than 3 mm
under a 3 m straight-edge. The surface shall have a granular or matted texture w
hich will not slick when wet. 407.3.8 Curing Concrete All newly placed concrete
shall be cured in accordance with this Specification, unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer. The curing method shall be one or more of the following: 1. Wat
er Method The concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the application of wate
r for a minimum period of 7 days after the concrete has been placed. The entire
surface of the concrete shall be kept dump by applying water with an atomizing n
ozzle. Cotton mats, rugs, carpets, or earth or sand blankets may be used to reta
in the moisture. At the expiration of the curing period the concrete surface sha
ll be cleared of the curing medium. 2. Curing Compound Surfaces exposed to the a
ir may be cured by the application of an impervious membrane if approved by the
Engineer. The membrane forming compound used shall be practically colorless liqu
id. The use of any membrane-forming compound that will alter the natural color o
f the concrete or impart a slippery surface to any wearing surface shall be proh
ibited. The compound shall be applied with a pressure spray in such a manner as
to cover the entire concrete surface with a uniform film and shall be of such ch
aracter that it will harden within 30 minutes after application. The amount of c
ompound applied shall be ample to seal the surface of the concrete thoroughly. P
ower-operated spraying equipment shall be equipped with an operational pressure
gauge and means of controlling the pressure. The curing compound shall be applie
d to the concrete following the surface finishing operation immediately after th
e moisture sheen begins to disappear from the surface, but before any drying shr
inkage or craze cracks begin to appear. In the event of any delay, in the applic
ation of the curing compound, which results in any drying or cracking of the
240
surface, application of water with an atomizing nozzle as specified under “Water M
ethod”, shall be started immediately and shall be continued until the application
of the compound is resumed or started, however, the compound shall not be applie
d over any resulting free standing water. Should the film of compound be damaged
from any cause before the expiration of 7 days after the concrete is placed in
the case of structures, the damaged portion shall be repaired immediately with a
dditional compound. Curing compound shall not be diluted or altered in any manne
r after manufacture. At the time of use, the compound shall be in a thoroughly m
ixed condition. If the compound has not been used within 120 days after the date
of manufacture, the Engineer may require additional testing before the use to d
etermine compliance to requirements. An anti-setting agent or a combination of a
nti-setting agents shall be incorporated in the curing compound to prevent cakin
g. The curing compound shall be packaged in clean barrels or steel containers or
shall be supplied from a suitable storage tank located on the Site. Storage tan
k shall have a permanent system designed to completely redisperse any settled ma
terial without introducing air or any other foreign substance. Containers shall
be well-sealed with ring seals and lug type crimp lids. The linings of the conta
iners shall be of a character that will resist the solvent of the curing compoun
d. Each container shall be labeled with a manufacturer’s name, specification numbe
r, batch number, capacity and date of manufacture, and shall have label warning
concerning flammability. The label shall also warn that the curing compound shal
l be well-stirred before use. When the curing compound is shipped in tanks or ta
nk trunks, a shipping invoice shall accompany each load. The invoice shall conta
in the same information as that required herein for container labels. Curing com
pound may be sampled by the Engineer at the source of supply and on the Site. 3.
Waterproof Membrane Method The exposed finished surfaces of concrete shall be s
prayed with water, using a nozzle that so atomizes the flow that a mist and not
a spray is formed until the concrete has set, after which a curing membrane of w
aterproof paper or plastic sheeting shall be placed. The curing membrane shall r
emain in place for a period of not less than 72 hours. Waterproof paper and plas
tic sheeting shall conform to the specification of AASHTO M 171. The waterproof
paper or plastic sheeting shall be formed into sheets of such width as to cover
completely the entire concrete surface.
241
All joints in the sheets shall be securely cemented together in such a manner as
to provide a waterproof joint. The joint seams shall have a minimum lap of 100
mm. The sheets shall be securely weighed down by placing a bank of earth on the
edges of the sheets or by other means satisfactory to the Engineer. Should any p
ortion of the sheets be broken or damaged within 72 hours after being placed, th
e broken or damaged portions shall be immediately repaired with new sheets prope
rly cemented into place. Sections of membrane which have lost their waterproof q
ualities or have been damaged to such an extent as to render them unfit for curi
ng, the concrete shall not be used. 4. Forms-in-Place Method Formed surfaces of
concrete may be cured by retaining the form-inplace. The forms shall remain in p
lace for a minimum period of 7 days after the concrete has been placed, except t
hat for members over 50 cm in least dimensions, the forms shall remain in place
for a minimum period of 5 days. Wooden forms shall be kept wet by watering durin
g the curing period. 5. Curing Cast-In-Situ Concrete All newly placed concrete f
or cast-in-situ structures, other than highway bridge deck, shall be cured by th
e water method, the forms-inplace method, or as permitted herein, by the curing
compound method, all in accordance with the requirements of Subsection, 407.3.8
Curing Concrete. The curing compound method may be used on concrete surfaces whi
ch are to be buried under ground and surfaces where only Ordinary Surface Finish
is to be applied and on which a uniform color is not required and which will no
t be visible from public view. The top surface of highway bridge decks shall be
cured by either the curing compound method or the water method. The curing compo
und shall be applied progressively during the deck finishing operations. The wat
er cure shall be applied not later than 4 hours after completion of the deck fin
ishing. When deemed necessary by the Engineer during periods of hot weather, wat
er shall be applied to concrete surface being cured by the curing compound metho
d or by the forms-in-place method until the Engineer determine that a cooling ef
fect is no longer required.
242
6. Curing Pre-Cast Concrete (except piles) Pre-cast concrete members shall be cu
red for not less than 7 days by the water method or by steam curing. Steam curin
g for pre-cast members shall conform to the following provisions: a. After place
ment of the concrete, members shall be held for a minimum 4-hour pre-steaming pe
riod. b. To prevent moisture loss on exposed surfaces during the presteaming per
iod, members shall be covered immediately after casting or the exposed surface s
hall be kept wet by fog spray or wet blankets. c. Enclosures for steam curing sh
all allow free circulation of steam about the member and shall be constructed to
contain the live steam with a minimum moisture loss. The use of tarpaulins or s
imilar flexible covers will be permitted, provided they are kept in good conditi
on and secured in such a manner to prevent the loss of steam and moisture. d. St
eam at jets shall be low pressure and in a saturated condition. Steam jets shall
not impinge directly on the concrete, test cylinders, or forms. During applicat
ion of the steam, the temperature rise within the enclosure shall not exceed 20o
C per hour. The curing temperature throughout the enclosure shall not exceed 65o
C and shall be maintained at a constant level for a sufficient time necessary to
develop the required compressive strength. Control cylinders shall be covered t
o prevent moisture loss and shall be placed in a location where temperature of t
he enclosure will be the same as that of the concrete. e. Temperature recording
devices that will provide an accurate continuous permanent record of the curing
temperature shall be provided. A minimum of one temperature recording device per
50 m of continuous bed length will be required for checking temperature. f. Cur
ing of pre-cast concrete will be considered completed after the termination of t
he steam curing cycle. 7. Curing Pre-cast Concrete Piles All newly placed concre
te for pre-cast concrete piles, conventionally reinforced or prestressed shall b
e cured by the “Water Method” as described in Subsection 407.3.8, Curing Concrete, e
xcept that the concrete shall be kept under moisture for at least 14 days. At th
e option of the Contractor, stream curing may be used in which case the steam cu
ring provisions of Subsection 407.3.8 (6), Curing Pre-Cast Concrete (except pile
s) shall apply except that the concrete shall be kept wet for at least 7 days in
cluding the holding and steaming period.
243
407.3.9 Falsework Design and Drawings Detailed working drawings and supporting c
alculations of the false work shall be furnished by the Contractor to the Engine
er. No falsework construction shall start until the Engineer has reviewed and ap
proved the design. The Contractor shall provide sufficient time for the Engineer
to complete this review. Such time shall be proportionate to the complexity of
the falsework design and in no case be less than two weeks. The Contractor may r
eview the falsework drawings at any time provided sufficient time is allowed for
the Engineer’s review before construction is started on the revised portion. Assu
mptions used in design of the falsework shall include but not be limited to the
following: 1. The entire superstructure cross-section, except for the railing, s
hall be considered to be placed at one time, except when in the opinion of the E
ngineer, a portion of the load is carried by members previously cast and having
attained a specified strength. 2. The loading used on timber piles shall not exc
eed the bearing value for the pile and shall in no case exceed 20 tonne per pile
. 3. Soil bearing values and soil condition (wet and dry) shall be designated by
the Contractor on the falsework drawings. Falsework footings shall be designed
to carry the loads imposed upon them without exceeding estimated soil bearing va
lues or allowable settlements. 4. The maximum loadings and deflections used on j
acks, brackets, columns and other manufactured devices shall not exceed the manu
facture’s recommendations. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furn
ish catalogue or other data verifying these recommendations. 5. If the concrete
is to be prestressed, the falsework shall be designed to support any increased o
r readjusted loads caused by the prestressing forces. 6. Joints supporting slabs
and overhangs shall be considered as falsework and designed as such. For the co
nstruction of falsework over and adjacent to roadways where falsework openings a
re required for maintaining traffic, the Contractor shall provide any additional
features for the work needed to insure that the falsework will be stable if sub
jected to impact by vehicles. The falsework design at the locations where said o
penings are required shall include but not be limited to the following minimum p
rovisions: a. Each exterior stringer in a span shall be securely anchored to the
following cap or framing.
244
b. Adequate bracing shall be used during all stages of falsework construction an
d removal over or adjacent to public traffic. c. Falsework members shall be at l
east 300 mm clear of temporary protective railing members. The falsework drawing
s shall include a superstructure placing diagram showing proposed concrete placi
ng sequence and construction joint locations, except that where a schedule for p
lacing concrete is shown on the Contract Plans, no deviation will be permitted t
here from unless approved in writing by the Engineer. The falsework drawings sha
ll show pedestrian openings which are required through the falsework. Anticipate
d total settlements of falsework and forms shall be indicated by the Contractor
on the falsework drawings. These should include falsework footing settlements ov
er 20 mm will not be allowed unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. Deck sl
ab forms between girders shall be constructed with no allowance for settlement r
elative to the girders. Detailed calculations by the Contractor showing the stre
sses deflections, and camber necessary to compensate for said deflections in all
load supporting members shall be supplied. After approving the Contractor’s false
work deflection camber, the Engineer will furnish to the Contractor the amounts
of camber necessary to compensate for vertical alignment or anticipated structur
e deflection, if these are not shown on the drawings. The total camber used in c
onstructing falsework shall be the sum of the aforementioned cambers. 407.3.10 F
alsework Construction The falsework shall be constructed to conform to the false
work drawings. The materials used in the falsework construction shall be of the
quantity and quality necessary to withstand the stresses imposed. The workmanshi
p used in falsework shall be of such quality that the falsework will support the
loads imposed on it without excessive settlement or take-up beyond that shown o
n the falsework drawings. When falsework is supported on piles, the piles shall
be driven to a bearing value equal to the total calculated pile loading as shown
on the falsework drawings. Suitable jacks or wedges shall be used in connection
with falsework to set the forms to their required grade and to take up any exce
ssive settlement in the falsework either before or during the placing of concret
e.
245
The Contractor shall provide tell-tales attached to the soffit forms easily read
able and in enough systematically-placed locations to determine the total settle
ment of the entire portion of the structure where concrete is being placed. Shou
ld unanticipated events occur, including settlements that deviate more than 20 mm
from those indicated on the falsework drawings, which in the opinion of the Eng
ineer would prevent obtaining a structure conforming to the requirement of the S
pecification, the placing of concrete shall be discontinued until corrective mea
sures satisfactory to the Engineer are provided. In the event satisfactory measu
res are not provided prior to initial set of the concrete in the affected area,
the placing of concrete shall be discontinued at a location determined by the En
gineer. All unacceptable concrete shall be removed. 407.3.11 Removing Falsework
Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, or permitted by the Engineer, falsework
supporting any span of a supported bridge shall not be released before 14 days a
fter the last concrete, excluding concrete above the bridge deck, has been place
d. Falsework supporting any span of a continuous or rigid frame bridge shall not
be released before 14 days after the last concrete excluding concrete above the
bridge deck, has been placed in that span and in the adjacent portions of each
adjoining span for a length equal to at least half the length of the span where
falsework is to be released. Falsework supporting deck overhangs and deck slabs
between girders shall not be released until 7 days after the deck concrete has b
een placed. In addition to the above requirements, no falsework for bridges shal
l be released until the supported concrete has attained a compressive strength o
f at least 80% of the required 28-day strength. Falsework for cast-in place pres
tressed portion of structure shall not be released until after the prestressing
steel has been tensioned. All falsework materials shall be completely removed. F
alsework piling shall be removed at least 50 cm below the surface of the origina
l ground or stream bed. When falsework piling is driven within the limits of dit
ch or channel excavation areas, the falsework piling within such areas shall be
removed to at least 50 cm below the bottom and side slopes of said excavated are
as. All debris and refuse resulting from work shall be removed and the site left
in a neat and presentable condition. 407.3.12 Formwork Design and Drawings The
Contractor shall prepare drawings and materials data for the formwork and shutte
rs to be submitted to the Engineer for approval unless otherwise directed. The r
equirements for design of formwork are the same as described under Section 407.3
.9.
246
407.3.13 Formwork Construction Concrete forms shall be mortar-tight, true to the
dimensions, lines and grades of the structure and with the sufficient strength,
rigidity, shape and surface smoothness as to leave the finished works true to t
he dimensions shown on the Plans or required by the Engineer and with the surfac
e finish as specified. Formwork and shutters are to be constructed in accordance
with the approved Plans. The inside surfaces of forms shall be cleaned of all d
irt, mortar and foreign material. Forms which will later be removed shall be tho
roughly coated with form oil prior to use. The form oil shall be of commercial q
uality form oil or other approved coating which will permit the ready release of
the forms and will not discolor the concrete. Concrete shall not be deposited i
n the forms until all work in connection with constructing the forms has been co
mpleted, all materials required for the unit to be poured, and the Engineer has
inspected and approved said forms and materials. Such work shall include the rem
oval of all dirt, chips, sawdust and other foreign material from the forms. The
rate of depositing concrete in forms shall be such to prevent bulging of the for
ms or form panels in excess of the deflections permitted by the Specification. F
orms for all concrete surfaces which will not be completely enclosed or hidden b
elow the permanent ground surface shall conform to the requirements herein for f
orms for exposed surfaces. Interior surfaces of underground drainage structures
shall be completely enclosed surfaces. Formwork for concrete place under water s
hall be watertight. When lumber is used, this shall be planed, tongued and groov
ed. Forms for exposed concrete surface shall be designed and constructed so that
the formed surface of the concrete does not undulate excessively in any directi
on between studs, joists, form stiffeners, form fasteners, or wales. Undulations
exceeding either 2 mm or 1/270 of the center to center distance between studs,
joists, form stiffeners, form fasteners, or wales will be considered to be exces
sive. Should any form of forming system, even though previously approved for use
, produce a concrete surface with excessive undulations, its use shall be discon
tinued until modifications satisfactory to the Engineer have been made. Portions
of concrete structures with surface undulations in excess of the limits herein
specified may be rejected by the Engineer. All exposed surfaces of similar porti
ons of a concrete structure shall be formed with the same forming material or wi
th materials which produce similar concrete surface textures, color and appearan
ce.
247
Forms for exposed surfaces shall be made of form materials of even thickness and
width and with uniform texture. The materials shall have sharp edges and be mor
tar-tight. Forms for exposed surfaces shall be constructed with triangular fille
ts at least 20 mm wide attached so as to prevent mortar runs and to produce smoo
th straight chamfers at all sharp edges of the concrete. Form fasteners consisti
ng of form bolts, clamps or other devices shall be used as necessary to prevent
spreading of the forms during concrete placement. The use of ties consisting of
twisted wire loops to hold forms in position will not be permitted. Anchor devic
es may be cast into the concrete for later use in supporting forms or for liftin
g precast members. The use of driven types of anchorage for fastening forms of f
orm supports to concrete will not be permitted. 407.3.14 Removal of Forms and Fa
lsework Forms and falsework shall not be removed without the consent of the Engi
neer. The Engineer’s consent shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility fo
r the safety of the work. Blocks and bracing shall be removed at the time the fo
rms are removed and in no case shall any portion of the wood forms be left in th
e concrete. Falsework removal for continuous or cantilevered structures shall be
as directed by the Engineer or shall be such that the structure is gradually su
bjected to its working stress. When concrete strength tests are used for removal
of forms and supports, such removal should not begin until the concrete has att
ained the percentage of the specified design strength shown in the table below.
Minimum Time Centering under girders, beams frames or arches Floor slabs Walls C
olumns Sides of beams and all other vertical surfaces Minimum Percentage Design
Strength 80% 70% 70% 70% 70%
14 days 14 days 1 day 2 days 1 day
In continuous structures, falsework shall not be released in any span until the
first and second adjoining spans on each side have reached the strength specifie
d herein, or in the Special Specifications. When cast-in-place post tensioned br
idges are constructed, falsework shall remain in place until all post tensioning
has been accomplished.
248
Falsework under all spans of continuous structures shall be completely released
before concrete is placed in railings and parapets. In order to determine the co
ndition of column concrete, forms shall be removed from columns before releasing
supports from beneath beams and girders. Forms and falsework shall not be relea
sed from under concrete without first determining if the concrete has gained ade
quate strength without regard to the time element. In the absence of strength de
termination, the forms and falsework are to remain in place until removal is per
mitted by the Engineer. The forms for footings constructed within cofferdams or
cribs may be left in place when, in the opinion of the Engineer, their removal w
ould endanger the safety of the cofferdam or crib, and when the forms so left in
tact will not be exposed to view in the finished structure. All other forms shal
l be removed whether above or below the ground line or water level. All forms sh
all be removed from the cells of concrete box girders in which utilities are pre
sent and all formwork except that necessary to support the deck slab shall be re
moved from the remaining cells of the box girder. To facilitate finishing, forms
used on ornamental work, railing, parapets and exposed vertical surfaces shall
be removed in not less than 12 nor more than 48 hours, depending upon weather co
nditions. In order to determine the condition of concrete in columns, forms shal
l always be removed from them before the removal of shoring from beneath beams a
nd girders. Falsework and centering for spandrel-filled arches not be struck unt
il filling at the back of abutments has been placed up to the spring line. False
work supporting the deck of rigid frame structure shall not be removed until fil
ls have been placed back to the vertical legs. 407.4 Method of Measurement The q
uantity of structural steel, structural concrete, reinforcing steel or other Con
tract Pay Items shall constitute the completed and accepted structure which shal
l be measured for payment in the manner prescribed in the several items involved
. 407.5 Basis of Payment
The quantities measured as provided in Section 407.4, Method of Measurement shal
l be paid for at the contract price for the several pay items which price and pa
yment shall be full compensation for furnishing, preparing, fabricating, placing
, curing and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to comple
te the Item. Such payment shall constitute full payment for the completed struct
ure ready for use.
249
Payment will be made under: Pay Item Number 405 (1) 405 (2) 405 (3) 400 103 601
404 407 (1) Description Concrete Class A, C & P Concrete Post/Baluster Railings
Parapet Walls Piling Structure Excavation Sidewalk Concrete Reinforcing Steel Ba
rs Lean Concrete Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter Each Linear Meter Cubic Meter L
inear Meter Cubic Meter Square Meter or Cubic Meter Kilogram Cubic Meter
When more than one item is specified, means of identification shall be inserted
in parenthesis immediately after the Pay Item and letter suffixes shall be inclu
ded within the parenthesis of the Pay Item Number.
ITEM 408– STEEL BRIDGES 408.1 Description This Item shall consist of the construct
ion of steel structure conforming to the lines, grades, dimensions and designs s
hown on the Plans and in accordance with the Specifications for piling, concrete
metal reinforcement, structural steel and other items which constitute the comp
leted structure. 408.2 Materials All materials shall conform to the detailed req
uirements specified for the component parts of the completed structure. Where sp
ecial materials are required, they shall be shown on the Plans or in the Special
Provisions. 408.3 Construction Methods 408.3.1 Organization and Equipment Durin
g the progress of the work the Contractor shall have a competent foreman or supe
rintendent, experienced in steel erection, in personal charge of the work. Befor
e starting work, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer as to the method of er
ection he proposes to follow and the amount and character of equipment he propos
es to use, which shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The approval
of the Engineer shall not be considered as relieving the Contractor of the respo
nsibility for the safety of his method or equipment or from
250
carrying out the work in full accordance with the Plans and Specifications. Erec
tion diagrams shall be approved by the Director, Bureau of Design. 408.3.2 Handl
ing and Storing Materials Steel and timber shall be placed on skids above the gr
ound and shall be kept clean. The underlying ground shall be kept free from vege
tation and properly drained. Girders and beams shall be placed upright and shore
d. Long members, such as columns and chords, shall be supported on skids placed
close enough together to prevent injury by deflection. The Contractor shall be r
esponsible for the loss of any material, which has been paid for by the Bureau,
while it is in his care, or for any damage, resulting from his work. The loading
, transporting, unloading and piling of structural material shall be so conducte
d that the metal will be kept free from injury from rough handling. 408.3.3 Erec
tion The Contractor shall furnish and place all falsework, erect all metal work,
remove the temporary construction, and do all work required to complete the str
ucture as covered by the Contract, including the removal of the old structure or
structures if so stipulated, all in accordance with the Plans and these Specifi
cations. If the substructure and superstructure are built under separate contrac
ts, the Department will provide the substructure, constructed to correct lines a
nd elevations and properly finished, and will establish the lines and elevation
required for setting the steel. If the fabrication and erection of the superstru
cture are done under separate contract, the Department will furnish detail plans
for the bridge or bridges to be erected, including shop details, camber diagram
s, erection diagrams, list of field rivets and bolts, and copy of shipping state
ments showing a list of parts and their weights. The Contractor shall provide al
l tools, machinery, and appliances including drift pins and fitting up bolts, ne
cessary for the expeditious handling of the work. The falsework shall be properl
y designed, substantially built and maintained for the loads which will come upo
n it. The Contractor, shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval plan
s for falsework or for changes in existing structure necessary for maintaining t
raffic. Approval of the Contractor’s plans shall not be considered as relieving hi
m of any responsibility. The parts shall be accurately assembled as shown on the
Plans and any matchmarks shall be followed. The material shall be carefully han
dled that no parts will be bent, broken or otherwise damaged. No hammering shall
be done that will in any way injure or damage a member. Bearing surface and sur
faces to be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members are assembl
ed. Unless erected by the cantilever method, truss spans shall be erected on blo
cking so placed as to give the trusses proper camber. The blocking shall be left
in
251
place, until the tension chord splices are fully riveted and all other truss con
nection pinned and bolted. Rivets in splices of butts joints of compression memb
ers and rivets in railings shall not be driven until the span is swung. Splices
and filled connections shall have one-half of the holes filled with bolts and cy
lindrical erection pin (half bolts and half pins) before riveting. Splices and c
onnections carrying traffic during erection shall have three-fourths of the hole
s so filled. Fitting up bolts shall be of the same nominal diameter as the rivet
s and cylindrical erection pins shall be 0.75 mm (1/32 inch) larger. 408.3.4 Wel
ding Where so indicated on the Plans, structural members shall be joined by weld
ing. The welds shall be of the size and type indicated and shall be made by comp
etent operators. Shop welding shall conform in all details to the Standard Speci
fications for Welded Highway and Railway Bridges of the American Welding Society
. Field welding shall conform to the requirement of Item 409, Welded Structural
Steel. 408.3.5 Bent Material The straightening of plates, angles, and other shap
es shall be done by methods not likely to produce fractures or other injury. The
metal shall not be heated. Following the straightening of a bend or buckle, the
surface shall be carefully inspected for evidence of fracture. Sharpkinks and b
ends may be cause for the rejection of the material. 408.3.6 Alignment Before be
ginning the field riveting, the structural steel shall be adjusted to correct gr
ade and alignment and elevation of panel points (end of floor beams) properly re
gulated. For truss spans a slight excess camber will be permitted while the bott
om chords are being riveted. 408.3.7 Field Riveting Pneumatic hammers shall be u
sed for field riveting. Cup-faced dollies, fitting the head closely, shall be us
ed to insure good bearing. Connections shall be secured and accurately fitted up
before the rivets are driven. Drifting shall be only such as to draw the parts
into position and not sufficient to enlarge the holes or distort the metal. Unfa
ir holes shall be reamed or drilled. Rivets shall be heated uniformly to light c
herry-red color and shall be driven while hot. They shall not be overheated or b
urned. Rivet heads shall be full and symmetrical, concentric with the shank, and
shall have full bearing all around. They shall not be smaller than the heads of
the shop rivets. Rivets shall be tight and shall grip the connected parts secur
ely together. Caulking or recupping will not be permitted. In removing rivets, t
he surrounding metal shall not be injured, and if necessary they shall be drille
d out.
252
408.3.8 Bolted Connections In bolted connections, the nut shall be drawn up tigh
t and set by center punching the threads of the bolt at the face of the nut. 408
.3.9 Pin Connections Pilot and driving nuts shall be used in driving pins. Pins
shall be so driven that the members will take full bearing on them. Pin nuts sha
ll be screwed up tight and threads burred at the face of the nut with a center p
unch. 408.3.10 Misfits and Shop Errors The connection of minor misfits involving
non-harmful amounts of reaming, cutting and chipping will be considered a legit
imate part of the erection. However, any error in the shop fabrication or deform
ation resulting from handling and transportation which prevents the proper assem
bling and fitting up of parts by the moderate use of drift pins or a moderate am
ount of reaming and slight chipping and cutting shall be reported immediately to
the Engineer, and his approval of the method of correction obtained. If the Con
tract provides for completed fabrication and erection, the Contractor shall be r
esponsible for all misfits, errors and injuries and shall make the necessary cor
rection and replacements. If the Contract is for erection only, the inspector, w
ith the cooperation of the Contractor shall keep a correct record of labor and m
aterials and be used in correction of misfits, errors and injuries, not due to a
ctions of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall render within 30 days of item
ized bill for the approval of the Engineer. 408.3.11 Placing Anchor Bolts Anchor
bolts shall be placed as provided under Item 407, Concrete Structures or as sho
wn on the Plans. 408.3.12 Setting Shoes and Bearing Shoes and bearing plates sha
ll not be placed on bridge seat bearing areas that are improperly finished or th
at are deformed or irregular. They shall be set level in exact position and elev
ation and shall have full even bearing. Unless otherwise specified, the shoes an
d bearing plates shall be set by the following methods: a. The bridge seat beari
ng area shall be heavily coated with lead paint and then covered with three laye
rs of 340.2 to 369.8 g (12 to 14 ounces) duck, each layer being coated thoroughl
y on its top surface with redlead paint. The shoes and bearing plates shall be p
laced in position while the paint is plastic. As an alternate to canvas and red
lead 3 mm (1/8 inch) sheet lead may be used if called for on the Plans or is app
roved by the Engineer. b. The shoes and bearing plates shall be properly support
ed and fixed with grout. No lead shall be placed upon them until the grout has s
et for at
253
least 96 hours, adequate provision being made to keep the grout well moistened d
uring this period. The grout shall consist of one part Portland Cement to one pa
rt fine-grained sand. The location of the anchor bolts in relation to the slotte
d holes in the expansion shoes correspond to the temperature at the time of erec
tion. The nuts on the anchor bolts at the expansion end of spans shall be adjust
ed to permit the free movement of span. Anchor bolt nuts shall be set by center
punching the threads of the bolts at the face of the nut. 408.3.13 Painting Unle
ss otherwise specified, metal work shall be given two shop coats of red lead pai
nt and two field coats of paint as specified under Item 411, Paint. 408.3.14 Pla
cing Concrete On steel spans, the concrete floor shall not be placed until the s
pan has been swung or released from the falsework. The concrete shall be placed
symmetrically on the span beginning at the center and working simultaneously tow
ards each end or beginning at the ends and working simultaneously towards the ce
nter. In either case, the concrete shall be placed continuously between construc
tion joints designated on the Plans or approved in writing by the Engineer. Conc
rete shall be cured specified under Item 407, Concrete Structures. 408.3.15 Timb
er Floors Timber floors of the species and grade indicated on the plans shall be
built as specified under Timber Structures, Item 402. 408.3.16 Field Inspection
All materials and work of erection shall be subject to the inspection of the En
gineer, who shall be given all facilities required. Materials and workmanship no
t previously inspected will not inspected after its delivery to the site of the
work. Any materials inspected and accepted prior to delivery on the work shall b
e subject to rejection if found defective after delivery. 408.4 Method of Measur
ement The quantity of structural steel and other Contract Pay Items which consti
tute the completed and accepted structure shall be measured for payment in the m
anner prescribed in the several items involved.
254
408.5 Basis of Payment The quantities, measured as prescribed above, shall be pa
id for at the contract until price for the several Pay Items which price and pay
ments shall be full compensation for furnishing, preparing, fabricating, transpo
rting, placing and erecting all structural steel and all other materials for the
complete structure; for all shop work, painting and field work; for all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the item. Such payment sh
all constitute full payment for the completed structure ready for use, and no al
lowance shall be made for cofferdam construction, falsework, or other erection e
xpenses as provided under Subsection 408.3.10.
ITEM 409 – WELDED STRUCTURAL STEEL 409.1 Description This work shall consist of th
e joining of structural steel members with welds of the type, dimensions, and de
sign shown on the Plans and in accordance with the Specifications. It is the int
ent of this Specification to provide for work of a quality comparable to that re
quired under the Standard Specifications for Welded Highway and Railway Bridges
of the American Welding Society. In case of dispute or for situations not adequa
tely provided for in this Specification, those designated Standard Specification
s shall be considered as the final authority and shall govern except as amended
by the Special Provisions. Welding of Structural Steel shall be done only when s
hown on the Plans or authorized in writing by the Engineer. 409.2 Materials Requ
irements Steel base metal to be welded shall be open-hearth or electric furnace
steel conforming to AASHTO M 183. All arc-welding electrodes shall conform to th
e requirements of American Welding Society Specifications. Electrodes shall be o
f classification numbers E7016, E7018 or E7028 as required for the positions, ty
pe of current and polarity, and other conditions of intended use, and to conform
to any special requirements indicated on the Plans. Filler material to be used
in the repair or strengthening of old structures or for joining new parts to exi
sting steel members, shall be adopted to the material to be welded and may depar
t from the foregoing requirements only if agreed by the Engineer.
255
409.3 Construction Requirements 409.3.1 Equipment 409.3.1.1 General All items of
equipment for welding and gas cutting shall be so designed and manufactured and
in such condition as to enable qualified welders to follow the procedures and a
ttain the results prescribed in this Specification. 409.3.1.2 Arc-Welding Equipm
ent Welding generators and transformers shall be designed expressly for welding.
They shall be capable of delivering steady currents adjustable through a range
ample for the work requirements. They shall respond automatically and quickly to
changes in power requirements due to variations in arc length and shall deliver
full current promptly on striking an arc. Welding cable shall have sufficient c
onductivity to avoid overheating and inadequate current at the arc and shall be
effectively insulated against welding circuit voltage. Earth or ground connectio
ns and circuits shall be secured and adequate to carry the welding currents. Ele
ctrode holders shall grip the electrode firmly and with good electrical contact.
Approved automatic welding heads may be used, with suitable auxiliary handling
equipment to provide automatic instead of manual control of electrode and weldin
g arc. 409.3.1.3 Gas-Cutting Equipment Torches and tips shall be of proper size
and type of the work at hand. Suitable regulators shall afford the welder comple
te control over the pressure and rate of flow of each gas. 409.3.1.4 Protective
Equipment All personnel protective equipment shall conform to the American Stand
ard Association Code for such equipment. The Contractor shall enforce the use of
approved accessories necessary for the protection and convenience of the welder
s and for the proper and efficient execution of the work. Suitable protection ag
ainst the light of the arc shall be maintained by the Contractor when arc-weldin
g operation might be viewed within harmful range by persons other than the actua
l welders and inspectors.
256
409.3.2 Welding 409.3.2.1 General Welding shall be performed by the metal-arc pr
ocess, using the electrodes specified with either direct or alternating current.
Surfaces to be welded shall be smooth, uniform and free from fins, tears, and o
ther defects which would adversely affect the quality of the weld. Edges of mate
rial shall be trimmed by machining, chipping, grinding, or machine gas-cutting t
o produce a satisfactory welding edge wherever such edge is thicker than: 13 mm
for sheared edge of material; 16 mm for toes of angles or rolled shapes (other t
han wide flange sections); 25 mm for universal mill plate or edges of flange sec
tions. The width of root face used, shall be not more than 1.5 mm for parts less
than 10 mm in thickness nor more than 3 mm for parts 10 mm or more in thickness
. Butt welds shall be proportioned so that their surface contours will lie in gr
adual transition curves. For butt welded joints between base metal parts of uneq
ual thickness, a transition shall be provided on a slope or level not greater th
an 1 in 2.5 to join the offset surfaces. This transition may be provided by slop
ing the surface of the weld metal or by bevelling the thicker part or by combina
tion of these two methods. Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale,
slag, rust, grease or other material that will prevent proper welding. Mill sca
le that withstands vigorous wire brushing or a light film of drying oil or rust
inhibitive coating may remain. Surfaces within 50 mm of any weld location shall
be free of any paint or other material that would prevent proper welding or prod
uce objectionable fumes while welding. No operation or actual welding or gas-cut
ting shall be performed on a member while it is carrying live load stress or whi
le subject to shock and vibration and from moving loads. Welding and gas-cutting
shall cease in advance of the application of such loads. 409.3.2.2 Welders All
welding shall be done by approved competent and experienced and fully qualified
welders. 409.3.2.3 Preparation of Materials for Welding Dimensional tolerance, s
traightness and flatness of the structural shapes and plates shall be within the
limits prescribed in this Specification. Structural steel which is to be welded
shall preferably not be painted until all welding is completed.
257
Preparation of edges by gas-cutting shall, wherever practicable, be done by mach
ine gas-cutting. Machine gas-cutting edges shall be substantially as smooth and
regular as those produced by edge planning and shall be left free of slag. Manua
l gas cutting shall be permitted only where machine gas-cutting is not practicab
le and with the approval of the Engineer. The edge resulting from manual gas-cut
ting shall be inspected and smoothed with special care. All reentrant corners sh
all be filleted to a radius at least 19 mm. The cut lines shall not extend beyon
d the fillet and all cutting shall follow closely the line prescribed. 409.3.2.4
Assembly The parts to be joined by fillet welds shall be brought into a close c
ontact as practicable, and no event shall be separated more than 5 mm. If the se
paration is 1.5 mm or greater, the leg of the fillet weld shall be increased by
the amount of separation. The separation between faying surfaces of lap joints a
nd of butt joints landing on a backing structure shall not exceed 1.5 mm. The fi
t of joints which are not sealed by welds throughout their length shall be suffi
ciently close to exclude water after painting. Where irregularities in rolled sh
ape or plates, after straightening, do not permit contact within the above limit
s, the procedure necessary to bring the material within these limits shall be su
bject to the approval of the Engineer. Cutting parts to be joined by butt welds
shall be carefully aligned. Where the parts are effectively restrained against b
ending due to eccentricity or alignment, a maximum offset of 10 percent of the t
hickness or the thinner part joined, but in no case more than 3 mm, may be permi
tted as a departure from the theoretical alignment. In connecting alignment in s
uch cases, the parts shall not be drawn into a greater slope than two degrees (1
in 30). Measurement of offset shall be between centerline of parts unless other
wise shown on the Plans. When parts abutting edge to edge differ in thickness, t
he joint shall be of such form that the slope of either surface through the tran
sition zone does not exceed 1 in 2.5, the thicker part being bevelled, if necess
ary. Members to be welded shall be brought into correct alignment and held in po
sition by bolts, clamps, wedges, guy lines, struts, other suitable devices or ta
ck welds until welding has been completed. The use of jigs and fixtures is recom
mended where practicable. Such fastening devices as may be used shall be adequat
e to insure safety. Plug and slot welds may be used to transmit shear in a lap j
oint or to prevent the buckling or separation of lapped parts. The diameter of t
he hole for a plug weld shall not be less than the thickness of the part contain
ing it plus 8 mm nor shall it be greater than 2.25 times the thickness of the we
ld. The minimum center spacing of plug welds shall be four times the diameter of
the hole.
258
The length of the slot for a slot weld not exceed ten times the thickness of the
weld. The width of the slot shall not be less than the thickness of the part co
ntaining it plus 8 mm nor shall it be greater than 2.25 times the thickness of t
he weld. The ends of the slot shall be semicircular or shall have the corners ro
unded to a radius not less than the thickness of the part containing it, except
those ends which extend to the edge of the part. The minimum spacing of lines of
slot welds in a direction transverse to their length shall be 4 times the width
of the slot. The minimum center to center spacing in a longitudinal direction o
n any line shall be 2 times the length of the slot. The thickness of plug or slo
t welds in material 16 mm or less in thickness shall be equal to the thickness o
f the material. In material over 16 mm in thickness, it shall be at least one-ha
lf the thickness of the material but not less than 16 mm. Tack welds, located wh
ere the final welds will later be made, shall be subject to the same quality req
uirements as the final weld. Tack welds shall be as small as practicable and whe
re encountered in the final welding, shall be cleaned and fused thoroughly with
the final weld. Defective, cracked or broken tack welds shall be removed before
final welding. Members or component parts of structures shall be assembled and m
atchmarked prior to erection to insure accurate assembly and adjustment of posit
ion on final erection. Painted assembly marks shall be removed from any surface
to be welded. 409.3.2.5 Control of Distortion and Shrinkage Stresses In assembli
ng and joining parts of a structure or a built-up member and in welding reinforc
ing parts to existing members, the procedure and sequence of welding shall be su
ch as will avoid distortion and minimize shrinkage stresses. As far as practicab
le, long parallel lines of welding on a part or member shall be executed concurr
ently, and all welds shall be deposited in a sequence that will balance the appl
ied heat of welding on various sides as much as possible while the welding progr
esses. Before the commencement of welding on a structural member in which severe
shrinkage stresses or distortion are likely to occur, a complete program for we
lding sequence and distortion control shall be submitted to the Engineer and sha
ll be subject to his approval. The direction of the general progression in weldi
ng on a member shall be from points where parts are relatively fixed in position
, with respect to each other, toward points which have a greater relative freedo
m of movement.
259
Where part or member is to be welded on both ends into a rigid structure or asse
mbly, the connection at which the greatest shrinkage will occur in the direction
of the length of the part or member, shall be made while the part or member is
free to move in the direction of the shrinkage; and the connection involving the
least shrinkage shall be made last. A weld designed to sustain tensile stress s
hall be made in such a way that their welding is being performed at any point, a
ll parts that would offer restraint against shrinkage can shrink, deform or move
enough to preclude serious shrinkage stresses. In welding of built-up members o
f heavy sections, particularly those T or Hshapes where the flanges are consider
ably heavier than the stems or webs, and in any case where the component parts a
re 38 mm or greater in thickness, special care shall be exercised during welding
to avoid weld cracking. In the welding of members of such heavy section, the te
mperature of contiguous areas about a welding operation shall be equal, and not
less than 55oC. If necessary, the lighter parts shall be heated while the weld i
s cooling, to keep the temperature of contiguous parts substantially equal. In t
he fabrication of cover-plated beams and built-up members, all shop splices in e
ach component part shall be made before such component part is welded to other p
arts of the member. In making all butt-welded splices in rolled shapes and in ma
king buttwelded field splices in built-up sections (such as in H or I-sections)
the sequence and procedure of welding shall be such as to take into account uneq
ual amounts of expansion or contraction in the parts being welded. The procedure
and sequence shall be such that while the weld and the heated base metal are co
ntracting at any point, any part of the member that would furnish restraint agai
nst such contraction can move or shrink enough to prevent the shrinkage of the h
eated metal from producing harmful internal stresses. The procedure and sequence
that is used for making such splices shall be planned in advance in full detail
and submitted to the Engineer and shall be subject to his approval. The ends of
all butt welds in flanges of beams and girders shall be made with extension bar
s regardless of the thickness of such flanges. Welding shall not be done when su
rfaces are wet from condensation or rain which is falling on the surfaces to be
welded; nor during periods of high winds unless the welding operator and the wor
k are properly protected. 409.3.2.6 Technique of Arch-Welding The welding curren
t shall conform with respect to voltage and current (and polarity, of direct cur
rent is used) to the recommendations of the manufacturer of the electrode being
used, as indicated in the instructions that are included with each container of
electrodes.
260
Arc lengths and electrical potential and current shall be suited to the thicknes
s of material, type of groove and other circumstances attendant to the work. The
maximum size of electrode permitted shall be 5 mm with the following exceptions
: 1. The maximum size for flat position welding of all passes except the root pa
ss shall be 8 mm. 2. The maximum size for horizontal fillet welds shall be 6 mm.
The electrode for the single pass fillet weld and for the root passes of all mu
ltiple layer welds in all cases shall be of the proper size to insure thorough f
usion and penetration with freedom from slag inclusions. A single layer of the w
eld metal, whether deposited-in one pass or made up of several parallel beads, s
hall not exceed 3 mm in thickness except that the bead at the root may be 6 mm i
n thickness if the position of welding and the viscosity of the weld metal permi
t control of the latter so that it does not over flow upon unfused base metal. T
he maximum size of fillet weld which may be made in one pass shall be 8 mm excep
t that for vertical welds made upward the maximum size made in one pass shall be
13 mm. In vertical welding the first root pass shall be formed from the bottom
upward. Succeeding passes may be formed by any technique that will fulfill the r
equirements of the Specification and Plans. The electrode manipulation during we
lding shall insure that: 1. Complete fusion between the base metal and the depos
ited weld metal is obtained. 2. The melted base metal is replaced by weld metal
so that no undercut remains along the edges of the finished weld. 3. The molten
weld metal floats all slag, oxide and gases to the surface behind the advancing
arc. Each time the arc is started, either to begin a weld or to continue partly
completed weld, the arch shall be manipulated to obtain complete fusion of the d
eposited weld metal with the base metal and with any previously deposited weld m
etal, before any progression of the arc along the joint. At the completion of a
pass or weld, the arc shall be manipulated so as to fill the crater with sound m
etal.
261
Before welding over previously deposited metal, the slag shall be removed and th
e weld and adjacent base metal shall be brushed clean. This requirement shall ap
ply not only to cratered areas but also when welding is resumed after any interr
uption. It shall not, however, restrict the making of plug and slot welds, in ac
cordance with the following paragraphs. In making plug welds the following techn
iques shall be used: 1. For flat welds, the arc shall be carried around the root
of the joint and then weaved along a spiral path to the center of the hole, fus
ing and depositing a layer of weld metal in the root and bottom of the joint. Th
e arc shall then be carried to the periphery of the hole, and the procedure repe
ated, fusing and depositing successive layers to fill the hole to the depth requ
ired. The slag covering the weld metal shall be kept molten, or nearly so, until
the weld is finished. If the arc is broken, except briefly for changing electro
des, the slag must be allowed to cool and shall be completely removed before res
tarting the weld. 2. For vertical welds, the arc shall be started at the root of
the joint, at the lower side of the hole and carried upward on the zigzag path,
depositing a layer about 5 mm thick on the exposed face at the thinner plate an
d fused to it and to the side of the hole. After cleaning the slag from the weld
, other layers shall be similarly deposited to fill the hole to the required dep
th. 3. For overhead welds, the procedure shall be the same as for flat welds exc
ept that the slag shall be allowed to cool and shall be completely removed after
depositing each successive layer until the hole is filled to the required depth
. Slot welds shall be made with a technique similar to that specified above for
plug welds, except that if the length of the slot exceeds three times the width,
or if the slot extends to the edges of the part of the technique specified abov
e for making plug welds shall be followed for the type of flat position welds. 4
09.3.2.7 Details of Welds The following tabulation shows that the relation betwe
en weld size and the maximum thickness of material on which various sizes of fil
let welds may be used: Size of Fillet Weld 5 mm 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 13 mm 16 mm over
Maximum Thickness of Part 13 mm 19 mm 32 mm 51 mm 152 mm 152 mm
262
The maximum size of fillet weld that may be used along the edge of material 6 mm
or more in thickness shall be 1.5 mm less than the thickness of the material. T
he minimum effective length of fillet weld shall be four times its size and in n
o case less than 38 mm. Fillet welds terminating at the corners of parts or memb
ers shall, wherever practicable, be turned continuously full size around the cor
ners for a distance not less than twice the nominal size of the weld. Intermitte
nt fillet welds, preferably, shall not be used. permitted only where the require
d weld area is less than that of a weld of the minimum size. If used on main mem
bers, they intermittent welds. In all other cases, chain intermittent welding st
aggered intermittent welding. They shall be continuous fillet shall be chain is
preferable to
Spacing of intermittent fillet welds shall be measured between the center of the
weld segments. The spacing shall conform to the following requirements unless c
alculated stresses between the parts require closer spacing: 1. At the end of me
mbers, there shall preferably be continuous longitudinal fillet welds at least a
s long as the width of the element or member being connected. 2. The clear spaci
ng in the direction of stress of stitch welds that connect plates to other plate
s or to shapes shall not exceed: a. For compression members ….10 times the thickne
ss of the thinner part but not more than 300 mm. b. For tension members ….. 14 tim
es the thickness of the thinner part but not more than 300 mm. The spacing trans
verse to the direction of stress shall not exceed 24 times the thickness of the
thinner part connected. 3. For members composed of two or more rolled shapes in
contact with one another, the longitudinal spacing of stitch welds shall not exc
eed 600 mm. Fillet welds in holes or slots may be used to transmit shear in lap
joints or to prevent the buckling or separation of lapped parts. The fillet weld
s in a hole or slot may overlap. Seal welding shall preferably be accomplished b
y a continuous weld combining the function of sealing and strength, changing sec
tions only as the required strength may necessitate. Exposed faces of welds shal
l be made reasonably smooth and regular, shall conform as closely as practicable
to the design requirements and shall not at any place be inside the intended cr
oss-section. Weld dimension in excess of the
263
design requirements shall not be a cause for rejection, but in case excess weld
metal involves serious malformation, such work shall be rejected. All fillet wel
ds shall be of acceptable types. All fillet welds that carry reversed stresses r
unning in a direction perpendicular to their longitudinal axis shall be of the c
oncave type or the 0-gee type when the fillet weld is flushed with the edge of a
member. When one of these types is specifically indicated on the Plans for a we
ld, it shall be of that type. Butt welds shall preferably be made with a slight
reinforcement, except as may be otherwise provided, and shall have no defects. T
he height of reinforcement shall be not more than 3 mm. All butt welds, except p
roduced with aid of backing material, shall have the root of the initial layer c
hipped out or otherwise cleaned to sound metal and welded in accordance with the
requirements of the Specification. Butt welds made with the use of a backing of
the same materials as the base metal shall have the weld metal thoroughly fused
with the backing materials. Ends of butt welds shall be extended past the edges
of the parts joined by means of extension bars providing a similar joint prepar
ation and having a width not less than the thickness of the thicker part jointed
; or for material 19 mm or less in thickness, the ends of the welds shall be chi
pped or cut down to solid metal and side welds applied to fill out the ends to t
he same reinforcement as the face of the welds. Extension bars shall be removed
upon completion and cooling of the weld and the ends of the weld made smooth and
flush with the edges of the abutting parts. 409.3.2.8 Quality of Welds Weld met
al shall be solid throughout except that very small gas pockets and small inclus
ions of oxide or slag may be accepted if well dispersed and if none exceeds 1.5
mm in greatest dimension, and if the sum of the greatest dimensions of all such
defects of weld metal area does not exceed 15 mm in an area of 10 cm2. There sha
ll be complete fusion between the weld metal and the base metal and between succ
essive passes throughout the joint. Welds shall be free from overlap and the bas
e metal free from undercutting. All craters shall be filled to the full cross-se
ction of the welds. 409.3.2.9 Correction In lieu of rejection of an entire piece
of member containing welding which is unsatisfactory or indicates inferior work
manship, the following corrective measures may be permitted by the Engineer whos
e specific approval shall be obtained for making each correction:
264
1. Removal of part or all of the welds shall be affected by chipping, grinding o
r gas-gouging. 2. Defective or unsound welds shall be corrected either by removi
ng and replacing the welds, or as follows: a. Excessive convexity – Reduce to size
by removal of excess weld metal. b. Shrinkage crack in base metal, craters and
excessive porosity – Remove defective portion of base and weld metal down to sound
metal and deposit additional weld metal. c. Undercutting, undersize and excessi
ve concavity – Clean and deposit additional weld metal. d. Overlapping and lack of
fusion – Remove and replace the defective length of weld. e. Slag inclusion – Remov
e those parts of the weld containing slag and fill with weld metal. f. Removal o
f adjacent base metal during welding – Clean and form full size by depositing addi
tional weld metal. 3. Where corrections require the depositing of additional wel
d metal, the electrode used shall be smaller than the electrode used in making t
he original weld. 4. A cracked weld shall be removed throughout its length, unle
ss by the use of acid etching, magnetic inspection or other equally positive mea
ns, the extent of the crack can be ascertained to be limited, in which case soun
d metal 50 mm or more beyond each end of the crack need not be removed. 5. In re
moving defective parts of a weld, the gas-gouging, chipping or grinding shall no
t extend into the base metal any substantial amount beyond the depth of the web
penetration unless cracks or other defects exist in the base metal. 6. Where the
work performed subsequent to the making of a deficient weld has rendered the we
ld inaccessible or has caused new conditions which would make the correction of
the deficiency dangerous or ineffectual, the original condition shall be restore
d by renewal of welds or members, or both before making the necessary correction
s, or else the deficiency shall be compensated by additional work according to a
revised design approved by the Engineer. 7. Caulking of welds shall not be done
. 8. Before adding weld metal or rewelding, the surfaces shall be cleaned thorou
ghly. Where incomplete fusion is disclosed by chipping, grinding or gas gouging,
to correct defects, that part of the weld shall be removed and rewelded.
265
409.3.2.10 Stress Relieving Peening to reduce residual stress of multi-layer wel
ds may be used only if authorized and ordered by the Engineer. Care shall be exe
rcised to prevent overpeening which may cause overlapping, scaling, flecking or
excessive cold working of weld and base metal. 409.3.2.11 Cleaning and Protectiv
e Coatings Painting shall not be done until the work has been accepted and shall
be in accordance with the Specification. The surface to be painted shall be cle
aned of spatter, rust, loose scale, oil and dirt. Slag shall be cleaned from all
welds. Welds that are to be galvanized shall be treated to remove every particl
e of slag. 409.3.2.12 Identification The operator shall place his identification
mark with crayon, or paint, near the welds made by him. 409.3.2.13 Inspection O
n completion of the welding work, inspection shall be carried out by an Inspecto
r appointed by the Engineer. The size and contour of welds shall be measured wit
h suitable gauges. The inspector shall identify with a distinguishing mark all w
elds that he has inspected and accepted. The Contractor shall remove and replace
, or correct as instructed, all welds found defective or deficient. He shall als
o replace all methods found to produce inferior results, with methods which will
produce satisfactory work. In the event that fault welding or the removal for r
ewelding of faulty welding shall damage the base metal, the Contractor shall rem
ove and replace the damaged material. 409.4 Measurement and Payment Unless other
wise provided in the Special Provisions, welded structural steel structures shal
l not be measured and paid for separately, but the cost thereof shall be conside
red as included in the contract price for other items.
266
ITEM 410 – TREATED AND UNTREATED TIMBER 410.1 Description This Item shall consist
of structural timber of the specie and size called for on the Plans, either trea
ted or untreated as called for in the Proposal. It shall include the furnishing
of the timber, the framing, erecting, furnishing of hardware and the furnishing
of paint and paintings if paint is called for on the Plans or in the Special Pro
visions. 410.2 Material Requirements 410.2.1 Timber Timber shall be the specie s
pecified on the Plans. Unless otherwise noted on the Plans or in the Special Pro
visions, only the best grade shall be used. It shall be free from loose knots, s
plits, worm holes decay, warp, ring separation, or any defect which will impair
its strength or render it unfit for its intended use. Any specie specified on th
e Plans may be used for untreated timber and if that specie is not available, a
specie of equivalent strength and durability may be used if authorized by the En
gineer. If the timber is to be treated, only those species shall be used which a
re known to possess properties which make them favorable to treatment. 410.2.2 P
aint When painting of timber is required, the paint shall conform to the require
ments of Item 411, Paint. 410.2.3 Hardware Hardware shall conform to the require
ments of Item 402, Timber Structures. 410.2.4 Preservatives The preservatives sh
all be creosote oil or creosote petroleum oil blend as called for on the Plans o
r by the Special Provisions, and shall conform to the Standard Specifications fo
r Pressure Treatment of Timber Products, ASTM D1760. When timber is intended for
marine use, the creosote petroleum oil blend shall not be used. 410.3 Construct
ion Requirements
410.3.1 Timber Treatment Treatment shall consist of the forcing of either creoso
te oil or a creosote petroleum oil mixture into the outer fibers of the timber b
y a heat and pressure
267
process. The process shall be in accordance with AASHTO M 133, preservatives and
pressure treatment process for timber, but with such changes in temperatures, p
ressures, duration of treatment and other factors affecting the final treatment
that experience has shown to be necessary in the treatment of structural timbers
sawn from woods native to the Philippines. The treatment shall be so regulated
that the curing process will not induce excessive checking. The minimum penetrat
ion of the preservative into the surface of the timber shall be 20 mm. The minim
um retention of the preservative per cubic metre of timber shall be as follows:
For general use, 192 kg by empty cell process For marine use, 320 kg by full cel
l process The Engineer shall be notified at least 10 days in advance of the date
that the treating process will be performed in order that the untreated timber,
the treatment process, and the finished treatment timber may all be inspected.
The Engineer shall inspect the timber prior to treatment to determine conformanc
e with those Specifications and suitability of conditions for treatment. He shal
l be permitted free access to the plant in order that temperatures, pressures an
d quantities and type of treatment materials used may be observed. Samples of th
e creosote or creosote petroleum oil mixture shall be furnished as required for
tests. After completion of the treatment, the timber shall be checked to determi
ne penetration of treatment, amount of checking quantity of free preservative re
maining on the timber and will check any other visual evidence that the treatmen
t has been performed in a satisfactory manner. The penetration of treatment shal
l be determined by boring a sufficient number of well-distributed holes to deter
mine the average penetration. All such holes shall be plugged with plugs approxi
mately 1.6 mm larger in diameter that the bit used in boring the holes. If the p
enetration of preservative is less than the required amount, the entire charge,
or such parts thereof as are determined by the Inspector to be unsatisfactory, m
ay be retreated. If after retreatment the penetration is still insufficient, the
treated pieces shall be rejected. Any excessive checking caused by the treating
process shall be cause for rejection of the pieces in which the excessive check
ing occurs. The treating plant shall be equipped with adequate thermometers and
pressure gauges so that the process can be accurately controlled and a continuou
s record made of all stages of the treating process. If required by the Engineer
, records shall be furnished showing the duration, maximum and minimum temperatu
res and pressures used during all stages of the process. 410.4 Method of Measure
ment The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meter of timber co
mplete in place and accepted. Measurement of timber shall be computed from
268
the nominal dimension of the timber even though the actual dimensions may be sca
nt. The measurement of timber shall include only such timber as a part of the co
mpleted and accepted work and will not include any timber required for a falsewo
rk, bracing or other timber required in the erection. 410.4 Basis of Payment
The quantities, determined as provided in Section 410.4, Method of Measurement,
shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter for Timber or Untre
ated Timber as called for in the Proposal, which price and payment shall constit
ute full compensate for furnishing all timber, for preservative treating when re
quired, and for the delivery, framing, erecting, painting if required, and for t
he furnishing of all labor, hardware, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary
to complete the Item. Payment will be made under: Pay Item Number 410 (1) 410 (
2) Description Timber Treated Timber Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter Cubic Meter
ITEM 411 – PAINT 411.1 Description This Item shall consist of furnishing and apply
ing all paint materials including vehicles, pigments, pastes, driers, thinners a
nd mixed paints for steel and wooden structures; sampling testing and packing; p
reparation of the surface and application of paint to structures. 411.2 Material
s Requirements 411.2.1 General Paint, except aluminum paint, shall consist of pi
gments of the required fineness and composition ground to the desired consistenc
y in linseed oil in a suitable grinding machine, to which shall be added additio
nal oil, thinner and drier as required. Aluminum paint shall consist of aluminum
powder or paste of the required fineness and composition to which shall be adde
d the specified amount of vehicle. The paint shall be furnished for use in ready
mixed, paste or powder form. All paints shall meet the following general requir
ements:
269
1. The paint shall show no excessive settling and shall easily redisperse with a
paddle to a smooth, homogeneous state. The paint shall show no curdling, liveri
ng, caking or color separation and shall be free from lumps and skins. 2. The pa
int as received shall brush easily, possess good leveling properties and shall s
how no running or sagging when applied to a smooth vertical surface. 3. The pain
t shall dry to a smooth uniform finish, free from roughness grit, unevenness and
other imperfections. 4. The paint shall not skin within 48 hours in a ¾ filled ti
ghtly closed container. 411.2.2 The paint shall conform to the requirements of t
he Specifications indicated as follows: Ready Mixed Red Lead Paint Aluminum Pain
t White & Tinted Ready Mixed Paint Foliage Green Bridge Paint Black Paint for Br
idges And Timber Structures Basic Lead-Silico-Chromate Ready Mixed Primer Ready
Mixed Aluminum Paint 411.2.3 Drier This Specification covers both straight oil d
rier (material free from resins and gums), and Japan drier (material containing
varnish gums). The drier shall be composed of lead manganese or cobalt or a mixt
ure of any of these elements, combined with a suitable fatty oil, with or withou
t resins or gums, and mineral spirits or turpentine, or a mixture of these solve
nts. The drier shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Appearance – Free f
rom sediment and suspended matter. 2. Flash Point – (Tag Close Up) Not less than 3
0oC. 3. Elasticity – The drier when flowed on metal and baked for 2 hours at 100oC
shall have an elastic film. AASHTO M 72 and PNS Type I, II, III & IV AASHTO M 6
9 and PNS Type I & II AASHTO M 70 AASHTO M 67 AASHTO M 68 AASHTO M 229 AASHTO M
260 and PNS
270
4. Drying – It shall mix with pure raw linseed oil in the proportion of 1 volume o
f drier to 19 volume of oil without curdling and the resulting mixture when flow
ed on glass shall dry in not more than 18 hours. 5. Color – When mixed with pure,
raw linseed oil in the proportion of 1 volume of drier to 8 volume of oil, the r
esulting mixture shall be darker than a solution of 6 grams of Potassium Dichrom
ate in 13 cc of pure Sulfuric Acid (sp.gr. 1.84). 411.3 Construction Requirement
s 411.3.1 Proportion of Mixing It is the intent of this Specification to provide
a paint of proper brushing consistency, which will not run, steak or sag and wh
ich will have satisfactory drying qualities. 411.3.2 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats
On Structural Steel The paint shall be mixed in the proportion of 240 grams of
aluminum powder or paste per liter of vehicle of long oil spar varnish. This mak
es a paint containing 21 percent pigment and 79 percent vehicle. The weighed amo
unt of powder or paste shall be placed in a suitable mixing container and the me
asured volume of vehicle poured over it. The paste or powder shall be incorporat
ed in the paint by vigorous stirring with a paddle. The powder or paste will rea
dily disperse in the vehicle. Before removing any paint from the container, the
paint shall be thoroughly stirred to insure a uniform mixture, and the paint sha
ll be suitably stirred during use. The paint shall be mixed on the job and only
enough for one day’s use shall be mixed at one time. When two field coats of alumi
num paint are specified, the first coat shall be tinted with lampblack paste or
Prussian blue paste in the quantity of 24 grams/liter of paint. The exact quanti
ty used shall be sufficient to give a contrast in color which can be readily dis
tinguished. When three field coats of aluminum paint are specified, the second c
oat shall be tinted. 411.3.3 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats on Creosoted Timber The
paint shall be mixed as specified for Aluminum Paint for Structural Steel excep
t that the proportions shall be 270 grams of aluminum powder or paste to one lit
re of vehicle. Other paint composition may be used when and as stipulated in the
Special Provisions. 411.3.4 Containers and Markings All paints shall be shipped
to strong substantial containers plainly marked with the weight, color and volu
me in litres of the paint content, a true statement of the percentage compositio
n of the pigment, the proportions of the pigment to
271
vehicle, the name and address of the manufacturers, and the stencil of the autho
rized inspecting agency. Any package or container not so marked will not be acce
pted for use. 411.3.5 Sampling and Testing Method of sampling shall be as follow
s: 1. One 20-litre can sample in original unopened container shall be obtained f
or 100 cans of the delivered material or 10% fraction thereof. 2. One 4-litre ca
n sample in original unopened container shall be obtained for every 100 cans or
fraction thereof of the delivered material. Methods of testing will be in accord
ance with the applicable AASHTO or ASTM Methods. 411.3.6 Painting 411.3.6.1 The
painting of structure shall include the proper preparation of the surface; the a
pplication, protection and drying of the paint coatings, the protection of the p
edestrians, vehicular or other traffic upon or underneath the structures, the pr
otection of all parts of the structure (both superstructure and substructure) ag
ainst disfigurement by spatters, splashes and smirches of paint or of paint mate
rials; and the supplying of all tools, tackle, scaffolding labor, paint and mate
rials necessary for the entire work. Paint shall not be applied during rain, sto
rms or when the air is misty, or when, in the opinion of the Engineer, condition
s are otherwise unsatisfactory for the work. Paint shall not be applied upon dam
p surfaces or upon metal which has absorbed heat sufficient to cause the paint t
o blister and produce a pervious paint film. No wide flat brush shall be used. A
ll brushes preferably shall be either round or oval but if flat brushes are used
, they shall not exceed 100 mm in width. The paint when applied shall be so mani
pulated as to produce a uniform even coating in close contact with the surface b
eing painted, and shall be worked into all corners and crevices. On surfaces ina
ccessible to brushes, the paint shall be applied by spray gun or with sheepskin
daubers specially constructed for the purposes. Paint shall be thoroughly stirre
d, preferably by means of mechanical mixers, before being removed from the conta
iners, and, to keep the pigments in suspension, shall be kept stirred while bein
g applied.
272
When a paint gun is used, the equipment used shall be of an approved type and sh
all have provision for agitation of paint in the spray container. In the case of
aluminum paint, the pressure used shall be only that necessary to secure adequa
te atomization. If in the opinion of the Engineer unsatisfactory results are obt
ained from the use of a spray gun, its use shall be discontinued and the paintin
g completed by the use of brushes. 411.3.6.2 Painting Structural Steel Surfaces
of metals to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, loose mill, scale,
dirt, oil or grease, and other foreign substances. Unless cleaning is to be done
by sandblasting, all weld areas, before cleaning is begun, shall be neutralized
with a proper chemical, after which they shall be thoroughly rinsed with water.
Cleaning may be by any of the following three methods: 1. Hand Cleaning The rem
oval of rust, scale and dirt shall be done by the use of metal brushes, scrapers
, chisels, hammers or other effective means. Oil and grease shall be removed by
the use of gasoline or benzene. Bristle or wood fiber brushes shall be used for
removing loose dust. 2. Sandblasting Sandblasting shall remove all scale and oth
er substances down to the base metal. Special attention shall be given to the cl
eaning of corners and re-entrant angels. Before painting, sand adhering to the s
teel in corners and elsewhere shall be removed. The cleaning shall be approved b
y the Engineer prior to any painting. The material shall be painted before the r
ust forms and not later than 2 hours after cleaning. 3. Flame Cleaning Oil and g
rease shall be removed by washing with suitable solvent. Excess solvent shall be
wiped from the work before proceeding with subsequent operation. The surface to
be painted shall be cleaned and dehydrated (freed of occluded moisture) by the
passage of oxyacetylene flames which have an oxygen to acetylene of at least one
. The inner cones of these flames shall have a ratio length to port diameter of
at least 8 and shall not be more than 4 mm center to center. The oxyacetylene fl
ames shall be traversed over the surface of the steel in such manner and at such
speed that the surface is dehydrated, and dirt, rust, loose scale, scale in the
form of blisters or scabs, and similar foreign matter are freed by the rapid in
tense heating by the flames. The flames shall not be traversed so slowly that lo
ose scale or other foreign matter is fused to the surface of the steel. The numb
er, arrangement and manipulation of the flames shall be such that all parts of t
he surface are adequately cleaned and dehydrated. Promptly after the application
of the flames, the surface of the steel shall be wire-brushed, hand scraped whe
rever necessary and then swept and dusted to remove all
273
free materials and foreign particles. Compressed air shall not be used for this
operation. Paint shall be applied promptly after the steel has been cleaned and
while the temperature of the steel is still above that of the surrounding atmosp
here, so that there will be no recondensation of moisture on the cleaned surface
s. 4. Shop Painting of Structural Steel When all fabrication work is completed a
nd has been tentatively accepted, all surfaces not painted before assembling sha
ll be given two coats of Red Lead Shop Paint conforming to the requirements of t
his Specification. (The inside of top chords for trusses and laced members or in
accessible parts, except contact surfaces, may be painted before assembling). Sh
ipping pieces shall not be located for shipment until thoroughly dry. No paintin
g shall be done after loading the materials on transport vehicles. Erection mark
s for field identifications of members shall be painted upon previously painted
surfaces. With the exception of abutting joints and base plates, machinefinished
surface shall be coated, as soon as practicable after acceptance with a hot mix
ture of white lead and tallow before removal from the shop. The composition used
for coating machine-finished surface shall be mixed in the following proportion
s: Pure Tallow Pure White Lead Pure Linseed Oil 5. Field Painting of Structural
Steel When the erection work is complete including riveting and straightening of
bent metal; all adhering rust, scale, dirt, grease or other foreign material sh
all be removed as specified under cleaning of surfaces. As soon as the Engineer
has examined and approved all field rivets, the heads of such rivets and field b
olts, all welds and any surfaces from which the shop coat of paint has become wo
rn off or has otherwise become defective, shall be cleaned and thoroughly covere
d with one coat of shop coat paint. When the paint applied for “touching up” rivet h
eads and abraded surfaces has become thoroughly dry, such field coats as called
for shall be applied. In no case shall a succeeding coat be applied until the pr
evious coat has dried throughout the full thickness of the film. All small crack
s and cavities which were not sealed in water-tight manner by the first field co
at shall be filled with a pasty mixture of red lead and linseed oil before the s
econd field coat is applied. 1,915 grams 958 grams 1.0 liter
274
The following provisions shall apply to the application of all field coats. To s
ecure a maximum coating on edges of plates or shapes, rivet heads and other part
s subjected to special wear and attack, these parts shall first be stripped, fol
lowed immediately by the general painting of the whole surface, including the ed
ges and rivet heads. The application of the final coats shall be deferred until
adjoining concrete work has been placed and finished. If concreting operations h
ave damaged that paint, the surface shall be recleaned and repainted. 411.3.6.3
Painting and Timber Structures Timber structures shown on the Plans to be painte
d, shall be given two coats of the specified materials, which shall be thoroughl
y brushed in. Additional coats shall be required when so specified on the Plans.
All surfaces shall be thoroughly dry before painting, and each coat shall be al
lowed to stand for three or four days, or until thoroughly dry before applying t
he succeeding coat. Timber which required painting must be seasoned timber surfa
ced on 4 sides. It shall be either untreated or salt-treated timber as specified
on the Plans. The entire surface of all untreated timber that is to be painted,
shall be given a priming coat immediately after the material is delivered to th
e project. All contact surfaces shall receive the second coat paint. Special car
e shall be taken during construction and handling so that the pieces to be paint
ed do not come in contact, except when required, with the creosoted materials an
d that no oil is brushed on the same during construction operations. The Contrac
tor shall be required to pile such pieces separately from the creosoted material
s and keep them from contact with same until ready for erection. Creosoted mater
ials such as guardrails and guide posts which are to be painted, shall be painte
d with aluminum paint as specified above. 411.3.6.4 Painting Galvanized Surface
For the purpose of conditioning the surface of galvanized surfaces to be painted
, the painting shall be deferred as long as possible in order that the surface m
ay weather. Before painting galvanized surfaces they shall be treated as follows
: 1. In 4 litres of soft water, dissolve 60 ml of copper chloride, copper nitrat
e, and sal ammonia, then add 60 ml of commercial muriatic acid. This should be d
one in earthenware or glass vessel, never in tin or other metal receptacle. Appl
y the solution with a wide flat brush to the galvanized surface, when it will as
sume a dark almost black color which on drying becomes a grayish film.
275
2. The surfaces, when dry, may then be painted as described. 411.3.6.5 Repaintin
g Existing Structures When called for on the Plans or in the Special Provisions,
existing structures shall be given the number and kind of coats of field paint
as stipulated. The surface to be repainted shall be cleaned as specified under S
ubsection 411.3.6.2, Painting Structural Steel, with the added provisions that a
ll dead or loose paint shall be removed by scraping, chipping, or brushing as ma
y be necessary. Timber railings, name plates, planking and other interfering par
ts shall be removed before cleaning is begun and shall be replaced after the pai
nting has been completed and the last coat has thoroughly dried. The application
of the coat shall be as specified under Subsection 411.3.6.2, (5), Field Painti
ng of Structural Steel. 411.4 Measurement and Payment Painting shall not be meas
ured and paid for separately, but the cost thereof shall be considered as includ
ed in the contract unit price of the items where called for.
ITEM 412 – ELASTOMERIC BEARING PADS 412.1 Description 412.1.1 Scope
This Item shall consist of the requirement for elastomeric bearing pads whose ma
in function is to transfer loads or accommodate relative movement between a brid
ge superstructure and its supporting structure, or both while avoiding damaging
strain and additional tension. Elastomeric bearings shall include unreinforced p
ads (consisting of elastomer only) and reinforced bearings with steel laminates.
412.1.2 General Requirements All bearings shall be designed in accordance with
specifications contained in the latest edition of the AASHTO Standard Specificat
ion for Highway Bridges, 15th Edition, 1992. 412.1.3 Classification and Use The
following are the types of elastomeric bearings: a. Plain Elastomeric Bearing Pa
d b. Plain Elastomeric Sandwich Bearing
276
c. Steel-Laminated Elastomeric Bearing without External Load Plates d. Steel-Lam
inated Elastomeric Bearing with External Load Plate(s) A laminated bearing pad i
s required when the thickness of the plain pad is more than 31.75 mm and the com
pressive strain is more than 15%. 412.2 Material Requirements The elastomer for
the manufacture of the bearing is furnished in two types as follows: 1. Type CR-
Chloroprene Rubber 2. Type NR-Natural Rubber The elastomer compound used in the
construction of a bearing shall contain only either natural rubber or a chloropr
ene rubber as the raw polymer. No reclaimed rubber shall be used. Steel laminate
s used for reinforcement shall be made from rolled mild steel conforming to ASTM
A 36, A 570 or equivalent, unless otherwise specified by the Engineer. The lami
nates shall have a minimum nominal thickness of 20 gage. 412.2.1 Physical Requir
ements A. The elastomer compound shall meet the minimum requirement of Table 1.
B. Dimensions and Permissible Variations All elastomeric layers, for example, pl
ain bearing pads, laminates, and covers, shall be of uniform thickness unless ot
herwise specified in the contract or purchase order. All internal steel laminate
s shall be of uniform thickness. When specified in the contract or purchase orde
r, the thickness of the outer steel laminates may differ if not adjacent to an e
xternal load plate. The minimum thickness of internal steel laminates shall be 1
.5 mm or 0.060 in (16 gage) when the greater of the length or width of a rectang
ular bearing or diameter of a circular bearing is less than 450 mm or 18 in. In
all other cases, the minimum thickness shall be 2 mm or 0.075 inch (14 gage). Be
aring dimensions and elastomer layer thicknesses shall satisfy the tolerances in
Table 2, in which D is the length, width or diameter as appropriate, and T is t
he total elastomer thickness. Variation from a plane parallel to a design surfac
e shall not exceed an average slope of 0.005 for the upper surface and 0.006 for
a side surface.
277
Table 1 – Quality Control Properties of Elastomer Natural Rubber (NR) Grade (Durom
eter) Physical Properties: A. Before Aging Tensile Strength, MPa (D412) Elongati
on, % (D412) Durometer Hardness, Shore (D2240) Tear Resistance, N/mm (D624) Comp
ression Set , % (D395) Method B, Temperature, oC B. After Aging Temperature of t
he Test, oC Aging Time, Hours Tensile Strength, % (D573) Elongation, % Durometer
Hardness, Shore Pts. Other Properties: Ozone Resistance (D1149) Partial Pressur
e, MPa Duration, Hours Tested at 20% strain 37.7 oC 1 oC Mounting procedure D518
Procedure A Brittleness D2137, low temp. Brittleness at -40 oC Shear Modulus Nom
inal Hardness Shear Modulus at 23 oC, MPa Pts. Chloroprene Rubber (CR)
15.5 (min.) 400 (min.) 60 5 31.5 (min.) 25 (max.) 70 70 168 -25 (max.) -25 (max.)
+10 (max.)
15.5 (min.) 300 (min.) 70 5 31.5 (min.) 25 (max.) 70 70 168 -25 (max.) -25 (max.)
+10 (max.)
15.5 (min.) 350 (min.) 60 5 31.5 (min.) 35 (max.) 100 100 70 -15 (max.) -40 (max.)
+15 (max.)
15.5 (min.) 300 (min.) 70 5 31.5 (min.) 35 (max.) 100 100 70 -15 (max.) -40 (max.)
+15 (max.)
25 48 -
25 48 -
100 100 No cracks
100 100 No cracks
Pass
Pass
Pass
Pass
0.851.1
1.131.84
0.851.1
1.131.84
Plain pads and laminated bearings shall be manufactured to the design dimensions
and these specifications with the tolerances listed in Table 2, unless other to
lerances are shown on the design drawings.
278
Table 2 – Tolerances Mm Overall vertical dimensions Design thickness 32 mm (1  in)
or less Design thickness over 32 mm (1 ) Overall horizontal dimensions 914 mm (36
in) and less Over 914 mm (36 in) Thickness of individual layers of elastomer (l
aminated bearing only) at any point within the bearing Variation from a plane pa
rallel to the theoretical surface: (as determined by measurements at the edge of
the bearings) Top -0, +3 -0, +6 -0, +6 -0, +12 20 percent of design value but no
more than 3 mm (1/8 in)
Slope relative to the bottom of no more than 0.005 radian 6 Sides Position of ex
posed connection members 3 Edge cover of embedded laminated -0, +3 connection me
mbers Size of holes, slots or inserts 3 Position of holes, slots, or inserts 3
412.3 Construction Requirements 412.3.1 Handling, Transport, Storage and Install
ation During handling, transport, storage, and installation, bearings shall be k
ept clean and protected from mechanical damage, heat, contaminants and other del
eterious effects. Bearings shall be placed on surfaces that are plane to within
1.6 mm and unless the bearings are placed in opposing pairs, horizontal to withi
n 0.01 radians. Any lack of parallelism between the top of bearing and the under
side of the girder that exceeds 0.01 radians shall be corrected either grinding
of the surface, grout pack bearing seats or modification of the bearing such tha
t the intended bearing placement is as originally designed with the least amount
of bearing modification, or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. Exterior pla
tes of the bearing shall not be welded unless at least 38.1 mm of steel exists b
etween the weld and the elastomer. Each completed bearing shall have its compone
nts clearly identified, be securely bolted, straffed or otherwise fastened to pr
event any relative movement and marked on its top as to location and orientation
in each structure in the projects conformity with the plans. 279
Dismantling at the site shall not be done unless absolutely necessary for inspec
ting or installation. 412.3.2 Sampling Sampling, testing and acceptance consider
ation will be made on a lot basis. A lot shall be further defined as the smalles
t number of bearings as determined by the following criteria: a. A lot shall not
exceed a single contract or project quantity. b. A lot shall not exceed 50 bear
ings. c. A lot shall consist of those bearings of the same type regardless of lo
ad capacity. For acceptance purposes, bearing from within the lot shall be selec
ted at random as samples for inspection and testing. A minimum of three bearings
shall be taken from the lot for testing. If the number of bearings in the lot e
xceeds 50 then for each additional 50 or part thereof, one additional bearing sh
all be taken for testing. 412.3.3 Acceptance Requirements 1. If lack of elastome
r to steel bond is indicated, the bearing shall be rejected. 2. If laminate plac
ement faults are observed which results in elastomer layer thickness that exceed
the tolerances in Table 2, the bearing shall be rejected. 3. If there are at le
ast three separate surface cracks which are each at least 2 mm wide and 2 mm dee
p. The bearing shall be rejected. 4. Record the median compressive stiffness (K)
of the bearing of median stiffness.The compressive stiffness of each bearing te
sted shall not differ form (K) by more than 10%. 5. For each bearing that fails
to meet the requirements in (1), two additional bearings maybe sampled and shall
meet the requirements in (1) or the lot shall be rejected. 6. If the lot is not
rejected, the bearing of median stiffness (K) shall be subjected to the elastom
eric material tests in (2). 412.4 Method of Measurement
The quantity of elastomeric bearing pad to be paid for will be the final quantit
y placed and accepted in the completed structure. The dimensions of elastomeric
bearing pads will be the quantity placed in accordance with the Plans or as othe
rwise directed by the Engineer.
280
412.5
Basis of Payment
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 412.4, shall be paid fo
r at the contract unit price for Elastomeric Bearing Pads which price and paymen
t shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including
all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work pres
cribed in this Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 412
Description Elastomeric Bearing Pads
Unit of Measurement Each
ITEM 413 - PREFORMED SPONGE RUBBER AND CORK EXPANSION JOINT FILLERS FOR CONCRETE
PAVING AND STRUCTURAL CONSTRUCTION Preformed sponge rubber and cork expansion j
oint fillers for concrete paving and structural construction shall conform to th
e applicable requirements of AASHTO M 153.
281
282
PART G – DRAINAGE AND SLOPE PROTECTION STRUCTURES ITEM 500 – PIPE CULVERTS AND STORM
DRAINS 500.1 Description This item shall consist of the construction or reconst
ruction of pipe culverts and storm drains, hereinafter referred to as “conduit” in a
ccordance with this Specification and in conformity with the lines and grades sh
own on the Plans or as established by the Engineer. 500.2 Material Requirements
Material shall meet the requirements specified in the following specifications:
Zinc coated (galvanized) corrugated iron or steel culverts and underdrains Cast
iron culvert pipe Concrete sewer, storm drain and culvert pipe Reinforced concre
te culvert, storm drain and sewer pipe Bituminous coated corrugated metal culver
t pipe and pipe arches Reinforced concrete arch culvert, storm drain and sewer p
ipe Reinforced concrete elliptical culvert, storm drain and sewer pipe Asbestos
cement pipe for culverts and storm drains
AASHTO M 36 AASHTO M 64 AASHTO M 86
AASHTO M 170
AASHTO M 190
AASHTO M 206
AASHTO M 207 AASHTO M 217
Joint Mortar – Joint mortar for concrete pipes shall consist of 1 part, by volume
of Portland Cement and two (2) parts of approved sand with water as necessary to
obtain the required consistency. Portland Cement and sand shall conform to the
requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. Mortar shall be used within 30 mi
nutes after its preparation. Rubber gaskets AASHTO M 198
282
Oakum – Oakum for joints in bell and spigot pipes shall be made from hemp (Cannavi
s Sativa) line or Benares Sunn fiber or from a combination of these fibers. The
oakum shall be thoroughly corded and finished and practically free from lumps, d
irt and extraneous matter. Hot poured joint sealing compound AASHTO M 173
Bedding material shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 500.3.2, Beddin
g. Backfill material shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 500.3.6, Ba
ckfilling. When the location of manufacturing plants allow, the plants will be i
nspected periodically for compliance with specified manufacturing methods, and m
aterial samples will be obtained for laboratory testing for compliance with mate
rials quality requirements. This shall be the basis for acceptance of manufactur
ing lots as to quality. Prior to and during incorporation of materials in the wo
rk, these materials will be subjected to the latest inspection and approval of t
he Engineer. 500.3 Construction Requirements 500.3.1 Trenches Excavation
Trenches shall be excavated in accordance with the requirement of Item 103, Stru
cture Excavation, to a width sufficient to allow for proper jointing of the cond
uit and thorough compaction of the bedding and backfill materials under and arou
nd the conduit. Where feasible, trench wall shall be vertical. The completed tre
nch bottom shall be firm for its full length and width. Where required, in the c
ase of crop drains, the trench shall have a longitudinal camber of the magnitude
specified. When so specified on the Plans, the excavation for conduits placed i
n embankment fill, shall be made after the embankment has been completed to the
specified or directed height above the designed grade of the conduit. 500.3.2 Be
dding
The bedding shall conform to one of the classes specified. When no bedding class
is specified, the requirements for Class C bedding shall apply. Class A bedding
shall consist of a continuous concrete cradle conforming to the plan details.
283
Class B bedding shall consist of bedding the conduit to a depth of not less than
30 percent of the vertical outside diameter of the conduit. The minimum thickne
ss of bedding material beneath the pipe shall be 100 mm. The bedding material sh
all be sand or selected sandy soil all of which passes a 9.5 mm sieve and not mo
re than 10 percent of which passes a 0.075 mm sieve. The layer of the bedding ma
terial shall be shaped to fit the conduit for at least 15 percent of its total h
eight. Recesses in the trench bottom shall be shaped to accommodate the bell whe
n bell and spigot type conduit is used. Class C bedding shall consist of bedding
the conduit to a depth of not less than 10 percent of its total height. The fou
ndation surface, completed in accordance with Item 103, Structure Excavation, sh
all be shaped to fit the conduit and shall have recesses shaped to receive the b
ells, if any. For flexible pipe, the bed shall be roughly shaped and a bedding b
lanket of sand or fine granular material as specified above shall be provided as
follows: Pipe Corrugation Depth 10 mm 25 mm 50 mm Minimum Bedding Depth 25 mm 5
0 mm 75 mm
For large diameter structural plate pipes the shaped bed need not exceed the wid
th of bottom plate. 500.3.3 Laying Conduit
The conduit laying shall begin at the downstream end of the conduit line. The lo
wer segment of the conduit shall be in contact with the shaped bedding throughou
t its full length. Bell or groove ends of rigid conduits and outside circumferen
tial laps of flexible conduits shall be placed facing upstream. Flexible conduit
shall be placed with longitudinal laps or seams at the sides. Paved or partiall
y-lined conduit shall be laid such that the longitudinal center line of the pave
d segment coincides with the flow line. Elliptical and elliptically reinforced c
onduits shall be placed with the major axis within 5 degrees of a vertical plane
through the longitudinal axis of the conduit. 500.3.4 Jointing Conduit
Rigid conduits may either be of bell and spigot or tongue and groove design unle
ss another type is specified. The method of joining conduit sections shall be su
ch that the ends are fully entered and the inner surfaces are reasonably flush a
nd even.
284
Joints shall be made with (a) Portland Cement mortar, (b) Portland Cement grout,
(c) rubber gaskets, (d) oakum and mortar, (e) oakum and joint compound, (f) pla
stic sealing compound, or by a combination of these types, or any other type, as
may be specified. Mortar joints shall be made with an excess of mortar to form
a continuous bead around the outside of the conduit and finished smooth on the i
nside. For grouted joints, molds or runners shall be used to retain the poured g
rout. Rubber ring gaskets shall be installed so as to form a flexible water-tigh
t seal. Where oakum is used, the joint shall be called with this material and th
en sealed with the specified material. When Portland Cement mixtures are used, t
he completed joints shall be protected against rapid drying by any suitable cove
ring material. Flexible conduits shall be firmly joined by coupling bands. Condu
its shall be inspected before any backfill is placed. Any pipe found to be out o
f alignment, unduly settled, or damaged shall be taken up and relaid or replaced
. 500.3.5 Field Strutting
When required by the Plans, vertical diameter of round flexible conduit shall be
increased 5 percent by shop elongation or by means of jacks applied after the e
ntire line of conduit has been installed on the bending but before backfilling.
The vertical elongation shall be maintained by means of sills and struts or by h
orizontal ties shall be used on paved invert pipe. Ties and struts shall be 300
mm in place until the embankment is completed and compacted, unless otherwise sh
own on the Plans. These construction specifications shall also apply in the case
of relaid conduits. In addition, all conduits salvaged for relaying shall be cl
eaned of all foreign materials prior to reinstallation. 500.3.6 Backfilling
Materials for backfilling on each side of the conduit for the full trench width
and to an elevation of 300 mm above the top of the conduit shall be fine, readil
y compactible soil or granular material selected from excavation or from a sourc
e of the Contractor’s choice, and shall not contain stones that would be retained
on a 50 mm sieve, chunks of highly plastic clay, or other objectionable material
. Granular backfill material shall have not less than 95 percent passing a 12.5
mm sieve and not less than 95 percent retained on a 4.75 mm sieve. Oversized mat
erial, if present, shall be removed at the source of the material, except as dir
ected by the Engineer.
285
When the top of the conduit is flushed with or below the top of the trench, back
fill material shall be placed at or near optimum moisture content and compacted
in layers not exceeding 150 mm (compacted) on both sides to an elevation 300 mm
above the top of the conduit. Care shall be exercised to thoroughly compact the
backfill under the haunches of the conduit. The backfill shall be brought up eve
nly on both sides of the conduit for the full required length. Except where nega
tive projecting embankment-type installation is specified, the backfill material
shall be placed and compacted for the full depth of the trench. When the top of
the conduit is above the top of the trench, backfill shall be placed at or near
optimum moisture content and compacted in layers not exceeding 300 mm (compacte
d) and shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the conduit for its full leng
th to an elevation 300 mm above the top of the conduit. The width of the backfil
l on each side of the conduit for the portion above the top of the trench shall
be equal to twice the diameter of the conduit or 3.5 m, whichever is less. The b
ackfill material used in the trench section and the portion above the top of the
trench for a distance on each side of the conduit equal to the horizontal insid
e diameter and to 300 mm above the top of the conduit shall conform to the requi
rements for backfill materials in this Subsection. The remainder of the backfill
shall consist of materials from excavation and borrow that is suitable for emba
nkment construction. Compaction to the density specified in Item 104, Embankment
, shall be achieved by use of mechanical tampers or by rolling. All conduits aft
er being bedded and backfill as specified in this Subsection shall be protected
by one metre cover of fill before heavy equipment is permitted to cross during c
onstruction of the roadway. 500.3.7 Imperfect Trench
Under this method, for rigid conduit, the embankment shall be completed as descr
ibed in Subsection 500.3.6, Backfilling, to a height above the conduit equal to
the vertical outside diameter of the conduit plus 300 mm. A trench equal in widt
h to the outside horizontal diameter of the conduit and to the length shown on t
he plans or as directed by the Engineer shall then be excavated to within 300 mm
of the top of the conduit, trench walls being as nearly vertical as possible. T
he trench shall be loosely filled with highly compressible soil. Construction of
embankment above shall then proceed in a normal manner. 500.4 Method of Measure
ment Conduit of the different types and sizes, both new and relaid, will be meas
ured by the linear metre in place. Conduit with sloped or skewed ends will be me
asured along the invert.
286
Each section will be measured by the number of units installed. Branch connectio
n and elbows will be included in the length measurement for conduit, or they may
be measured by the number of units installed. Class B bedding material placed a
nd approved shall be measured by the cubic metre in place. When the Bid Schedule
contains an estimated quantity for “Furnishing and Placing Backfill Material, Pip
e Culvert”, the quantity to be paid for will be the number of cubic metre complete
in place and accepted, measured in final position between limits as follows: 1.
Measurement shall include backfill material in the trench up to the top of the
original ground line but will not include any material placed outside of vertica
l planes 450 mm up outside of and parallel to the inside wall of pipe at its wid
est horizontal dimension. When the original ground line is less than 300 mm abov
e the top of the pipe, the measurement will also include the placing of all back
fill materials, above the original ground line adjacent to the pipe for a height
of 300 mm above the top of pipe and for a distance on each side of the pipe not
greater than the widest horizontal dimension of the pipe. The measurement shall
include the placing of backfill material in all trenches of the imperfect trenc
h method. Materials reexcavated for imperfect trench construction will be measur
ed for payment under Item 103, Structure Excavation.
2.
3.
500.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities of conduit, determined as provide
d in Section 500.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract uni
t price per linear meter for the conduit of the types and sizes specified comple
te in place. End sections and, when so specified, branch connections and elbows,
shall be paid for at the contract unit price per piece for the kind and size sp
ecified complete in place. Excavation for culverts and storm drains, including e
xcavation below flow line grade and for imperfect trench, shall be measured and
paid for as provided in Item 103, Structure Excavation. Concrete for Class A bed
ding will be paid for under Item 405, Structural Concrete.
287
When the Bid Schedule does not contain as estimated quantity for “Furnishing and P
lacing Backfill Material, Pipe Culvert” payment for placing backfill material arou
nd pipe culverts will be considered as included in the payment for excavation of
the backfill material. Payment will be made under:
Payment Item Number 500 (1)
Description Pipe Culverts, - mm Class Storm Drain, - mm Class -
Unit of Measurement Linear Meter
500 (2)
Linear Meter
ITEM 501- UNDERDRAINS 501.1 Description This item shall consist of constructing
underdrains, using pipe and granular filter materials, underdrain pipe outlets,
and blind drains using granular material in accordance with this Specification a
nd in reasonably close conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans o
r as established by the Engineer. 501.2 Material Requirements Material shall mee
t the requirements specified in the following specifications: Zinc coated (galva
nized) corrugated iron or steel Culverts and underdrains Extra strength and stan
dard strength clay pipe and perforated clay pipe Perforated concrete pipe Porous
concrete pipe Bituminized-fiber non-pressure sewer drain and underdrainage pipe
systems Asbestos-cement perforated underdrain pipe
AASHTO M 36
AASHTO M 65 AASHTO M 175 AASHTO M 176
AASHTO M 177 AASHTO M 189
288
Granular Backfill Filter Material – Granular backfill filter material shall be per
meable and shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 6, except that soundness test
s will not be required and minor variation in grading and content of deleterious
substances may be approved by the Engineer. When the location of manufacturing
plants allows, the plants will be inspected periodically by compliance with spec
ified manufacturing methods, and material sample will be obtained for laboratory
testing for compliance with material quality requirements. This shall be the ba
sis for acceptance of manufacturing lots as to quality. All material shall be su
bjected to inspection for acceptance as to condition at the latest practicable t
ime. 501.3 Construction Requirements 501.3.1 Pipe Installation
Trenches shall be excavated to the dimensions and grades required by the Plans o
r as directed by the Engineer. A minimum of 150 mm bedding layer of granular bac
kfill material shall be placed and compacted at the bottom of the trench for its
full width and length. Subdrainage pipe of the type and size specified shall be
embedded firmly in the bedding material. Perforated pipe shall normally, be pla
ced with the perforations down and the pipe sections shall be joined securely wi
th the appropriate coupling fittings or bands. Non-perforated pipe shall be laid
with the bell end upgrade and with open joints wrapped with suitable material t
o permit entry of water, or unwrapped as may be specified. Upgrade end sections
of all subdrainage pipe installations shall be closed with suitable plugs to pre
vent entry of soil materials. After the pipe installation has been inspected and
approved, granular backfill material shall be placed to a height of 300 mm abov
e the top of pipe. Care shall be taken not to displace the pipe or the covering
at open joints. The remainder of the granular backfill material shall then be pl
aced and compacted in 150 mm maximum layers to the required height. Any remainin
g portion of trench above the granular backfill shall be filled with either gran
ular or impervious material, as may be specified, and thoroughly compacted.
289
501.3.2
Underdrain Outlets
Trenches for underdrain outlets shall be excavated to the width and depth shown
on the Plans or as otherwise directed. Pipes shall be laid in the trench with al
l ends firmly joined by the applicable methods and means. After inspection and a
pproval of the pipe installation, the trench shall be backfilled in accordance w
ith Item 103, Structure Excavation. 501.3.3 Blind Drain
Trenches for blind drains shall be excavated to the width and depth shown on the
Plans. The trench shall be filled with granular backfill material to the depth
required by the Plans. Any remaining upper portion of trench shall be filled wit
h either granular or impervious material in accordance with Item 103, Structure
Excavation. 501.4 Method of Measurement Underdrains and outlets shall be measure
d by the linear meter for pipe of the type and size specified. Blind drains shal
l be measured by the linear meter including all excavation and backfill material
s required. Granular backfill filter material, when specified in the Contract as
a pay item shall be measured in place by the cubic meter, completed and accepte
d. Cross-sectional measurements will not exceed the net dimensions shown on the
Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Excavation for underdrain pipe will be mea
sured and paid for as provided in Item 103, Structure Excavation. 501.5 Basis of
Payment The accepted quantities determined as provided in Section 501.4, Method
of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit prices. Payment will be
made under:
Payment Item Number 501 (1) 501 (2) 501 (3)
Description Underdrain - mm Blind drain Granular Backfill filter material for un
derdrains
Unit of Measurement Linear Meter Linear Meter
Cubic Meter
290
ITEM 502 – MANHOLES, INLETS AND CATCH BASINS 502.1 Description This item shall con
sist of the construction, reconstruction or adjustment of manholes, inlets and c
atch basins in accordance with this Specification and in reasonably close confor
mity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans or as established by the Engin
eer. 502.2 Material Requirements Concrete for these structures shall meet the re
quirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. Other materials shall meet the foll
owing specifications: Corrugated Metal Units – The units shall conform to Plan dim
ensions and the metal to AASHTO M 36. Bituminous coating, when specified, shall
conform to ASTM D 1187, Asphalt-base Emulsion for use as Protective Coating for
Metal. Sewer and manhole brick (Made from clay or shale) Building brick (Solid m
asonry units made from clay or shale)
AASHTO M 91
AASHTO M 114
Joint Mortar- Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, joints mortar shall be co
mposed of one part Portland Cement and two parts fine aggregate by volume to whi
ch hydrated lime has been added in an amount equal to 10 percent of the cement b
y weight. All materials for mortar shall meet the requirements of Item 405, Stru
ctural Concrete. Frames, Gratings, Covers and Ladder Rungs – Metal units shall con
form to the plan dimensions and to the following specification requirements for
the designated materials. Metal gratings and covers which are to rest on frames
shall bear on them evenly. They shall be assembled before shipment and so marked
that the same pieces may be reassembled readily in the same position when insta
lled. Inaccuracy of bearings shall be corrected by machining, if necessary. A fr
ame and a grating or cover to be used with it shall constitute one pair. All cas
tings shall be uniformly coated with asphalt-based emulsion meeting the requirem
ents of ASTM D 1187, Asphalt-base Emulsion for use as Protective Coating for Met
al. Samples of the material in casting shall be taken during the casting of the
291
units and shall be separate casting poured from the same material as the casting
they represent. Gray iron casting Mild to medium-strength carbon steel castings
for general application Structural steel Galvanizing, where specified for these
units, shall conform to the requirements of Reinforcing Steel AASHTO M 105
AASHTO M 103 AASHTO M 183
AASHTO M 111 AASHTO M 31
Pre-cast Concrete Units – These units shall be cast in substantial permanent steel
forms. Structural concrete used shall attain a minimum 28-day compressive stren
gth of 20.682 MPa (3000 psi). The pre-cast units shall be cured in accordance wi
th AASHTO M 171. Water absorption of individual cores taken from such units shal
l not exceed 7 percent. Additional reinforcement shall be provided as necessary
to provide for handling of the pre-cast units. A sufficient number of cylinders
shall be cast from the concrete for each unit permit compression tests at 7, 14
and 28 days, and to allow for at least 3 cylinders for each test. If the strengt
h requirement is met at 7 or 14 days, the units shall be certified for use 14 da
ys from the date of casting. If the strength is not met at 28 days, all units ma
de from that batch or load will be rejected. Cracks in units, honeycombed or pat
ched areas in excess of 2,000 square millimeters, excessive water absorption and
failure to meet strength requirements shall be the causes for rejection. Pre-ca
st reinforced concrete manhole risers and tops shall conform to the requirements
of AASHTO M 199. The plants will be inspected periodically for compliance with
specified manufacturing methods, and material samples will be obtained for labor
atory testing for compliance with material quality requirements. This may be the
basis for acceptance of manufacturing lots as the quality. All materials shall
be subjected to inspection for acceptance as to condition at the latest practica
ble time the Engineer has the opportunity to check for compliance prior to or du
ring incorporation of materials into the work. 502.3 Construction Requirements C
oncrete construction shall conform to the requirements for Item 405, Structural
Concrete.
292
Metal frames shall be set in full mortar bed. Pipe sections shall be flushed on
the inside of the structure wall and projected outside sufficiently for proper c
onnection with next pipe section. Masonry shall fit neatly and tightly around th
e pipe. When grade adjustment or existing structures is specified, the frames, c
overs and gratings shall be removed and the walls reconstructed as required. The
cleaned frames shall be reset at the required elevation. Upon completion, each
structure shall be cleaned of any accumulation of silt, debris, or foreign matte
r of any kind and shall be kept clear of such accumulation until final acceptanc
e of the work. Excavation and backfill shall be done in accordance with Item 103
, Structure Excavation.
502.4 Method of Measurement Standard manholes, inlets and catch basins, both new
and reconstructed as applicable, will be measured by the unit. Any additional c
oncrete, reinforcing steel, or masonry required for authorized increases in heig
hts of structures paid of under this Item and in excess of the standard height s
hown on the Plans will be measured and paid for under Item 405, Structural Concr
ete and Item 404, Reinforcing Steel, as applicable. Structures noted on the Plan
s as “junction boxes” will be measured for payment as manholes. The number of concre
te covers, pairs of metal frames and gratings, and pairs of metal frames and cov
ers will be measured as acceptably completed. The number of existing manholes, i
nlets and catch basins adjusted as directed will be measured as acceptably compl
eted.
502.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities, determined as provided in Sectio
n 502.4, Method of Measurement of the Pay Items in the Bill of Quantities will b
e paid for at the contract unit prices, which shall constitute full compensation
for furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor, equipment, tools an
d incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Excavation and backfill will be me
asured and paid for as provided in Item 103, Structure Excavation.
293
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 502 (1) 502 (2) 502 (3) 502 (4) 502 (5) 502 (6) 502 (7) 502 (8)
502 (9) Manholes
Description
Unit of Measurement Each Each Each Each Pair Pair Each Each Each
Inlets, type Catch basins Concrete covers Metal frames and gratings, type Metal
frames and covers Adjusting manholes Adjusting inlets Adjusting catch basin
ITEM 503 – DRAINAGE STEEL GRATING WITH FRAME
503.1 Description This item shall consist of furnishing all materials, tools, an
d equipment including labor required in undertaking the proper application of st
eel grating with frame as shown on the plans and in accordance with this specifi
cation. 503.2 Classes and Uses of Road Grates and Frames Classes of grates that
are commonly use in drainage work are sump, trench and box. Sump grates shall be
used to create a trafficable ground level entry area for surface rainwater to f
low into the underground stormwater drainage system. Sump grates shall be used i
n paved or grassed areas that are graded to direct the surface water to a single
pit or to a series of pits. Sump grates shall be plain or hinged.
294
Trench grates shall be used to collect surface rainwater run off from areas that
cannot be graded to direct flow into a single pit. Box grates or road drainage
shall be used to transfer road surface storm water into an underground drainage
system. Normally used in conjunction with kerb entry, the addition of the grate
significantly increases the hydraulic capacity of the inlet, particularly on ste
ep slopes. 503.3 Strength Classifications and the Loading Conditions for Sump, T
rench and Box grates Class A – Test Load 10kN For locations trafficked only by ped
estrians, wheelchairs and cyclists – inaccessible to motor vehicles by virtue of b
arriers, narrow passages or stepped or unpaved approaches. Class B – Test Load 80k
N For locations normally trafficked by pedestrians and slow moving passenger car
s or light agricultural tractors. These locations include areas accessible to in
frequent slow moving heavy trucks. Typical locations include footpaths, ground l
evel and multistoried car parks, suburban driveways and back yards. Class C – Test
Load 150kN For locations trafficked by slow moving fully laden trucks such as p
edestrians, malls and industrial or commercial areas. Class D – Test Load 210kN Fo
r locations trafficked by fast moving fully laden trucks and forklifts with whee
l loads to 5.0T. This includes all public roads from residential to freeway. Cla
ss E, F or G – Test Load 400kN, 600kN or 900kN For locations subject to vehicles s
uch as large forklifts, earthmoving or container handling equipment and aircraft
. Typical locations include wharves, container storage areas, heavy industry or
construction sites and domestic or international airports. All loading condition
s specified above are applicable to the three classes of grates depending on the
ir specific uses and locations.
295
503.4 Materials Requirement 503.4.1 Steel Grating The steel grating shall be mad
e of fabricated mild steel provided with hot dip galvanized in accordance with A
STM A153/AASHTO M 232 for superior corrosion protection. Steel grating shall be
machine-made grating comprised of steel flat bars standing on edge equispaced fr
om each other. To prevent them from falling over and to provide restraint in buc
kling, a twisted cross rod (6mm) is forge-welded1 into the top of the flat bars.
503.4.2 Steel Frame The steel frame clear openings of drainage grates shall be
15mm larger than nominal sizes of industry standard sized pits. These pits incre
ase in size in increments of 150mm. This shall be done to allow frames to be pla
ced over standard panel formwork and cast in while pouring the pit walls, to spe
eds up installation and ensure the frame is fully embedded in the concrete. 503.
4.3 Drainage Grate Sizes The drainage grates shall be identified by their intern
al clear opening dimensions of the frame. For square and rectangular grates, the
normal convention shall be the width x length. Metal units shall conform to the
approved plan dimensions and specifications requirement for the designated mate
rials. Grates shall consist of 25mm to 65mm x 3mm, 4.5mm or 5mm thick flat bars
with length of not more than 6.1m spaced at 30mm o.c. with 6mm twisted rod space
d at 100mm o.c.. Angular frame (L 75mm x 75mm x 9mm thick) shall be coated with
hot dipped galvanized for superior corrosion protection finish and extended life
. If required, I-Beam support shall be provided in the grates in accordance with
the approved plan. It shall also conform to the requirements of ASTM A 153 or i
ts equivalents AASHTO M 232. 503.4.4 The metal unit shall conform to ASTM A 36 /
AASHTO M 183. Dimension Tolerances:
Thickness Width Length Straightness
= = = =
0.20mm 0.80mm + 50mm/NIL mm 6mm in each 1.5m length
1
Forge-welding is a process of metal fusion using a combination of high temperatu
re and high pressure.
296
503.4.5 Joint Mortar Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, joint mortar shall
be composed of one part Portland Cement and two parts fine aggregate by volume
to which hydrated lime has been added in an amount equal to 10 percent of the ce
ment by weight. All materials for mortar shall meet the requirements of Item 405
, Structural Concrete. Structural concrete used shall attain a minimum 28-day co
mpressive strength of 20.682 MPa (3000 psi). 503.5 Construction Requirements Con
crete construction shall conform to the requirements for Item 405, Structural Co
ncrete. Metal gratings which are to rest on frames shall bear on them evenly. Th
ey shall be assembled before shipment and so marked that the same pieces may be
reassembled readily in the same position when installed. Inaccuracy of bearings
shall be corrected by machining, if necessary. The steel grating and its corresp
onding frame shall constitute one pair. When grade adjustment or existing draina
ge grates is specified, the frames and steel gratings shall be removed and the w
alls shall be reconstructed as required. The cleaned frames shall be reset at th
e required elevation. Upon completion, each drainage grates shall be cleaned of
any accumulations of silt, debris, or foreign matter of any kind and shall be ke
pt clear of such accumulation until final acceptance of the work. Excavation and
backfill shall be done in accordance with Item 102, Excavation. 503.6 Acceptanc
e Requirement A sufficient number of cylinders for concrete construction shall b
e cast from the concrete for each unit for compression tests at 7, 14 and 28 day
s, and to allow for at least 3 cylinders for each test. If the strength requirem
ent is met at 7 or 14 days, the units shall be certified for use 14 days from th
e date of casting. If the strength is not met at 28 days, all units made from th
at batch or load will be rejected. The steel grating plants will be inspected pe
riodically for compliance with specified manufacturing and fabricating methods a
nd bars samples will be obtained for laboratory testing for compliance with mate
rial quality requirements. All draining grates materials shall be subjected to i
nspection for acceptance as to condition at the latest practicable time the Engi
neer has the
297
opportunity to check for compliance prior to or during incorporation of material
s into the work. 503.7 Method of Measurement The quantity to be measured and pai
d for will be the number of pairs of metal frames and gratings completed and acc
epted. Concrete and reinforcing steel (AASHTO M 31) will be measured and paid fo
r under Item 405, Structural Concrete and Item 404, Reinforcing Steel, respectiv
ely. Excavation and backfill will be measured and paid for as provided in Item 1
02, Excavation. 503.8 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities, determined as pr
ovided in Section 503.7, Method of Measurement of the Pay Items in the Bill of Q
uantities will be paid for at the contract unit prices, which shall constitute f
ull compensation for furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor, equ
ipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the item. Payment will be ma
de under:
Pay Item No.
Description
Unit Of Measurement
503
Metal frames and grating
Set
ITEM 504 - CLEANING AND RECONDITIONING EXISTING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 504.1 Descri
ption This item shall consist of cleaning and reconditioning existing pipes and
appurtenant structures in reasonably close conformity with this Specification an
d as shown on the Plans. 504.2 Material Requirements Materials used for repair o
r replacement under the various Pay Items shall conform the requirements of the
applicable Items of this Specification.
298
504.3 Construction Requirements Pipe Removed and Cleaned – The pipe shall be caref
ully removed and cleaned of foreign material both within the barrel and at the j
ointed ends. Pipe Cleaned in Place – All foreign materials within the barrel shall
be removed and disposed off by methods which will prevent damage to the pipe. I
f approved by the Engineer, all or part of the pipe designated to be cleaned in
place may be removed, cleaned, and relaid in accordance with the applicable Item
s. In such cases, the Contractor shall furnish all materials required to replace
damaged pipes and joints, perform all excavation and backfill, and relay the pi
pe, all at the contract bid price for this Item. Re-laying or Stockpiling Salvag
ed Pipe - Relaying of pipe selected by the Engineer to be removed and cleaned sh
all be done as shown on the Plans, in accordance with the appropriate Item for t
he kind of pipe involved. The Contractor shall furnish all jointing materials an
d shall replace the pipe broken by him, in sufficient lengths to complete the de
signated length to be relaid without added compensation. Salvaged pipe to be sto
ckpiled shall be placed as shown on the Plans and as directed by the Engineer. N
o pipe which has sustained structural damage shall be placed in stockpiles. The
Contractor shall dispose off such damaged pipes at an approved locations. Recond
itioning Drainage Structures – Structures such as manholes, inlets, and the likes,
designated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer to be reconditioned shal
l have all debris removed, leaks repaired, missing or broken metalwork replaced,
and each structure left in operating condition. 504.4 Method of Measurement Mea
surement will be made by the linear meter of pipe acceptably cleaned, removed, r
e-laid or stockpile as designated in the Bill of Quantities, irrespective of the
kind or size involved. Pipe removed, cleaned, and re-laid will be measured in t
heir final position. Pipe removed, cleaned, and stockpiled will be measured by t
otaling the nominal laying lengths of all pipe units acceptably removed, cleaned
, and placed in the stockpile. Pipe cleaned in place will be measured along the
flow line of the pipe line acceptably cleaned a directed. Measurement of drainag
e structures reconditioned will be made by actual count of the total number of u
nits of each type acceptably completed.
299
504.5 Basis of Payment The quantities as provided in Section 504.4, Method of Me
asurement, shall be paid for at the contract price bid per unit of measurement f
or each of the Pay Items listed below that appear in the Bid Schedule, which pri
ce and payment shall be full compensation for the work of this item except excav
ation and backfill which is paid for under Item 103, Structure Excavation. Excav
ation and backfill necessary for pipe removal operations shall be done as part o
f the work of this Item. The Contractor shall remove and replace without added c
ompensation any pipe damaged by this operations and which cannot be acceptably r
epaired in place. Payment will be made under: Pay Item Number 504 (1) Descriptio
n Removing, cleaning, stockpiling Salvaged culvert pipe Removing, cleaning, and
re-laying Salvaged culvert pipe Cleaning culvert pipe in place Reconditioning dr
ainage structures Unit of Measurement
Linear Meter
504 (2)
Linear Meter Linear Meter Each
504 (3) 504 (4)
If more than one type of drainage structure is described for an Item in the Bid
Schedule, letter suffixes shall be added to the item Number differentiate betwee
n such structures. If no Pay Item from the list above appears in Bid Schedule, t
he pipe removed will be considered as included in the work of Item 101, Removal
of Structures and Obstructions.
ITEM 505 – RIPRAP AND GROUTED RIPRAP 505.1 Description This Item shall consist of
the furnishing and placing of riprap with or without grout as the case may be, w
ith or without filter backing, furnished and
300
constructed in accordance with this Specification and to the lines and grades an
d dimensions shown on the Plans. 505.2 Material Requirements 505.2.1 Stones
Stones for riprap shall consist of rock as nearly as rectangular in section as i
s practical, except that riprap of Class A may consist of round natural stones.
The stones shall be sound, tough, durable, dense, resistant to the action of air
and water, and suitable in all respects for the purpose intended. Stones for ri
prap shall be one of the following classes as shown on the Plans or determined b
y the Engineer. Class A Stones ranging from a minimum of 15kg to a maximum of 25
kg with at least 50 percent of the stones weighing more than 20kg Stones ranging
from minimum of 30kg to a maximum of 70kg with at least 50 percent of the stone
s weighing more than 50kg Stones ranging from minimum of 60kg to a maximum of 10
0kg with at least 50 percent of the stones weighing more than 80kg
Class B -
Class C -
Stones ranging from minimum of 100kg to a maximum of 200kg with at least 50 perc
ent of the stones weighing more than 150kg Sound pieces of broken concrete obtai
ned from the removal of bridges, culverts and other structures may be substitute
d for stone with the approval of the Engineer. 505.2.2 Filter Materials
Class D -
When required, the riprap shall be placed on a filter layer to prevent fine emba
nkment materials to be washed out through the voids of the face stones. The grad
ing of the filter material shall be as specified on the Plans, or in the Special
Provisions. If not so specified, it will be required that D15 of the filter is
at least 4 times the size D85 for the embankment material, where D15 percent and
85 percent, respectively, passing (by mass) in a grain size analysis. Fine aggr
egate passing grading requirements for Item 405, Structural Concrete, will satis
fy foregoing requirements.
301
505.2.3
Mortar
Mortar for grouted riprap shall consist of sand, cement and water conforming to
the requirements given under Item 405, Structural Concrete, mixed in the proport
ion of one part cement to three parts sand by volume, and sufficient water to ob
tain the required consistency. The horizontal and vertical contact surface betwe
en stones shall be embedded by cement mortar having a minimum thickness of 20 mm
. Sufficient mortar shall be used to completely fill all voids leaving the face
of the stones exposed.
505.3 Construction Requirements 505.3.1 Excavation
The bed for riprap shall be excavated to the required depths and properly compac
ted, trimmed and shaped. The riprap shall be founded in a toe trench dug below t
he depth of scour as shown on the Plans or as ordered by the Engineer. The toe t
rench shall be filled with stone of the same class as that specified for the rip
rap, unless otherwise specified. 505.3.2 Placing
Stones placed below the water line shall be distributed so that the minimum thic
kness of the riprap is not less than that specified. Stones above the water line
shall be placed by hand or individually by machines. They shall be laid with cl
ose, broken joints and shall be firmly bedded into the slope and against the adj
oining stones. Each stone shall be laid with its longest axis perpendicular to t
he slope in close contact with each adjacent stone. The riprap shall be thorough
ly rammed into place as construction progresses and the finished surface shall p
resent an even, tight surface. Interstices between stones shall be filled with s
mall broken fragments firmly rammed into place. Unless otherwise provided, ripra
p shall have the following minimum thickness, measured perpendicular to the slop
e: Class A – 300 mm Class B – 500 mm Class C – 600 mm Class D – 800 mm
302
The surface of riprap shall not vary from the theoretical surface by more than 1
00 mm at any point. 505.3.3 Grouting
When grouted riprap is specified, stones shall be placed by hand, or individuall
y by machine as specified for riprap placed above the water line. The spaces bet
ween the stones shall then be filled with cement mortar throughout the thickness
of the riprap as specified in Subsection 504.2.3, mortar. Sufficient mortar sha
ll be used to completely fill all voids, except that the face surface of the sto
nes shall be left exposed. Grout shall be placed from bottom to top of the surfa
ce swept with a stiff broom. After grouting is completed, the surface shall be c
ured as specified in Item 405, Structural Concrete for a period of at least thre
e days. The stones shall also be laid in a manner that the vertical and horizont
al alignments of the exposed face shall, as possible be maintained in a straight
line. 505.3.4 Weepholes
All walls and abutments shall be provided with weepholes. Unless otherwise shown
on the Plans or directed by the Engineer, the weepholes shall be placed horizon
tally at the lowest points where free outlets for water can be obtained and shal
l be spaced at not more than 2 m center to center in a staggered manner . The le
ngth of the weepholes shall not be less than the thickness of the walls of the a
butment and shall be at least 50 mm diameter PVC or other pipe materials accepte
d by the Engineer. Weepholes must be provided with filter bags as specified in s
pecial provision or as directed by the Engineer, and shall be incidental to Pay
Item 505.
505.4 Method of Measurement The quantities to be measured for payment shall be t
he number of cubic meters of riprap or grouted riprap, as the case may be, inclu
ding stones placed in the toe trench laid in position and accepted. Filter layer
of granular material, when required, shall be measured separately by the cubic
meter in place and accepted. The computation of the quantities will be based on
the volume within the limiting dimensions designated on the Plans or as determin
ed by the Engineer.
303
505.5 Basis of Payment The quantities measured as provided under Subsection 505.
4 shall be paid for at the contract unit price, respectively, for each of the Pa
y Items listed below and shown in the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shal
l be full compensation for excavation and preparation of the bed, for furnishing
and placing all materials including backfill and all additional fill to bring t
he riprap bed up to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the plans, and all
labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment
will be made under: Pay Item Number 505 (1) 505 (2) 505 (3) 505 (4) 505 (5) 505
(6) 505 (7) 505 (8) 505 (9) Description Riprap, Class A Riprap, Class B Riprap,
Class C Riprap, Class D Grouted Riprap, Class A Grouted Riprap, Class B Grouted
Riprap, Class C Grouted Riprap, Class D Filter layer of granular material Unit
of Measurement Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic
Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Cubic Meter
ITEM 506 – STONE MASONRY
506.1 Description This Item shall consist of stone masonry in minor structures,
in headwalls for culverts, in retaining walls at the toes of slopes, and at othe
r places called for on the Plans, constructed on the prepared foundation bed, in
accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades, se
ctions, and dimensions shown on the Plans or as ordered in writing by the Engine
er.
304
506.2 Material Requirements 506.2.1 Stone The stone shall be clean, hard, and du
rable and shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval. Adobe stone shall not be us
ed unless otherwise specified. Sizes and Shapes – Unless other sizes are shown on
the Plans, stones have a thickness of not less than 150 mm, and widths of not le
ss than one and one-half times their respective thickness, and lengths of not le
ss than one and one half times their respective widths. Each stone shall be of g
ood shape and be free of depressions and projections that might weaken or preven
t it from being properly bedded. Dressing – The stone shall be dressed to remove a
ny thin or weak portions. Face stones shall be dressed to provide bed and joint
lines that do not vary more than 20 mm from the true lines and to ensure the mee
ting of bed and joint lines without the rounding of corners of the stones in exc
ess of 30 mm in radius. Bed surfaces of the face stones shall be approximately n
ormal to the face of the stones for about 80 mm and from this point may depart f
rom a normal plane not to exceed 50 mm in 300 mm. Finish for Exposed Faces – Face
stones shall be pitched to the line along the beds and joints. The maximum proje
ction of rock faces beyond the pitch lines shall not be more than 50 mm. 506.2.2
Mortar
Cement, fine aggregate, and water shall conform to the respective requirements f
or those materials as specified under Item 405, Structural Concrete, except as t
o the grading of fine aggregate which shall all pass the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve,
not less than 15 nor more than 40 percent shall pass the 0.3 mm (No. 50 ) sieve,
and not more than 10 percent shall pass the 0.15 mm (No.100) sieve. The mortar
for the masonry shall be composed of one part of Portland Cement and two parts o
f fine aggregate by volume and sufficient water to make the mortar of such consi
stency that it can be handled easily and spread with a trowel. Mortar shall be m
ixed only in those quantities required for immediate use. Unless an approved mor
tar mixing machine is used, the fine aggregate and cement shall be mixed dry in
a tight box until the mixture assumes a uniform color, after which, water shall
be added as the mixing continues until the mortar attains the proper consistency
. Mortar that is not used within 90 minutes after the water has been added shall
be discarded. Retempering of mortar will not be permitted.
305
506.3 Construction Requirement 506.3.1 Selection and Placing
When the masonry is to be placed on a prepared foundation bed, the bed shall be
firm and normal to, or in steps normal to, the face of the wall, and shall have
been approved by the Engineer before any stone is placed. Care shall be taken to
prevent the bunching of small stone or stones of the same size. Large stones sh
all be used in the corners. All stones shall be cleaned thoroughly and wetted im
mediately before being set, and the bed which is to receive them shall be cleane
d and moistened before the mortar is spread. They shall be laid with their longe
st faces horizontal in full beds of mortar, and the joints shall be flushed with
mortar. The exposed faces of individual stones shall be parallel to the faces o
f the walls in which the stones are set. The stones shall be so handled as not t
o jar displace the stones already set. Suitable equipment shall be provided for
setting stones larger than those that can be handled by two men. The rolling or
turning of stones on the walls will not be permitted. If a stone is loosened aft
er the mortar has taken initial set, it shall be removed, the mortar cleaned off
, and the stone relaid with fresh mortar. 506.3.2 Bed and Joints
Beds for face stones may vary from 20 mm to 50 mm in thickness. They shall not e
xtend an unbroken line through more than 5 stones. Joints may vary from 20 mm to
50 mm in thickness. They shall not extend in an unbroken line through more than
two stones. They may be at angles with the vertical from 00 to 450. Face stone
shall bond at least 150 mm longitudinally and 50 mm vertically. At no place shal
l corners of four stones be adjacent to each other. Cross beds for vertical face
d walls shall be level, and for battered walls may vary from level to normal to
the batter line of the face of the wall. 506.3.3 Headers
Headers shall be distributed uniformly throughout the walls of the structures so
as to form at least one-fifth of the exposed faces. They shall be of such lengt
hs as to extend from the front face of the wall into the backing of at least 300
mm. When a wall is 450 mm or less in thickness, the headers shall extend entire
ly from front to back face.
306
506.3.4
Backing.
Backing shall be built mostly of large stones as shown in the approved Plans or
as directed by the Engineer. The individual stones composing the backing and hea
rting shall be well bonded with the stones in the face wall and with each other.
All openings and interstices in the backing shall be filled completely with mor
tar or with spalls surrounded completely by mortar. 506.3.5 Pointing
Both bed and vertical joints shall be finished as shown on the Plans or as direc
ted by the Engineer. The mortar in joints on top of surface of masonry shall be
crowned slightly at the center of the masonry to provide drainage. 506.3.6 Copin
g Copings, if called for, shall be finished as shown on the Plans. Where copings
are not called for, the top of the wall shall be finished with stones wide enou
gh to cover the top of the wall from 450 mm to 1000 mm in length, and of random
heights, with a minimum height of 150 mm. Stone shall be laid in such a manner t
hat the top course is an integral part of the wall. The tops of top course of st
one shall be pitched to line, in both vertical and horizontal planes. 506.3.7 We
epholes
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 504, Riprap and Grouted Riprap unde
r Subsection 504.3.4, Weepholes. 506.3.8 Cleaning Exposed Faces
Immediately after being laid, and while the mortar is fresh, all face stones sha
ll be thoroughly cleaned of mortar stains and shall be kept clean until the work
is completed. 506.3.9 Curing
In hot or dry weather, the masonry shall be satisfactory protected from the sun
and shall be kept wet for a period of at least three days after completion. 506.
4 Method of Measurement The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of cubic
meters of stone masonry complete in place and accepted. Projections extending b
eyond the faces of the walls shall not be included. In computing the quantity fo
r payment, the dimensions used shall be those shown on the Plans or ordered in w
riting by
307
the Engineer. No deductions shall be made for weepholes, drain pipes or other op
enings of less than one square meter in area. 506.5 Basis of Payment The quantit
y of masonry, determined as provided in Section 506.4, Method of Measurement, sh
all be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter for Stone Masonry, wh
ich price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all
materials, including mortar for masonry, for all necessary excavations, and for
all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Paym
ent will be made under:
Pay Item Number
Description
Unit of Measurement
506
Stone Masonry
Cubic Meter
ITEM 507 – RUBBLE CONCRETE 507.1 Description This item shall consist of the constr
uction of rubble concrete in accordance with this specification and in conformit
y with the lines, grades, slopes and dimensions shown in the Plans or establishe
d by the Engineer. 507.2 Material Requirements
507.2.1 Stone The stone shall be cleaned, hard, and durable and shall be subject
to the Engineer’s approval. Adobe stone shall not be used unless otherwise specif
ied. Stones to be used shall be more than 0.015 cubic metre in volume and not le
ss than 75 percent of the total volume of rock embankment and shall consist of s
tones 0.03 cubic metre in volume as described in Item 506.2. Stones obtained fro
m excavation performed under this contract may be used. 507.2.2 Concrete Class “B” C
oncrete shall be Class “B” in accordance with Item 405, Structural Concrete.
308
507.3
Construction Requirements
507.3.1 Preparation of Foundation Bed The foundation bed shall be excavated to t
he lines and grades as shown in the plans as directed by the Engineer, and shall
be thoroughly compacted in accordance with Item 104.3.3. 507.3.2 Falsework and
Formwork Construction
Falsework/formwork shall be constructed so as to withstand the stresses imposed.
Formwork used shall be constructed with sufficient strength, rigidity and shape
as to leave the finished works true to the dimensions shown on the Plans and wi
th the surface finished as specified. The inside surface of the forms shall be c
leaned of all dirt, water and foreign materials. Forms shall be thoroughly coate
d with form oil prior to use. The form oil shall be commercial quality form oil
or other approved coating which will permit the ready release of forms and will
not discolor the concrete. 507.3.3 Placing
One layer of concrete Class “B” shall be placed at the prepared bed prior to placing
of stones. Clearance between stones shall not be less than 2-1/2 inches or the
maximum size of concrete aggregate for Class “B”. Concrete Class “B” shall be placed aft
er each layer of stone and shall be thoroughly consolidated by means of a vibrat
or inserted in each layer of concrete. In no case shall the vibrator be operated
longer than 10 seconds in any location. After removal of forms, any cavities, v
oids and honeycomb spots shall be filled up with mortar composed of one part cem
ent and two parts sand. All debris and refuse resulting from work shall be remov
ed and the site left in a neat and presentable condition. 507.3.4 Weepholes
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 504, Riprap and Grouted Riprap unde
r Subsection 504.3.4, Weepholes.
309
507.4
Method of Measurement
The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meters of rubble concre
te complete in place and accepted. In computing the quantity of payment the dime
nsion used shall be those shown on the plans or ordered in writing by the Engine
er. No reduction shall be made for weepholes.
507.5
Basis of Payment
The quantity of rubble concrete determined as provided in the preceding section
507.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per c
ubic meter for rubble concrete, which price and payment shall be full compensati
on for the preparation of the bed, furnishing, necessary excavations, falsework,
and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the I
tem. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number
Description
Unit of Measurement
507
Rubble Concrete
Cubic Meter
ITEM 508 – HAND-LAID ROCK EMBANKMENT 508.1 Description This Item shall consist of
hand-laid rock embankment, as designated in the Bid Schedule, constructed in acc
ordance with this Specification and in conformity with the lines and grades show
n on the Plans or established by the Engineer.
508.2 Material Requirements Stones shall be sound and durable and furnished in a
well-balanced ranged of sizes meeting the requirements herein. Unless otherwise
provided by the Plans or Special provisions, all stones shall be more than 0.01
5 cubic meter in volume and not less than 75 percent of the total volume of rock
embankment and shall consist of stones 0.03 cubic meter in
310
volume. Stones obtained from excavation performed under this contract may be use
d. Adobe stone shall not be used, unless otherwise specified. 508.3 Construction
Requirements Sufficient excavation shall be made to expose a foundation bed tha
t is satisfactory to the Engineer. The stones shall be founded on this bed and l
aid to the lines and dimensions required. Stones shall be laid flat and securely
placed with broken joint lines. The larger stones shall generally be located in
the lower part of the structure and voids shall be eliminated to the extent pos
sible. Spalls smaller than the minimum stone size specified in Section 506.2, Ma
terial Requirements, shall be used to check the larger stones solidly in positio
n and to substantially fill voids between the major stones as laid in the embank
ment. The exposed face of the rock mass shall be reasonably uniform, with no pro
jections of more than 150 mm, beyond the neat lines shown on the Plans or as dir
ected by the Engineer. Backfill adjacent to the hand-laid rock embankment shall
be filled entirely with acceptable material coming from excavation items and com
pacted. 508.4 Method of Measurement The quantity to be paid for will be the numb
er of cubic meter of hand-laid rock embankment measured in place, completed and
accepted. 508.5 Basis of Payment
The quantity determined, as provided in Section 508.4, Method of Measurement , w
ill be paid for at the contract price per cubic meter for HandLaid Rock Embankme
nt, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, s
electing, and transporting stones, for placing stones by hand, for backfilling,
and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the It
em including foundation excavation. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number
Description
Unit of Measurement
508
Hand-Laid Rock Embankment
Cubic Meter
311
ITEM 509 – SHEET PILES 509.1 Description This shall consist of furnishing, driving
and cutting off of sheet piling covered by this Specification. 509.2 Material R
equirements
509.2.1 Timber Sheet Piles The timber, unless otherwise definitely noted on the
Plans or in the Special Provisions, may consist of any species which will satisf
actorily stand driving. It shall be sawn or hewn with square corners and shall b
e free from worm holes, loose knots, wing shakes, decay or unsound portions or o
ther defects which might impair its strength or tightness. 509.2.2 Concrete Shee
t Piles Concrete, reinforcement, and manufacture of concrete sheet piles shall c
onform to the requirements of Item 400, Piling, Subsection 400.2.3, Concrete Pil
es. 509.2.3 Steel Sheet Piles Steel sheet piles shall be of the type, weight and
Section Modulus indicated on the Plans or Special Provisions, and shall conform
to the requirement of Item 400, Piling, Subsection 400.2.7, Sheet Piles, Painti
ng shall conform to the requirements for Item 411, Paint, Subsection 411.6.2, Pa
inting Structural Steel. 509.3 Construction Requirements Sheet piles shall be dr
iven to elevation shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Where impra
ctical to drive to plan elevation due to subsurface conditions, the driving of p
iles may be stopped at a higher elevation with the written permission of the Eng
ineer. However, before granting such permission, the Engineer shall ascertain th
at the Contractor has adequate equipment for the required driving and that the p
iles can be driven to the plan elevation with the proper use of this equipment.
The top of the piling shall be driven or cut-off to a straight line at the eleva
tion indicated on the Plans. The requirements governing the installation of shee
t piling shall conform in general to those governing bearing piles as set forth
under Item 400, Piling.
312
509.4 Method of Measurement Sheet piling will be measured by the linear meter of
sheet piling as shown on the Plans or as directed in writing by the Engineer, c
omplete in place and accepted. However, measurement of piling which has been del
ivered to plan length and cannot be driven according to plan or directed elevati
on because of subsurface condition shall be measured as if driven to that elevat
ions. 509.5 Basis of Payment Payment of steel piles as determined in Section 509
.4, Method of Measurement, shall be made at the contract unit price per linear m
eter. Such payment shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all mate
rials, labor, equipment, tools, paint, bolts, wales and incidentals necessary to
complete the Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 509 (a) 509 (b) 509 (c)
Description Sheet Piles (Timber) Sheet Piles (Steel) Sheet Piles (Concrete)
Unit of Measurement Linear Meter Linear Meter Linear Meter
ITEM 510 – CONCRETE SLOPE PROTECTION 510.1 Description This Item shall consist of
the furnishing and placing of concrete slope protection including all necessary
excavation, a bed course and reinforced concrete to the required thickness and e
xtent to protect slopes against erosion. Construction details shall be as shown
on the Plans. 510.2 Material Requirements 510.2.1 Bed Course A bed course, where
required, shall be granular material which satisfies the requirements for Item
200, Aggregate Sub-base, Grading A.
313
510.2.2 Formwork Formwork, where necessary, shall be as specified in Item 407, C
oncrete Structures. 510.2.3 Steel Reinforcement Steel reinforcement shall be as
specified in Item 404, Reinforcing Steel. 510.2.4 Concrete Concrete shall be Cla
ss B as specified in Item 405, Structural Concrete, unless otherwise specified o
r required by the Engineer.
510.3 Construction Requirements 510.3.1 Excavation The ground shall be excavated
where necessary in accordance with the dimensions, lines and grades shown on th
e Plans. 510.3.2 Bed Course Where shown on the Plans or ordered by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall provide and lay a bed course, to the depth required, and a
s specified in Item 200, Aggregate Subbase Course, compacted at least 100 percen
t of the maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T 180, Method D. 510.3.3 Co
ncrete The Contractor shall provide and place concrete in accordance with the re
quirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete, to the required depths in the posit
ions and to the grades and elevations shown on the Plans. Unless otherwise speci
fied, the concrete slabs shall not be greater than 4m by 4m and shall have betwe
en slabs, plain vertical straight joints with no joint filler or sealer. The toe
of the concrete slope protection shall be constructed and protected a shown on
the Plans. 510.3.4 Drainage Drainage of the bed course or backfill shall be prov
ided as shown on the Plans or as required by the Engineer.
314
510.4 Method of Measurement The quantity of granular material in the bed course
to be paid for shall be measured by the cubic meter in-place and accepted as sho
wn on the Plans. The quantity of concrete to be paid for shall be measured by th
e cubic meter in-place and accepted as shown on the Plans.
510.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities as provided in Section 510.4, Met
hod of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price according to th
e Pay Item in the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall constitute full com
pensation for the necessary excavation, for all labor, equipment, tools, all mat
erials including formwork and reinforcing steel, and incidentals necessary to co
mplete this Item. Payment will be made under: Pay Item Number 510 (1) Descriptio
n Bed Course Granular Material Concrete Unit of Measurement Cubic meter in-place
510 (2)
Cubic meter in-place
ITEM 511 – GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 511.1 Description This Item shall consist of fur
nishing, forming wire mesh baskets, and placing rocks installed at the locations
designated, in accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the li
nes, grades, dimensions, and arrangements shown on the Plans or as directed by t
he Engineer. 511.2 Material Requirements 511.2.1 General
Gabions shall be constructed of wire mesh and shall be supplied in various lengt
hs and heights. A double twisted wire mesh container of variable
315
sizes, uniformly partitioned into internal cells, interconnected with other simi
lar units, and filled with stones at the project site to form flexible, permeabl
e, monolithic structures such as retaining walls, sea walls, channel linings, re
vetments and weirs for erosion control. The lengths shall be multiples of 2, 3 o
r 4 times the width of the gabion and heights shall be 0.50 m to 1.00 m or as sh
own on the plans. The horizontal width shall not be less than one meter. Gabion
furnished shall be of uniform width. The width, height and length of the gabion
as manufactured shall not differ more than 5% from the ordered size prior to fill
ing. Mattresses are double twisted wire mesh container uniformly partitioned int
o internal cells with relatively small height in relation to other dimensions, h
aving smaller mesh openings than the mesh used for gabions. Mattresses are gener
ally used for riverbank protection and channel linings. The length shall be 3.00
m to 6.00 m, the width shall be 2.00 m and the height shall be 0.17 m, 0.23 m o
r 0.30 m or as shown on the Plans. The width and length of the revet mattress as
manufactured shall not differ more than 5%, and the height shall not differ more
than 10% from the ordered size prior to filling. 511.2.2 Wire
The wire used in the manufactured of double-twisted mesh for use in gabions and
mattresses shall conform to the specifications as shown below as appropriate for
the style ordered. 511.2.2.1 Style 1 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured
from zinc-coated steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 641, Class 3 coat
ing, soft temper. 511.2.2.2 Style 2 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured fr
om Zn-5A1-MMcoated steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 856/A 856 M, Cl
ass 3 coating, soft temper. 511.2.2.3 Style 3 double-twisted mesh shall be manuf
actured from the same type of metallic-coated steel wire as style 1 with an addi
tional PVC coating extruded into the metallic-coated steel wire. The PVC coating
shall conform to the following requirements: Test Method 1. Specific Gravity 2.
Tensile Strength, min 3. Modulus of Elasticity, min 1.30 to 1.35 20.6 MPa 18.6
MPa D 792 D 412 D 412
316
4. Hardness, shore “D” 5. Brittleness Temp, max 6. Resistance to Abrasion, % weight
loss, max.
between 50 & 60 90C (150F) or lower temp. 12%
D 2240 D 746 D 1242
The PVC coating shall not show cracks or breaks after the wires are twisted in t
he fabrication of the mesh. 511.2.2.4 Style 4 double-twisted mesh shall be manuf
actured from aluminumcoated steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 809, s
oft temper. 511.2.3 Lacing Wire and Stiffener Lacing wire and stiffeners shall b
e made of wire having the same coating material as the double-twisted wire mesh
conforming to Specification ASTM A 641, A 856/A 856 M or A 809 with a tensile st
rength in accordance with subsection 509.2.7. 511.2.4 Fasteners made from zinc-c
oated steel wire, zinc - 5% aluminum mischmetal alloy-coated steel wire and alum
inum-coated steel shall conform to specification A 764, Type A, B, or C, Table 2
or Table 3. Gabion and mattresses shall be manufactured with all components mec
hanically connected at the production facility with the exception of the mattres
ses lid which is produced separately from the base. All gabions and mattresses s
hall be supplied in the collapsed form, either folded and bundled or rolled, for
shipping. Dimensions
511.2.5
511.2.6
The minimum size of the galvanized and PVC coated wire to be used in the fabrica
tion of the gabion and mattresses shall be as follows: Diameter, mm Gabion Mattr
esses Metallic PVC Metallic PVC Coated Coated Coated Coated 3.05 2.70 2.20 2.20
3.80 3.40 2.70 2.70 2.20 2.20 2.20 2.20
Body Wire Selvedge or Perimeter Wire Tying and Connecting Wire
Diameter Tolerances for Galvanized Wire to be used in the fabrication of gabion
and mattress shall be .10.
317
The nominal and the minimum thickness of PVC coating shall be 0.50 mm and 0.38 m
m, respectively. 511.2.7 Mechanical Properties
Tensile Strength – The tensile strength of Zinc-coated wire used in the fabricatio
n of gabion and mattresses when tested in accordance with Test Methods ASTM A 37
0, shall be as follows: Strength, max, Mpa Gabion Mattresses 485 515 485 485 515
515
Body Wire Selvedge or Perimeter Wire Tying and Connecting Wire 511.2.8 Weight of
Coating
The minimum weight of zinc per unit area of uncoated wire surface shall be in ac
cordance with ASTM A 975 or as follows: Wire Diameter, mm Over 1.90 to 2.30 Over
2.30 to 2.70 Over 2.70 to 3.10 Over 3.10 to 3.50 Over 3.50 to 3.90 511.2. 9 Roc
k Fill Rock used in the gabions and mattresses shall consist of hard, durable ro
ck pieces that will not deteriorate when submerged in water or exposed to severe
weather conditions. Rock pieces shall be generally uniformly graded in sizes ra
nging from 100 mm to 200 mm. Filled gabions shall have a minimum density of 1,40
0 kg/m3. Voids shall be evenly distributed. No rock size shall exceed 2/3 the ma
ttress depth and at least 85% by weight of the stone shall have a size greater t
han 80 mm. No stones shall be able to pass through the mesh. The rock shall meet
the requirements of AASHTO M 63 except that the sodium sulphate soundness loss
shall not exceed 9% after 5 cycles. 511.2.10 Filter Fabric Filter cloth shall co
nsist of 70% polypropylene and 30% polyethylene. Class 3 or A Coating, g/m2, AST
M A 641 220 230 240 260 270
318
511.3 Construction Requirements 511.3.1 Fabrication 1. Gabions and mattresses sh
all be in the form of rectangular baskets of the required dimensions and shall b
e manufactured from wire as specified in Subsection 509.2.2. Gabions shall be ma
de of steel wire double twisted forming a uniform hexagonal mesh type 8 x 10 hav
ing a nominal mesh openings of 83 by 114 mm. Mattresses shall be made of steel w
ire double twisted forming a uniform hexagonal mesh type 6 x 8 having a nominal
mesh openings of 64 by 83 mm. Tolerances on the hexagonal, double-twisted wire m
esh opening shall not exceed 10% on the nominal dimension D values, 64 mm for mat
tresses and 83 mm for gabions. The edges shall be formed into a securely connect
ed selvedge adequate to prevent raveling. Individual basket ties and connections
shall be made by using a quantity of wire not less than 8% of the weight of eac
h basket. 2. When the gabion length exceeds its width, it shall have securely ti
ed diaphragms connected at all edges to form individual cells of equal length an
d width. Gabions shall be fabricated in such a manner that the sides, ends, lids
and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baske
ts of the specified sizes. Gabions shall be of single unit construction, base, l
ids, ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of thes
e members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the
strength and flexibility at the point of connection is at least equal to that of
the mesh. The gabion shall be equally divided by diaphragms, placed at not more
than 1.0 m intervals, and of the same mesh and gauge as the body of the gabions
, into cells the length of which does not exceed the horizontal width. The gabio
n shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on
the base in such a manner that no additional tying at this junction will be nec
essary. 3. Four cross-connecting wires shall be provided in each cell having a h
eight of one half the width or less, and eight cross-connecting wires shall be p
rovided in each cell having a height greater than one half the width. All perime
ter edge of the mesh forming the gabion shall be securely selvedged so that the
joints, by tying the selvedges, have at least the same strength as the body of t
he mesh.
319
Selvedge wire used through all the edges (perimeter wire) shall not be less than
3.80 mm diameter and shall meet the same specifications as the wire mesh. 511.3
.2 Assembly and Construction: 1. Gabions shall be installed in a workmanlike man
ner. The gabions shall be placed on a smooth foundation. Final line and grade sh
all be approved by the Engineer. Each gabion unit shall be assembled by binding
together all vertical edges with wire ties on approximately 152 mm (6 inches) sp
acing or by a continuous piece of connecting wire stitched around the vertical e
dges with a coil every 102 mm ( 4 inches). Empty gabion units shall be set to li
ne and grade as shown on the Plans or as described by the Engineer. Wire ties or
connecting wires shall be used to join the units together in the same manner as
described above for assembling. Internal tie wires shall be uniformly spaced an
d securely fastened in each cell of the structure. A standard fence stretcher, c
hain fall, or iron rod may be used to stretch the wire baskets and hold alignmen
t. 2. When possible the subgrade of the mattress and gabion shall be properly co
mpacted to a depth of 150 mm. The Contractor shall consider the cost of subgrade
preparation in the unit prices. Filter fabric as beds of gabions and mattresses
forming the structure shall be suitably leveled and shall be securely connected
along the complete length of all contact edges by means of the above specified
tying and connecting wire. 3. Before the filling material is placed, the gabions
and mattresses shall be carefully selected for uniformity of size, and the piec
es shall be handplaced to provide a neat appearance as approved by the Engineer.
The gabions shall be filled with stone carefully placed by hand or machine to a
ssure alignment and avoid bulges with a minimum voids. Alternate placing of rock
and connection wires shall be performed until the gabion is filled. After a gab
ion has been filled, the lid shall be bent over until it meets the sides and edg
es. The lid shall then be secured to the sides, ends and diaphragms with the wir
e ties or connecting wire in the manner described for assembling. The vertical j
oints of gabions and mattress baskets shall be staggered as in running bond in b
rickwork.
320
4. The cells in any row shall be filled in stage so that local deformation may b
e avoided. That is at no time shall the cell be filled to a depth exceeding 30 c
m more than the adjoining cell. 5. Filter fabric shall be placed between earth s
urface and gabion or mattress structures. Filter fabric shall be rolled out into
a flat nonrutted surface free from sharp objects, weighing down the edges. Cons
truction equipment shall not be allowed into unprotected fabric. Jointing is nor
mally affected by overlapping not less than 300 mm, but it is preferable to join
t by sewing or industrial stapling. Joint edges should be facing downwards to av
oid protruding through the surface material.
511.4 Method of Measurement The quantities to be paid for shall be the number of
cubic meter of gabions and mattresses and the area of filter cloth completed an
d accepted.
511.5
Basis of Payment
Quantities determined as provided above shall be paid for at the appropriate con
tract unit price per unit of measurement for the Pay Item shown in the Bid Sched
ule, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for all necessar
y excavation, subgrade preparation, for furnishing, placing wire baskets and fil
l materials and for all labor, equipment accessories, tools, and incidentals nec
essary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 511 (1) 511 (2) 511 (3)
Description Gabions Mattresses Filter Cloth
Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter Cubic Meter Square Meter
321
PART H – MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES ITEM 600 – CURB AND GUTTER 600.1 Description This
Item shall consist of the construction of curb and gutter either Precast or Cast
in place, made of concrete in accordance with this Specification at the locatio
n, and in conformity with the lines, grades, dimensions and design, shown on the
Plans or as required by the Engineer. 600.2 Material Requirements 600.2.1 Mater
ial for Bed Course Bed course materials as shown on the Plans shall consist of c
inders, sand, slag, gravel, crushed stone, or other approved porous material of
such grading that all the particles will pass through 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) sieve.
600.2.2 Concrete Concrete shall be of the class indicated on the Plans and shall
conform to the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. 600.2.3 Expansion
Joint Filler Expansion joint filler shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M 153/ Item 705. 600.2.4 Cement Mortar Cement mortar shall consist of one part
of Portland cement and two parts of fine aggregates with water added as necessar
y to obtain the required consistency. The mortar shall be used within 30 minutes
of preparation. 600.2.5 Bonding Compound Where bonding compound is used, it sha
ll conform to AASHTO M 200. 600.3 Construction Requirements
600.3.1 Bedding Excavation shall be made to the required depth and the base upon
which the curb and/or gutter is to be set shall be compacted to a firm and even
surface. All soft and unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with su
itable material.
322
Bed course material shall be placed and compacted to form a bed of the required
thickness as shown on the Plans. 600.3.2 Cast in Place Curb and Gutter 600.3.2.1
Placing Forms shall conform to the requirements of Item 407, Concrete Structure
s. Metal forms shall be of an approved section. Forms to hold the concrete shall
be built and set-in-place as described in Item 407, Concrete Structures. Forms
for at least 50 m of curb and gutter shall be inplace and checked for alignment
and grade before concrete is placed. Curbs and gutters constructed on curves sha
ll have forms of either wood or metal and they shall be accurately shaped to the
curvature shown on the Plans. Mixing, placing, finishing and curing of concrete
shall conform to the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete, as modified
by the requirements below. The concrete shall be placed in the forms in layers
of 100 or 125 mm each, and to the depth required. It shall be tamped and spaded
until mortar entirely covers the top and surfaces of the forms. The top of the c
oncrete shall be finished to a smooth and even surface and the edges rounded to
the radii shown on the Plans. Before the concrete is given the final finishing,
the surface of the gutter shall be tested with a 3-m straight-edge and any irreg
ularities of more than 10 mm in 3 m shall be corrected. The curb and gutter shal
l be constructed in uniform sections of not more than 50 m in length except wher
e shorter sections are required to coincide with the location of weakened planes
or contraction joints of the concrete pavement, or for closures, but no section
shall be less than 2 m long. The sections shall be separated by sheet templates
set perpendicular to the face and top of the curb and gutter. The templates sha
ll be approximately 5 mm in thickness and of the same width as that of the curb
and/or gutter and not less than 50 mm deeper than the depth of the curb and/or g
utter. Templates shall be set carefully and held firmly during the placing of th
e concrete and shall remain in place until the concrete has set sufficiently to
hold its shape but shall be removed while the forms are still in place. A prefor
med joint filler approved by the Engineer may be used in lieu of the sheet templ
ate mentioned above. In this event the fiber board shall be pre-cut to the shape
of the curb so that its outer edge will be flushed with the abutting curb and/o
r gutter. Expansion joints shall be formed at intervals shown on the Plans. Wher
e a curb is placed next to a concrete pavement, expansion joints in the curb sha
ll be located opposite expansion joints in the pavement.
323
The form shall be removed within 24 hours after the concrete has been placed. Mi
nor defects shall be repaired with mortar containing one part of Portland Cement
and two parts of fine aggregate. Plastering shall not be permitted and all reje
cted portions shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. The expos
ed surface shall be finished while the concrete is still fresh by rubbing the su
rfaces with a wetted soft brick or wood until they are smooth. The surfaces shal
l be wetted thoroughly, either by dipping the brick or wood in water, or by thro
wing water on the surfaces with a brush. After the concrete has been rubbed smoo
th using water, it shall then be rubbed with a thin grout containing one part of
Portland Cement and one part of fine aggregates. Rubbing with grout shall conti
nue until uniform color is produced. When completed, the concrete shall be cover
ed with suitable material and kept moist for a period of 3 days, or a membrane-f
orming material may be applied as provided in Item 405, Structural Concrete. The
concrete shall be suitably protected from the weather until thoroughly hardened
. After the concrete has set sufficiently, the spaces on the back of the curb wh
ich were excavated for placing the curb shall be refilled to the required elevat
ion with suitable material which shall be tamped in layers of not more than 150
mm until consolidated. 600.3.3 Precast Curb and Gutter 600.3.3.1 Placing The pre
cast concrete curb and gutter shall be set in 20mm of cement mortar as specified
in Subsection 600.2.4 to the line level and grade as shown on the approved Plan
s. The precast curb shall not be more than 20cm in width at the top portion and
not be more than 25cm at the base. The precast curb and gutter shall be 1.0 m in
length and shall be put side by side consecutively with joint in between. Joint
s between consecutive curb and gutter shall be filled with cement mortar to the
full section of the curb and gutter. Expansion joints shall be formed at interva
ls shown on the Plans. Where a curb and gutter is placed next to a concrete pave
ment, expansion joints in the curb and gutter shall be located opposite expansio
n joints in the pavement. Minor defects shall be repaired with mortar containing
one part of Portland Cement and two parts of fine aggregates. Plastering shall
not be permitted and all rejected portions shall be removed and replaced at the
Contractor’s expense. The exposed surface shall be finished by rubbing the surface
s with a wetted soft brick or wood until they are smooth. The surfaces shall be
wetted thoroughly, either by dipping the brick or wood in water, or by throwing
water on the surfaces with a brush. After the concrete has been rubbed smooth us
ing water, it shall then be
324
rubbed with a thin grout containing one part of Portland Cement and one part of
fine aggregate. Rubbing with grout shall continue until uniform color is produce
d. 600.3.3.2 Handling Precast Curb and Gutter 1. In preparation for the handling
of precast curb and gutter, all fabricated curb and gutter of one (1) meter in
length shall be provided or inserted with 2-1ӯ PVC pipes for fitting at their requi
red locations. The PVC pipes shall be placed 25 mm from both edge during the fre
sh concrete is in plastic state. 2. Precast curb and gutter shall be lifted on u
pright position and not at the points of support and shall be the same during tr
ansporting and storage. 3. Extreme care shall be exercised in handling and movin
g precast curb and gutter to avoid cracking. 4. No precast curb and gutter shall
be used that does not reach its final position in the forms with the required t
ime stipulated prior to installation. 5. Precast curb and gutter shall be transf
erred to the construction site. Fresh curb and gutter shall not be placed agains
t in-situ concrete which has been in a position for more than 30 minutes. 6. Pre
cast curb and gutter may only be transported to the delivery point in truck agit
ators or truck mixer operating at the speed designated by the manufacturer of th
e equipment, provided that the consistency and workability of the mix concrete u
pon discharge at the delivery point is suitable for adequate placement. 600.4 Me
thod of Measurement
The length of curb and gutter to be paid for shall be the number of linear meter
s of curb and gutter (cast in place) or the number of pieces of precast curb and
gutter of the required dimensions shown on the Plans measured along its front f
ace in-place, completed and accepted. No deductions shall be made for flattening
of curbs at entrances and no additional allowances shall be made for curbs and
gutters constructed on curves. 600.5 Basis of Payment The length of curb and gut
ter determined in Subsection 600.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at
the contract unit price per linear meter for Curb and Gutter which price and pay
ment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials
for concrete, reinforcing steel if required on the Plans, expansion joint mater
ials, forms for drainage openings, excavation for curb and
325
gutter, backfilling, dumping and disposal of surplus materials, and for all labo
r, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will
be made under:
Pay Item Number 600 (1) 600 (2) 600 (3) 600 (4) 600 (5) 600 (6)
Description Concrete Curb (Cast in place) Concrete Gutter (Cast in place) Curb a
nd Gutter (Cast in place) Concrete Curb (Precast) Concrete Gutter (Precast) Curb
& Gutter (Precast)
Unit of Measurement Linear Meter Linear Meter Linear Meter Piece Piece Piece
ITEM 601 – SIDEWALK
601.1
Description
This Item shall consist of the construction of asphalt or Portland Cement concre
te sidewalk in accordance with this Specification and to the lines, grades, leve
ls and dimensions shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer. 601.2 Mate
rial Requirements 601.2.1 Portland Cement Concrete The cement concrete shall be
Class A as specified in Item 405, Structural Concrete. 601.2.2 Asphalt Asphaltic
material shall be as specified in Item 308, Bituminous Plant-Mix Surface Course
, Cold-Laid, or Item 310, Bituminous Concrete Surface Course, HotLaid. 601.2.3 E
xpansion Joint Filler Unless otherwise ordered, the preformed joint filler shall
have a thickness of 5 mm and shall conform to the requirements of Item 311, Por
tland Cement Concrete Pavement.
326
601.2.4
Forms
Forms shall be of wood or metal as approved by the Engineer and shall extend to
the full depth of the concrete. All forms shall be straight, free from warps and
of adequate strength to resist distortion. 601.2.5 Bed Course Material Bed cour
se material consists of cinders, sand, slag, gravel, crushed stone or other appr
oved permeable granular material of such grading that all particles shall pass a
12.5 mm (1/2 inch) sieve. 601.2.6 Asphaltic Prime Coat Prime coat shall be cut-
back asphalt conforming to the requirements of Item 301, Bituminous Prime Coat.
601.3 Construction Requirements
601.3.1 Asphalt Sidewalk Excavation shall be made to the depth and width require
d that will permit the installation and bracing of the forms. The foundation sha
ll be shaped and compacted to a firm and even surface conforming to the section
shown on the Plans. All materials from soft areas shall be removed and replaced
with suitable materials. The bed course shall be compacted in layers not exceedi
ng 100 mm to the depths, lines and levels shown on the Plans. The prepared bed c
ourse material shall receive an application of prime coat in accordance with the
requirements of Item 301, Bituminous Prime Coat. The asphalt mixture shall be p
laced on the previously primed and prepared bed only when, in the opinion of the
Engineer, the bed is sufficiently dry and weather conditions are suitable. The
mixture shall be placed in one or more layers of uniform thickness to the total
depth shown on the Plans. Each layer shall be smoothed by raking or screeding an
d shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling with a hand operated roller of a type
satisfactory to the Engineer. After compaction, the surfacing shall be of the t
hickness and section shown on the Plans and shall be smooth, even and of a dense
uniform texture. Forms, if used, shall be removed and the shoulders shaped and
compacted to the required section. 601.3.2 Cement Concrete Sidewalk Excavation s
hall be as specified above. The bed course material shall be placed in accordanc
e with the Item 200, Aggregate Subbase Course.
327
All forms shall be staked securely in position at the correct line and level. Pr
eformed joint filler shall be set in position shown on the Plans before placing
of the concrete is started. The top of the joint filler shall be placed 5 mm bel
ow the top surface of the finished sidewalk. The mixing, placing, finishing and
curing of concrete shall be as specified in Item 405, Structural Concrete. The P
ortland Cement concrete shall be placed to the total depth shown on the plans. T
he surface shall be cut through to a depth of 10 mm with a trowel at intervals o
f 1 m or, were required, in straight lines perpendicular to the edge of sidewalk
. The surface shall then be brushed. The edges of the sidewalk and the transvers
e cuts shall be shaped with a suitable tool so formed as to round the edges to a
radius of 15 mm
601.4 Method of Measurement The area to be paid for shall be the number of squar
e meters of sidewalk measured, completed in-place and accepted.
601.5 Basis of Payment The quantity as determined in Subsection 601.4, Method of
Measurement, shall be paid for all the contract unit price per square meter for
Sidewalk which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnish
ing and placing all materials for asphalt sidewalk, concrete sidewalk, expansion
joint material, for excavating and compacting the foundation bed, for furnishin
g and placing cinders, gravel or other permeable bed course material, for prime
coat material, for forms, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals ne
cessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item No.
Description
Unit of Measurement
601
Sidewalk
Square Meter
328
ITEM 602 – MONUMENTS, MARKERS AND GUIDE POSTS
602.1 Description This Item shall consist of right-of-way monuments, maintenance
marker posts, kilometer posts and/or guide posts, furnished and installed in ac
cordance with this Specification at the locations, and in conformity with the si
zes, dimensions and design, shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.
602.2
Material Requirements
Concrete shall be the class designated on the Plans and shall be composed of mat
erials conforming to the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete. Reinforc
ing steel shall conform to the requirements of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel. Timb
er shall be of the species and grade shown on the Plans. Treated timber, if requ
ired, shall conform to the requirements of Item 410, Treated and Untreated Timbe
r. The metal material shall conform to the requirements shown on the Plans, or a
s stipulated in the Special Provisions. Paints, if required, shall conform to th
e requirements shown on the Plans, or as stipulated in the Special Provisions. W
arning reflectors, if required, shall conform to the requirements shown on the P
lans, or as stipulated in the Special Provisions.
602.3 Construction Requirements Construction or fabrication and installation of
monuments and posts shall be as shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions
and shall include the attaching of warning reflectors and the painting of posts,
if required. Each monument and post shall be set accurately at the required loc
ation and elevation and in such manner as to insure its being held firmly in pla
ce. In constructing precast monuments, the forms shall not be removed until afte
r the concrete has hardened. Monuments that are warped shall be rejected. The ex
posed surface of the finished monuments shall be uniform, of even texture, and s
hall be free from holes, cracks and chipped edges. The precast monuments shall n
ot be transported to the work until the concrete has been cured.
329
602.4 Method of Measurement The quantities to be paid for shall be the actual nu
mber of right-of-way monuments, maintenance marker posts, kilometer posts and/or
guide posts furnished, placed and accepted.
602.5
Basis of Payment
The quantities determined as provided in Subsection 602.4, Method of Measurement
, shall be paid for at the contract price per unit of measurement respectively,
for each of the particular Pay Item listed below and as shown in the Bid Schedul
e, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and
placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals ne
cessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item. Payment will be made under
:
Pay Item Number 602 (1) 602 (2) 600 (3) 600 (4)
Description Right-of-Way monuments Maintenance marker posts Kilometer posts Guid
e posts
Unit of Measurement\ Each Each Each Each
(When more than one design is specified for any of the pay items, their respecti
ve dimensions, material types or other means of identification shall be inserted
in parenthesis immediately after the name of the pay item, and letter suffixes
shall be included within the parenthesis of the pay item numbers)
ITEM 603 – GUARDRAIL
603.1 Description This item shall consist of furnishing and constructing posts a
nd guardrails of the types called for in the contract and in accordance with thi
s Specification, at the locations, and in conformity with the lines and grades s
hown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.
330
603.2 Material Requirements Materials for the desired type of guardrail shall me
et the requirements specified in the following specifications: 1. 2. 3. 4. Wire
rope or wire cable AASHTO M 30 Chain link fabric AASHTO M 181 Metal beam rail AA
SHTO M 180 Timber rail, unless otherwise indicated in the Plans or Special Provi
sions, any of the following first group Philippine Timber shall be used: Ipil, M
olave, Tindalo or Yacal. Only one specie of timber shall be used in the construc
tion of any one continuous length of guardrail.
Timber guardrail shall be well-seasoned, straight and free of injurious defects.
They shall be dressed and of sufficient length so that joints shall be on the r
ail posts. Guardrail Hardware. Offset brackets of the resilient and non-resilien
t types shall be of the type specified, or as shown on the Plans, and shall meet
the strength requirements specified. Splices and end connections shall be of th
e type and design specified or as shown on the Plans, and shall be of such stren
gth as to develop the full design strength of the rail elements. Unless otherwis
e specified, all fittings, bolts, washers and other accessories shall be galvani
zed in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO M 111 or ASTM A 153, whichever
may apply. All galvanizing shall be done after fabrication. Guardrail Post. Pos
ts shall be of either wood, steel, or concrete, as may be specified. Only one ki
nd of post shall be used for any one continuous guardrail. Wood post shall be fa
bricated from an approved or specified timber specie and shall be of the quality
, diameter or section and length as specified, or as shown on the Plans. Steel p
ost shall be of the section and length as specified, or as shown on the Plans. T
hey shall be of a copper bearing steel when so specified. Steel shall conform to
the requirements of AASHTO M 183 for the grade specified. The posts shall be ga
lvanized or shop painted as may be specified. Pre-cast reinforced concrete posts
shall be of a section and length as specified or as shown on the Plans. Concret
e shall conform with the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete, for clas
s specified. Reinforcement shall conform with the requirements of AASHTO M 31 Gr
ade 60. All bars shall be of the deformed type.
331
Concrete deadmen for end anchorages shall be as specified, or as shown on the Pl
ans. Concrete and reinforcement shall conform to the requirements as stated abov
e the precast reinforced concrete posts. Paints for steel and wood shall be spec
ified and conform to the requirements specified in Item 411, Paint. 603.3 Constr
uction Requirements 603.3.1 Posts Posts shall be set vertically in the position
shown on the Plans and, where embedded in a concrete foundation block, shall rem
ain undisturbed for a minimum of 48 hours. The space around the post shall be ba
ckfilled to the ground line with approved material in layers not exceeding 100 m
m and each layer shall be moistened and thoroughly compacted. 603.3.2 Rail Eleme
nts Rail elements shall be erected in a manner resulting in a smooth continuous
installation. All bolts, except adjustment bolts, shall be drawn tight. Bolts sh
all be of sufficient length to extend beyond the nuts at least 5 mm but not more
than 10 mm. Where painting of railing components is specified, any damage to th
e shop coat of paint shall be corrected by an application of an approved rust-in
hibitive primer prior to further painting. Any surface inaccessible to painting
after erection shall be given the specified number of coats of paint uniformly a
pplied by thorough brushing using an approved pressure spray. Galvanized surface
s which have been abraded so that the base material is exposed, threaded portion
s of all fittings and fasteners and cut ends of bolts shall be protected in a ma
nner as may be specified or directed. The surfaces and sawed edges of untreated
or salt-treated guardrail shall be painted with three coats of white paint to wi
thin 200 mm of the ground line. The first 200 mm of posts above the ground shall
be painted with two coats of black paint. Painting shall be done only when the
timber is dry and clean. Each coat of paint shall be thoroughly dry before the n
ext coat is applied. Paint shall be applied in heavy coats, completely covering
every part of the surface and shall be worked well into the joints and open spac
es. It shall be thoroughly and evenly spread that no excess paint collects at an
y point. Guardrail and posts, after erection has been completed, shall be staine
d with two applications of approved creosote stain, covering the rails and the e
xposed portions of the posts. The wood shall be dry before being stained. The fi
rst coat
332
shall be thoroughly dry before the second is applied. Stain shall not be applied
in damp weather. For beam type guardrails, metal works not galvanized shall be
given one shop coat of red lead, zinc chromate paint or an approved fast-drying
rust-inhibitive primer and two field coats of white or aluminum paint. Untreated
wood posts shall be given three coats of paints of the color indicated on the P
lans, or as specified. Painting shall conform to the requirements of Item 411, P
aint.
603.4
Method of Measurement
Guardrail shall be measured by linear meter from center to center of end posts,
except where end connections are made on masonry or steel structures, in which c
ase measurement will be to the face of such structures. End anchorages and termi
nal sections will be measured as units of each kind shown in Bid Schedule. If no
pay item for anchorages or terminal sections appear in the Bid Schedule, measur
ement therefore shall be included in the linear meter measurement for completed
guardrail.
603.5
Basis of Payment
The accepted quantities of guardrail, determined in Subsection 603.4, Method of
Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per linear meter for t
he type specified, complete in place, which price and payment shall be full comp
ensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipmen
t, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. When so specified, end
anchorages and terminal sections will be paid for at the contract unit price for
each of the kind specified and completed in place. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item No.
Description
Unit of Measurement
603 (1) 603 (2) 603 (3a) 603 (3b) 604 (4)
Guardrail (Wire rope or Wire cable) Cable Guardrail 9Chain Link Fabric) Metal Gu
ardrail (Metal Beam) Including Post Metal Beam End Piece Guardrail (Timber)
Linear Meter Linear Meter Linear Meter Each Linear Meter
333
ITEM 604 – FENCING
604.1 Description This Item shall consist of furnishing and constructing posts a
nd barbed wire or chain link fences in accordance with the details, and at the l
ocations, shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.
604.2 Material Requirements 604.2.1 Barbed Wire Barbed wire shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A 121, Class I. The barbed wire shall consist of 2 strands
of 12.5 gauge wire, twisted with 2 points, 14 gauge barbs spaced 100 mm apart.
604.2.2 Chain Link Fence Fabric Chain link fence fabric shall be fabricated from
10 gauge galvanized wire conforming to AASHTO M 181 and shall be of the type sh
own on the Plans. Before ordering the chain link fence fabric, the Contractor sh
all submit a sample of the material to the Engineer for testing and for approval
. 604.2.3 Concrete Post Concrete posts shall be made of Class A concrete in acco
rdance with Item 405, Structural Concrete. The posts shall be cast to a tapered
section 3 m long, or to the length shown on the detailed Plans, and shall have a
smooth surface finish. 604.2.4 Steel Post Steel posts shall be of the sections
and length as specified or as shown on the Plans. The posts shall be copper bear
ing steel and shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 183 for the grade sp
ecified. 604.2.5 Steel Reinforcement Steel reinforcement for concrete posts shal
l be deformed steel bars conforming to the provisions of Item 404, Reinforcing S
teel. 604.2.6 Hardwares Nuts, bolts, washers and other associated hardware shall
be galvanized after fabrication as specified as ASTM 153.
334
604.3
Construction Requirements
The Contractor shall perform such clearing and grubbing as may be necessary to c
onstruct the fence to the required grade and alignment. Fence shall generally fo
llow the contour of the ground. Grading shall be performed where necessary to pr
ovide a neat appearance. Gates shall be constructed as shown on the Plans 604.3.
1 Erection Post The post shall be erected vertically in position inside the form
work of the foundation block prior to the placing of concrete and shall be adequ
ately supported by bracing to prevent movement of the post during the placing an
d setting of the concrete. The posts shall be erected to the height and location
shown on the Plans, or as ordered by the Engineer. 604.3.2 Installation of Chai
n Link Fence fabric The chain link fence fabric shall be set to line and elevati
on and pulled taut between each post before spot welding, or other method of fix
ing, is carried out. Where splicing of the fence fabric is necessary, or at join
ts, the lapping of the chain link fence fabric shall be for a minimum of 100 mm
and shall occur only at the post. No horizontal splicing will be permitted. The
fence fabric shall be fixed to the posts as shown on the Plans. Any surface prot
ective layer damaged during welding and/or construction shall be restored proper
ly.
604.4 Method of Measurement The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of l
inear meter measured center to center of posts, of fencing erected in place and
accepted.
604.5 Basis of Payment The quantity, as determined in Subsection 604.4, Method o
f Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract price per unit of measurement r
espectively for each of the particular items listed below and as shown in the Bi
d Schedule, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing an
d placing all materials and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals nece
ssary to complete the Item.
335
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item No.
Description
Unit of Measurement
604 (1) 604 (2) 604 (3) 604 (4)
Fencing (Barbed wire) Fencing (Chain Link Fence Fabric) Fencing (Posts) Fencing
(Gates)
Linear Meter Linear Meter Each Each
ITEM 605 – ROAD SIGN
605.1 Description This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing road sign
s in accordance with this Specification and to the details shown on the Plans, o
r as required by the Engineer. The road signs shall comply in all respects with
the “Philippine International Road Signs Manual” published by the Department of Publ
ic Works and Highways, Manila. The categories of road signs are designated in th
e Manual, namely, danger warning signs, regulatory signs and informative signs,
or guide signs. These are referred to in the Contract as warning signs and infor
matory signs, respectively. Road signs shall be classified as standard or non-st
andard. Standard signs consist of all warning signs, regulatory signs and inform
atory signs with the exception of direction signs, place identification signs an
d the line. Non-standard signs consist of all informatory signs which are not cl
assified as standard signs. The size of warning and regulatory signs is the leng
th of the side of triangular signs (measured from the points of intersection of
the extension of the edges), the horizontal width of octagonal signs and the dia
meter of circular signs.
605.2 Material Requirements 605.2.1 Sign Panels Sign panels for warning, regulat
ory, and informatory signs shall be manufactured from aluminum sheeting at least
3 mm thick.
336
605.2.2 Reflective Sheeting The reflective sheeting used on the road signs shall
consist of spherical lens elements embedded within a transparent plastic having
a smooth, flat surface with a protected precoat adhesive which shall be pressur
e sensitive for manual application, or tack free heat activated for mechanical v
acuum-heat application. The minimum reflective brightness values of the reflecti
ve sheeting as compared to a magnesium oxide (MgO) shall be as given in Table 60
5.1. The brightness of the reflective sheeting totally wet by rain, shall be not
less than 90% of the given values. Table 605.1 – Reflective Brightness of Traffic
Signs Surfaces Color Angle of Incidence -40 200 500 -40 200 500 -40 200 500 -40
200 500 Angle of Divergence 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0
.50 0.50 Minimum Reflective Brightness Value Compared with MgO 15 10 3 75 70 70
35 35 10 6 4.5 0.5
Red
White
Yellow
Blue
The reflective sheeting shall be sufficiently flexible to permit application and
adhesion to a moderately embossed surface. It shall show no damage when bent 90
0 over a 50 mm diameter mandrel. The sheeting shall be solvent-resistant so as t
o be capable of withstanding cleaning with petrol, diesel fuel, mineral spirits,
turpentine methanol. The sheeting shall show no cracking or reduction in reflec
tivity after being subjected to the dropping of a 25 mm diameter steel ball from
a height of 2 m into its surface. The adhesive shall permit the reflective shee
ting to adhere accurately 48 hours after application of temperatures of up to 90
0.
337
The reflective material shall be weather-resistant and, following cleaning in ac
cordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, shall show no discoloration, crackin
g, blistering, peeling or any dimensional change. Samples of reflective sheeting
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 605.2.3 Posts and Frames Wide
flange posts and frames shall be fabricated from structural steel conforming to
ASTM A 283 Grade D. In lieu of wide flange steel posts, the Contractor may use t
ubular steel posts conforming to ASTM A 501. All posts shall be thoroughly clean
ed, free from grease, scale and rust and shall be given one coat of rust-inhibit
ing priming paint and two coats of gray paint in accordance with Item 411, Paint
. 605.2.4 Nuts and Bolts Nuts, bolts, washers and other metal parts shall be hot
-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO
M 111. 605.2.5 Concrete Foundation Blocks The concrete for the foundation blocks
shall be Class A in accordance with Item 405, Structural Concrete and shall be
of the size shown on the Plans.
605.3 Construction Requirements 605.3.1 Excavation and Backfilling Holes shall b
e excavated to the required depth to the bottom of the concrete foundation as sh
own on the Plans. Backfilling shall be carried out by using suitable material ap
proved by the Engineer and shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm in
depth. Surplus excavated material shall be disposed of by the Contractor as dire
cted by the Engineer. 605.3.2 Erection of Posts The posts shall be erected verti
cally in position inside the formwork of the foundation block prior to the placi
ng of the concrete and shall be adequately supported by bracing to prevent movem
ent of the post during the placing and setting of concrete. The posts shall be l
ocated at the positions shown on the Plans.
338
605.3.3 Sign Panel Installation Sign panels shall be installed in accordance wit
h the details shown on the Plans. Any chipping or bending of the sign panels sha
ll be considered as sufficient cause to require replacement of the panels at the
Contractor’s expense. The exposed portion of the fastening hardware on the face o
f the signs shall be painted with enamels matching the background color. All new
ly erected traffic road signs shall be covered until ordered removed by the Engi
neer.
605.4
Method of Measurement
The quantities of standard reflective warning and regulatory road signs shall be
the number of such signs of the size specified, including the necessary posts a
nd supports erected and accepted. The quantities for standard reflective informa
tory signs and non-standard reflective informatory signs shall be the number of
such, including the necessary posts and supports, erected and accepted.
605.5
Basis of Payment
The quantities measured as determined in Subsection 605.4, Method of Measurement
, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for the Pay Items shown in the Bi
d Schedule which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and
installing road signs, for excavation, backfilling and construction of foundati
on blocks, and all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete
the Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item No.
Description
Unit of Measurement
605 (1) 605 (2) 605 (3)
Warning Signs Regulatory Signs Informatory Signs
Each Each Each
339
ITEM 606 – PAVEMENT MARKINGS
606.1
Description
This item shall consist of placing markings on the finished pavement. The work s
hall include the furnishing of premixed reflectorized traffic paint or reflector
ized pavement marking paint conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 248, whic
hever is called for in the Contract, sampling and packing, preparing the surface
, and applying the paint to the pavement surface, all in accordance with this Sp
ecification. The paint shall be applied to the size, shape and location of the m
arkings shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer. 606.2 Premixed Refle
ctorized Traffic Paints Premixed reflectorized traffic paint is a paint in which
the glass beads are mixed in the paint during the process of manufacture, so th
at upon application and drying, the paint line is capable of retroreflection of
the light beams. Premixed reflectorized traffic paints which are available in bo
th white and yellow are paints that provide reflective marking for concrete, bit
uminous, bricks or stone surface of highways, bridges, tunnels, streets, parking
lots and airports. 606.2.1 Classification Premixed reflectorized traffic paint
shall be classified according to the following types based on the vehicles used:
Type I – Alkyd Type II – Chlorinated Rubber Alkyd
606.2.2
Material Requirements
The paint shall consist of pigments, vehicles and glass beads so combined as to
produce a paint that will conform to the following requirements. a. Condition in
container – The packaged material shall be free from lumps and mixed readily to a
smooth homogenous state. b. Skinning – The packaged material shall not skin withi
n 48 hours in a ¾ filled, tightly closed container. c. Appearance of Dried Film – Th
e paint film shall dry to a smooth uniform finish. d. Flexibility – The dried pain
t film shall not show cracking or flaking after being bent about 180 degrees ove
r a 12.7 mm mandrel.
340
e. Resistance to Water – The dried paint film shall not show blistering, peeling,
wrinkling and discoloration when immersed in water for 18 hours. f. The paint sh
all also conform to the physical properties specified in Table 1. Table 1 – Physic
al Properties
Properties
Type I and Type II Minimum 1.5 65 Maximum 40 95
Specific Gravity Drying Time, No Pick Up, Minutes Consistency (Kreb Units) at 20
C
g. Premixed reflectorized traffic paint composition shall conform to the require
ments given in Table 2. Table 2 – Composition Requirements Requirements Paint Comp
osition Type I Type II Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum Total Dry Solids, percent
By weight 60 60 Titanium Dioxide, Rutile Percent by weight 16.0 16.0 Medium Chr
ome Yellow, Percent by weight 12.0 12.0 Extenders, percent by wt., White 13.0 13
.0 Yellow 17.0 17.0 Non-volatile Content (based on the vehicle) percent by weigh
t 40 41 Glass Beads, percent by Weight 31.0 35.0 35.0 31.0 h. Glass Spheres or B
eads Requirements: Quantity: The amount of glass beads to be mixed with the pain
t shall be 500 grams per liter of paint.
341
Beads Diameter: The percentage of beads that will pass through the US Standard S
ieves shall be as follows: Sieve No. (um) Mass Percent Passing 100 85-100 15-55
0-10
70 (212 – um) – 0.850 80 (186 – um) – 0.600 140 (106 – um) – 0.300 230 ( 63 – um) – 0.150
Index of Refraction: The index of refraction of the beads shall be within the ra
nge of 1.50 to 1.60 when tested by the liquid immersion method at 29oC. Appearan
ce: The glass beads shall be transparent, colorless and the sum of particles tha
t are fused, plane, angular and colored and contains bubble shall not exceed 20
percent 606.2.3 Construction Requirements The painting of lane markers and traff
ic strips shall include the cleaning of the pavement surfaces, the application,
protection and drying of the paint coatings, the protection of pedestrians, vehi
cular or other traffic, the protection of all parts of the road structure and it
s appurtenances against disfigurement by spatters, splashes or smirches of paint
s or of paint materials, and the supplying of all tools, labor and traffic paint
necessary for the entire work. The paint shall not be applied during rain or we
t weather or when the air is misty, or when in the opinion of the Engineer, cond
itions are unfavorable for the work. Paint shall not be applied upon damp paveme
nt surfaces, or upon pavement which has absorbed heat sufficient to cause the pa
int to blister and produce a porous film of paint. The application of paint shal
l preferably be carried out by a machine specially made for this purpose but whe
re brushes are used, only round or oval brushes not exceeding 100 mm in width wi
ll be permitted. The paint shall be so applied as to produce a uniform, even coa
ting in close contact with the surface being painted. Traffic paint shall be app
lied to the pavement at the rate of 0.33 L /m2 and shall dry sufficiently to be
free from cracking in from 15 to 30 minutes. All markings shall present a clean
cut, uniform and workmanlike appearance. Markings that fail to have a uniform, s
atisfactory appearance either by day or night, shall be corrected by the Contrac
tor in a manner acceptable to the Engineer and at no cost to the Government.
342
606.2.4 Sampling The paint shall be sampled in accordance with PNS 484/ISO 1512
or other Philippine Standard Method of Sampling Paints and Varnishes. 606.2.5 Te
st Methods The paints shall be tested in accordance with the methods specified i
n PNS 461 or other Philippine Standard Method of Tests for Paints and Varnishes.
606.2.6 Packing, Packaging and Marking The paints shall be packed, packaged and
marked in accordance with PNS 140.
606.3 Method of Measurement The quantity of pavement markings to be paid for sha
ll either be the length as shown on the Plans of painted traffic line of the sta
ted width or the area as shown on the plans of symbols, lettering, hatchings, an
d the like, completed and accepted. Separate items shall be provided for premixe
d reflectorized traffic paint and reflectorized thermoplastic pavement markings.
606.4 Basis of Payment The quantities measured as determined in Section 606.4, M
ethod of Measurement, shall be paid for at the appropriate contract unit price f
or the Pay Items shown in the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall constit
ute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, sampling and pac
king, for the preparation of the surface, and for all labor, equipment, tools an
d incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item No.
Description
Unit of Measurement
606 (1)
Pavement markings (Premixed Reflectorized) Pavement markings (Reflectorized Ther
moplastic)
Square Meter
606 (2)
Square Meter
343
ITEM 607 – REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT STUDS 607.1 Description This Item shall consist of
furnishing and installing reflective pavement studs on the surface of the paveme
nt in accordance with this Specification and at the locations shown on the Plans
, or as required by the Engineer.
607.2 Material Requirements 607.2.1 Reflective Studs Reflective studs shall be e
ither the “Flush Surface” or “Raised Profile” type having the following characteristics.
The “Flush Surface” reflector shall be the short base type having a maximum base ar
ea of 180 mm x 140 mm. The base shall be formed in cast-iron with adequate webbi
ng to insure a firm key to the road when installed. The pad shall be highly resi
lient and durable rubber reinforced with canvass and shall have a design life of
at least 5 years. The pad shall be so designed as to produce a self-wiping acti
on of the reflectors when depressed. The reflectors shall be made of impact and
abrasion-resisting glass and shall be hermetically sealed into a copper socket.
The “Raised Profile” reflectors shall consist of an acrylic plastic shell filled wit
h an adherent epoxy compound molded from methyl methacyclate into the shape of a
shallow frustrum of a pyramid with base dimensions approximately 100 mm x 100 m
m and thickness of not more than 20 mm. The shell shall contain two prismatic re
flectors each inclined at an angle of 30o to the horizontal and having an area n
ot less than 20 cm2. The reflectors shall attain the following standards for the
ir photometric and physical properties: a) The reflectors shall have the minimum
specific intensity values expressed as candle power per foot-candle of illumina
tion at the reflector on a plane perpendicular to the incident light shown in Ta
ble 607.1. Table 607.1 – Raised Profile Pavement Studs: Photometric Properties Spe
cific Intensity Values Crystal Yellow 0.2o 0.2o 3.00 1.20 1.80 0.72
Color Divergence Angle Incidence Angle 0o 20o
Red 2o 0.75 0.30
344
Each reflector for testing shall be located with the center of the reflecting fa
ce at a diameter of 1.5 m from a uniformly bright light source having an effecti
ve diameter of 5 mm. The width of the photocell shall be 1.2 mm and shall be shi
elded from stray light. The distance from the centers of the light source and ph
otocell shall be 5 mm. Failure of more than 4% of the reflective faces shall be
a cause for rejection of the complete batch. The reflectors shall support a vert
ical load or kgf(10kN) when tested in the following manner. A reflector shall be
centered horizontally over the open end of a vertically positioned hollow metal
cylinders, 75 mm internal diameter, 25 mm high and wall thickness of 6 mm. The
load shall be applied to the top of the reflector through a 6 mm diameter by a 6
mm high metal plug centered on top of the reflector. Failure shall constitute e
ither breakage or significant deformation of the marker at any load less than 10
00 kgf. 607.2.2 Adhesive When “Raised Profile” type reflectors are specified, an app
roved two-part epoxy adhesive shall be used. 607.2.3 Cement Mortar Cement mortar
shall consist of 1 part of Portland Cement to 2 parts of fine aggregate with wa
ter added as necessary to obtain the required consistency.
607.3 Construction Requirements 607.3.1 Flush Surface Type The stud shall be ins
talled into the pavement in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions but sh
all also comply with the following requirements. Cavities in the pavement shall
be clearly cut to the dimensions of the pavement stud and shall allow a clearanc
e of 10 mm around the stud base. The longitudinal centerline axis of the cavity
shall be the same as that required for the pavement stud when laid to the correc
t line and direction. The walls of the cavity shall be splayed back at the angle
of approximately 30 to the vertical to facilitate a “dove-tail” joint after the mor
tar has set.
o
The bottom of the cavity shall be levelled with asphalt concrete prior to placin
g the stud base which shall be pounded into position with a pounder foot attache
d to the pneumatic drill.
345
The depth of the activity shall be such that when the stud base and reflectors h
ave been installed the elevation of the floor of the lens socket shall not be gr
eater than 2.0 mm or less than 1.0 mm above the pavement surface. When the studs
are installed into a cement concrete pavement, the stud shall be grouted into p
osition with asphalt concrete containing fine aggregate only or with a cement mo
rtar as described in Subsection 607.2.3 above. 607.3.2 Raised Profile Type The p
avement studs shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction
s.
607.4 Method of Measurement The quantity of reflectorized pavement studs to be p
aid for shall be the number of reflectorized pavement studs of either the flush
surface type or the raised profile type, whichever is called for in the Contract
, installed complete and accepted.
607.5 Basis of Payment The quantities measured as described in Subsection 607.4,
Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price of the Pay
Items shown in the Bid Schedule, which payment shall constitute full compensatio
n for furnishing and placing all materials, excavating cavities, preparation of
surfaces, applying adhesive and mortar and for all labor, equipment, tools and i
ncidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item No.
Description
Unit of Measurement
607 (1)
Reflectorized Pavement Stud (Flush Type) Reflectorized Pavement Studs (Raised Pr
ofile Type)
Each
607 (2)
Each
346
ITEM 608 – TOPSOIL
608.1 Description This Item shall consist of topsoil furnished, transported and
spread, or topsoil removed from designated areas, hauled and spread, in accordan
ce with this Specification at the location shown on the Plans or as required by
the Engineer.
608.2 Material Requirements Topsoil furnished shall consist of fertile friable s
oil of loamy character without admixture of undesirable subsoil, refuse or forei
gn materials. It shall be obtained from well-drained arable land and shall be re
asonably free from roots, hard clay, coarse gravel, stones larger than 50 mm in
size, coarse sand, noxious seeds, sticks, brush, litter and other deleterious su
bstances. Topsoil shall be capable of sustaining healthy plant life and shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer. Topsoil shall contain not less than fi
ve (5) percent organic matter as determined by loss or ignition of samples oven-
dried to constant weight.
608.3 Construction Requirements 608.3.1 Sources of Material Topsoil shall be obt
ained as specified in Item 102, Excavation, or from other approved sources. The
Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least five days before he intends to sta
rt topsoil stripping operations. After inspection and approval by the Engineer a
nd prior to stripping any topsoil, the Contractor shall remove noxious weeds and
tall grass, brush roots and stones larger than 50 mm in diameter. 608.3.2 Placi
ng The topsoil shall be evenly spread on the areas and to the line and level sho
wn on the Plans and compacted with a light roller to a depth of not less than 10
0 mm. Spreading shall not be done when the ground topsoil is excessively wet, or
otherwise in a condition detrimental to such work. The roadway surfaces shall b
e kept clean during hauling and spreading operations. After spreading has been c
ompleted, large clods, stones, roots, stumps and other loose-lying materials sha
ll be raked up and removed. Any erosion, irregularities of grade or other incide
ntal damage to the surface of the topsoil shall be repaired and/or restored to t
he Engineer’s satisfaction.
347
608.4 Method of Measurement The quantities to be paid for shall be the number of
cubic meters of Topsoil removed, furnished and hauled complete in place and acc
epted.
608.5
Basis of Payment
The quantities, as determined in Subsection 608.4, Method of Measurement, shall
be paid for at the contract unit price respectively, for each of the particular
Pay Items listed below that is shown on the Bid Schedule, which price and paymen
t shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials and for al
l labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Paymen
t will be made under:
Pay Item Number 608(1) 608(2)
Description Furnishing and Placing Topsoil Placing Topsoil
Unit of Measurement Cubic Meter Cubic Meter
ITEM 609 - SPRIGGING
609.1
Description
This Item shall consist of planting sprigs of living grass plants in accordance
with this Specification at locations shown on the Plans or as required by the En
gineer.
609.2
Material Requirements
609.2.1 Sprigs Sprigs shall be healthy living stems (stolons or rhizomes) with a
ttached roots or perennial turf-forming grasses of the kinds shown on the Plans,
harvested without adhering soil and obtained from approved sources in the local
ity of the work where the sod is heavy and thickly matted. The presence of objec
tionable grasses, weeds or other detrimental material will be a cause for reject
ion.
348
609.2.2 Fertilizers Fertilizers shall be standard commercial fertilizers supplie
d separately or in mixture containing the percentages of total nitrogen, availab
le phosphoric acid and water-soluble potash. They shall be furnished in standard
containers with name, weight and guaranteed analysis of contents clearly marked
. The fertilizers may be supplied in the following form: 1. A dry, free-flowing
fertilizer soluble in water, suitable for application by a common fertilizer spr
eader. 2. A finely ground fertilizer, soluble in water suitable for application
by power sprayer. 3. A granular or pellet form suitable for application by blowe
r equipment. 609.2.3 Ground Limestone Ground limestone shall contain not less th
an 85 percent of calcium and magnesium carbonates and shall be of such fineness
that 100 percent shall pass through a 2.00 mm sieve and not less than 35 percent
through a 0.150 mm sieve. Granulated slag may be substituted in lieu of ground
limestone subject to the approval of the Engineer of an adjusted application rat
e that will provide the equivalent total neutralizing power of the specified lim
estone. 609.2.4 Topsoil Topsoil shall perform to the requirements of Item 608, T
opsoil. 609.2.5 Mulch Material Mulch material shall be hay, straw or other local
non-toxic material.
609.3 Construction Requirements 609.3.1 Harvesting Sprigs The Contractor shall n
otify the Engineer at least 5 days before sprigs are to be harvested and the sou
rce shall be approved by the Engineer before harvesting begins. To begin harvest
ing, grass and woods shall be mowed to a height of 50 to 75 mm and all clippings
removed. Sprigs shall then be loosened by cross-disking, shallow plowing or oth
er acceptable methods. After loosening the sprigs from the soil, they shall be g
athered in small piles or windrows, watered and kept moist until planted.
349
Not more than 24 hours shall elapse between harvesting and planting sprigs, exce
pt that when weather or other uncontrollable condition interrupts the work, a ti
me extension may be granted, provided the sprigs are still moist and viable. Spr
igs that have heated in stockpiles, permitted to dry out or otherwise seriously
damaged during harvesting or delivery shall be rejected and be disposed off as d
irected. 609.3.2 Advance Preparation and Cleanup After grading of areas has been
completed and before applying fertilizer and ground limestone, areas to be spri
gged shall be raked or otherwise cleared of stone larger than 50 mm in diameter,
sticks, stumps and other debris which might interfere with sprigging, growth of
grasses or subsequent maintenance of grass-covered areas. If any damage by eros
ion or other causes has occurred after grading of areas and before beginning the
application of fertilizer and ground limestone, the Contractor shall repair suc
h damage. This may include filling gullies, smoothing irregularities and repairi
ng other incidental damage. 609.3.3 Topsoiling If topsoiling is shown on the Pla
ns, it shall be done in accordance with the requirements of Item 608, Topsoil. 6
09.3.4 Applying Fertilizer and Ground Limestone Following advance preparation an
d cleanup, fertilizer shall be uniformly spread at the rate indicated on the Pla
ns. If use of ground limestone is required, it shall be spread at the rate shown
on the Plans. These materials shall be incorporated into the soil to a depth of
not less than 50 mm by disking, raking or other methods acceptable to the Engin
eer. Stones larger than 50 mm in diameter, large clods, roots and other litter b
rought to the surface by this operation shall be removed. On steep slopes where
fertilizer and ground limestone cannot be incorporated effectively by mechanical
equipment, they may be applied with power sprayers, blower equipment or other a
pproved method and need not be incorporated into the soil. 609.3.5 Planting Spri
gs Sprigging shall not be done during windy weather or when the ground is dry, e
xcessively wet or otherwise untillable. Sprigs shall be planted in existing grou
nd or in formed embankments or on topsoil as shown on the Plans. If the soil is
not moist when the sprigs are being set, water shall be applied until the soil i
s moist and in a workable condition. One or more of the following methods shall
be used, whichever is directed by the Engineer:
350
1.
Broadcast Sprigging – Sprigs shall be broadcast by hand or by suitable equipment i
n a uniform layer over the prepared surface with spacing between sprigs not to e
xceed 150 mm. The sprigs shall then be forced into the soil to a depth of 50 mm
to 100 mm with a straight spade or similar tool, or with a disk harrow or other
equipment set to cover the sprigs to the required depth. Row Sprigging – Furrows s
hall be opened along the approximate contour of slopes at the spacing and depth
indicated on the Plans. Sprigs shall be placed without delay in continuous row i
n the open furrow with successive sprigs touching and shall be covered immediate
ly. Spot Sprigging – Spot sprigging shall be performed as specified under row spri
gging, except that, instead of planting in continuous rows, groups of four sprig
s or more shall be spaced 450 mm apart in the rows.
2.
3.
609.3.6 Mulching and Compacting After planting or sprigs has been completed and
prior to compacting, the surface shall be cleared of stones larger than 50 mm in
diameter, large clods, roots and other litter brought to the surface during spr
igging. If mulching of sprigged areas is shown on the Plans, the sprigged area s
hall be covered with mulch in accordance with the requirements of Subsection 609
.2.5, Mulch Material, within 24 hours from the time sprigging has been completed
, weather and soil conditions permitting. If mulching is not shown on the Plans,
the sprigged area shall be compacted within 24 hours from the time sprigging ha
s been completed, weather and soil conditions permitting, by cultipackers, rolle
rs or other satisfactory equipment operated at right angles to the slopes. Compa
ction shall not be done when the soil is in such condition that it is picked up
by the equipment, nor shall clay soils be compacted if so directed by the Engine
er. 609.3.7 Maintenance of Sprigged Areas The Contractor shall protect sprigged
areas against traffic by warning signs or barricades approved by the Engineer. S
urfaces gullied or otherwise damaged following sprigging shall be repaired by re
grading and resprigging as directed. The Contractor shall mow, water as directed
and otherwise maintain sprigged areas in a satisfactory condition until final i
nspection and acceptance of the work.
351
609.4 Method of Measurement The quantity of sprigging to be paid for shall be th
e number of units of 100 square meters, measured on the ground surface, complete
d and accepted.
609.5 Basis of Payment The quantity, determined as provided in Subsection 609.4,
Method of Measurement, shall be paid for the Pay Item listed below, which price
and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials
, for any required mulching of sprigged areas and for all labor, equipment, tool
s and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Section exce
pt topsoiling which shall be paid for as provided in Item 608, Topsoil.
Pay Item will be made under:
Pay item No.
Description
Unit of Measurement
609
Sprigging
100 Square Meter
ITEM 610 – SODDING
610.1 Description This Item shall consist of furnishing and laying of live sod o
n the shoulders, slopes, ditches, or other locations as designated, construction
of sod ditch checks or similar appurtenances, as shown on the Plans or as order
ed and laid out in the field by the Engineer, all in accordance with this Specif
ication.
610.2
Material Requirements
The sod shall consist of healthy, dense, well-rooted growth of permanent and des
irable grasses indigenous to the general locality where it is to be used and sha
ll be free from weeds or undesirable grasses. At the time the sod is cut, the gr
ass on the sod shall have a length of approximately 50 mm (if longer, the grass
shall be cut to approximately this length) and the sod shall have been raked fre
e from debris.
352
The sod shall be cut into uniform squares approximately 300 mm x 300 mm, but not
larger than is convenient for handling and transporting. The thickness of the s
od shall be uniform as possible approximately 40 mm or more depending on the nat
ure of the sod, so that practically all of the dense root system of the grasses
will be retained, but exposed, in the sod strip and that the sod can be handled
without undue tearing or breaking. In the event the sod to be cut is in a dry co
ndition as to cause scrumbling or breaking during cutting operations, the Contra
ctor, at his own expense, shall apply water in sufficient quantities at least 12
hours before cutting to provide a wellmoistened condition of the sod to the dep
th to which it is to be cut. Sods shall be subject to the approval of the Engine
er.
610.3 Construction Requirements 610.3.1 Preparation of the Earth Bed
The area to be sodded shall be constructed to the required cross-section and con
tour, and the tops and bottoms of the slopes shall be rounded as shown in the ty
pical roadway sections. The areas to be sodded shall be free from stones, roots
or other undesirable foreign materials. The soil on the area to be sodded shall
be loosened and brought to a reasonably fine texture to a depth of not less than
30 mm by means of equipment on hand methods adapted for the purpose. 610.3.2 Pl
acing the Sod The earth bed upon which the sod is to be placed shall be moistene
d to the loosened depth, if not naturally sufficiently moist, and the sod shall
be placed thereon within 24 hours after the same has been cut. Unless otherwise
required, the sod on slopes shall be laid on horizontal strips beginning at the
bottom of the slope and working upwards. When placing sod in ditches, or in the
construction of sod ditch checks or similar appurtenances, the length of the str
ips shall be laid at right angles to the direction of the flow of the water. Sod
shall be laid so that the joints caused by abutting ends of sod strip are not c
ontinuous. Each sod strip shall be so laid as to abut snugly against the strip p
reviously laid.
353
As the sod is being laid it shall be lightly tamped with suitable wooden or meta
l tampers sufficiently to set or press the sod into the underlying soil. At poin
ts where it is anticipated that water may flow over a sodded area, the upper edg
es of the sod strips shall be turned into the soil to be below the adjacent area
and a layer of earth place over this juncture and thoroughly compacted. At the
limits of sodded areas, the end strips shall be turned in and treated similarly.
610.3.3 Staking the Sod On all slopes steeper than one vertical to four horizon
tal, sod shall be pegged with stakes 200-300 mm in length, spaced as required by
the nature of the soil and steepness of slope. Stakes shall be driven into the
sod at right angles to the slope until flush with the bottom of the grass blades
. 610.3.4 Top Dressing After staking has been completed, the surface shall be cl
eared of loose sod, excess soil or other foreign material, whereupon a thin laye
r of topsoil shall be scattered over the sod as a top dressing and the areas sha
ll then be thoroughly moistened by sprinkling with water. 610.3.5 Watering The C
ontractor shall regularly water and maintain sodded areas in a satisfactory cond
ition for the duration of the Contract and until final acceptance of the work by
the Engineer.
610.4 Method of Measurement Sodding shall be measured by the square meter and th
e quantity to be measured for payment shall be the actual number of square meter
s of area on which sod has been placed in accordance with this Specification and
within the limits of construction as designated on the Plans or as ordered by t
he Engineer.
610.5
Basis of Payment
The quantity as determined in Subsection 610.4, Method of Measurement, shall be
paid for at Contract unit price per square meter for Sodding which price and pay
ment shall be full compensation for preparing the earth bed, for furnishing, pla
cing, staking, top dressing and watering the sod, and for all labor, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
354
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item No.
Description
Unit of Measurement
610
Sodding
Square Meter
ITEM 611 – TREE PLANTING
611.1
Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and planting deciduous shade, flowering tr
ees and evergreen trees less than 150 mm in diameter on the areas and in the arr
angements indicated on the Plans or as indicated by the Engineer, including the
digging and preparation of pocket holes, furnishing and placing the necessary to
psoil, mulch, water, fertilizer and other incidentals necessary to complete the
Item. 611.2 Material Requirements
611.2.1 Topsoil Topsoil shall conform to the requirements of Item 608, Topsoil.
611.2.2 Mulching Mulching material shall consist of approved wood chips, ground
or crushed corn cobs, wood shavings, sawdust or peat moss. Wood chips shall be c
ombination of wood slivers with ground wood or sawdust. Bracing stakes for plant
s shall be 50 mm x 50 mm of rough wood free from unsound loose knots, rot, cross
grain and sapwood or other defects that may impair its strength. Anchor stakes
shall be of the same quality as bracing stakes and of the size specified under o
perations calling for their use. Wrapping material for trees shall be waterproof
paper or burlap. The tying material to be used in wrapping trees shall be jute
twine or similar material not less than 2-ply for trees 7.5 mm or less in diamet
er and 3-ply for trees over 7.5 mm in diameter.
355
The wire to be used in bracing trees 7.5 mm or less in diameter shall be 3 mm (N
o. 11) galvanized steel wire and for trees over 75 mm in diameter, 40 mm (No. 9)
galvanized steel wire shall be used. All wires shall be new and free from bends
or kinks. 611.2.3 Trees All trees furnished under this Item shall be 150 mm or
less in diameter and shall be true to name and type and shall follow standard na
mes of trees in accordance with the Bureau of Forestry Standards as adopted by t
he Department of Public Works and Highways. When specified in the Provisions, ce
rtain varieties of plants will be furnished by the government. The Contractor sh
all submit complete and detailed information concerning the sources of supply fo
r each item of plant materials before planting operations. All existing laws and
regulations requiring inspection for plant diseases and infections shall be com
plied with and each delivery shall be accompanied by necessary certificates of c
learance to be presented to the Engineer. Plants furnished by the Contractor sha
ll be healthy, shapely and well-rooted and roots shall show no evidence of havin
g been restricted or deformed at any time. Plants shall be well-grown and free f
rom insect pest and disease. Root condition of plants furnished by the Contracto
r in containers will be determined by the removal of earth from the roots of not
less than two plants nor more than two (2) percent of total number of plants of
each specie or variety except when container-grown plants are from several sour
ces, the roots of not less than two plants of each specie or variety from each s
ource will be inspected by the Engineer. In case the sample plants inspected are
found to be defective, the Government reserves the right to reject the entire l
ot or lots of plants represented by the defective samples. Any plant rendered un
suitable for planting because of this inspection will be considered as samples a
nd will not be paid for.
611.3 Construction Methods 611.3.1 Balling of Plants and Trees Balling is employ
ed in plants and trees to be transplanted or transferred. To ball out the trees,
the depth to which the root system reaches is first determined. Digging around
the tree is then done, being careful not to cut many roots. Watering the soil be
fore balling is prohibited. The surface of the earth is kept as smooth as possib
le. After the tree is dug out, the roots and earth is wrapped immediately with t
he sacking material. The tree could now be tipped over and rolled to a new
356
location. These plants shall be hauled by the ball only and not by the plant its
elf. The slightest indication of manufactured earth balls or hauling of the plan
ts itself will be a cause for rejection of such plants. 611.3.2 Digging Plants A
ll plants, nursery-grown or collected, shall be dug with care and skill immediat
ely before shipping and avoiding all possible injury to the plants, loss or dama
ge of the roots, particular attention being given to fibrous roots in this respe
ct. After the plants are dug, their roots shall not be permitted to dry out. The
y shall not be exposed to hot temperatures. All plants shall be dug in dormant s
tate and shall be so held until planted. 611.3.3 Temporary Storage and Plant Spr
ay After delivery and inspection, the plants shall be sprayed with an approved a
nti-desiccant prior to planting, heeling-in or storing, except in the case of co
llected stock which shall not be heeled-in or stored, but shall be sprayed with
anti-desiccant immediately and planted within 36 hours after digging. The spray
shall cover both upper and lower surfaces of the branches and foilage to the poi
nt of run-off. Spray nozzles shall be the type to produce a fine mist. Spraying
shall be included for payment in the pertinent planting item. Following spray tr
eatment with anti-desiccant, all plants which cannot be planted promptly shall b
e heeled-in in a trench, spread and the roots covered with moist soil. If plants
are not to be stored for a period longer than 10 days, they may be placed in an
approved well-ventilated, cool and moist storage shed and the roots completely
covered with moist straw. All plants heeled-in or stored shall be properly maint
ained by the Contractor until planted. In the event heeled-in plant material mus
t be held over for a longer period, such heeled-in material shall be lifted and
replanted in a satisfactory manner in nursery rows. The ball of soil and roots o
f balled and burlapped plants, if not immediately planted after delivery and ins
pection, shall be adequately protected by topsoil covering until removed for pla
nting in a manner appropriate to the conditions and satisfactory to the Engineer
. Such emergency storage of plant shall be at the entire risk of the Contractor,
including maintenance of same.
357
611.3.4 Layout of Planting Before digging pocket holes or beds, the Contractor s
hall lay out, by suitable staking, the location of all pocket holes and beds. Th
e layout of planting shall be approved by the Engineer. 611.3.5 Roots and Top Pr
uning The ends of all broken and damaged roots, 6 mm diameter or larger, shall b
e pruned with a clean cut removing no more than the injured portion. All plants
shall be pruned to balance the top with the root system keeping the natural shap
e of the species. All dead woods shall be removed. All cuts and wounds, 12 mm or
over in diameter, shall be painted with tree wound dressing immediately after t
he pruning. 611.3.6 Pocket Holes Pocket holes shall be dug at the locations show
n on the Plans or as directed by Engineer. The holes shall be dug to the depth a
nd cross-section specified and should be of sufficient size to provide for not l
ess than 150 mm of top soil backfill beneath and around the root system. The hol
es shall be dug with the sides vertical. Surplus excavation from the bed and poc
ket holes shall be disposed off as directed by the Engineer. 611.3.7 Backfill Th
e pocket holes shall be backfilled with topsoil as each plant is set. The topsoi
l shall be well-tamped by the worker’s feet, rods or other approved tamping device
s as it is shovelled into the holes. The backfill in holes on slopes shall be bu
ilt-up on the lower side to catch and hold water. During planting the topsoil su
rrounding the plant be slightly depressed to hold water. 611.3.8 Planting The pl
ants to be planted shall be the specie, variety and size specified. The operatio
n of the actual planting shall not be performed at any time when the soil is not
in a friable or workable condition. The Engineer shall also approve the locatio
n of each individual plant taking into consideration its size and shape, in orde
r that the best possible arrangement will result. One plant shall be planted in
the center of each pocket hole and in the arrangement shown on the Plans. The pl
ants shall be set on tamped topsoil backfill brought to the height necessary to
plant them at the same depth they grew, carefully spreading out the roots of bar
efoot stock in their natural position. Upright plants shall be kept in a vertica
l position. After placing the plant in the hole, the backfill shall be carefully
made, tamping with the worker’s feet and with round-end rods or other approved ta
mping devices to insure topsoil in and about all the roots. The
358
topsoil shall be settled in and about the plant roots by application of water bu
t at no time shall tamping or further topsoil backfill be made while this wet to
psoil backfill is of a consistency that would permit its being compacted or pudd
led by so doing. All compaction shall be such that no plant will settle lower th
an the depth above specified. No air pocket shall be left around the root of any
plants. After filling halfway on the earth ball, the burlap shall be loosened a
nd the top half cut off and removed after which the balance of the pocket hole s
hall be backfilled and tamped. After planting and prior to mulching, fertilizers
shall be applied evenly over the top of the backfilled area. Care shall be used
so that the fertilizer does not get into contact with the stem, trunk, branches
or leaves of the plants. 611.3.8.1 Tree Planting along National Road The trees
to be used for this purpose shall be the varieties the root systems of which gro
w downward rather than sideward to avoid situations where the roots spread sidew
ard and consequently destroy the road and sidewalk slabs. Trees shall be planted
in a neat row, within the road right-of-way (ROW) and as close as possible to t
he ROW limit, with sufficient allowance so that the trees when fully grown will
not encroach on the adjoining property or touch electric and other overhead util
ity lines. The center-to-center spacing between trees shall be 1020 metres (m).
For road sections with a generally north-south alignment, the trees on one side
of the road shall be staggered vis-à-vis the trees on the other side of the road.
This arrangement will help to ensure that enough sunlight will fall on the road
and thus help to keep the road dry even during the rainy season. For roads witho
ut curbs, the trees shall be planted with a minimum clear distance of 0.60 m bey
ond the edge of the shoulder, but in no case less than 3.0 m from the edge of th
e pavement. For roads with curbs, particularly in urban areas, the trees shall b
e planted with a minimum setback of 1.00 m beyond the face of the curb. Where th
ere are longitudinal drainage canals, the trees shall be planted on the outer si
de of such canals. On the roadway curves and intersections, the pertinent design
standards on sight distance shall be observed. Non-traversable hazards (ravine,
waiting shed, etc.) along the line of trees shall be provided with appropriate
barriers, e.g., guardrails, and clearly marked, so that these do not pose hazard
s to motorists. The Contractor concerned shall undertake and be responsible for
the maintenance of the planted trees during the contract warranty period of the
road project covered by his contract. The contractor’s maintenance work shall comp
ly
359
with the provision of subsection 611.3.10 (Watching and Maintenance). The mainte
nance of trees shall be faithfully undertaken as an integral part of the regular
road maintenance program and shall be included in the reports therefore as a re
gular work item under Activity No. 209 of the Highway Maintenance Activity Stand
ards. The tree planting shall be undertaken not only along national roads progra
mmed for construction or improvement, but also along existing national roads esp
ecially those outside developed urban areas where there are no trees or only a f
ew trees have been planted. For such existing roads, the required tree planting
shall be undertaken by the District Engineering Office concerned. The tree plant
ing shall be undertaken in both contractual projects and projects by administrat
ion. 611.3.9 Mulching Within 24 hours after planting, mulching material shall be
spread to cover the plant hole and the area 150 mm outside the periphery of the
plant hole. The depth and application for wood chips shall be a minimum of 150
mm. For ground or crushed corn cobs, sawdust or peat moss the minimum depth shal
l be 100 mm. 611.3.10 Watering and Maintenance All plants shall be watered durin
g the planting operations, subject to direction and approval of the Engineer. Fr
om time to time during the life of the Contract, sufficient water shall be appli
ed so that not only will the topsoil backfill about each plant be kept moist, bu
t also for moisture to extend into the surrounding soil. The Contractor shall, d
uring the life of the Contract, properly care for all plants furnished, planted
or stored, performing such watering, weeding, cultivating or other ordinary main
tenance work as shall be necessary to keep the stock in a live and healthy condi
tion. Plants which have died back into the crown or beyond a normal pruning line
shall be replaced by the Contract at no additional expense to the Government. 6
11.3.11 Bracing All deciduous and evergreen trees shall be braced immediately af
ter planting. Deciduous trees from 1.20 m to 1.80 m in height shall have one ver
tical support stake. Deciduous trees from 1.80 m to 2.50 m in height shall have
two vertical support stakes. Balled and burlapped deciduous or evergreen trees w
ithin the above size ranges shall be supported with the number of stakes specifi
ed for the group but instead of being placed vertically, shall be driven so that
the stake does not enter or contact the earth ball around the plant roots. The
stake or stakes shall be so placed that after being driven in place, the upper f
oot of the stake is within approximately
360
100 mm of the trunk at one-half of the height of the tree. If two are required,
they shall be driven on opposite sides of the tree with the stake tops on opposi
te sides for fastening. All trees, deciduous or evergreen over two and one-half
meters shall be braced by the tripod method as directed by the Engineer. 611.3.1
2 Dead Trees Before completion and final acceptance of the project, all trees no
t healthy or that have died back into the crown or beyond the normal pruning lin
e shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense with trees of the speci
fied species or variety, size and quality and meeting the Specification.
611.4 Method of Measurement The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of t
rees of each specie or variety called for in the Plans furnished, planted and ac
cepted with the necessary mulch, topsoil, water, fertilizer and other incidental
s to complete the Item.
611.5 Basis of Payment The quantities as determined in Subsection 611.4, Method
of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price each of the trees o
f each specie or variety furnished, planted and accepted which price and payment
shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all labor, tools and incident
als necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item No.
Description
Unit of Measurement
611 (1)
Trees (Furnishing and Transpplanting) Trees (Transplanting)
Each Each
611 (2)
361
ITEM 612 – REFLECTIVE THERMOPLASTIC STRIPPING MATERIALS ( SOLID FORM)
612.1
Description
This standard specifies the requirement for reflectorized thermoplastic pavement
striping material conforming to AASHTO M 249 that is applied to the road surfac
e in a molten state by mechanical means with surface application of glass beads
at a rate of not less than 350 g/L of glass beads having a size range of dropin
type and will produce an adherent reflectorized stripe of specified thickness an
d width capable of resisting deformation by traffic.
612.2
Materials Requirements
1. Reflectorized Thermoplastic Pavement Material shall be homogeneously composed
of pigment, filler, resins and glass reflectorizing spheres. The thermoplastic
material shall be available to both white and yellow. 2. Glass Beads (Pre-Mix) s
hall be uncoated and shall comply with the following requirements: Refractive In
dex, min. - 1.50 Spheres, Percent, min. - 90 Gradation: Sieve mm 0.850 0.600 0.4
25 0.300 0.180 0.150 Mass Percent Passing 100 75-95 15-35 0-5
612.3
General Requirements
612.3.1 Composition The pigment, beads and filler shall be uniformly dispersed i
n the resin. The material shall be free from all skins, dirt and foreign objects
and shall comply with the requirements as specified in Table 612.1.
362
Table 612.1 – Composition Requirements Component Binder, min. Glass Beads: min. ma
x. Titanium Dioxide, min. Chrome Yellow, Medium, min. Calcium Carbonate And Iner
t Fillers, Max. 612.3.2 Qualitative The material shall conform to the qualitativ
e requirements as specified in Table 612.2. Table 612.2 – Qualitative Requirements
Property Specific Gravity, max. Drying Time, minutes, max. Bond Strength to Por
tland Cement Concrete after heating for four (4) hours 5 min. @ 218oC, MPa, max.
Cracking Resistance @ low temp. after heating for four (4) hours 5 min. @ 218 2oC.
Impact Resistance after heating for four (4) hours 5 min. @ 218 2oC and forming t
est specimens, mm/kg, min. Softening Point after heating for four (4) hours 5 min
. @ 218 2oC. Daylight reflectant @ 45 Degrees – 0 degrees, % min. Requirements Whit
e Yellow 2.15 10.0 White 18.0 30 40 10.0 10.0 Yellow 18.0 30 40
42.0
42.0
1.24
No cracks
115 102.5 9.5oC
75
45
363
612.4 Application Properties The material shall readily extrude at a temperature
of 211 7oC, from approved equipment to produce a line 3.2 to 4.8 mm thick which
shall be continuous and uniform in shape having clear and sharp dimensions. The
material shall not exude fumes which are toxic, obnoxious or injurious to perso
ns or property when heated during applications. The application of additional gl
ass beads by drop-in methods shall be at a rate of not less than 350 g/L of glas
s beads having a size range for drop-in type. The typical size range of spheres
of drop-in type paints is as follows. Passing 850 um (#20) sieve and retained on
250 um (#60) sieve, %
80 – 100
a) Preparation of Road Surface – the materials should be applied only on the surfa
ce which is clean and dry. It shall not be laid into loose detritus, mud or simi
lar extraneous matter, or over an old paint markings, or over an old thermoplast
ic marking which is faulty. In the case of smooth, polished surface stones such
as smooth concrete, old asphalt surfacing with smooth polished surface stones an
d/or where the method of application of the manufacturer of the thermoplastic ma
terials shall be recommended, and with the approval of the Engineer. b) Preparat
ion of Thermoplastic Materials – The materials shall be melted in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instruction in a heater fitted with a mechanical stirrer to giv
e a smooth consistency to the thermoplastic and such the local overheating shall
be avoided. The temperature of the mass shall be within the range specified by
the manufacturer and shall on no account be allowed to exceed the maximum temper
ature stated by the manufacturer. The molten material shall be used as expeditio
usly as possible and for thermoplastics which have natural resin binders or othe
rwise sensitive to prolong heating the materials shall not be maintained in a mo
lden condition for more than 4 hours. c) Laying – Center lines, lane lines and edg
es lines shall be applied by approved mechanical means and shall be laid in regu
lar alignment. Other markings may be applied by hand – screed, hand propelled mach
ine or by self-propelled machine approved or directed by the Engineer. After tra
nsfer to the laying apparatus the materials shall be maintained within the tempe
rature range specified by the manufacturer and stirred to maintain the right con
sistency for laying. In the case of screen application, the material shall be la
id to a thickness of not less than 3 mm or more than 6 mm unless authorized by t
he Engineer when laid over an existing markings. In the case of sprayed applicat
ion the material shall
364
be laid to thickness of not less than 1.5 mm unless authorized by the Engineer.
In all cases the surface produced shall be uniform and appreciably free from bub
bles and steaks. Where the Contractor Documents require or the Engineer direct t
hat ballotini shall be applied to the surface of the markings, these shall be ap
plied uniformly to the surface of hot thermoplastic immediately after laying suc
h that the quality of ballotini firmly embedded and retained in the surface afte
r completion complies with the requirements of Sub-section 606.2.2, Material Req
uirements. Road markings of a repetitive nature, other center lines, lane lines,
etc., shall unless otherwise directed by the Engineer be set out with stencils
which comply with the size and spacing requirements shown on the Plans. d) Re-us
e of Thermoplastic Materials – At the end of day’s as much as possible the material
remaining in the heater and/or laying apparatus shall be removed. This may be br
oken and used again provided that the maximum heating temperature has not been e
xceeded and that the total time during which it is a molden condition does not e
xceed the requirements of Sub-section 606.2.3, Construction Requirements. 612.4.
1 Defective Materials or Workmanship Materials which are defective or have been
applied in an unsatisfactory manner or to incorrect dimensions or in a wrong loc
ation shall be removed, the road pavement shall be made good and materials repla
ced, reconstructed and/or properly located, all at the Contractor’s expenses and t
o the satisfaction of the Engineer. 612.4.2 Protection of the Traffic The Contra
ctor shall protect pedestrians, vehicles and other traffic adjacent to the worki
ng area against damage or disfigurement by construction equipment, tools and mat
erials or by spatters, splashes and smirches or paint or other construction mate
rials and during the course of the work, provide and maintain adequate signs and
signals for the warning and guidance of traffic. 612.5 Sampling A minimum weigh
t of 10 kg. of Reflectorized Thermoplastic paint shall be taken for every 100 ba
gs or fraction thereof. 612.6 Testing The material shall be tested in accordance
with AASHTO T 250 or with the appropriate method in ASTM designation.
365
612.7 Packing and Marking The material shall be packaged in a suitable container
s to which it will not adhere during shipment and storage. The blocks of cast th
ermoplastic material shall be approximately 300 x 915 by 51 mm and shall weigh a
pproximately 23 kg. Each container label shall designate the color, manufacturer’s
name, batch number and date of manufacture. Each batch manufactured shall have
its own separate number. The label shall warn the user that the material shall b
e heated to 211 7oC during application.
612.8 Method of Measurement The quantity of pavement markings to be paid for sha
ll be the area as shown on the Plans of painted traffic line of the stated width
and the area as shown on the plans of symbols, lettering, hatching and the like
, completed and accepted. The quantity shown in the Bill of Quantities represent
s the approximate quantity in square meter of pavement markings, with width as s
hown applied at the centerline of the road pavements to which may be increased o
r decreased depending on the Engineer’s decision whether to require additional mar
kings or delete parts of it. Other markings representing symbols, lettering, hat
ching and others in locations where they maybe required by the Engineer shall, l
ikewise, be implemented by the Contractor using reflectorized thermoplastic pave
ment markings as approved and directed.
612.9 Basis of Payment The quantities measured as determined in Subsection 612.8
, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the appropriate contract unit pric
e for the Pay Items shown in the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall cons
titute full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, sampling and
packing, for the preparation of the surface, and for all labor, equipment, tools
and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. Payment will be made under:
Pay Item Number 612(1) 612(2)
Description Reflectorized Thermoplastic Pavement Markings (White) Reflectorized
Thermoplastic Pavement Markings (Yellow)
Unit of Measurement Square Meter Square Meter
366
367
PART I – MATERIALS DETAILS
ITEM 700 – HYDRAULIC CEMENT 700.1 Portland Cement and Masonry Cement Cement shall
conform to the requirements of the following cited Specifications for the type s
pecified or permitted. Type Portland Cement Blended Hydraulic Cements Masonry Ce
ment Specifications AASHTO M 85 (ASTM C 150) AASHTO M 240 (ASTM C 595) AASHTO M
150-74 (ASTM C 91)
When Types IV and V (AASHTO M 85), P and PA (AASHTO M 150) cements are used, pro
per recognition shall be given to the effects of slower strength gain on concret
e proportioning and construction practices. Types S and SA cements will be permi
tted only when blended with Portland Cement in proportions approved by the Engin
eer. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the product of only one mill of
any one brand and type of Portland Cement shall be used on the project. The Con
tractor shall provide suitable means of storing and protecting the cement agains
t dampness. Cement which, for any reason, has become partially set or which cont
ains lumps of caked cement will be rejected. Cement salvaged from discarded or u
sed bags shall not be used.
ITEM 701 – CONSTRUCTION LIME (HYDRATED)
701.1 General Hydrated lime shall conform to the requirements of PHILSA I-1-68 o
r ASTM C 207-76 and shall be of the following type : Type N Type S Type NA Type
SA Normal hydrated lime for masonry purposes. Special hydrated lime for masonry
purposes. Normal air-entraining hydrated lime for masonry purposes. Special air-
entraining hydrated lime for masonry purposes.
Type N and S are suitable for use in mortar, in scratch and brown coats of cemen
t plaster, for stucco and for addition to Portland Cement concrete.
367
Type NA and SA are air-entrained hydrated limes that are suitable for use in any
of the above uses where air-entrainment are desired. Type S and SA hydrated lim
e develop high, early plasticity and higher water retentivity and by a limitatio
n on their unhydrated oxide content. It is the intent of this Specification to u
se either the Type N or S for soil stabilization and as filler requirement to bi
tuminous plant mixtures. It is expected to provide pavements with greater resist
ance to the detrimental effects of water, especially flooding during the rainy s
eason.
701.2 Chemical Requirements Hydrated lime for construction purposes shall confor
m to the following standard chemical requirements. Percentage Calcium and Magnes
ium oxides (Non-volatile basis), min. % Carbon dioxide (as received basis), max.
% If sample is taken at the place of manufacture If sample is taken at any othe
r place Unhydrated oxides (as received basis) for Type S and SA, max. %
60 5 7 8
701.3 Physical Requirements Hydrated lime for construction purposes shall confor
m to the following standard physical requirements: a. Percentage Residue The res
idue retained on a 0.600 mm (No. 30) sieve shall not be more than 0.57% and not
more than 15% on a 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve. b. Plasticity The putty made from T
ype S, special hydrate, or type SA, special airentraining hydrate, shall have pl
asticity figure of not less than 200 when tested within 30 minutes after mixing
with water. c. Water Retention Hydrated lime mortar made with Type N (normal hyd
rated lime) or Type NA (normal air-entraining lime), after suction for 60 second
s, shall have a water retention value of not less than 75 percent and not less t
han 85% for Type S and SA, when tested in a standard mortar made form the dry
368
hydrate or from putty made from the hydrate which has been soaked for a period o
f 16 to 24 hours.
701.4 Grading Requirement Hydrated lime for construction purposes shall conform
to the following grading requirements: Sieve Designation Standard mm Alternate U
S Standard 0.850 (No. 20) 0.075 (No. 200) Mass Percent Passing 100 85 – 100
701.5 Sampling Samples of construction lime shall be taken at the place of manuf
acture or at the destination as agreed upon by the parties concerned. If the sam
ples are taken elsewhere than at the place of manufacture, such samples shall be
taken within 24 hours of the receipt of the material. Sampling shall be conduct
ed as expeditiously as possible to avoid undue exposure of the material to the a
ir. Samples shall not be taken from broken packages. At least one percent of the
package shall be sampled but in no case shall less than five packages be sample
d. Individual packages shall be taken from various parts of the unit being sampl
ed. Each package so taken shall be opened and not less than 0.5 kg shall be take
n by means of a sampling tube that takes a core of the material of not less than
2.5 cm in diameter and that is of sufficient length to permit the taking of the
sample from the top to the bottom of the mass being sampled. The material remov
ed shall be thoroughly mixed and quartered. Triplicate samples of not less than
2.5 kg each shall be taken and sealed in properly labelled, air-tight, moisture
proof containers. 701.5.1 Sample for Chemical Analysis
The sample as received at the laboratory shall be thoroughly mixed, quartered, a
nd a representative sample taken and crushed to pass a 0.150 mm (No. 100) sieve
for analysis. The remaining uncrushed portion shall be resealed for further poss
ible tests.
701.6 Rejection Materials failing to meet the specification requirements shall b
e reported to the manufacturer within one (1) week after tests have been complet
ed and the cause for rejection shall be stated.
369
701.7 Packing Lime and limestone products may be shipped in bulk or in container
s agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser. The most common units for h
ydrated lime are paper bags holding 23 kg (50 lbs.), 11.5 kg (25 lbs.), 4.5 kg (
10 lbs.) or 2.3 kg (5 lbs.).
ITEM 702 – BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
702.1 Asphalt Cements Asphalt cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M 226.
702.2 Liquid Asphalts Liquid asphalt shall conform to the requirements of the fo
llowing specifications: Rapid Curing Liquid Asphalts Medium Curing Liquid Asphal
ts AASHTO M 81 AASHTO M 82
702.3 Emulsified Asphalts Emulsified asphalts shall conform to the requirements
of the following specifications: Emulsified Asphalt (Anionic) Emulsified Asphalt
(Cationic) AASHTO M 140 (ASTM D 977) AASHTO M 208
702.4 Acceptance Procedures for Bituminous Materials 702.4.1 General
Bituminous materials will be accepted at the source of shipment subject to the f
ollowing conditions: a. The supplier shall conduct laboratory tests of all mater
ials intended for shipment to the Government and certify that the materials meet
the Contract Specifications. b. Before loading, the producer shall examine the
shipping container, remove all remnants of previous cargoes which night contamin
ate the material to
370
be loaded and certify that it was clean and free of contaminating material and l
oaded. c. The Contractor shall furnish with each shipment two copies of the deli
very ticket. The delivery tickets shall contain the following information: Consi
gnees ________________ Project Number _____________ Grade ____________________ N
et Liters __________________ Destination _________________ Date ________________
______ Loading Temp. ______________ Specific Gravity ______________ At 15.50C (6
00F) Net Weight _______________________________________________ Identification N
o. (Truck, Car, Tank, etc.) ________________________ The Contractor or the suppl
ier as his agent, shall deliver to the Engineer or his representative a certific
ation signed by an authorized representative of the supplier to cover the qualit
y and quantity of material and the condition of container for each shipment. The
certification shall be essentially in the following form and may be stamped, wr
itten or printed on the delivery tickets.
d.
“This is to certify that this shipment of _______________ (tonnes/litres) or _____
_________ of asphalt meets all Contract Specification requirements of the DPWH,
and the shipping container was clean and free from contaminating material when l
oaded. Producer ________________________ Signed __________________________ Failu
re to sign the certification will be a cause to withhold use of the material unt
il it can be sampled, tested and approved. 702.4.2 Quality Control Reviews
Quality control reviews will be conducted by the Government, or an authorized re
presentative at the point of production, at frequencies prescribed by the DPWH,
to determine the reliability of the producer’s certifications. If this review indi
cates that the certifications are not reliable, the acceptance of bituminous mat
erials by certification will be discontinued and the contents of each shipping c
ontainer will be sampled at point of delivery, tested and accepted prior to inco
rporation into the work. This procedure will be followed until the engineering d
etermination is made that the supplier’s quality control and testing procedures ar
e such that material meeting Contract Specifications is being consistently produ
ced. 702.4.3 Alternate Acceptance Procedures for Asphalt Materials
Where required by the Special Provisions, the following alternate acceptance pla
n for asphalt material will apply in lieu of (a) and (b) above. The Contractor s
hall provide deliver tickets and certifications as set out in (a), above.
371
Acceptance samples of bituminous materials shall be obtained in accordance with
AASHTO T 40, Sampling Bituminous Materials, at the applicable point of acceptanc
e as defined herein: a. Bituminous materials used in direct application on the r
oad. Acceptance samples shall be obtained under the supervision of the Engineer
from the conveyances containing the bituminous material at the point of delivery
. Single samples shall be taken of each separate tank load of bituminous materia
l delivered, at the time of discharge, into distributors or other conveyances on
the project. b. Bituminous materials initially discharged into storage tanks on
the project. Acceptance samples shall be obtained from the line between the sto
rage tank and the distributor of the bituminous mixing plant after each delivery
. A single acceptance sample shall be taken after sufficient period of circulati
on of such bituminous material has taken place to insure samples representative
of the total materials then in the storage tank. As soon after sampling as pract
icable, the acceptance sample shall be delivered by the Engineer to the nearest
authorized laboratory for tests to determine compliance. 702.4.4 Requirements fo
r Bituminous Materials containing Anti-stripping Additives
a. All the foregoing requirements of Item 702 shall apply for the type of bitumi
nous material involved. b. Additionally, the Contractor or the supplier as his a
gent, shall furnish the Engineer or his representative along with and the time o
f delivery of the initial shipment of fortified bituminous material to the proje
ct, and thereafter with the subsequent shipments when ordered by the Engineer, 1
litre (1 quart) sealed sample of the bituminous material taken at the time of l
oading at the refinery and prior to introduction of the additive, along with a s
eparate 0.5 litre (1 pint) sample of the anti-stripping additive involved.
702.5 Application Temperatures Bituminous materials for the several application
indicated in the Specifications shall be applied within the temperature ranges i
ndicated in Table 702.1. Table 702.1 – Application Temperatures Type and Grade Of
Material RT 1-2-2 RT 4-5-6 RT 7-8-9 Application Spray (Min./Max.) 15.5 – 54 29 – 65.
5 65.5 – 107 Temperature Range (0C) Mix (Min./Max.) 15.5 – 54 29 – 65.5 65.5 – 107
372
RT 10-11-12 RTCB 5-6 . . . . 30 MC . . . . . . . . . 30 RC-MC . . . . . . 70 RC-
MC . . . . . . 250 RC-MC . . . . . . 800 RC-MC . . . . . . 3000 All Emulsions As
phalt Cement (All Grades)
79 – 121 15.5 – 48.9 21 – 62.8 40.5 – 85 60 – 107 79 – 129 106.7 – 143 10 – 71 204 Max.
79 – 121 15.5 – 48.9 15.5 – 40.5 32 – 68 51.7 – 93 71 – 107 93 – 126.7 10 – 71 As required to
hieve viscosity of 75 – 150 seconds to achieve a Kinematic Viscosity of 150-300 mm
2/s (150300) centi-stokes
Table 702.1 shall apply unless temperatures ranges applicable to specific lots o
f material delivered to the job are supplied by the producer. 702.6 Material for
Dampproofing and Waterproofing Concrete and Masonry Surfaces Material shall con
form to the requirements of the following specifications: a. b. Primer for use w
ith asphalt Primer for use with tar Or It may be a liquid water-gas tar conformi
ng to the following requirements: Specific gravity, 250/250C Specific viscosity
at 400C (Engler), not more than Total distillate, mass percent 3000, not more th
an Bitumen (soluble in carbon disulphide), not less than Water not more than c.
Tar for mop or seal coats: Coal tar pitch (heated to free flowing but not to exc
eed 1490C (3000F) 1.030 – 1.100 3.0 50.0 98.0 percent 2.0 percent AASHTO M 116 AAS
HTO M 121 (ASTM D 43)
ASSHTO M 118, Type B (ASTM D 450)
Or Tar applied at about 270C (800F) AASHTO M 52, RTCB 5 or 6
373
Rubberized tar (heated to free flowing but not to exceed 1210C (2500F) d. e. Asp
halt for mop coat Waterproofing fabric
ASTM D 2993 AASHTO M 115 ASSHTO M 117 (ASTM D 1668)
Fabric shall be waterproofed with tar or asphalt in agreement with the material
specified for prime and mop coats. f. Mortar materials shall conform to Section
705.5 except that the mortar shall be uniformly mixed to spreading consistency i
n the proportion of 1 part Portland Cement to 3 parts fine aggregate. Asphalt pl
ank AASHTO M 46 (ASTM D 517)
g.
Unless otherwise shown on the plans, planks shall be 30 mm thick and may be from
150 to 300 mm in width but all pieces for one structure shall be of the same wi
dth except such “closers” as may be necessary. The lengths shall be such as to permi
t the laying of the planks to the best advantage on the surface to be covered bu
t shall not be less than 0.9 nor more than 2.5 m. h. Asphalt roll roofing ASTM D
224, 65 pound grade
702.7 Membrane Material for Waterproofing Bridge Decks Bridge deck waterproofing
membrane shall be mesh-reinforced self-sealing rubberized asphalt preformed mem
brane and shall have the following properties: Thickness Permeance-Perms Kg/Pa.s
.m2 (grains/sq.ft./hr./in.Hg) Tensile strength 1.65 mm (655 mils) 57.213 x 10-11
(0.10)
ASTM E 96 Method B
344.5 kPa (50 lb/in)
ASTM D 882 modified for 25.4 mm (1 inch) opening ASTM E 154
Puncture resistance (mesh) Pliability – 6.35 mm (1/4”) mandrel 1800 bend at –8.30C (-1
50F)
90.8 kg (200 lb)
No cracks in rubberized asphalt
ASTM D 146
374
Primer and mastic shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be compa
tible with the membrane.
702.8 Tars Tars shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 52.
702.9 Dust Oils Dust oils and clarified dust oil shall conform to the following
requirements: General Requirements Flash Point, 0C (Open tag.), min. Viscosity a
t 380C (1000F) Kinematic, CS Water, % maximum Asphaltenes % Saturates % minimum
ASTM METHOD D 1310 D 2170 Dust Oil Medium 51.6 90-135 Clarified Dust Oil 93.3 20
-100
Light 51.6 40-70
Heavy 51.6 145-200
D 95 *D2006 *D2006
2.0 3.0-6.0 25 Distillation 35
2.0 4.0-7.0 25
2.0 5.0-8.0 25
2.0 0-5.0 10
Total Distillate to **D402 30 30 2880C (550 F), Max. % Test on residue from Dist
illation to 2880C (5500F) D 2170 75-250 200-630 540-1500 Viscosity at 100oT, Kin
ematic, CS Solubility in ***2042 97.0 97.0 97.0 Trichloroethylene, % Min. *
5
20-150
97.0
As modified in procedure as “Test Method for Determination of Asphaltene and Satur
ate Content of Dust Oils” by Materials Testing Laboratory, Region I, USDA Forest S
ervice, Missoula, MT dated November 1970. Copies of the procedure are available
from the Regional Materials Engineer, Region I, USDA Forest Service, Missoula, M
T 598011. Except that the residue remaining after a temperature of 2880C (instea
d of 3600C) shall be used for further testing. As modified in procedure identifi
ed as “Standard Method of Test for Distillation of Forest Service Dust Oil” dated Ju
ly 1972. Copies of the procedure are available from the Regional Materials Engin
eer, Region I USDA Forest Service, Missoula, MT, 59801. Trichloroethylene shall
be used as a solvent instead of carbon disulphide. 375
**
***
ITEM 703 – AGGREGATES
703.1 Fine Aggregate for Concrete and Incidentals 703.1.1 Concrete
Fine Aggregate for concrete shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 6, wit
h no deleterious substances in excess of the following percentages: Clay lumps 3
.0 Coal and lignite 1.0 Material passing 0.075 mm sieve 4.0 Other substances – as
shown in the Special Provisions Lightweight aggregate, if required or permitted
by the Special Provisions, shall meet the pertinent requirements of AASHTO M 195
. 703.1.2 Granular backfill filter material for underdrains and filler for paved
waterways shall be permeable and shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 6, exc
ept that soundness tests will not be required and minor variations in grading an
d content of deleterious substances may be approved by the Engineer. 703.1.3 Agg
regate for minor concrete structures shall be clean, durable, uniformly graded s
and and gravel, crushed slag or crushed stone, 100 percent of which will pass a
37.5 mm (1-1/2 inches) sieve and containing not more than 5 percent passing the
0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve.
703.2 Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete Coarse aggregate for concret
e shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 80. Lightweight aggregate, if required
or permitted by the Special Provisions, shall conform to the requirements of AA
SHTO M 195, for the grading specified.
703.3 Aggregate for Portland Cement Treated and Stabilized Base Course The crush
ed and uncrushed granular material shall consist of hard durable stones and rock
s of accepted quality, free from an excess of flat, elongated, soft or disintegr
ated pieces or other objectionable matter. The method used in obtaining the aggr
egate shall be such that the finished product shall be as consistent as practica
l. All materials passing the 4.75 mm (No. 4) mesh produced in the crushing opera
tion of either the stone or gravel shall be incorporated in the base material to
the extent permitted by the gradation requirements. The plasticity index shall
not be less 4 nor more than 10.
376
703.4 Aggregate for Untreated Subbase, Base or Surface Courses Aggregate shall c
onsist of hard, durable particles or fragments of crushed stone, crushed slag or
crushed or natural gravel. Materials that break up when alternately wetted and
dried shall not be used. Coarse aggregate is the material retained on the 2.00 m
m (No. 10) sieve and shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 50 for sub
base and not more than 45 for Base and Surface Courses as determine by AASHTO Me
thod T 96. Fine aggregate is the material passing the 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve and
shall consist of natural or crushed sand and fine mineral particles. The fracti
on passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve shall not be greater than 0.66 (two-thir
ds) of the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve. For base courses, the f
raction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a liquid limit not greate
r than 25 and a plasticity index not greater than 6, while for subbase course, t
he liquid limit shall not be greater than 35 plasticity index not greater than 1
2. For surface courses, the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall h
ave a liquid limit not greater than 35 and a plasticity index not less than 4 or
greater than 9. All materials shall be free from vegetable matter and lumps or
balls of clay. When crushed aggregate is specified, not less than 50 mass percen
t of the particles retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall have at least one
fractured face. Gradation of each designated size of aggregate shall be obtaine
d by crushing, screening and blending processes as may be necessary. Materials o
therwise meeting the requirements of this Section will be acceptable whenever su
ch materials produce a compacted course meeting applicable density requirements
as specified in Subsections 200.3.3, 201.3.3, 202.3.3 and 203.3.6.
703.5 Aggregate for Bituminous Concrete 703.5.1 Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate retained on the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve shall be crushed stone, c
rushed slag or crushed or natural gravel and unless otherwise stipulated, shall
conform to the quality requirements of AASHTO M 79 – 74. When crushed gravel is us
ed, it shall meet the pertinent requirements of Section 2.1 and 3.1 of AASHTO M
62 – 74 and not less than 50 mass percent of the particles retained on the 4.75 mm
(No. 4) sieve shall have at least one fractured face. The coarse aggregate shal
l be of such gradation that when combined with other required aggregate fraction
s in proper proportion, the resultant mixture will
377
meet the gradation required under the composition of mixture for the specific ty
pe under contract. Only one kind shall be used on the project except by permissi
on of the Engineer. 703.5.2 Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate passing the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve shall consist of natural sand,
stone, stone screenings or slag screenings or a combination thereof and unless o
therwise stipulated shall conform to the quality requirements of AASHTO M 29 (AS
TM D 1073). Fine aggregate shall be of such gradation that when combined with ot
her required aggregate fractions in proper proportion, the resultant mixture wil
l meet the gradation required under the composition of mixture for the specific
type under contract. 703.5.3 Open-Graded Asphalt Concrete Friction Course
Aggregate shall conform to Subsections 703.5.1 and 703.5.2 above and the followi
ng requirements. Relatively pure carbonate aggregates or any aggregates known to
polish shall not be used for the coarse aggregate fraction (material retained o
n the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve. In addition, the coarse aggregate fraction shall ha
ve at least 75 mass percent of weight of particles with at least two fractured f
aces and 90 mass percent with one or more fractured faces, except that lightweig
ht aggregates need not meet this requirement. The abrasion loss (AASHTO T 96) sh
all not exceed 40 mass percent. 703.5.4 Lightweight Aggregate (except slag)
Lightweight aggregate (except slag), if required or permitted by a Special Provi
sions, shall be manufactured by the rotary kiln process. The material shall cons
ist of angular-fragments uniform in density and reasonably free from flat, elong
ated or other deleterious substances. The material shall show an abrasion loss o
f less than 45 mass percent when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 96. The dry
mass per cubic metre shall not exceed 1080 kg (67 pcf). After testing through fi
ve cycles of the magnesium sulfate soundness test, the loss shall not exceed ten
(10) mass percent.
703.6
Aggregate for Bituminous Plant Mix Surfacing
Aggregate shall be uniformly graded from coarse to fine. Target values for the i
ntermediate sieve sizes shall be established within the limits shown in Table 70
3.1. The Contractor shall submit the proposed target values in writing to the En
gineer for approval. The target gradation is subject to confirmation testing in
accordance with Section 307.2 before approval by the Engineer. Any changes in th
e target gradation are subject to confirmation testing in accordance with Sectio
n 307.2, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer. No target gradati
on adjustment will be permitted during the span of a lot.
378
Table 703.1 Range of Gradation Target Values Sieve Designation, mm 25 (1 inch) 1
9 (3/4 inch) 4.75 (No. 4) 2.36 (No. 8) 0.075 (No. 200) Mass percent passing squa
re mesh sieves, AASHTO T 11 and T 27, exclusive of mineral filler Range 100 100
50 – 60 38 – 48 3–7 The minimum for Sand Equivalent is 35
No intermediate sizes of aggregate shall be removed for other purposes without w
ritten consent of the Engineer. If crushed gravel is used, not less than 50 mass
percent of the material retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be particle
s having at least one fractured face. That portion of the composite material pas
sing a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall have a sand equivalent of not less than 35, a
s determined by AASHTO T 176, Alternate Method No. 2. The aggregate shall show a
durability index not less than 35 (coarse and fine) as determined by AASHTO T 2
10. The material shall be free of clay balls and adherent films of clay or other
matter that would prevent thorough coating with the bituminous material.
703.7 Aggregate for Hot Plant-Mix Bituminous Pavement The provisions of Subsecti
ons 703.5.1, 703.5.2 and 703.5.3 shall apply. The several aggregate fraction for
the mixture shall be sized, graded and combined in such proportions that the re
sulting composite blend meets one of the grading requirements of Table 703.2 as
specified in the Schedule. The gradings to be used will be shown in the Special
Provisions, adjusted to reflect variations in aggregate densities. The ranges ap
ply to aggregates with bulk specific gravity values that are relatively constant
throughout a grading band. When such values vary from sieve to sieve, such as w
ith lightweight aggregates, the ranges for each sieve size shall be adjusted to
reflect the variations. 703.8 Aggregate for Cold Plant-Mix Bituminous Pavement T
he provisions of Subsections 703.5.1 and 703.5.2 shall apply.
379
703.8.1
Aggregate for Pavement
The several aggregate fractions for the mixture shall be sized, graded and combi
ned in such proportions that the resulting composite blends meet the respective
grading requirements of Table 703.3 adjusted to reflect variation in aggregate d
ensities. 703.8.2 Aggregate for Top Dressing
The material for the top dressing shall consist of dry sand, stone screenings or
slag screenings so graded that at least 95 mass percent shall pass the 4.75 mm
(No. 4) sieve and not more than 40 percent shall pass the 0.300 mm (No. 50) siev
e. Table 703.2 Gradation Ranges – Hot Plant Mix Bituminous Pavements (Mass percent
passing square sieves, AASHTO T 11 and T 27)
Sieve Designation, mm 37.5 (1-1/2 inch) 25 ( 1 inch) 19 (3/4 inch) 12.5 (1/2 inc
h) 9.5 (3/8 inch) 4.75 (No. 4) 2.36 (No. 8) 1.18 (No. 16) 0.600 (No. 30) 0.300 (
No. 50) 0.075 (No. 200) A 100 95-100 75-95 54-75 36-58 25-45 11-28 0-8 B 100 95-
100 68-86 56-78 38-60 27-47 18-37 11-28 6-20 0-8 C GRADING D 100 95-100 74-92 48
-70 33-53 22-40 15-30 10-20 4-9 E 100 95-100 75-90 62-82 38-58 22-42 11-28 2-10
F 100 45-65 33-53 10-20 3-8 G 100 95-100 30-50 5-15 2-5
100 95-100 68-86 56-78 38-60 27-47 18-37 13-28 9-20 4-8
703.9 Aggregate for Road Mix Bituminous Pavement Aggregates for road mix bitumin
ous pavement construction shall be crushed stone, crushed slag, or crushed or na
tural gravel which meet the quality requirements of AASHTO M 62-74 or M 63-74 fo
r the specified gradation, except that the sodium sulfate soundness loss shall n
ot exceed 12 mass percent. When crushed gravel is used, at least 50 mass percent
of the particles retained on the 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve shall have at least one
fractured face. Gradation shall conform to Grading F of Table 703.2. 703.10 Agg
regate for Cover Coats, Surface Treatments and Bituminous Preservative Treatment
Cover aggregate for type 2 seal coat (Item 303) shall consist of sand or fine s
creenings, reasonably free from dirt or organic matter. Aggregates for type 3 se
al coat (Item 303) surface treatments or bituminous preservative treatment shall
be crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed or natural 380
gravel. Only one type of aggregate shall be used on the project unless alternati
ve types are approved. Aggregates shall meet the quality requirements of AASHTO
M 78-74. When tested in accordance with AASHTO T 182, (ASTM D 1664) aggregate sh
all have a retained bituminous film above 95 mass percent. Aggregates which do n
ot meet this requirement may be used for bituminous surface treatments and seal
coats provided a water resistant film. Lightweight aggregate, if required or per
mitted by the Special Provisions, shall meet the pertinent requirements of Subse
ction 703.5.4. When crushed gravel is used, not less than 50 mass percent of the
particles retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall have at least one fractur
ed face. Aggregates shall meet the gradation requirements called for in the Bid
Schedule. Table 703.3 Gradation Requirements – Cold Plant Mix Bituminous Pavement
(Mass percent passing square mesh sieves, AASHTO T 27) Sieve Designation Standar
d, mm 37.5 25 19 12.5 4.75 2.36 0.600 0.300 Alternate US Standard 1-1/2” 1” ¾” ½” No. 4 No.
8 No. 30 No. 50 Bottom (Binder) Course 100 85 – 100 40 – 70 10 – 35 4 – 16 0–5 Wearing (Su
rface) Course 100 95 – 100 15 – 40 10 – 25 4 – 13 0-5
Table 703.4 Gradation Requirements for Cover Coats (Mass percent passing square
mesh sieves, AASHTO T 27)
Sieve Designation Std. mm Alt US Std 37.5 1-1/2” 25 1” 19 ¾” 12.5 ½” 9.5 3/8” 4.75 No. 4 2.36
No. 8 0.075 No. 200 Grading designation with corresponding size No. from AASHTO
M 43 (ASTM D 448) modified A (No.5) B (No.6) C (No.7) D (No.8) E (No.9) F (No.10
) 100 90-100 100 90-100 100 0-10 90-100 100 0-15 85-100 100 100 0-15 85-100 85-1
00 0-10 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-10
381
703.11 Blotter Aggregate for blotter material shall conform to the gradation req
uirements of AASHTO M 43 (ASTM D 448), size 2.00 mm (No. 10). The aggregate shal
l be free from vegetable or other deleterious materials. Table 703.5 Gradation R
equirements for Bituminous Surface Treatments (Mass percent passing square mesh
sieves, AASHTO T 27)
Sieve Designation Std. mm Alt US Std 37.5 1-1/2” 25 1” 19 ¾” 12.5 ½” 9.5 3/8” 4.75 No. 4 2.36
No. 8 0.150 No. 100 Grading designation with corresponding size No. from AASHTO
M 43 (ASTM D 448) modified A (No.5) B (No.6) C (No.7) D (No.8) E (No.9) F (No.10
) 100 90-100 100 20-25 90-100 100 0-10 20-55 90-100 100 0-5 0-15 40-70 85-100 10
0 100 0-5 0-15 10-30 85-100 85-100 0-5 0-10 10-40 60-100 0-10
Table 703.6 Gradation Requirements for Bituminous Preservative Treatment Sieve D
esignation Standard mm Alternate US Standard 19 ¾” 9.5 3/8” 4.75 No. 4 2.36 No. 8 0.07
5 No. 200 Mass percent passing square mesh Sieves, AASHTO T 27 Grading A Grading
B 100 100 45 – 80 45 – 80 28 – 64 28 – 64 0 – 12 0 - 12
703.12 Bed Course Material Bed course material for sidewalks, paved waterways an
d curbing shall consist of cinders, sand, slag, gravel, crushed stone or other a
pproved material of such gradation that all particles will pass through a sieve
having 37.5 mm (1-1/2 inches) square openings. Bed course material for slope pro
tection shall be a porous, free-draining material consisting of sand, gravel, ci
nders, slag, crushed stone or other approved free-draining material. This materi
al shall be uniformly graded and of such size that 100 percent of the material w
ill pass through a sieve having 37.5 mm (1-1/2 inches) square opening.
382
703.13 Sheathing Material Sheathing material shall conform to either (a) or (b)
below: a. Sound, durable particles of gravel, slag or crushed stone meeting the
following gradation: Sieve 75 mm (3”) 4.75 mm (No. 4) 0.075 mm (No. 200) Mass perc
ent passing 100 0 – 10 0–2
b. Clean noncementitious sand meeting the requirements of Subsection 703.1.2. 70
3.14 Aggregates for Subgrade Modification The material shall consist of hard, du
rable particles or fragments of slag, stone or gravel, screened or crushed to th
e required size and grading. The material shall be visually free from vegetable
matter and lumps or balls of clay and shall meet the requirements for one of the
gradings given in Table 703.7 whichever is called for in the Bid Schedule. That
portion of the material passing a 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a plastici
ty index of not over 6, as determined by AASHTO T 90. Table 703.7 Grading Requir
ements – Aggregates for Subgrade Modification Sieve Designation Standard mm Altern
ate US Standard 75 3” 37.5 1-1/2” 25 1” 4.75 No. 4 0.075 No. 200 Mass percent passing
square mesh sieves using AASHTO T 27 100 30 – 70 0 - 15 100 30 – 70 0 - 15 100 40 – 80
5 – 20
Crushed slag shall consist of clean, tough, durable pieces of blast furnace slag
, reasonably uniform in density and quality and reasonably free from glassy piec
es. 703.15 Aggregates for Salt Stabilization Aggregates for salt stabilized base
course shall consist of hard durable particles or fragments of slag, stone or g
ravel, screened or crushed to the required size and grading.
383
That portion of the material passing a 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a plas
ticity index of not over 6, as determined by AASHTO T 90. The material shall be
visually free from vegetable matter or lumps or balls of clay and shall meet the
requirements for one of the gradings given in Table 703.8 as called for in the
Bid Schedule. Table 703.8 Gradation Requirements for Aggregates for Salt Stabili
zed Base Course Sieve Mass percent passing square mesh Designation sieves, AASHT
O T 11 and T 27 Standard, mm Alternate US Standard Grading A Grading B 75 3” 50 2” 1
00 37.5 1-1/2” 70 – 100 25 1” 100 19 ¾” 70 – 100 50 – 80 9.5 3/8” 50 – 80 40 – 70 4.75 No. 4
0 – 60 2.00 No. 10 25 – 50 20 – 50 0.425 No. 40 15 – 30 10 – 30 0.075 No. 200 7 - 15 7 – 15
* Gradation varies with top size of material and should be based on size of larg
est material used. For instance, if largest size is 50 mm (2 inches), gradation
should be under heading B; if 25 mm (1 inch), under A.
703.16 Aggregates for Emulsified Asphalt Treated Base Course Aggregate shall con
sist of coarse aggregate of crushed gravel, crushed slag or crushed stone, compo
sed of hard, durable particles or fragments and a filler of finely crushed stone
, sand, slag or other finely divided mineral matter. The portion of the material
retained on a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be known as coarse aggregate and that
portion passing a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be known as fine aggregate. The m
aterial shall meet one of the grading requirements of Table 703.9. Table 703.9 G
rading Requirements for Aggregates for Emulsified Asphalt Treated Base (Mass per
cent passing square mesh sieves, AASHTO T 11 & T 27) Sieve Designation Grading A
Grading B Grading C Standard mm Alternate US Standard 37.5 1-1/2” 100 100 25 1” 95 –
100 95 – 100 19 ¾” 50 – 85 100 12.5 1/2” 95 – 100 4.75 No. 4 26 – 59 65 – 100 2.00 No. 10 0–9
8 0.300 No. 50 12 – 35 0.075 No. 200 0–2 2 – 10 3 - 12 384
If crushed gravel is used, not less than 65 mass percent of the coarse aggregate
particles retained on a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be particles having at leas
t one fractured face. Coarse aggregate shall have a percent of wear of not more
than 35 at 500 revolution, as determined by AASHTO T 96. The aggregate shall sho
w a durability factor not less than 35 (coarse and fine) as determined by AASHTO
T 210 (Production of Plastic Fines in Aggregates). The material shall be free o
f clay balls and adherent films of clay or other matter that would prevent thoro
ugh coating with bituminous material.
ITEM 703A – MINERAL FILLER
703A.1 Description Mineral filler shall consist of finely divided mineral matter
such as rock dust, slag dust, hydrated lime, hydraulic cement, fly ash or other
suitable mineral matter. It shall be free from organic impurities and at the ti
me of use, shall be sufficiently dry to flow freely and shall be essentially fre
e from agglomerations.
703A.2 General Requirements 703A.2.1 Filler material for bituminous bases or pav
ements shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 17, Mineral Filler for Bituminous
Paving Mixtures. 703A.2.2 Physical Requirements Mineral filler shall be graded
within the following limits: Sieve 0.600 mm (No. 30) 0.300 mm (No. 50) 0.075 mm
(No. 200) Maximum Perfect Passing 100 95 – 100 70 – 100
The mineral filler shall have a plasticity index not greater than 4. Plasticity
index limits are not appropriate for hydraulic lime and cement.
385
703A.3 Methods of Sampling 703A.3.1 Materials in Bulk Sampling from bins, piles
or cars – A sampling tube that takes a core not less than 25 mm (1 inch) in diamet
er may be used to obtain sample portions from one or more location as required t
o obtain a field sample of at least 5 kg (10 lb). Sample portions may be taken f
rom holes dug into the material at 5 or more locations to provide a field sample
of at least 5 kg (10 lb). Sampling from conveyors – Sample portions shall be take
n at regular intervals during the time of movement of the materials in the unit
being sampled to provide a field sample of at least 5 kg (10 lb). 703A.3.2 Mater
ials in Packages From the unit to be sampled, select at least one percent of the
packages at random for sampling, but in no case shall fewer than 5 packages be
selected. Take a sample portion from a hole dug into the top of each package sel
ected for sampling. A sampling tube may be used that takes a core not less than
25 mm (1 inch) diameter. Insert the tube into the package to substantially sampl
e the entire length of the package. Combine the sample portions taken to obtain
a field sample of at least 5 kg (10 lb).
703A.4 Shipping Samples Mineral filler shall be shipped in a clean, moisture-pro
of container and packaged securely to prevent the loss of material during handli
ng. Reduce the field sample to a minimum size of 2.5 kg (5 lb) to submit for tes
ting, using the method of quartering.
703A.5 Methods of Test The properties enumerated in this Specification shall be
determined in accordance with the following AASHTO Method of Test: Gradation Pla
sticity Index T 37 T 90
386
ITEM 704 – MASONRY UNITS
704.1 Clay or Shale Brick Brick shall conform to the requirements of one of the
following specifications: AASHTO M 91, Grade SM ASTM C 32, Grade SM AASHTO M 114
, Grade SW, or ASTM C 62, Grade SW The grade will be shown on the Plans or in th
e Special Provisions. Sewer Brick Sewer Brick Building Brick -
704.2 Concrete Brick Concrete brick shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C
55, Grade A.
704.3 Concrete Masonry Blocks Concrete masonry blocks may be rectangular or segm
ented and, when specified, shall have ends shaped to provide interlock at vertic
al joints. Solid blocks shall conform with the requirements of ASTM C 139 or AST
M C 145, grade as specified. Hollow blocks shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM C 90, grade as specified. Dimensions and tolerances shall be as individuall
y specified on the Plans.
ITEM 705 – JOINT MATERIALS
705.1 Joint Fillers Poured filler for joints shall conform to the requirements o
f AASHTO M 173. Preformed fillers for joints shall conform to the requirements o
f AASHTO M 33 (ASTM D 994), AASHTO M 153, AASHTO M 213, AASHTO M 220, as specifi
ed, and shall be punched to admit the dowels where called for on the Plans. The
filler for each joint shall be furnished in a single piece for the depth and wid
th required for the joint unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. When the
use of more than one piece is authorized for a joint, the abutting ends shall be
fastened securely and held accurately to shape, by stapling or other positive f
astening satisfactory to the Engineer.
387
705.2 Joint Mortar Pipe joint mortar shall consist of one part Portland Cement a
nd two parts approved sand with water as necessary to obtain the required consis
tency. Portland Cement and sand shall conform respectively to Section 700.1 and
703.1. If shown in the Special Provisions, air entrainment conforming to Section
708.2 shall be provided. Mortar shall be used within 30 minutes after its prepa
ration.
705.3 Rubber Gaskets Ring gaskets for rigid pipe shall conform to the requiremen
ts of AASHTO M 198. Continuous flat gaskets for flexible metal pipe shall confor
m to the requirements of ASTM D 1056 with grade SCE 41 used for bands with proje
ctions or flat bands and grade SCE 43 for corrugated bands. Gaskets thickness fo
r bands with projections or flat bands shall be 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) greater than
the nominal depth of the corrugation and shall be 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) for corrugat
ed bands.
705.4 Oakum Oakum for joints in bell and spigot pipe shall be made from hemp (Ca
nnabis Sativa) line, or Benares Sunn fiber, or from a combination of these fiber
s. The oakum shall be thoroughly corded and finished and practically free from l
umps, dirt and extraneous matter.
705.5 Mortar for Masonry Beds and Joints 705.5.1 Composition
Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, masonry mortar shall be composed of one
part Portland Cement or air-entraining Portland Cement and two parts fine aggre
gate by volume to which hydrated lime has been added in an amount equal to ten (
10) mass percent of the cement. In lieu of air-entraining cement, Portland Cemen
t may be used with an air-entraining admixture in accordance with the applicable
provisions of Item 405. For masonry walls not exceeding 1.8 m (6 feet) in heigh
t, a mortar composed of one part masonry cement and two parts fine aggregate by
volume maybe substituted for the above mixture of Portland Cement, lime and fine
aggregate. For other construction, masonry cement may be used if and as shown o
n the Plans. 705.5.2 Materials
Either Type I or Type IA air-entraining Portland Cement, conforming to AASHTO M
85 may be used, except that when the contract contains an item for concrete unde
r Item 405, the Contractor may use the same type as is used for that work.
388
Masonry cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 150 – 74 (ASTM C 91).
Fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 45 (ASTM C 144). H
ydrated lime shall meet the requirements for Residue, Popping and Pitting, and W
ater retention shown for Type N lime in Section 701.3 (ASTM C 207). Water shall
conform to the requirements of Item 714, Water. Air-entraining agents shall conf
orm to the requirements of Section 708.2 AASHTO M 154 (ASTM C 260).
705.6 Copper Water Stops or Flashings Sheet copper for water stops of flashings
shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 138 (ASTM B 152) for Type ETP, light col
d-rolled, soft anneal, unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.
705.7 Rubber Water Stops Rubber water stops may be molded or extruded and have a
uniform crosssection, free from porosity or other defects, conforming to the no
minal dimensions shown on the Plans. An equivalent standard shape may be furnish
ed, if approved by the Engineer. The water stop may be compounded from natural r
ubber, synthetic rubber or a blend of the two, together with other compatible ma
terials which will produce a finished water stop meeting the requirements of Tab
le 705.1. No reclaimed material shall be used. The Contractor shall furnish a ce
rtificate from the producer to show the general compositions of the material and
values for the designated properties. The Contractors shall also furnish sample
s, in length adequate for making designated tests, as ordered by the Engineer.
705.8 Plastic Water Stops Plastic water stops shall be fabricated with a uniform
cross-section, free from porosity or other defects, to the nominal dimensions s
hown on the Plans. An equivalent standard shape may be furnished, if approved by
the Engineer. The material from which the water stop is fabricated shall be a h
omogenous,, elastomeric, plastic compound of basic polyvinyl chloride and other
material which, after fabrication, will meet the requirements tabulated herein.
No reclaimed material shall be used. The Contractor shall furnish a certificate
from the producer, showing values for the designated properties in Table 705.2.
The Contractor shall furnish
389
samples, in lengths adequate for making designated tests, as ordered by the Engi
neer. Table 705.1 Required Properties and Test Methods-Finished Rubber Water Sto
p
Property Hardness (by durometer) Compression set Tensile strength shore
Federal Test Method Standard No. 601 3021 3311 4111 ASTM D 412 4131 6631 7111
Requirement
Elongation at Breaking Tensile stress at 300 percent elongation Water absorption
by mass Tensile strength after aging
60 – 70 Maximum 30 percent Minimum 17.23 MPa (2,500 psi) Minimum 450 percent Minim
um 6.20 MPa (900 psi) Minimum 5 percent Minimum 80 percent original
Table 705.2 Required Properties and Test Methods-Finished Plastic Water Stop AST
M Property Tensile strength Elongation at breaking Hardness (shore) Specific gra
vity Resistance to alkali Method D 638 D 638 D 2240 (Federal test Method No. 406
-5011) D 543 Requirements Minimum 9.646 MPa (1,400 psi) Minimum 260 percent 60 – 7
5 Maximum – 0.02 from manufacturer’s value Maximum weight change: - 0.10 percent to
+ 0.25 percent No cracking Not more than manufacturer’s value Maximum hardness cha
nge 5 (shore), Maximum tensile strength decrease: 15%
Water absorption (48 hrs) Cold bending Volatile loss 7 days using 10% NaOH
D 570 (1) D 1203 -
390
1
The cold bend test will be made by subjecting a 25 x 150 x 3 mm (1 x 6 x 1/8 inc
h) strip of plastic water stop to a temperature of –28.80C (-200F) for 2 hours. Th
e strip will immediately thereafter be bent 180 degrees around a rod of 6.35 mm
(1/4 inch) diameter by applying sufficient force to hold the sample in intimate
contact with the rod. The sample will then be examined for evidence of cracking.
At least three individual samples from each lot will be tested and the result r
eported.
705.9 Hot Poured Pipe-Joint Sealing Compound It shall meet the requirements of F
ederal Specification SS-S-169 for the type and class specified.
705.10 Pipe-Joint Packing Compound Packaging compounds for use with sealing comp
ounds specified in Section 705.9 shall be of appropriate sizes and shall meet th
e requirements of Federal Specification HH-P-117.
705.11 Preformed Plastic Sealing Compound For concrete pipe joints, it shall mee
t the requirements of Federal Specification SS-S-210.
ITEM 706 – CONCRETE, CLAY, PLASTIC AND FIBER PIPE 706.1 Non-Reinforced Concrete Pi
pe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 86 (ASTM C 14) for th
e specified diameters and strength classes. 706.2 Reinforced Concrete Pipe This
pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 170 or AASHTO M 242 (ASTM C 6
55) for specified diameters and strength classes. Elliptical pipe conforming to
the requirements of AASHTO M 207 (ASTM C 507) shall be furnished where specified
. Unless otherwise specified, pipe wall design and use of elliptical reinforced
concrete arch culvert pipe shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 206 (ASTM C 5
06). Precast reinforced concrete and sections shall conform to the requirements
of the cited specifications to the extent which they apply. Reinforced concrete
D-load pipe shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 242 (ASTM C 655).
391
706.3 Perforated Concrete Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AA
SHTO M 175 for the specified diameters and strength classes. 706.4 Drain Tile Th
is pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 178 or M 179 (ASTM C 4) fo
r the specified material, diameters and quality classes. 706.5 Porous Concrete P
ipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 176 (ASTM C 654) for
the specified diameters. 706.6 Vitrified Clay Lined Reinforced Concrete Pipe De
signs for fully lined or half lined pipes of the specified strength classes shal
l be submitted by the manufacturer for approval. The application requirements of
AASHTO M 170 and AASHTO M 65 shall govern. Liner or liner elements, shall be cl
ay of first quality, sound, thoroughly and perfectly burned without warps, crack
s or other imperfections and fully and smoothly salt glazed. 706.7 Perforated Vi
trified Clay Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 65, fo
r pipe with full circular cross-section, for the specified diameters and strengt
h class. When specified, the bell shall have integral spacer lugs to provide for
an annular opening and self-centering feature. 706.8 Vitrified Clay Pipe This p
ipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 706.7 for the specified diamete
rs and strength classes for circular, unperforated or perforated pipe as shown o
n the Plans. 706.9 Cradle Invert Clay Pipe This pipe shall conform to the applic
able requirements of AASHTO M 65. 706.10 Asbestos Cement Pipe This pipe shall co
nform to the requirements of AASHTO M 217 (ASTM C 428) for the specified diamete
rs and strength classes. 706.11 Perforated Asbestos Cement Pipe This pipe shall
conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 189 for the specified diameters. 706.12
Bituminized Fiber Pipe
392
This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 177 ASTM D 1861 or D 186
2. 706.13 Perforated Bituminized Fiber Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requi
rements of Sections 706.12 for the specified diameters. Unless otherwise specifi
ed, either Type I or Type II Couplings may be furnished. 706.14 Reinforced Concr
ete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requ
irements of AASHTO M 206 (ASTM C 506). 706.15 Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Cul
vert, Strom Drain and Sewer Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 207 (ASTM C 507). 706.16 Reinforced Concrete D-load Culvert, Storm Drai
n and Sewer Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 242 (AS
TM C 655). 706.17 Plastic and Polyethylene Corrugated Drainage Pipe or Tubing Th
is pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 252. 706.18 Precast Reinfo
rced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains and Sewers These sections
shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 259. 706.19 Acrylonitrile-Butadien
e-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings This pipe shall conform to the requireme
nts of ASTM D 2751. 706.20 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Composite Sewer
Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 264 (ASTM D 2680).
706.21 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Drain Pipe This pipe shall confo
rm to the requirements of AASHTO M 304M (ASTM D 2729).
393
ITEM 707 – METAL PIPE
707.1 Cast Iron Pipe This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 64
or ASTM A 716 for the specified diameters and strength classes. Unless otherwise
specified, either smooth, corrugated or ribbed pipe may be furnished. Pipe of d
iameter in excess of 1.2 m (48 inches) shall conform to ANSI Standard for Cast I
ron Pit Cast Pipe for specified diameter and strength class. 707.2 Corrugated Ir
on or Steel Pipe and Pipe Arches 707.2.1 Riveted Pipe and Pipe Arches
The conduit shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 218 for the s
pecified dimensions and thicknesses. 707.2.2 Welded Pipe and Pipe Arches
Corrugated steel pipe and pipe arches fabricated by resistance spot welding shal
l comply with the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 218. 707.2.3 Heli
cal Pipe
Unperforated helically corrugated pipes shall conform to sizes shown on the Plan
s and with the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 218. 707.2.4 Special
sections, such as elbows and fabricated flared and sections, shall conform to t
he applicable requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 218. Coupling bands shall confor
m to AASHTO M 36 and M 218, except that use of bands with projections (dimple ba
nds) will be limited to end sections and to pipe laid on grades under 10 percent
. Bands of special design that engage factory reformed ends of corrugated pipe m
ay be used. Steel sheets of the required compositions may be furnished with comm
ercially produced corrugation dimensions other than those specified in AASHTO M
36 and M 246, if shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer. 707.3 Bituminou
s Coated Corrugated Iron or Steel Pipe and Pipe Arches These conduits, coupling
bands and special sections, shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 190 co
ating Type A, B or C as specified. Coupling bands shall be fully coated with bit
uminous material. Special sections, such as elbows and other sections shall conf
orm to the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 190. Coating and invert paving sh
all be of
394
the type specified. Flared end sections shall conform to the requirements of AAS
HTO M 243 for the coating specified. The Engineer may waive the imperviousness t
est for coated pipe if no separation of coating from metal is observed. When asb
estos bonded bituminous coating is specified, these requirements shall equally a
pply and in addition, the special process of embedding asbestos fiber in the mol
ten metallic bonding medium shall be used to bond the bituminous coating. Asbest
os-bonded corrugated metal pipe shall be fabricated in accordance with AASHTO M
36 using asbestos-bonded sheets shall be coated with a layer of asbestos fibers
pressed into the molten zinc bonding medium. Immediately after the metallic bond
has solidified, the asbestos fibers shall be thoroughly impregnated with a bitu
minous saturant. The finished sheets shall be uniformly coated and free from bli
sters. After fabrication, the culvert sections shall be treated as specified for
either Type A, B or C, as called for in the Bid Schedule, in accordance with AA
SHTO M 190. Coupling bonds shall be fully coated with bituminous material confor
ming to the requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 190, Type A. The use of bands with
projections (dimple bands) will be limited to end sections and to pipe laid on
grades under 10 percent. 707.4 Corrugated Iron or Steel Pipe for Underdrains Thi
s pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 218 for the specif
ied diameters and types. Galvanized metal part-circle pipe may be used if permit
ted by the Special Provisions and shown in the Bid Schedule. 707.5 Bituminous Co
ated Iron Steel Pipe for Underdrains This pipe shall conform to the requirements
of AASHTO M 36 and M 218 and shall be coated with bituminous material to meet t
he requirements of AASHTO M 190, Type A coating, except that the minimum coating
thickness shall be 0.75 mm (0.03 inch). Coupling bands shall be fully coated. T
he specified minimum diameter of perforations shall apply after coating. The Eng
ineer may waive the imperviousness test if no separation of coating from the met
al is observed. 707.6 Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Culvert Pipe This shall conform
to the requirements of AASHTO M 196 and M 197. 707.7 Corrugated Aluminum Alloy P
ipe for Underdrains This pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 707.6
. 707.8 Bituminous Coated Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Culvert Pipe This pipe shall
conform to the requirements of Section 707.6 and shall be coated with bituminou
s material conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 190. Coating and invert pa
ving shall be of the type specified.
395
707.9 Bituminous Coated Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Pipe Underdrain This pipe shal
l conform to the requirements of Section 707.6 and shall be coated with bitumino
us material conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 190, type of coating as s
pecified. 707.10 Structural Plate for Pipe, Pipe Arches and Arches These conduit
s and bolts and nuts for connecting plates shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 167. 707.11 Full Bituminous Coated Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe Arches a
nd Arches These conduits shall conform to the requirements of Section 707.10 and
shall be coated with bituminous material conforming to the requirements of AASH
TO M 243, type coating as specified. 707.12 Aluminum Alloy Structural Plate for
Pipe, Pipe Arches and Arches These conduits and the bolts and nuts for connectin
g plates shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 219. 707.13 Full Bitumino
us Coated Aluminum Alloy Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe Arches and Arches These con
duits shall conform to the requirements of Section 707.12 and shall be coated wi
th bituminous materials conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 190, type of
coating as specified. 707.14 Precoated, Galvanized Steel Culverts and Underdrain
s These conduits shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 245 and M 246. 70
7.15 Slotted Pipe Slotted pipe shall be the angle slot pipe or the grate slot ty
pe. slotted pipe to be installed shall be at the option of the Contractor. The t
ype of
Slot angles for the angle slot drain shall conform to the requirements of ASTM S
36. Grate assemblies for the grate slot drain shall conform to ASTM A 36 or A 5
76. Slot angles and grate slot assemblies shall be galvanized in accordance with
the provisions of Subsection 712.07, Frames, Gratings, Covers and Ladder Rungs,
of the Standard Specification Federal Highway Projects FP-79. Flashing shall be
commercial quality and shall be galvanized with G 165 coating designation confo
rming to the provisions in ASTM A 525. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the provi
sions of ASTM A 307. Structural tubing spacers shall
396
conform to the provisions in ASTM A 501. Said bolts, nuts and spacers shall be g
alvanized in accordance with the provisions of AASHTO M 111.
ITEM 708 – CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES FOR CONCRETE
708.1
Description
This Item specifies the classification, sampling, testing, packing and marking o
f concrete admixtures. It also specifies the physical requirements for concrete
with each type of chemical admixtures. Admixtures - A material, other than water
, aggregates and hydraulic cement (including blended cement) that is used as an
ingredient of concrete and is added to the batch in controlled amounts immediate
ly before or during mixing to produce some desired modification to the propertie
s of the concrete. 708.2 Types of Chemical Admixtures for Concrete The concrete
chemical admixture shall be classified as follows and shall conform to the requi
rements of AASHTO M 194. a. Type A – Accelerating Admixtures An admixture that acc
elerates the time of setting and early strength development of concrete. b. Type
B – Retarding Admixtures An admixture that delays the time of setting of concrete
. c. Type C – Water-reducing Admixtures An admixture that reduces the quantity of
mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency. d. Type D – Wate
r-reducing High Range, Admixtures An admixture that decreases the quantity of mi
xing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency by 12 percent or
greater. e. Type E – Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures An admixture that
decreases the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given c
onsistency and hastens the time of setting and early strength development of con
crete.
397
f.
Type F – Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixtures An admixture that decreases the q
uantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency and
delays the time of setting of concrete.
g.
Type G – Water-Reducing, High Range, and Retarding Admixtures An admixture that de
creases the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given con
sistency of 12 percent or greater and delays the time of setting of concrete.
708.3 Air-Entraining Admixtures Air-entraining admixtures shall conform to the r
equirements of AASHTO M 154 (ASTM C 260).
708.4
Physical Requirements
The concrete in which each of the types of chemical admixtures are used shall co
nform to the physical requirements given in Table 1. Table 1 – Physical Requiremen
ts of Chemical Admixtures for ConcreteA
PHYSICAL PROPERTY Water Content, percent of control, maximum Time of setting, al
lowable deviation from control, hour Initial Minimum Maximum 1.0 earlier nor 1.5
later 1.0 earlier nor 1.5 later 1.0 later 3.5 later 1.0 earlier 3.5 earlier 1.0
later 3.5 later 1.0 earlier 3.5 earlier 1.0 earlier nor 1.5 later 1.0 earlier n
or 1.5 later 1.0 later 3.5 later Type A Type B Type C Type D Type E Type FB Type
GB
95
-
-
95
95
88
88
Final : Minimum Maximum
3.5 later
1.0 earlier -
3.5 later
1.0 earlier -
3.5 later
Compressive Strength, percent of control minimum:C
398
1 day 3 days 7 days 28 days 6 months 1 year Flexural Strength, percent of contro
l, minimum:C 3 days 7 days 28 days Length Change, maximum shrinkage (Alternative
requirements)D Percent of control Increase over Control Relative durability fac
tor minimum
A
110 110 110 100 100
90 90 90 90 90
125 100 100 90 90
110 110 110 100 100
125 110 110 100 100
140 125 115 110 100 100
125 125 115 110 100 100
100 100 100
90 90 90
110 100 90
100 100 100
110 100 100
110 100 100
110 100 100
135 0.010 80
135 0.010 80
135 0.010 80
135 0.010 80
135 0.010 80
135 0.010 80
135 0.010 80
The values in the table include allowance for normal variation in test results.
The objects of the 90% compressive strength for Type B admixture is to require a
level of performance comparable to that of the reference concrete. It is recomm
ended that whenever practicable, tests may be made using cement, pozzolan, aggre
gates, air-entraining admixture, and the mix proportions and batching sequence w
hen used in non-air-entraining and air-entrained concrete because the specific e
ffects produced by chemical admixtures may vary with the properties and proporti
on of the other ingredients of the concrete. For instance, types “F” and “G” admixtures
may exhibit such higher water reduction in concrete mixtures having higher cemen
t factors than 307 + -3 kg/m3. Mixtures having a high range water reduction gene
rally display a higher rate of slump loss. When high range admixtures are used t
o impart increased workability (15 cm to 20 cm slump), the effect may be of limi
ted duration, reverting to the original slump in 30 to 60 min depending on facto
rs normally affecting rate of slump loss. The compressive and flexural strength
of the concrete containing the admixture under test at any test age shall be not
less 90% of that attained at any previous test age. The objective of this limit
is to require that the compressive or flexural strength of the concrete contain
ing the admixture under test shall not decrease with age. The percent of control
limit applies when length change of control is 0.030% or greater; increase over
control limit applies when length change of control is less than 0.030%. This r
equirement is applicable only when the admixtures is to be used in airentrained
concrete.
B
C
D
E
399
When the admixture is to be used in Prestressed concrete, the chloride content o
f the admixture shall be stated and whether or not chloride has been added durin
g its manufacture.
708.5 708.5.1
Sampling The chemical admixtures for concrete shall be sampled either by grab or
composite sampling. A grab sample is one obtained in a single operation. A comp
osite sample is one obtained by combining three or more grab samples. Liquid Adm
ixtures The grab samples taken for quality tests shall represent a unit shipment
or a single production lot. Each grab sample shall have a volume of at least 0.
5L (1 pint), a minimum of 3 grab samples shall be taken. Liquid admixtures shall
be agitated thoroughly immediately prior to sampling. Grab samples shall be tak
en from different locations and thoroughly mixed to form the composite sample an
d the resultant mixture sampled to provide for at least 4 litres for complete se
t. Admixtures in bulk storage tanks shall be sampled equally from the upper, int
ermediate and lower levels by means of drain cocks in the sides of the tanks or
a weighed sampling bottle fitted with a stopper that can be removed after the bo
ttle is lowered to the proper depth. Non-liquid Admixtures The grab samples take
n shall represent not more than 2 Mg (2 tons) of admixture and shall have a mass
of at least 1 kg (2 lb). A minimum of four grab samples shall be taken. Composi
te samples shall be prepared by thoroughly mixing the grab samples selected and
the resultant mixture sampled to provide at least 2.3 kg (5 lb) for complete tes
t.
708.5.2 708.5.2.1
708.5.2.2
708.5.2.3
708.5.3 708.5.3.1
708.5.3.2
708.6
Testing
Procedures for Proportioning of Concrete Mixtures, Tests and Properties of Fresh
ly Mixed Concrete, Preparation of Test Specimens, Test Specimens of Hardened Con
crete and Tests on Hardened Concrete shall be in accordance with AASHTO M 194. T
he Concrete containing the admixtures shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C
39, ASTM C 138, ASTM C 192, ASTM C 617.
400
708.7
Packing
The liquid admixtures shall be packed in 4, 20 or 200 litre containers made of s
teel, plastic or other suitable packing materials. These containers shall be pro
perly sealed. The non-liquid admixtures or concrete shall be packed in 25-kilogr
am containers made of steel, plastic, or other suitable packing materials. These
containers shall be properly sealed. 708.8 Marking Each container shall be mark
ed with the following information: a. b. c. d. e. f. Name, form and type of the
product; Net mass or volume; Name and address of manufacturer and recognized tra
demark, if any; Manufacturer’s batch number and date of manufacture Made in the Ph
ilippines and, Required handling procedures
ITEM 709 – PAINTS 709.1 Description This Item covers all paint materials including
Vehicles, Pigment, Pastes, Driers, Thinners and Mixed Paints for steel and wood
en structures. 709.2 Material Requirements 709.2.1 General
Paint, except, aluminum paint, shall consist of pigments of the required finenes
s and composition ground to the desired consistency in linseed oil in a suitable
grinding machine, to which shall be added additional oil, thinner and drier as
required. Aluminum paint shall consist of aluminum bronze powder or paste of the
required fineness and composition to which shall be added the specified amount
of vehicle. The paint shall be furnished for use in ready mixed, paste or powder
form. All paint shall meet the following general requirements: a. The paint sha
ll show no excessive settling and shall easily be redispersed with a paddle to a
smooth, homogenous state. The paint shall show no
401
b.
c. d. e.
curdling, livering, caking or color separation and shall be free from lumps and
skins. The paint as received shall brush easily, possess good levelling properti
es and shall show no running or sagging when applied to a smooth vertical surfac
es. The paint shall dry to a smooth uniform finish free from roughness grit, une
veness and other imperfections. The paint shall not skin within 48 hours in thre
e quarters filled closed container. The paint shall show no thickening, curdling
, gelling or hard caking after six (6) months storage in full, tightly covered c
ontainer at a temperature of 210C (700F). The paint shall conform to the require
ments of the indicated specifications as follows: Red Lead Ready-Mixed Paint AAS
HTO M 72 Type I, II, III and IV Aluminum Paint AASHTO M 69 Type I and II White &
Tinted Ready-Mixed Paint AASHTO M 70 Foliage Green Bridge Paint AASHTO M 67 Bla
ck Paint for Bridges and Timber Structures AASHTO M 68 Basic Lead Silicon Chroma
te, ReadyMixed Primer AASHTO M 229 The constituents parts of the paint shall mee
t the following specifications: Red Lead (97% Pb3O4) Iron Oxide (85% Fe2O3) Alum
inum Powder and Paste Magnesium Silicate Mica Pigment Titanium Dioxide Chrome Ye
llow Calcium Carbonate Basic Lead-Silicon Chromate Basic Carbonate White Lead Zi
nc Oxide Chrome Oxide Green Carbon Black Lampblack Prussian Blue Boiled Linseed
Oil Raw Linseed Oil Pale Heat Bodied Linseed Oil Alkyd Resin Mineral Spirit Drie
rs Turpentine ASTM D 83 ASTM D 84 ASTM D 962 ASTM D 605 ASTM D 607 ASTM D 476 AS
TM D 211 ASTM D 1199 ASTM D 1638 ASTM D 81 ASTM D 79 ASTM D 263 ASTM D 561 ASTM
D 209 ASTM D 261 ASTM D 260 ASTM D 234 Fed Spec. TT-0-367 Fed. Spec. TT-R-266 AS
TM D 235 ASTM D 600 ASTM D 13
709.2.2
709.2.3
402
709.2.4
Drier
These specifications cover both straight oil drier (material free from resins an
d “gums”), and Japan drier (material containing varnish “gums”). The drier shall be comp
osed of lead manganese, or cobalt, or a mixture of any of these elements, combin
ed with a suitable fatty oil, with or without resins of “gums” and mineral spirits o
f turpentine, or a mixture of these solvents. The drier shall conform to the fol
lowing requirements: a. Appearance – Free from sediment and suspended matter. b. F
lash Point – (Tag close cup) not less than 300C (860F). c. Elasticity – The drier wh
en flowed on metal and baked for 2 hours at 1000C (2120F) shall have an elastic
film. d. Drying – It shall mix with pure raw linseed oil in the proportion of 1 vo
lume of drier to 19 volumes of oil without curdling, and the resulting mixture w
hen flowed on glass shall dry in not more than 18 hours. d. Color – When mixed wit
h pure, raw linseed oil in the proportion of 1 volume of drier to 8 volumes of o
il, the resulting mixture shall be darker than a solution of 6 g of potassium di
chromate in 13 cc of pure sulfuric acid (sp. gr. 1.84).
709.3 Proportion for Mixing It is the intent of these Specifications to provide
a paint of proper brushing consistency, which will not run, streak or sag and wh
ich will have satisfactory drying qualities. 709.3.1 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats
on Structural Steel
The paint shall be mixed in the proportion of 0.242 kg of aluminum powder of pas
te per litre of vehicle of long oil spar varnish (2 lb/gal) producing a paint co
ntaining 21 mass percent pigment and 79 percent vehicle. The weighed amount of p
owder or paste shall be placed in a suitable mixing container and the measured v
olume of vehicle then poured over it. The paste or powder shall be incorporated
in the paint by vigorous stirring with a paddle. The powder or paste will readil
y disperse in the vehicle. Before removing any paint from the container, the pai
nt shall be thoroughly stirred to insure a uniform mixture and the paint shall b
e suitably stirred during the use. The amount of paint enough for one day’s use on
ly shall be mixed at one time. When two field coats of aluminum paint are specif
ied, the first coat shall be tinted with lampblack paste or Prussian blue paste
in the quantity of 0.024 kg/L or more (1/5 lb/gal) of paints. The exact quantity
used shall be sufficient to give a contrast in color which can be readily disti
nguished. When three field coats of aluminum paint are specified the second coat
shall be tinted.
403
709.3.2
Aluminum Paint, Field Coats on Creosoted Timber
This paint shall be mixed as specified for Aluminum Paint for Structural Steel e
xcept that the proportions shall be 0.272 kg of aluminum powder or paste per lit
re of vehicle (2-1/2 lb/gal). Other paint composition may be used when and as st
ipulated in the Special Provisions. 709.4 Containers and Markings All paints sha
ll be shipped in strong, substantial containers plainly marked with mass, color
and volume in litres of the paint content, a true statement of the percentage co
mposition of the pigment, the proportions of the pigment to vehicle, the name an
d address of the manufacturers and the stencil of the authorized inspecting agen
cy. Any package or container not so marked will not be accepted for use under th
is Specification.
ITEM 710 – REINFORCING STEEL AND WIRE ROPE
710.1 Reinforcing Steel Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of t
he following Specifications: Deformed Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforceme
nt Deformed Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement Welded Steel Wire Fabric for C
oncrete Reinforcement Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement Fabricate
d Steel Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fa
bric of Concrete Reinforcement Plastic Coated Dowel Bars Low Alloy Steel Deforme
d Bars for Concrete Reinforcement AASHTO M 31 (ASTM A 615)
AASHTO M 225 (ASTM A 496)
AASHTO M 55 (ASTM A 185)
AASHTO M 32 (ASTM A 82)
AASHTO M 54 (ASTM A 184)
AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A 497)
AASHTO M 254 Type A ASTM A 206
404
Bar reinforcement for concrete structures, except No. 2 bars shall be deformed i
n accordance with AASHTO M 42, M 31 and M 53 for Nos. 3 through 11. Dowel and ti
e bars shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 31 or AASHTO M 42 except th
at rail steel shall not be used for tie bars that are to be bent and restraighte
ned during construction. Tie bars shall be deformed bars. Dowel bars shall be pl
ain round bars. They shall be free from burring or other deformation restricting
slippage in the concrete. Before delivery to the site of the work, a minimum of
one half (1/2) the length of each dowel bar shall be painted with one coat of a
pproved lead or tar paint. The sleeves for dowel bars shall be metal of an appro
ved design to cover 50 mm (2 inches), plus or minus 6.3 mm of the dowel, with a
closed end, and with a suitable stop to hold the end of the sleeve at least 25 m
m (1 inch) from the end of the dowel bar. Sleeves shall be of such design that t
hey do not collapse during construction. Plastic coated dowel bar conforming to
AASHTO M 254 may be used.
710.2 Wire Rope or Wire Cable The wire rope or wire cable shall conform to the r
equirements of AASHTO M 30 for the specified diameter and strength class.
710.3 Prestressing Reinforcing Steel Prestressing reinforcing steel shall confor
m to the requirements of the following Specifications: High-tensile wire High-te
nsile wire strand or rope High-tensile alloy bars as follows: High-tensile-stren
gth alloy bars shall be cold stretched to a minimum of 895.7 MPa (30,000 psi). T
he resultant physical properties shall be as follows: Minimum ultimate tensile s
trength AASHTO M 204 (ASTM A 421) AASHTO M 203 (ASTM A 416)
1000 MPa (145,000 psi) followed by stress relieving
Minimum yield strength, measured by the 0.7 percent extension under load method
shall not be less than
895.7 MPa (130,000 psi)
405
Minimum modulus of elasticity Minimum elongation in 20 bar diameters after ruptu
re Diameters tolerance
25,000,000
4 percent +0.762 mm – 0.254 mm (+0.03”-0.01”)
If shown on the Plans, type 270 k strand shall be used, conforming to AASHTO M 2
03.
ITEM 711 – FENCE AND GUARDRAIL 711.1 Barbed Wire Galvanized barbed wire of the coa
ting class specified shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 121. Aluminum c
oated barbed wire shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 585, with Type I (
Aluminum Coated) or Type II (Aluminum Alloy) barbs at the option of the manufact
urer. 711.2 Woven Wire Galvanized woven wire fence of the coating class specifie
d shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 116. Aluminum coated woven wire fe
nce shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 584. 711.3 Chain Link Fence Chai
n link fabric and the required fittings and hardware shall conform to AASHTO M 1
81, for the kind of metal, coating, size of wire and mesh specified. Galvanized
coiled spring steel tension wire shall be 7 (0.177 inch) gauge, conforming to AS
TM A 641 hard temper, with Class 3 coating unless otherwise specified or shown o
n the drawings. Aluminized coil spring steel tension wire shall also be 7 (0.177
inch) gauge, hard temper, having a minimum coating mass of 0.12 kg/m2 (0.40 oz/
ft2) of aluminum. 711.4 Metal Beam Rail Steel rail elements shall be corrugated
sheet steel conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 180 of the designated cla
ss and type.
406
711.5 Timber Rail The timber rail shall be cut from the specified grade of dry,
well seasoned and dressed timber stock of the species specified, which shall mee
t the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 168. Where preservative treatment is s
pecified, this shall conform to the requirements of Section 713.3. Rustic rails
shall be straight, sound and free of injurious defects and shall have been cut f
rom live trees not less than 30 days but not more than 1 year before use. They s
hall have been stripped of bark before seasoning or shall have been stored under
water. Immediately before the logs are used in the work, all knots and projecti
ons shall be trimmed and smooth and, if water cured, all barks shall be peeled.
Slight curvature of “wind” to give a pleasing appearance to the structure will be pe
rmitted. Logs of only one specie shall be used in the construction of any one co
ntinuous length of guardrail. 711.6 Fence Posts Wood posts shall conform to the
details and dimensions indicated on the Plans. All wood posts shall be sound, se
asoned wood, peeled and with ends cut square or as indicated. The posts shall be
straight and all knots trimmed flush with surface. Where treated posts are call
ed for, the kind and type of treatment shall conform to that indicated on the Pl
ans. When red cedar posts or bracing is furnished, the requirements for peeling
may be omitted. All dimensions timber and lumber required for fences or gates sh
all be sound, straight and reasonably free from knots, splits and shakes. It sha
ll be of the species and grades indicated on the Plans and shall be dressed and
finished on four sides. Concrete posts shall be made of concrete conforming to t
he specified requirements of concrete, for the class specified, and shall contai
n steel reinforcement as shown on the Plans, conforming to the requirements of I
tem 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope. Steel posts for line-type fencing shal
l conform to ASTM A 702. Steel posts shall be galvanized in accordance with AASH
TO M 111 except that tubular steel posts shall be galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A 120. Fittings, hardware and other appurtenances not specifically covered
by the Plans and Specifications, shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 1
20 and shall be standard commercial grade, and in accordance with current standa
rd practice. Weathering steel posts conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 558
, shall be furnished when specified. Aluminum alloy posts shall conform to the r
equirements of AASHTO M 181.
407
711.7 Guardrail Post Guardrail post shall conform to the applicable standards co
ntained in AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA “A Guide to Standardized Highway Barrier Rail Hardware”.
711.8 Guardrail Hardware Guardrail hardware shall conform to the applicable sta
ndards contained in AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA “A Guide to Standardized Highway Barrier Rail
Hardware”. 711.9 Box Beam Rail Steel box rail elements shall conform to the appli
cable standards contained in AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA” Guide to Standardized Highway Barri
er Rail Hardware”.
ITEM 712 – STRUCTURAL METAL
712.1 Structural Steels 712.1.1 General Unless
Steel shall be furnished according to the following Specifications. otherwise sp
ecified, structural carbon rivet steel shall be furnished. 712.1.2 Structural St
eel
a. Carbon Steel. Unless otherwise specified, structural carbon steel for riveted
, bolted or welded construction shall conform to Structural Steel, AASHTO M 183.
b. Eyebars. Steel for eyebars shall be of a weldable grade. This grade includes
structural steel conforming to: Structural Steel, AASHTO M 183; Highway Strengt
h Low Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 MPa (50,000 psi) Minimum Yield Point to
100 mm (4 inches) thick, AASHTO M 222 (ASTM A 588 with Supplementary Requirement
SI of AASHTO M 222 mandatory). 712.1.3 High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel
It shall conform to: High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Struct
ural Quality, AASHTO M 223, High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5
MPa (50,000 psi) Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm (4 inches) thick, AASHTO M 222.
408
712.1.4
High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel for Welding
It shall conform to: a. High-Strength Low Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structura
l Quality, Grade 50, AASHTO M 223 (ASTM A 572 with supplementary requirements S2
of AASHTO M 223 mandatory). b. High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 34
4.5 MPa (50,000 psi) Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm (4 inches) thick, AASHTO M 22
2 (ASTM A 588 in Supplementary Requirement S1 of AASHTO M 222 mandatory). 712.1.
5 High-Strength Structural Steel for Riveted or Bolted Construction It shall con
form to: a. High-Strength Low Alloy Columbium – Vanadium Steel of Structural Quali
ty, and AASHTO M 223. b. High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 MPa
(50,000 psi) Minimum Yield Point to 100mm (4 inches) thick, AASHTO M 222. 712.1
.6 High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate
It shall conform to: a. High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel P
late, suitable for welding, ASTM A 514. b. High-Strength Alloy Steel Plates, Que
nched and Tempered for pressure vessels, ASTM A 517. c. Quenched and tempered al
loy steel structural shapes and seamless mechanical tubing meeting all the mecha
nical and chemical requirements of A 514/A 517 steel, except that the specified
maximum tensile strength may be 964.6 MPa (140,000 psi) for structural shapes an
d 999.05 MPa (145,000 psi) for seamless mechanical tubing shall be considered as
A 514/A 517 steel. 712.1.7 Structural Rivet Steel
It shall conform to Steel Structural Rivets AASHTO M 228, Grade I (ASTM A 502, G
rade I). 712.1.8 High-Strength Structural Rivet Steel
It shall conform to Steel Structural Rivets AASHTO M 228, Grade 2 (ASTM A 502, G
rade 2).
409
712.1.9
High-Strength Bolts
Bolts, nuts circular washers shall conform to High-Strength Bolts for Structural
Steel Joints, including Suitable Nuts and Plain Hardened Washer, AASHTO M 164 (
ASTM A 325). High-strength bolts for structural steel joints including suitable
nuts and plain hardened washers shall conform to either AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325
) or AASHTO M 253. When M 164 type 3 bolts are specified, they along with suitab
le nuts and washers shall have an atmospheric corrosion resistance approximately
two times that of carbon steel with copper. Bolts and nuts manufactured to AASH
TO M 164 (ASTM A 325) are identified by proper marking as specified on the top o
f the bolt heads and on one face of the nuts for three different types. Bolts ma
nufactured to AASHTO M 253 shall be identified by marking on the top of the head
with the symbol A 490 and the nuts shall be marked on one face with the legend “2
H” or “DH”. Bolt and nut dimensions shall conform to the dimensions shown in Table 712
.1 and to the requirements for Heavy Hexagon Structural Bolts and for Heavy Semi
-Finished Hexagon Nuts given in ANSI Standard B 18.2.1 and B 18.2.2, respectivel
y. Circular washers shall be flat and smooth and their nominal dimensions shall
conform to the dimensions given in Table 712.2 except that for lock pin and coll
ar fasteners, flat washers need not be used, unless slotted or oversized holes a
re specified. Bevelled washers for American Standard Beams and Channels or other
sloping faces shall be required and shall be square or rectangular, shall taper
in thickness, and shall conform to the dimensions given in Table 712.2. When ne
cessary, washer may be clipped on one side to a point not closer than 0.875 (7/8
) of the bolt diameter from the center of the washer. Other fasteners or fastene
rs assemblies which meet the Materials, Manufacturing, and Chemical Composition
requirements of AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) or AASHTO M 253 and which meet the Mec
hanical Property requirements of the same specification in full-size tests and w
hich have body diameter and bearing areas under the head and nut, or other equiv
alent, not less than those provided by a bolt and nut of the same nominal dimens
ions prescribed in the previous paragraph, may be used. Such alternate fasteners
may differ in other dimensions from those of the specified bolts and nuts. Thei
r installation procedure may differ from those specified in AASHTO Bridge Specif
ication. Article 2.10.20 (D) and their inspection may differ from that specified
in Article 2.10.20 (E). When a different installation procedure or inspection i
s used, it shall be detailed in a supplemental specification applying to the alt
ernate fastener and that specification must be approved by the Engineer.
410
Subject to the approval of the Engineer, high strength steel lock-pin and collar
fasteners may be used as an alternate for high strength bolts or rivets as show
n on the Plans. The shank and head of the high strength steel lock-pin and colla
r fasteners shall meet the requirements of the preceding paragraph. Each fastene
rs shall provide a solid shank body of sufficient diameter to provide tensile an
d shear strength equivalent to or greater than the bolt or rivet specified, shal
l have a cold forged head on one end, of type and dimensions as approved by the
Engineer, a shank length suitable for material thickness fastened, locking groov
ed, break neck groove and pull grooves (all annular grooves) on the opposite end
. Each fasteners shall provide a steel locking collar of proper size for shank d
iameter used which by means of suitable installation tools, is cold swaged into
the locking grooves forming a head for the grooved end of the fastener after the
pull groove section has been removed. The steel locking collar shall be a stand
ard product of an established manufacturer of lock-pin and collar fasteners, as
approved by the Engineer. 712.1.10 Copper Bearing Steels When copper bearing ste
el is specified, the steel shall contain not less than 0.2 percent of copper.
712.2 Forgings Steel forgings shall conform to the specifications for Steel Forg
ings, Carbon and Alloy, for General Industrial Use, AASHTO M 102, (ASTM A 668, C
lasses C, D, F & G).
712.3 Pins and Rollers Pins and rollers more than 228.6 mm (9 inches) in diamete
r shall be annealed carbon-steel forgings conforming to AASHTO M 102, Class C1.
Pins and rollers 228.6 mm (9 inches) or less in diameter shall be either anneale
d carbon-steel forgings conforming to AASHTO M 102 (ASTM A 668), Class C1 or col
d finished carbon-steel shafting conforming to AASHTO M 169, grade 1016 to 1030
(ASTM A 108) inclusive, with a minimum Rockwell Scale B Hardness of 85. Material
not meeting the specifications for hardness maybe accepted provided it develops
a tensile strength of 482.3 MPa (70,000 psi) and a yield point of 248.04 MPa (3
6,000 psi). Threads for pins shall conform to the ANSI B1.1 Coarse Thread Series
, Class 2A. Pin ends having a diameter of 35mm (1 3/8 inches) or more shall be t
hreaded six threads to the inch.
411
Table 712.1 – Nominal Bolt and Nut Dimensions
Heavy Hexagon Structural Bolts Nominal Bolt Size (Diameter) mm (inch) 12 (1/2) 1
5 (5/8) 18 (3/4) 21 (7/8) 25 (1) 28 (1-1/8) 31 (1-1/4) 34 (1-3/8) 37 (1-1/2) Dim
ensions in mm (inches) Width of Height Thread Head Across of Length Flats Head 2
1 (7/8) 7 (5/16) 25 (1) 26 (1-1/16) 9 (25/64) 31 (1-1/4) 31 (1-1/4) 11 (15/32) 3
4 (1-3/8) 35 (1-7/16) 13 (35/64) 37 (1-1/2) 40 (1-5/8) 15 (39/64) 43 (1-3/4) 45
(1-13/16) 17 (11/16) 50 (2) 50 (2) 19 (25/32) 50 (2) 54 (2-3/16) 21 (27/32) 56 (
2-1/4) 59 (2-3/8) 23 (15/16) 56 (2-1/4) Heavy Semi-Finished Hexagonal Nuts Dimen
sions in mm (inches) Width Across Flats 21 (7/8) 26 (1-1/6) 31 (1-1/4) 35 (1-7/1
6) 40 (1-5/8) 45 (1-13/16) 50 (2) 54 (2-3-16) 59 (2-3/8)
Height 12 (31/64) 15 (39/64) 18 (47/64) 21 (55/64) 24 (63/64) 27 (1-7/64) 30 (1-
7/32) 33 (1-11/32) 36 (1-15/32)
Table 712.2 – Nominal Washer Dimensionsa
Circular Washer Bolt Size Diameter mm (inch) 12 (1/2) 15 (5/8) 19 (3/4) 22 (7/8)
25 (1) 28 (1-1/8) 31 (1-1/4) 34 (1-3/8) 37 (1-1/2) 43 (1-3/4) 50 (2) Over 50 to
100 (2 to 4) incl.
a b c d
Square or Rectangular Bevelled Washers for American Standard Beams and Channels
Thickness Minimum Maximum 2 (0.177) 3 (0.122) 3 (0.122) 3 (0.136) 3 (0.136) 3 (0
.136) 3 (0.136) 3 (0.136) 3 (0.136) C 4(0.178) 4 (0.178) d 6(0.24) 4 (0.177) 4 (
0.177) 4 (0.177) 4 (0.177) 4 (0.177) 4 (0.177) 4 (0.177) 4 (0.177) 4 (0.177) c 7
(0.28) 7 (0.28) d 8 (0.34) Minimum Side Dimension 43 (1-3/4) 43 (1-3/4) 43 (1-3/
4) 43 (1-3/4) 43 (1-3/4) 43 (2-1/4) 43 (2-1/4) 43 (2-1/4) 43 (2-1/4) Mean Thickn
ess 7 (5/16) 7 (5/16) 7 (5/16) 7 (5/16) 7 (5/16) 7 (5/16) 7 (5/16) 7 (5/16) 7 (5
/16) Slope or Taper in Thickness 40 (1.6) 40 (1.6) 40 (1.6) 40 (1.6) 40 (1.6) 40
(1.6) 40 (1.6) 40 (1.6) 40 (1.6) -
Nominal Outside b Diameter mm (inch) 26 (1-1/16) 32 (1-5/16) 36 (1-15/32) 43 (1-
3/4) 50 (2) 56 (2-1/4) 62 (2-1/2) 68 (2-3/4) 75 (3) 84 (3-3/8) 93 (3-3/4) 2D-12
(1/2)
Nominal Diameter of Hole 13 (17/32) 16 (21/32) 20 (13/16) 23 (15/16) 26 (1-1/16)
31 (1-1/4) 34 (1-3/8) 37 (1-1/2) 40 (1-5/8) 46 (1-7/8) 53 (2-1/8) D+3 (1/8)
Dimensions in mm (inches) May be exceeded by 6 mm (1/4 inch) 4 mm (3/16 in) nomi
nal 6 mm (1/4 in) nominal
712.4 Castings Castings shall conform to the requirements of the following Speci
fications: Steel castings for Highway Bridges-AASHTO M 192, Class 70 shall be fu
rnished unless otherwise specified. Chromium Alloy Steel Castings-AASHTO M 163 (
ASTM A 296), Grade CA-15 shall be furnished unless otherwise specified.
412
Gray Iron Castings – AASHTO M 105 Class No. 30 shall be furnished unless otherwise
specified. Iron castings shall be true to pattern in form and dimensions, free
from pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blow holes, and other defects in positi
on affecting their strength and value for the service intended. Casting shall be
boldly filleted at angles and the arises shall be sharp and perfect. All castin
gs must be sandblasted or otherwise effectively cleaned of seals and sand so as
to present a smooth, clean and uniform surface. Malleable Castings – ASTM A 47. Gr
ade No. 35018 shall be furnished unless otherwise specified. The requirements fo
r workmanship, finishing, and cleaning shall be the same as above for gray iron
castings.
712.5 Steel Grid Floors All steel for grid floors shall conform to the requireme
nts of AASHTO M 183 or AASHTO M 222. Steel grid floors can be weathering steel,
galvanized or painted. Unless the floors are of weathering steel or galvanized,
the material shall have a minimum copper content of 0.2%. Unless painting of flo
ors is specified in the Special Provisions, open type floors shall be galvanized
.
712.6 Steel Pipe It shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 53, ASTM A 120.
AASHTO M 222 and ASTM A 618, as shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
Standard weight pipe shall be furnished unless otherwise shown on the Plans or
in the Special Provisions.
712.7 Galvanized Metal When galvanized structural steel shapes, plates, bars and
their products are specified, they shall be galvanized in accordance with the r
equirements of AASHTO M 111.
712.8 Sheet Lead It shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B 29 for common de
silverized lead. The sheets shall be of uniform thickness and shall be free from
cracks, seams, slivers, scale and other defects. Unless otherwise specified, le
ad sheets shall be 3.8 mm (1/8 inch) in thickness with a permissible tolerance o
f 0.75 mm (0.03 inch) plus or minus.
413
712.9 Welded Stud Shear Connectors Shear connector studs shall conform to the re
quirements of AASHTO M 169 (ASTM A 108) for cold finished carbon steel bars and
shafting, cold drawn bar, Grades 1015, 1018 or 1020, either semi-skilled or full
y-skilled. If flux retaining caps are used, the steel for the caps shall be of a
low carbon grade suitable for welding and shall comply with ASTM A 109 for cold
rolled carbon steel strip. Tensile properties as determined by tests of bar sto
ck after drawing or of finished studs shall conform to the following requirement
s: Tensile strength (minimum) 413.4 MPa (60,000 psi) Yield strength* (minimum) 3
44.5 MPs (50,000 psi) Elongation (minimum) 20 percent in 50 mm (2 in) Reduction
in area (minimum) 50 percent * As determined by 0.2 percent offset method. Tensi
le properties shall be determined in accordance with applicable sections of ASTM
A 370 for mechanical testing of steel products. Tensile tests of finished studs
shall be made on studs welded to test plates using a test fixture with dimensio
ns similar to those shown in Table 712.3. In fracture occurs outside the middle
half of the gage length, the test shall be repeated. Finished studs shall be of
uniform quality and conditions, free from injurious laps, fins, seams, cracks, t
wists, bends or other injurious defects. Finish shall be produced by cold drawin
g, cold rolling or machining. The studs shall conform to the dimensions given in
Table 712.3. The Contractor shall furnish the manufacturer’s certification that t
he studs as delivered are in accordance with the material requirements of this I
tem. Certified copies of in-plant quality control test reports shall be furnishe
d to the Engineer upon request. Table 712.3 – Welded Stud Shear Connector Standard
Dimensions and Tolerances mm (inches) Shank Diameter (c) 19.05 + 0.00 (3/4) - 0
.381 (-0.015) 22.23 + 0.000 (7/8) - 0.381 (-0.015) * Length* (L) 101.6 + 1.575 (
+0.062) (4) – 3.175 (-0.125) 101.6 + 1.575 (+.062) (4) – 3.175 (-0.25) Diameter (H)
31.75 + 0.40 (1-1/4) (1/64) 34.93 0.40 (1-3/8) (1/64) Head Thickness (T) 9.53 (3
/8) min. 9.53 (3/8) min.
Length includes thickness of head. Standard lengths is 101.6 mm (4 inches) but o
ther lengths may be obtained by special order.
414
ITEM 713 – TREATED AND UNTREATED TIMBER
713.1 General Requirements 713.1.1 Timber It shall be of the species specified o
n the Plans. Unless otherwise noted on the Plans or in the Special Provisions on
ly the best grade shall be used. It shall be free from loose knots, splits, worn
holes, decay, warp, ring separation or any defects which will impair its streng
th or render it unfit for its intended use. Any specie specified on the Plans ma
y be used for untreated timber and if that specie is not available, a specie of
equivalent strength and durability maybe used if authorized by the Engineer. If
the timber is to be treated, only those species shall be used which are known to
posses properties which make them favorable to treatment. 713.1.2 Paints When p
ainting of timber is required, the paint shall conform to the requirements of It
em 709, Paints. 713.1.3 Preservatives It shall be creosote oil or creosote-petro
leum oil blend as called for on the Plans or by the Special Provisions and shall
conform to the Specification for timber preservative of AASHTO M 133. When timb
er is intended for marine use, the creosote petroleum oil blend shall not be use
d.
713.2 Untreated Structural Timber and Lumber Structural timber, lumber and pilin
g shall conform to the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 168 or equivalent. No
boxed heart pieces of Douglas fir or redwood shall be used in outside stringers
, floor beams, caps, posts, sills or rail posts. Boxed heart pieces are defined
as timber so sawed that any point in the length of a sawed piece, the pith lies
entirely inside the four faces. Yard lumber shall be of the kinds and grade call
ed for on the Plans. Round poles and posts shall be of the kinds indicated on th
e Plans.
713.3 Treated Structural Timber and Lumber Structural timber, lumber and piling
to be treated shall conform to the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 168 and M
133 or equivalent. The type of treatment to be used will be shown on the Plans
or in the Special Provisions and shall conform to the applicable requirements of
AWPA standard C1 and C14 or equivalent.
415
ITEM 714 – WATER 714.1 Description This Item covers criteria for acceptance of Que
stionable Water either natural or wash water for use in concrete. 714.2 Requirem
ents The mixing water shall be clear and apparently clean. If it contains quanti
ties or substances that discolor it or make it smell or taste unusual or objecti
onable, or cause suspicion, it shall not be used unless service records of concr
ete made with it (or other information) indicated that it is not injurious to th
e quality, shall be subject to the acceptance criteria as shown in Table 714.1 a
nd Table 714.2 or as designated by the purchaser. When wash water is permitted,
the producer will provide satisfactory proof or data of non-detrimental effects
if potentially reactive aggregates are to be used. Use of wash water will be dis
continued if undesirable reactions with admixtures or aggregates occur. Table 71
4.1 Acceptance Criteria For Questionable Water Supplies Limits Compressive stren
gth, min. % Control at 7 days Time of Setting deviation from control Time of Set
ting (Gillmore Test) Initial Final Set Appearance Color Odor Total Solids PH val
ue 90 from 1:00 earlier to 1:30 later No marked change No marked change Clear Co
lorless Odorless 500 parts/million max. 4.5 to 8.5
Table 714.2 Chemical Limitation for Wash Water Limits Chemical Requirements, Min
imum Concentration Chloride as C1(-1) expressed as a mass percent of cement when
added to the C1(-1) in the other components of the concrete mixtures shall not
exceed the following levels:
416
1. Prestressed Concrete 2. Conventionally reinforced concrete in a moist environ
ment and exposed to chloride 3. Conventionally reinforced concrete in a moist en
vironment but not exposed to chloride 4. Above ground building construction wher
e the concrete will stay dry Sulfate as SO4, ppmA Alkalies as (Na2O + 0.658 K2O)
, ppm Total Solids, ppm
A
0.06 percent
0.10 percent
0.15 percent No limit for corrosion 3000 600 50000
Wash water reused as mixing water in concrete may exceed the listed concentratio
ns of sulfate if it can be shown that the concentration calculated in the total
mixing water, including mixing water on the aggregate and other sources, does no
t exceed that stated limits.
Water will be tested in accordance with, and shall meet the suggested requiremen
ts of AASHTO T 26. Water known to be of potable quality may be used without test
.
ITEM 715 – GEOTEXTILES 715.1 Description This Item covers geotextile fabrics for u
se in subsurface drainage, hydraulic filter, erosion control, sediment control,
pavement structures as a waterproofing and stress relieving membrane, and as a p
ermeable separator to prevent mixing of dissimilar materials such as foundations
and select fill materials. 715.2 Physical and Chemical Requirements Fibers used
in the manufacture of geotextiles, and the threads used in joining geotextiles
by sewing, shall consist of long-chain synthetic polymers, composed of at least
85 percent by mass polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamids. They shall be formed i
nto a network such that the filaments or yarns rertain dimensional stability rel
ative to each other, including selvedges. These materials shall conform to the p
hysical requirements of Table 1 for the indicated application. Guidelines for th
e survivability levels referred to under “Separation” in Table 1 are included in Tab
le 2. 715.3 Sampling and Testing The product shall be subject to sampling and te
sting. Sampling shall be done in accordance with ASTM D 4354 and testing procedu
res shall be in accordance with the methods given in Table 1.
417
715.4 Certification 715.4.1 Manufacturer’s Certificate
The manufacturer shall file with the purchaser a certificate stating the name of
the manufacturer, the chemical composition of the filaments or yarns, and other
pertinent information so as to fully describe the geotextile. The manufacturer
shall include in the certificate a guarantee stating that the geotextile that is
furnished meets the requirements of the specification. The certificate shall be
attested to by a person having legal authority to bind the company. Either mism
arking or misrepresentation by the manufacturer shall be reason to discontinue a
cceptance under these specifications. Notice sent to the manufacturer by the pur
chaser regarding the discontinuance of acceptance will be considered to be notic
e to all wholesalers, jobbers, distributors, agents and other intermediaries han
dling the manufacturer’s product. 715.5 Quality Control The geotextile manufacture
r is responsible for establishing and maintaining a quality control program so a
s to assure compliance with the requirements of this specification. 715.6 Shipme
nt and Storage 715.6.1 During periods of shipment and storage, the fabric shall
be protected from direct sunlight, ultra-violet rays, temperatures greater than
600C (1400F), mud, dust, and debris. To the extent possible, the fabric shall be
maintained wrapped in a heavy-duty protective covering. Each shipping document
shall include a notation certifying that the geotextile is in accordance with th
e manufacturer’s certificate and guarantee previously filed with the purchaser. 71
5.6.2 Product Marking
Label the fabric and its container with the manufacturer’s name fabric type or tra
de name, lot number and quantity. 715.7 Installation 715.7.1 Separation Geotexti
le The geotextile shall be unrolled as smoothly as possible on the prepared subg
rade in the direction of construction traffic. Adjacent geotextile rolls shall b
e overlapped in the direction of subbase placement using the guidelines in Table
3. Sewing is recommended where subgrade soils have a CBR value less than 1. The
geotextile maybe held in place prior to subbase placement by pins, staples, or
piles of fill or rock. On curves, the geotextile maybe folded or cut to conform
to the curve. The fold or overlap shall be in the direction of construction and
held in place as prescribed above.
418
715.7.2 Drainage Geotextile In trenches, after placing the backfill material, th
e geotextile shall be folded over the top of the filter material to produce a mi
nimum overlap of 12 inches for trenches greater than 12 inches wide. In trenches
less than 12 inches in width, the overlap shall be equal to the width of the tr
ench. The geotextile shall then be covered with the subsequent course. Successiv
e sheets of geotextile shall be overlapped a minimum of 12 inches in the directi
on of flow. 715.7.3 Erosion Control Geotextile The geotextile shall be placed an
d anchored on a smooth graded surface approved by the Engineer. The geotextile s
hall be placed in such a manner that placement of the overlying materials will n
ot excessively stretch or tear the fabric. Anchoring of the terminal ends of the
geotextile shall be accomplished through the use of key trenches or aprons at t
he crest and toe of slope. In certain applications to expedite construction, 18
inches long anchoring pins placed on 2 to 6 feet centers depending on the slope
of the covered area have been used successfully. 715.7.4 Paving Fabric The fabri
c shall be placed into the asphalt sealant with minimum wrinkling prior to the t
ime the asphalt has cooled and lost tackiness. As directed by the Engineer, wrin
klers or folds in excess of 1 inch shall be slit and laid flat. Brooming and/or
pneumatic rolling will be required to maximize fabric contact with the pavement
surface. Overlap of fabric joints shall be sufficient to ensure full closure of
the joint, but should not exceed 6 inches. Transverse joints shall be lapped in
the direction of paving to prevent edge pickup by the paver. A second applicatio
n of asphalt sealant to fabric overlaps will be required if in the judgment of t
he Engineer additional asphalt sealant is needed to ensure proper bonding of the
double fabric layer. 715.7.5 Geotextile Silt Fence Fence construction shall be
adequate to handle stress from sediment loading. Geotextile at the bottom of the
fence shall be buried a minimum of 6 inches in a trench so that no flow can pas
s under the barrier. The trench shall be backfilled and the soil compacted over
the geotextile. Fence height shall be as specified by the Engineer but in no cas
e shall exceed 36 inches above ground surface. The geotextile shall be spliced t
ogether only at a support post with a minimum 6 inches overlap. 715.7.6 Hydrauli
c Filter The geotextile shall be laid lengthwise down slopes and appropriately a
nchored along the top edge. Installation horizontally along slopes will not be a
ccepted. Overlaps shall be sufficient to prevent parting of laps during the init
ial construction or fill stage. On soft soil subgrades the overlap shall not be
less than 400 mm. Alternatively the geotextile shall be sawn using a double-stit
ch portable sewing machine and appropriate thread.
419
715.8 Method of Measurement 715.8.1 The geotextile shall be measured by the numb
er of square meters from the pavement lines shown on the plans, or from the pave
ment lines established in writing by the Engineer. 715.8.2 Temporary silt fence
will be measured in linear meter. 715.8.3 Removed sediment will be measured by t
he cubic meter. 715.8.4 Excavation, backfill, bedding, and cover material are se
parate pay items.
420
421
422
Table 2 Construction Survivability Levels Site Soil CBR Installation <1 1-2 >2
Equipment Ground Contract Pressure (KPa) Cover Thickness (mm)1 (Compacted) 1022,
3 152 305 457 H M NR
1 2 3
>345 <345
>345 <345
>345 <345
NR NR NR H
NR NR H M
H H M M
H M M M
M M M M
M M M M
= = =
High Medium Not recommended
Maximum aggregate size not to exceed one-half the compacted cover thickness For
low volume unpaved road (ADT<200 vehicles) The 102 mm minimum cover is limited t
o existing road bases intended for use in new construction Table 3 Soil Strength
(CBR) Less than 1 1-2 2-3 3 and above Recommended Overlaps Overlap Unsewn (mm)
965 762 610 Overlap (mm) 229 203 76 -
715.9 Basis of Payment The quantities determined as provided above shall be paid
for at the contract price per unit of measurement, respectively, for each pay i
tem listed below. Payment shall be made under : Pay Item Separation Geotextile D
rainage Geotextile Paving Fabric Hydraulic Filter Silt Fence Removing Sediment 4
23 Pay Unit Square Meter Square Meter Square Meter Square Meter Linear Meter Cub
ic Meter
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
Table 1 – Physical Rtequirement1,.1A A P P L I C A T I O N Sediment Control Erosio
n Control2 Wire Fence Supported 4002 SelfSupported
Subsurface Drainage2 Property Unit Test Method Class A3 Class B4
Hydraulic Filter Paving2,11
Separation
Class A9
Class B10
Unprotected
Protected
Grab Tensile Length Elongation
N Percent
ASTM D 4632 ASTM D 1682 ASTM D 4632 ASTM D 1682 ASTM D 4632 ASTM D 4833 ASTM D 7
51-79 ASTM D 3786 ASTM D 751-79 ASTM D 4533 ASTM D 1117 ASTM D 4491
800 -
355 -
4002 50% Max. @ 200 N -
890 15
400 15
785 353
353 108
355 50% @ Break -
High Survivability Level 1200/800 50 % 50 percent12 1067/710 445/335
Medium Survivability Level 800/510 50 % 50 percent12 710/465 310/175
Seam Strength5 Puncture Strength Burst Strength Trapezoid Tear Permeability6 (K)
N N
710 355
310 110
-
800 355
355 175
KPa N cm/sec
2000 220 K Fabric K Soil Notes 7 & 7A 70 @150 h -
900 110 K Fabric K Soil Notes 7 & 7A 70 @150 h -
-
-
2220 220 K Fabric K Soil Notes 7 & 7A 70 @150 h -
965 2000 130 K Fabric K Soil Notes 7 & 7A 70 @150 h 216 108 900
445/335 K Fabric K Soil Notes 7 & 7A 70 @150 h -
310/175 K Fabric K Soil Notes 7 & 7A 70 @150 h -
Apparent Opening Size (AOS) Permitivity Ultraviolet Degradation Asphalt Retentio
n Melting Point
(US Std.) Sec.-1 (Percent Retained Strength) L/m2
o
ASTM D 4751
.848 Max .012,8 70 @150 h -
.848 Max .012,8 70 @150 h -
-
-
-
ASTM D 4491 ASTM D 4355
-
-
-
Appendix XI ASTM D 276
-
-
0.9 150
C
421
Legend:
1
Acceptance of geotextile material is to be based on ASTM D 4759, Standard Practi
ce for determining the Specification Conformance Geotextiles Contracting Agency
may require a letter from the supplier certifying that its geotextile meets spec
ification requirements. Minimum – Use value in weaker principal direction. All num
erical values represent minimum average roll value (i.e. test results from any s
ampled roll in a lot shall meet or exceed the minimum values in the table). Stat
ed values are for non-critical, non-severe conditions. Lot sampled according to
ASTM D 4354. Class A Drainage applications for fabrics are where installation st
resses are more severe than Class B applications, i.e. very coarse, sharp, angul
ar aggregate is used, heavy degree of compaction (greater than 95 percent AASHTO
T 99) is specified, or depth of trench is greater than 3 meters. Class B Draina
ge applications are those where fabric is used with smooth graded surfaces havin
g no sharp angular projections, no sharp angular aggregate is used, compaction r
equirements are light (less than 95 percent AASHTO T 99) and trenches are less t
han 3 meters in depth. Values apply to both field and manufactured seams. See Ta
ble 3 for Recommended overlaps. A nominal coefficient of permeability maybe dete
rmined by multiplying permitivity value by nominal thickness. The K value of the
fabric should be greater than the K value of the soil. Soil with 50 percent or
less particles by mass passing 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve, AOS less than 0.6 mm (g
reater than 0.600 mm (No. 30) sieve. Soil with more than 50 percent by mass pass
ing 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve. AOS less than 0.297 mm (greater than 0.300 mm (No.
50) sieve. Permitivity & Apparent Opening Size (AOS) do not relate directly to
filtration performance of silt fence fabrics. Value presented reflect minimum cr
iteria of products currently used. Performance tests such as VTM-51 (from Virgin
ia Highway Research Council) maybe used to evaluate silt fence performance if de
emed necessary by the Engineer. Class A Erosion Control applications are those w
here fabrics are used under conditions where installation stresses are more seve
re than Class B, i.e. stone placement height should be less than 0.9 m and stone
mass should not exceed 113.5 kg. Class B Erosion Control applications are those
where fabric is used in structure or under conditions where the fabric is prote
cted by a sand cushion or by “zero drop height” placement of stone. This specificati
on is applicable to fabric membranes used for full coverage of the payment, or a
s strips over transverse and longitudinal pavementjoints. It is not intended to
describe membrane systems specifically designed for pavement joints and localize
d (spot) repairs. Values of geotextile elongation do not imply the allowable con
solidation properties of the subgrade soil – they must be determined by a separate
investigation, but are intended to show that for fabrics with percent elongatio
n less than 50 percent, a higher strength is required.
1A
2
3
4
5
6
7
7A
8
9
10
11
12
422